Air Pilotx27s Manual Volume 1 Flying Training Compress

The Air Pilot's Manual
Volu111e 1
Contents
Introduction ix
1. Aircraft Familiarisation .................................................. 1

2. Before and After Flight
2a. Preparation for Flight ................................................... 13
2b. Starting and Stopping the Engine .................................. 19
2c. Post-Flight Actions ....................................................... 23
3. Air Experience ................................................................ 25

4. The Controls
4a. The Primary Effect of Each Main Flight Control ............. 29
4b. The Further Effect of Each Main Flight Control ............. 40
4c. The Art of Trimming .................................................... 45
4d. The Effect of Airspeed and Slipstream .......................... 49
4e. The Effects of Power Changes ...................................... 53
4f. The Effect of Using Flaps .............................................. 57
4g. Carburettor Heat ......................................................... 60
4h. The Mixture Control .................................................... 62
4i. Using the Radio .......................................................... 64
4j. Cabin Heating and Ventilation ...................................... 68
5. Taxiing an Aeroplane .................................................... 69

6. Straight and Level
6a. Flying Straight and Level in Balanceat
Constant Power ........................................................... 77
6b. Flying Straight and Level in Balanceat
\ a Selected Airspeed ..................................................... 91

6c. Cruising with Flap Extended ......................................... 96
7. Climbing ........................................................................ 103

8. Descending
Ba. The Glide .................................................................. 115
Sb. The Powered Descent ............................................... 124
Be. Use of Flap in the Descent ......................................... 128
8d. The Sideslip ............................................................... 133
9. Turning
9a. The Medium Level Turn .............................................. 137
9b. The Climbing Turn ...................................................... 148
9c. Descending Turns ....................................................... 152
9d. Turning onto Selected Headings ................................. 164
10. Stalling and Slow Flight
10a.Slow Flying ..................................................................................................................................
167
1Ob. Stalling ........................................................................ 173
11. Spinning
11a. Incipient Spins ............................................................. 187
11b. Full Spins .................................................................... 189
12. Standard Take-Off and Climb to Downwind Leg ... 197
13. Circuits, Approaches and Landings
13a. The Circuit, Powered Approach and Normal Landing .. 215
13b. The Go-Around .......................................................... 232
13c. Departing and Joining the Circuit ................................ 236
13d. The FlaplessApproach and Landing ............................. 243
13e. The Glide Approach and Landing ................................ 245
13f. Crosswind Operations ................................................ 250
13g. Short-Field Operations ............................................... 266
13h. Soft-Field Operations .................................................. 270
14. First Solo ........................................................................273

15. Advanced Turning
15a. The Steep Level Turn .................... ,............................ 275
1Sb. Recovery from Unusual Attitudes ................................ 283
1Sc. The Steep Descending Turn ........................................ 286
16. The Forced Landing Without Power ........................289

17. Precautionary Landings
17a. The Precautionary Search and Landing ........................ 307
17b. Ditching in Water ....................................................... 313
18. Pilot Navigation

18a. Pilot Navigation .......................................................... 315
18b. Navigation at Lower Levels and in Reduced Visibility ... 336
I
19. Instrument Flying .........................................................347

Appendix 1
The PPL(A) Skill Test 383
Index 387
The Air Pilot'sManual
Flying Training
Airworl< Diagrams
4a. The PrimaryEffectof EachMain FlightControl .................. 36

4b. The Further Effectof EachMain FlightControl ................... 43
4c. The Art of Trimming .........................................................48
4d. Effectof Airspeed and Slipstream ......................................52
4e. Effectof MakingPower Changes........................................56
4g. Use of Carburettor Heat ...................................................61
4h. Use of the Mixture Control ...............................................63
5. Taxiing an Aeroplane ........................................................76
6a. Straightand Level in Balanceat Constant Power ................ 88

6b. Straightand Level in Balanceat a SelectedAirspeed .......... 93
6c. Part (i) The Effectof usingFlap...................................... 98
Part (ii) Cruisingwith FlapExtended ............................ 102
7. The Climb ....................................................................... 110
Ba. The Glide ....................................................................... 122

Sb. The Powered Descent .................................................... 127
Sc. Use of Flapsin the Descent ............................................. 131
Sd. The Sideslip..................................................................... 135
9a. The Medium LevelTurn .................................................. 147

9b. The ClimbingTurn .......................................................... 151
9c. Part (i) The GlidingTurn ............................................. 156
Part (ii) The DescendingTurn UsingPower ................. 158
Part (iii) The DescendingTurn with FlapExtended........ 160
Part (iv) Sideslippingin a GlidingTurn ........................... 163
10a. Slow Flying...................................................................... 172

1Ob. The StandardStalland RecoveryProcedure .................... 180
11a. The Incipient Spin ............................................................ 188
11b. Full Spins .......................................................................... 196
12. Standard Take-Off and Climb to Downwind Leg .............. 210
1la. Powered 'Approach and Normal Landing ......................... 226

1lb. The Go-Around ............................................................... 235
13d. The FlaplessApproach and Landing .................................. 244
1le. The Glide Approach and Landing ..................................... 249
1lf. Part (i) Crosswind Take-Off ......................................... 254
Part (iia) Crosswind Landing- Crab Method ................. 260
Part (iib) Crosswind Landing- Wing-Down ................... 263
Part (iic) Crosswind Landing- Combination Method ...... 265
1 Sa. Steep Level Turns ............................................................ 280

1Sb. Recovery from Unusual Attitudes ..................................... 285
1 Sc. Steep Descending Turns .................................................. 288
16. Practisingthe Forced Landing ........................................... 304
17a. The Precautionary Searchand Landing ............................. 311
18b. Low-Level Flying .............................................................. 344
19. Instrument Flying

Part (i) FlyingStraight and Level ................................... 368
Part (ii) Climbing, Cruising and Descending ................... 371
Part (iii) Turning ............................................................ 378
Part (iv) Recovery from Unusual Attitudes ..................... 381
vii
..
EditorialT earn
Dorothy Pooley LLB(Hons) FRAeS

Dorothy holds an ATPL (A) and a CPL (H), and is both an
instructor and examiner on aeroplanes and an instructor on
helicopters. She is Head of Training for a school dedicated to
running Flight Instructor courses at Shoreham. She is also a CAA
Flight Instructor Examiner. In addition, having qualified as a
solicitor in 1982, Dorothy acted for many years as a consultant
specialising in aviation and insurance liability issues, and has
lectured widely on air law and aviation insurance. This highly
unusual combination of qualifications led to her appointment as
Honorary Solicitor to the Guild of Air Pilots and Navigators
(GAP AN). Dorothy is a Fellow of the Royal Aeronautical Society,
immediate past Chairman of the GAP AN Instructor Committee,
and Chairman of the Education & Training Committee, as well as
serving as a Warden on their Court. She is also Chairman of the
Professional Flying Instructors Association. In 2003 she was
awarded the Jean Lennox Bird Trophy for her contribution to
aviation and support of Women in Aviation and the BWP A
(British Women Pilots Association). A regular contributor to
seminars and conferences, Dorothy is the author and editor of a
number of flying training books and has published articles in legal
and insurance journals.
Esther Law BA(Hons) AFRAeS

Esther holds a CPL/IR and currently instructs at White Waltham
Airfield in Berkshire. Ester took up flying as a hobby in the 80s
whilst working the banking industry as a software developer and
systems analyst, gaining her PPL in 1989. After several years in IT,
she returned to full-time education and completed a Law degree
at Oxford University in 2007. She subsequently worked as a legal
editor, writing and editing Law Reports for the Cayman Islands
and Gibraltar. In 2008, Esther finally decided to pursue flying as a
career and completed the ATPL ground exams, followed by
training for the CPL and Instructor Rating. She has been working
full-time as a PPL flying instructor since 2009. Esther is a member
of the Guild of Air Pilots and Air Navigators and the British
Women Pilots Association.
viii
Acknowledgements
The Civil Aviation Authority; Allied Signal, Bendix, Cessna,

Piper, and Gulfstream American and Slingsby for technical
material; Captain Steve Oddy, Captain Nigel Ashley, Captain
John Clemons, Captain Ian McClelland, Captain Horace Galop
(British Aerospace Flying College, Prestwick), Captain R. W. K.
(Dicky) Snell, Bill Bennet, Bill Constable, the late John Fenton,
Peter Grant, Robyn Hind, Rick James, Robert Johnson, Mark
Miller, John Monroe, Edward Pape, Daljeet Gill, Clare
Lowndes, David Robson, Bill Ryall, Ronald Smith and Ian
Suren and the many other instructors and students whose
comments have helped to improve this manual.
A Condensed History of the Air Pilot Manuals

For over 25 years the Air Pilot Manuals have led the academic training of
pilots in the United Kingdom and in many countries around the world.
I first met Trevor Thom, a professional pilot and natural teacher, in
Melbourne during a visit to Australia in Janua1y 1985. He already had his
series of PPL Manuals for the Australian market and I asked him to produce
a series for the New Zealand market where we had a small aviation business.
Having completed this task, Trevor immediately began writing the first of the
Air Pilot Manuals for the United Kingdom market and this project began in
earnest on 5th December 1985.
Both Trevor Thom and Robert Johnson commenced the task in my office
at Feldon. By the end of the following year, all four volumes were complete
and were published in February 1987. At that time, we estimated that 95%
of all the UK Flying Schools were using our manuals. Volumes 5, 6 and 7
followed, so completing the full series.
Unfortunately, Trevor Thom had a serious accident at home which
prevented him from continuing with the editing of the manuals. His rights
were eventually sold to David Robson, another experienced pilot and natural
teacher, who progressively improved the drawings and brought colour into
the manuals for the first time.
Over the years there have been many assistant editors, in particular Peter
Godwin, whose help I first asked for in the very early days with Trevor Thom
and which continued until quite recently. The rights in the Air Pilot Manuals
are now vested with the Pooley family and they continue to be edited and
published from our offices and the school at Shoreham Airport.
The Air Pilot Manuals have an outstanding reputation for accuracy and
are continuously updated. They are recommended CAA reading material
and are referred to extensively in the CAA examination answer booklet.
Robert Pooley
CStJ FRIN FRAeS
ix
Sk_,(llS. ·. C,o-r~fE"k t."·h.

Introduction +Mu'oA -&
Becoming a Pilot < \

very pilot begins as a student pilot, whether the aim is to fly
E for a h b _ • to fly for a career. :V tv· 0 .
_ L arnin to fl does not take long - within the first 20 hours
of flying training you will have~lea1n d the basic skills. Since the
training period is so short, good habits must be developed right
-~· ~n1 the start. Patterns forn1ed in the first few hours will stay with
you hrough01it your flying"life, and so, to gain the maximum
benefit fron1 each hour in the air and to develop good habits, you
should be well prepared. This manual will help you to do this.
An advanced formal education is not a requirement to become
a pilot, th ug of the English language is r quir or radio
calls n a now dg of basic mathematics i u ful _____ at,
no special academic skills are required.
The basic training aeroplane is simple in design nd r igh
ward to operate. It has a control column (or control heel raise
or lower the nose and to bank the aeroplane, a 1ud er to keep it
in balance and a throttle to supply engine power. The largest and
fastest airliners have basically the same controls.
Tailplane
\Y
■ The main aerodynamic surfaces of the aeroplane
How an Aeroplane Flies

When not in flight, an aeroplane is supported by the ground, but
when airborne it mu t generate its own support. It does thi~ by
1 odifying_th Ilow o the air over the wings, generating a force
known a lifi. ...._
_ __.., (\\:I
'\J
X
Ground
reaction Lift
Weight Weight
■ In flight, the aeroplane is supported by li'(t
The air is made up of many molecules, all of which are moving

at high speed and in random directions, even though the parcel of
air itself might be stationary. The molecules act like small tennis
balls, bouncing off any surface that they come in contact with and
thus exerting a force on it.
Stationary airmass Force exerted
by average
~/ tI V
collision
■ Static pressure exerted by a stationary parcel of air
The size of the force is greatest when the collision is 'head-on',

and becomes less with glancing blows. All of these small forces,
when added up over an area, exert a pressure on the surface. This
is known as static pressure.
The static pressure at any point in a fluid acts equally in all
directions (air is a fluid). Static pressure of the atmosphere is being
exerted at all points on your hand right now.
■ Static pressure acts in all directions

xi
The energy of motion is called kinetic energy. The kinetic

energy of a parcel of air in motion relative to an object allows the
air to exert a force on the object. This force, when calculated per
unit of surface area, is called dynamic pressure.
If you hold your hand up in a strong wind or at the window of
a moving car, then wind pressure (or moving pressure) is felt
because air is striking your hand and flowing around it. This pres-
sure is called dynamic pressure, i.e. pressure due to relative move-
ment between your hand and the air. The strength of this
dynamic pressure depends on two factors:
• The speed of the body relative to the air. The faster the car
drives or the stronger the wind blows then the stronger the
dynamic pressure that you feel on your hand. This is because
more air molecules per second strike your hand.
10 knots, 40 knots,
low ~ high
dynamic ('( ,
, dynamic
pressure
pressure ~ '.}
1
■ Dynamic pressure increases with airspeed
• The density of the air. At the same speed, the denser the air,
the more air molecules per second will strike your hand and so
the greater the dynamic pressure.
40 knots,
low air density
low
dynamic
pressure
■ Dynamic pressure is greater in dense air
Editor'snote: Now, an aircraft wing is shaped so that the airflow speeds up

A very credible,alternative over its upper surface. This results in a lowerstatic pressure above
theory for the generationof the wing than below it and so a lifting force is created.
Ii~ exists (the Coanda
effect). However,this is Remote free stream Reduced static
beyondthe accepted relative airflow ___ pressure
theory of Ii~ and willnot be
consideredfurther in this
manual. ~<pwa~~~
7~ Direction of flight "==-t:::

■ The ,aitflow is faster over a wing than under it, causing a lower static
pressure to be generated
.;
xii
NOTE The decrease in static pressure with an increased speed of

airflow is known in physics as Bernoulli's principle. It is usually
stated as: staticpressure + dynamic pressure = a constant total pressure
(related to speed).
The effect is the same when air flows past the wing as when the
wing moves through the air - it is the relative motion of one to
the other that is important.
The actual lift generated by a wing depends on its shape and Increasingtheangleof
also on the angle at which the wing is presented to the airflow. attackofa wingincreases
This angle is known as the angle of attack. The greater it is in the itsli~ingability.
flight range, the faster the air will travel over the upper surface of
the wing and the lower the static pressure will be - thus, the
greater the angle of attack, the greater the lifting ability of the
wing. The practical result is that sufficient lift to support the
weight of the aeroplane can be generated at a lower airspeed.
Litt Lttt
Fast
Low angle Slow High angle
\
~--::-....£:--:=:-::r::-=...o_f at_tac_k___ ........,_~_. of attack
________ ~~i~h! _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Weight ________ _
■ In level flight the aeroplane can fly slower at high angles of attack
A limit occurs when the aeroplane slows to an airspeed at

which the angle of attack reaches a critical value. Beyond this
angle of attack the smooth airflow over the wing breaks down
and becomes turbulent, causing a marked decrease in lift. The
wing is then said to be stalled. Exercise 1Ob of this manual
discusses stalling and stall recovery in detail.
The force that opposes the motion of the aeroplane through
the air is called drag. In straight and level flight, drag is balanced
by thrust from the propeller.
xiii
Lift (L)
Weight (W)
■ The four main forces that act on an aeroplane in flight
To control the aeroplane, control surfaces, operated from the
cockpit by the pilot, are used to alter the airflow around the wings
and the tail-section. This causes different aerodynamic forces to
be generated, and thus allows the pilot to manoeuvre the aero-
plane as desired.
That summarises briefly the basic principles of flight. Volume 4
of The Air Pilot's Manual covers this topic in depth and prepares
you for the Aircraft (General) technical examination.
Be Prepared for your Flying Lessons

For each stage of your training, this manual sets out:
• a clear aim;
• the principles and considerations involved;
• how to fly the manoeuvre;
• the Airwork exercise, summarised graphically; and
• any further points relevant to the exercise.
It will prepare you well and help to minimise your training
hours (and your expense). As your training progresses, it can be
used for revision. Earlier manoeuvres can be revised by scanning
the sub-headings and margin notes within the relevant exercise
and referring to the Airwork pages, which act as a summary.
Your flight training will consist of various phases:
PHASE 1. Upper airwork, learning the four fundamental manoeu-
vres (climbing, straight and level, turning and descending), with
an introduction to stalling and slow flight. Throughout this phase
you will also be practising starting and stopping the engine, and
taxiing on the ground.
PHASE 2. Take-offs, circuits and landings, leading to first solo.
PHASE 3. Advanced manoeuvres and procedures, including steep

turns, low-level flying and practice forced landings.
PHASE 4. Cross-country navigation and VFR radio navigation, and
basic instrument flying.
xiv
You will feel a great sense of achievement as you progress

through these phases towards your Private Pilot Licence.
NOTE The order and breakdown of flying training exercises in
this book follows our preferred sequence of instruction, and has
been agreed with the CAA. You may find that this differs slightly
from some other syllabi.
Pre-flight Briefings
Each new flight exercise should be preceded by a pre-flight brief-
ing by your instructor. This briefing will outline the principles of
the exercise to be flown. A typical briefing appears on page 90.
Flight Tests for the PPL(A)

The culmination of your training is to demonstrate that you have
achieved (or even surpassed) the required standard for the PPL
(Aeroplanes). There is one Flight Test to be completed at the end
of your training, which may be split into two parts - General
Handling and Navigation. Details of this test are included in
Appendix 1 of this manual.
The Air Pilot's Manual and EASA Part-FCL

This book is the first in a series of seven volumes, designed to
I
prepare you for the European Aviation Safety Agency Flight Crew
Licence (BASA Part-FCL) Private Pilot Licence (PPL) and Light
Aircraft Pilot Licence (LAPL). BASA Part-FCL replaces the Joint
Aviation Regulations Flight Crew Licence GAR-FCL) Parts 1
and 2.
Note that while these books cover BASA Part-FCL, they also
cover the UK National Private Pilot's Licence (NPPL), which was
implemented on 30 July 2002, and the UK PPL, which has been
reintroduced to allow BASA licence holders to hold non-BASA
national ratings and the requirements for which are the same as for
BASA Part-FCL.
THE AIR PILOT'S MANUAL SERIES
Volume 1 Flying Training

Volume2 Aviation Law, Flight Rules and Operational Procedures;
Meteorology
Volume3 Air Navigation includes Radio Navigation
Volume4 The Aeroplane - Technical covers Aircra'ft (General) and
Aircra'ft (Type) -principles of flight; airframe, engines and
systems; airworthiness and performance.
Volume5 Instrument Flying, Radio Navigation, IMC Ratings,
Night Rating
Volume6 Human Factors and Pilot Performance; First Aid and Survival
Volume7 Radiotelephony
Flying Training 1
Exercise 1
Aircraft Familiarisation
T he basic training aero plan con i ts of a fu lag to whi h the

wings, the tail, the wh ls and an ngine are attach d. A
propeller, driven by the engine, generates thrust to pull the
aeroplane through the air. This enables the airflow over the wings
to generate an aerodynamic force, known as lift, that is capable of
supporting the aeroplane in flight. The aeroplane can fly without
thrust if it is placed in a gliding descent.
Rear-facing Elevator
position light (white)
Horizontal stabilizer (or tailplane)
Elevator Cockpit
canopy
Win
flap
Wing trailing edge

Spinner
Landing light(s)
Green
position light ..____
.....__ Engine exhaust
Right wing tip
■ Figure1-1 The aeroplane
The tail section of the aeroplane is situated some distance to the

rear of the main load-carrying sections of the fuselage, and
provides a balancing or stabilising force much like the tail feathers
on an arrow or a dart. The tail section consists of a vertical
stabiliser (or fin) and a horizontal stabiliser, both of which are
shaped to produce suitable aerodynamic forces.
The pilot and other occupants of the aeroplane are accon1n10-
dated in the cockpit, usually in two-abreast seating- the pilot-in-
2 FLYING TRAINING
command s1tt1ng on the left-hand side. Various controls and

instruments are available in the cockpit to enable safe and efficient
operation of the aeroplane and its systems.
The main controls used to fly the aeroplane are the flight
controls and the throttle. The throttle, which is operated by the
pilot's right hand, controls the power supplied by the engine-
propeller combination. 'Opening' the throttle by pushing it
fo1ward increases the fuel/air supply to the engine, resulting in
increased revolutions and greater power being developed. Pulling
the throttle back, or 'closing' it, reduces the power.
ne
Suction
gauge
peratureand
pressuregauges
a o
(e glh8 ~ 000000000000
n rp ~--- Circuit breakers
Carburettor Throttle Mixture control
heat control
■ Figure1-2 The cockpit
The attitude (or position in flight) of the aeroplane is control-

led using the main flight controls. These are surfaces which, when
deflected, alter the pattern of the airflow around the wings and
tail, causing changes in the aerodynamic forces that they generate.
THE ELEVATOR (hinged to the trailing edge of the horizontal stabiliser)
controls pitching of the nose up or down and is operated from the
cockpit with fore and aft movements of the control column.
1 - Aircra~ Familiarisation 3
THE AILERONS(hinged to the outer trailing edge of each wing)

control rolling of the aeroplane and are operated by sideways
movement of the control column.
THE RUDDER (hinged to the trailing edge of the vertical stabiliser)
controls the yawing of the nose left or right and is operated by the
rudder pedals.
Other flight controls include:
• the wing flaps (situated on the inner trailing edge of each
wing); and
• the elevator trim tab (on the trailing edge of the elevator).
There will be other controls in the cockpit to operate the cabin
heating and ventilation systems.
Variations in Design
There are variations in design between different types, but the
same basic principles apply to all aeroplanes.
Instead of a control column in the form of a 'stick', many
aeroplanes are fitted with a control wheel, which serves exactly
the same function. Moving the control wheel in or out operates
the elevator, rotating it operates the ailerons. In this manual the
term controlcolumn refers to both types.
Control wheel
Control column or yoke
or joystick
■ Figure1-3 The control column and the control wheel
Even though the aerodynamic sections of various aeroplane

types serve the same basic functions, their actual location on the
structure and their design can vary. For example, the wings may be
attached to the fuselage in a high, low or mid-wing position; the
horizontal stabiliser is sometimes positioned high on the fin
(known as a T-tail), and the combined horizontal stabiliser and ele-
vator is sometimes replaced by an all-flying tailplane (or stabilator).
High wing Low wing with T-tail

Butterfly or V-tail
■ Figure1-4 Different aircra~ designs

4 FLYING TRAINING
Fixed horizontal stabiliser

plus moving elevator Stabilator
■ Figure1-5 Different tailplane designs
Most modern training aeroplanes have a tricycle under-

carriage or landing gear that consists of two main wheels and a
nosewheel to provide support on the ground. Other aircraft have
a tailwheel instead of a nosewheel. The nosewheel on most types
is connected to the rudder pedals so that movement of the pedals
will turn it, assisting in directional control on the ground.
Most aircraft have brakes on the main wheels which are
operated by pressing the top of the rudder pedals or by using a
brake handle.
Tricycle Tailwheel
■ Figure1-6 The tricycle undercarriage and the tailwheel type
The Engine and Propeller

The typical training aeroplane has a piston engine that uses A vgas
(aviation gasoline). The engine revolutions per minute (rpm) are
controlled by the throttle. Attached to the engine is a fixed-pitch
propeller (its blade angle cannot be altered) that converts the
power from the engine into thrust. A measure of the power
developed is the engine rpm (revolutions per minute) which is
indicated in the cockpit on the tachometer (or 'rev counter').
Some modern types of training aircraft are fitted with a Full
Authority Digital Engine Control (FAD EC) system. The
engine is controlled by a computer system called an Engine
Control Unit (ECU). When you select an engine power setting
with the throttle, the ECU will adjust the manifold pressure,
injected fuel quantity and propeller speed to achieve the desired
result. These aircraft usually have a variable pitched propeller (its
blade angle can be altered to ensure maximum efficiency at
different air speeds) operated automatically by the ECU. Two
independent ECUs are fitted, to ensure engine function in the
unlikely event that the prima1y system fails. Such aircraft often use
Jet Al fuel instead of Avgas.
1 - Aircra~Familiarisation 5
The fuel is usually stored in wing tanks; low-wing aeroplanes

require a fuel pump to deliver it to the engine, high-wing
aeroplanes usually rely on gravity. There are fuel gauges in the
cockpit to indicate quantity, but it is good airmanship (c01nmon
sense) to check the contents of the tanks visually prior to flight.
It is also wise to confirm both that the fuel is of the correct
grade (which is identified by its colour) and that it is not
contaminated - the most likely contaminant being water, which
is denser than aircraft fuel or A vgas and Jet A 1 and gathers at the
low points in the fuel system. The check is pe1formed by
inspecting a small sample taken from fuel drains fitted at low
points in the fuel system, for example from beneath each fuel
Fuelmanagementis
tank.
a highpriorityitem.
The fuel tank selector in the cockpit allows fuel to be supplied
from each tank as desired or possibly from all tanks. It is vital that
a tank containing fuel be selected. Alternatively, an aircraft may
have a main tank in one wing that supplies fuel to the engine, and
an auxiliary tank in the other that does not. In this case there will
be a fuel transfer switch in the cockpit, allowing fuel to be
transferred from the auxiliary tank to the main tank, and it is vital
that the main tank contains fuel.
Oil for lubricating and cooling the engine is stored in a sump
in the engine compartment. Its quantity should be checked with
a dip-stick prior to flight. There are two cockpit gauges in the oil
system to register oil pressure and oil temperature when the
engine is running. These gauges are often colour-coded, with the
normal operating range shown as a green arc.
The fuel is mixed with air in a carburettor attached to the
engine and passes through the induction system into the cylinders,
where combustion occurs. The mixture control, situated near
the throttle, is used to ensure that a suitable fuel/ air mixture is
provided to the engine by the carburettor. The carburettor heat
control, also located near the throttle, is used to supply hot air to
protect the carburettor from ice. If your aircraft is fitted with a fuel
injected engine there is no separate carburettor. Therefore, there
will be no carburettor heat control. In FADEC aircraft the ECU
controls the amount ofinjected fuel automatically, so there will be
no manual mixture control either.
The engine has dual ignition systems which provide sparks to
initiate the combustion process in the cylinders. The electrical
current for the sparks is generated by two magnetos geared to the
engine. The dual ignition systems provide more efficient
combustion and greater safety in the event of one system failing.
An ignition switch in the cockpit is normally used to select BOTH,
although it can select the LEFT or RIGHT systems individually, as well
as having an OFF position. Most ignition switches have a further
6 FLYING TRAINING
position, START, which connects the batte1y to an electric starter to

tum the engine over. Once the engine starts, the ignition switch is
returned to BOTH and the red starter warning light (if fitted) should
go out to verify that the starter motor has indeed disengaged. In
FADEC fitted aircraft the engine is started by the ECU and uses
spark plugs instead of magnetos, like a modem car engine. In this
case the ignition switch will have a ST ART position, but no left/
right magneto selection. To start the engine, tum the engine master
switch ON. The ECU will automatically activate the glow plugs to
prepare for starting. Wait for the 'GLOW' indicator to extinguish
before operating the starter.
■ Figure1-7 The ignition switch
The Electrical System

The battery is a source of electrical power to start the engine and
provides an emergency electrical back-up supply if the engine-
driven alternator (or generator) fails.
The electrical system will have an alternator or a generator to
supply various aircraft services, such as some flight instrun1ents,
the radios, cabin lights, landing lights, navigation lights, the
wing-flap motor, pitot heater and stall warning system. It is
important that aeroplanes fitted with an alternator have a
serviceable battery so that the alternator can come on-line.
The electrical system has an ammeter and/ or warning light
incorporated to verify that electrical current is flowing.
Note that the two magneto systems providing the ignition
sparks to the engine are totally separate from the electrical system
(alternator/generator, battery, circuit breakers and fuses). Each
electrical circuit is protected from excessive current by a fuse or a
circuit breaker.
One very useful electrical service is the radio, which is used for
air/ground communications. It has an ON/OFF and volume control
(usually combined in the one knob), a squelch control to
eliminate unwanted background noise, a microphone for
transmitting and speakers or headphones for receiving messages.
In a FADEC fitted aircraft, the electrical system is particularly
important. The engine is dependent on the ECU to function, and
1 - Aircraft Familiarisation 7
as the ECU is electronically powered the engine is dependent on

the electrical system. For this reason the aircraft has an emergency
battery to supply power to the ECU in the event of an electrical
failure.
■ Figure 1-8 Control panel of a typical VHF-COM radio
The Instruments
The panel in front of the pilot contains various instruments which
can provide important information - the main groups being the
flight instruments (which are directly in front of the pilot) and
the engine instruments (which are generally situated near the
throttle).
The flight instruments include an airspeed indicator, an
attitude indicator to depict the aeroplane's attitude relative to the
horizon, an altimeter to indicate height, a vertical speed indicator
to show climb or descent, a direction indicator and a turn
coordinator with an associated balance ball.
The instruments related to airspeed and height are operated by
air pressure obtained from the pitot-static pressure system, while
those related to attitude, direction and turning are operated by
internal spinning gyroscopes (with the exception of the magnetic
compass). The gyroscope rotors may be spun electrically or by a
stream of air induced by 'suction' from the vacuum system. The
magnetic compass is usually located well away from the magnetic
influences of the instrument panel and radio.
The engine instruments include the tachometer (to read
engine rpm), and the oil pressure and oil temperature gauges.
Some aircraft also have a cylinder head temperature gauge.
Other instruments may include an ammeter to monitor the
electrical system and a suction gauge for the vacuum system.
8 FLYING TRAINING
Altimeter
----------------
• I
Suction
gauge
Turn
coordinato 10[2]1 Oil temperature and
pressure gauges
Heading ert ca speed
Balance ball indic)ltor. indicator
1rn01
Fuel gauges
• _! ~
~000000000000
Circuit breakers
Tachometer(engine RPM) Carburetor heat control , Throttle Mixture control
■ Figure1-9 A typical instrument panel
Other Items
There 1nay be a fire extinguisher provided in the cockpit, which
should be checked for serviceability and security in its fitting.
Light aircraft fire extinguishers are nonnally of the dry-chemical
(powder) type, which are non-toxic. You should learn how to use
the extinguisher in your aircraft.
Control locks n1ay be carried. These fit both internally to lock
the control colmnn and/ or externally on the actual flight controls.
Their purposes is to prevent control-surface movement and
damage from the wind when the aeroplane is parked. It is vital of
course that they be ren1oved prior to flight.
A pitot cover may be carried to protect the pitot head fron1
blockage by insects and water while the aeroplane is parked. It
must be removed prior to flight if the airspeed indicator is to read
correctly.
Wheel chocks may be carried, to place ahead of and behind
the wheels when the aeroplane is parked as a precaution against
moven1ent. There may also be a tie-down kit of ropes, pegs and
mallet to secure the aeroplane to the ground and prevent strong
winds lifting the wings or tail.
A first-aid kit may be carried.
Checklists
Written checklists are used in son1e aeroplanes to confirm_ that
appropriate drills have been carried out: for exa1nple, the 'pre-
take-off drill' or the 'engine fire drill'. The 1nethod of using
checklists may be one of:
1. Carrying out the items as the checklist is read.

2. Canying out the items in full, followed by confirmation using
the checklist.
3. Carrying out the items without reference at all to a written
checklist.
Vital drills are best committed to memory so that they may be
actioned quickly and efficiently, followed by confirmation using a
checklist if required. The procedures for your training
organisation will be made quite clear by your flying instructor. If
checklists are used, they must be carried in the cockpit.
1E.. Emergency Drills

The Pilot's Operating Handbook for the aircraft will specify the
d1illsto be followed in coping with ce1tain emergencies, for example:
• engine fire on start-up or taxiing;
• engine fire in flight;
• engine failure in flight followed by a forced landing;
• electrical fire;
• cabin fire;
• flat main tyre; and
• brake failure.
If any problemoccrrr~in flight,the most essentialtask for the pilot is

to maintainflyingspeed and controlthe flightpathof the aeroplane.
The emergencymust be handledin conjunctionwith this primarytask.
The more serious en1ergencies are considered in detail in the

appropriate exercises of this manual. However, since you are about
to commence flying training, and become part of the flight crew,
you should have a basic awareness of emergency procedures even
at this early stage.
Fire
Fire is a hazard to aviation and is to be avoided at all costs. For a
fire to occur, three things are required:
• fuel (Avgas, oil, papers, fabric, cabin seating, etc.);
• oxygen (present in the air); and
• an ignition source (cigarettes, 1natches, electrical sparks, etc.).
The usual method of extinguishing a fire is to eliminate one or
1nore of these items, e.g. blanketing a fire with 'd1y chemical' from
a fire extinguisher to starve the fire of oxygen.
It is, of course, preferable that fire is prevented by keeping 'fuel'
and possible sources of ignition separate. For example, when
10 FLYING TRAINING
refuelling an aeroplane, ensure that there is no smoking in the

vicinity, that the aeroplane and refuelling equipment are
adequately grounded to avoid the possibility of static electricity
causing a spark, and that no fuel is spilled. As a precaution,
however, a fire extinguisher should be readily available. Know
how to use it!
Engine Fire during Start-Up

The best procedure in this situation is to keep the engine turning
with the starter, but to move the mixture control to IDLE CUT-OFF
(or the fuel selector to OFF) to allow the engine to purge itself and
the induction system of fuel. The fire will probably go out. If not,
then further action should be taken:
• fuel - OFF"
'
• switches - OFF;
• brakes - ON;
• evacuate, taking the extinguisher.
Engine Fire in Flight

If there is an engine fire in flight, shut down the engine and do
not restart it. Maintain flying speed.
A fire in flight will probably be caused by a leakage of fuel or
oil under pressure, so a typical procedure to stop the leakage is:
• throttle - CLOSED;
• mixture - IDLE CUT-OFF, or fuel selector - OFF (so that fuel will
be eliminated from the induction system and engine);
• ignition switches - OFF;
• cabin heat - OFF ( to avoid fumes from the engine entering the
cockpit).
Electrical Fire
A peculiar smell often indicates that the fire is electrical. Switch off
any associated electrical circuits. If required, a fire extinguisher can
be used, but ensure that cabin ventilation is sufficient and the
windows are open to remove smoke and toxic fumes from the
cabin once the fire is out. An immediate landing is advisable.
Whether or not to shut the engine down in flight is a command
decision and will, of course, mean a forced landing without power.
A typical drill for an electrical fire is:

• master switch - OFF (to remove power from the electrical
services);
• all other switches (except ignition) - OFF;
• cabin heat - OFF;
• fire extinguisher - use as required (and open fresh air vents);
• on the ground, shut down the engine and evacuate; in flight,
decide whether to keep the engine running and make an early
landing or shut down the engine and make an immediate
forced landing.
Cabin Fire
A cabin fire may be caused by such things as a cigarette igniting a
seat or other matter. The source of the fire should be identified
and the fire eliminated using the fire extinguisher. In flight,
maintain flying speed and a suitable flightpath while the
emergency is resolved; on the ground, consider an immediate
evacuation after securing the aeroplane (shut down the engine,
switches and fuel - OFF, brakes - ON).
Brake Failure
If the brakes fail while taxiing, then:
• throttle - CLOSED;
• steer away from other aircraft and obstacles; and, if a collision
is imminent
• stop the engine (mixture control to IDLE CUT-OFF);
• fuel- OFF"
'
• ignition - OFF;
• master switch - OFF;
Alternator Failure
In FADEC fitted aircraft, the engine is dependent on the
electrically powered ECU to function. In the case of a complete
electrical failure an emergency battery will supply power for a
limited amount of time to prevent the engine from stopping. If an
'alternator fail' warning appears:
• check circuit breakers are all in.
• essential Bus ON.
• Switch off all unnecessary electrical equipment.
• If there is still no electrical power available, emergency switch
ON.
• LandASAP.
• Be prepared for an engine failure and emergency landing.
FLYING TR1\INING
Before and A~er Flight 13
Exercise la
Preparation for Flight
Aim
To prepare for flight.
Considerations
The success of a flight depends very much on thorough
preparation. In the course of your training a pattern of regular
pre-flight actions should be developed to ensure that this is the
case. They must be based on the checks in the Pilot's Operating
Handbook for your aeroplane.
Preparation for a flight commences well before you actually
enter the aeroplane, and consists of:
• personal preparation;
• satisfying the pre-flight documentation requirements;
• 'booking out' the flight with an Air Traffic Service Unit;
• the pre-flight inspection of the aeroplane;
• start-up and taxi checks;
• the pre-take-off check.
Personal Preparation for Flight

The pilot is the key person on any flight and must be properly
prepared. If you are planning on a flight some days hence, then
calm, unhurried and thorough long-term preparation a day or
two ahead of time might be useful, be it preparing the maps for a
cross-count1y flight or reading up on 'turning' for an imminent
lesson on that exercise.
Short-term preparation involves such things as being properly
equipped, arriving early enough at the aerodrome for any briefing
or flight preparation to proceed in an unhurried manner, and
carrying out the required pre-flight checks of the aeroplane
calmly and thoroughly.
A typical list of items to check before even leaving home
should include:
• Am I fit to fly?
Have I consu1ned alcohol in the last eight hours?
Am I using pills, tablets, drugs, etc. that could impair 1ny
abilities?
Do I have a cold, blocked nose, blocked ears or any other
upper respirato1y complaint?
14 BEFOREAND AFTER FLIGHT
• Do I have the required equipment for this particular flight?

• Am I suitably clothed? (Natural fibres and materials are
generally best, such as a cotton shirt, woollen slacks and leather
shoes; these allow the body to 'breathe' as well as being
somewhat fire-resistant.)
Pre-Flight Documentation
A high level of flight safety is maintained partly because of the
thorough documentation required. Items that are recorded
include the history of the aeroplane in terms of hours flown and
maintenance carried out, and the details of each particular flight
and the experience of the pilot.
The Flight Authorisation Sheet

Each flight must be authorised by your flying training organisation
and will be recorded on a Flight Authorisation Sheet with
appropriate details. There may also be a book containing local
rules and regulations appropriate to your flying training, which
you should check prior to flight.
The Flight Plan and the Weather

It is not usual to compile a flight plan prior to a local training flight,
but it is a consideration during more advanced training when
cross-country flights will be undertaken. Weather is a
consideration for every flight and, if a 'weather man' is available,
you should consult him, and also read through the appropriate
weather forecasts or discuss the weather with your flying instructor.
Weight and Balance

It is essential to the safety of every flight that no weight limit is The aeroplanemust
exceeded and that the load is arranged to keep the centre of always be withinweight
gravity within approved limits. The ability of the aeroplane to fly and balancelimitations.
and be controllable depends on this.
Most training aeroplanes, however, will be satisfactorily loaded
with one or two persons on board and so there may be no need
actually to compile a load sheet or check the weight and balance
prior to every training flight. All the same, you should develop the
habit of considering weight and balance before each and every flight.
Airworthiness Documents
It is the pilot's responsibility to check certain documents prior to
flight to ensure that the aeroplane is airworthy. These documents
include the:
• Certificate of Airworthiness;
• maintenance documents;
• aircraft weight and balance schedule; and
• aircraft technical log.
2a - Preparation
forFlight 15
Do not accept responsibility for the aeroplane if it has defects

which may make it unacceptable for flight. If in any doubt, discuss
the matter with your flying instructor or with a licensed engineer.
Booking Out
Booking out with Air Traffic Services (ATS) makes them aware
of your flight and allows them to document its progress and safe
completion. You can book out with the ATS unit in person
before going to the aeroplane or by radio prior to taxiing.
Preparing the Aeroplane for Flight

The Pilot's Operating Handbook for your aeroplane will contain
a list of items that must be checked during:
• the external inspection of the aeroplane;
• the internal inspection;
• the pre-start, starting and after-starting checks;
• the engine power check; and
• the pre-take-off check.
At first, these checks may seem long and complicated but, as
you repeat them thoroughly prior to each flight, a pattern will
soon form. It is vital that these checks are carried out thoroughly,
strictly in accordance with your Pilot's Operating Handbook.
The comments that follow are only general comments that will
apply to most aeroplanes, however they may or may not apply to
yours.
The External Inspection

Always perform a The external inspection can commence as you walk to the
thoroughexternal aeroplane, and should include:
inspection. • the position of the aeroplane as being suitable for start-up
and taxi (also, note the wind direction and the likely path to the
take-off point);
• the availability of fire extinguishers and emergency
equipment in case of fire on start-up (a very rare event, but it
does happen).
A list of typical 'walk-around' items follows. Each item must be
inspected individually, but do not neglect a general overview of
the aeroplane. Be vigilant for things such as buckling of the
fuselage skin or 'popped' rivets, as these could indicate internal
structural damage from a previous flight. Leaking oil, fuel forming
puddles on the ground, or hydraulic fluid leaks from around the
brake lines also deserve further investigation. With experience,
you will develop a 'feel' for what looks right and what doesn't.
16 BEFORE AND AFTER FLIGHT
The walk-around inspection starts at the cockpit door:

• Check or take action to ensure that:
the magneto switches are OFF;
the fuel contents are indicated on the gauges;
the control locks are removed;
the flaps are lowered (in anticipation of an external
inspection);
the brakes are set to PARK.
• Check the door to ensure that it is securely attached and can be
latched correctly.
• Check the fuel contents by visually inspecting the tanks,
replacing the fuel caps securely.
• Carry out a fuel drain (following refuelling or on the first flight
of the day) from the drain valves into a glass bottle, visually
checking for water (which will sink to the bottom), for any
sediment, and for correct coloration of the fuel.
If the fuel is contaminatedby water, all of the water shouldbe drained ■ Figure2a-1
away.If the fuel is contaminatedby dirt or other solidcontaminants, Take fuel samples from
the whole fuel system may have to be drained. the fuel system
Do not fly with contaminated fuel!
Propeller, spinner,
air intakes and taxi light
I
....-- - - - ---
(or landing light, as applicable)
'
,·===;::1..-i::::::===~✓
,,
Wing leading edge,
' , 1
~Nose gear and tyre Repeat
(landing light) and pitot tube Static' r::;~:::::::::- 7 \ Engine (general) and oil level other side
- - -- - - - - - --
1
.... vent ,, ' ....- - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
I _. - -
... . \
I
I
Wingtip and red
position light
Fuel tank d·rain,
tyre and brakes
'
.·:
:-:=_--:------.:::-=:-::-'=c-=----~z
"~-c
.... ...L.z··..·:.L·~-,J.~=-~=-=i-:::-::--:::~~-~- :-:_==-~-·
-
~
-----
Wing flap;, ;il;ro~ - -
....
1
1
1'
I
,' - - - - - - -------
and left wing I Enter 1 Rear

, cockpit 1
, • fuselage
1
1 ,' Rear
1
fuselage
I
1
I
1 \
...
I I
I ' Empennage, rotating beacon
I L__ ___ __.. ,___,.:;.-..;.;....~u
1 ' and rear-facing position light,
I ' elevator and rudder (and
General
1
I \
..._ --- --- - - --
1 trim tab, if applicable)
overview -;-f Finally, check that the '\ I
I
I chocks and tie-down \ I
I ropes are removed.
I
■ Figure2a-2 Typical walk-around pattern for the external check

2a - Preparationfor Flight 17
• Check the hydraulic lines to the wheel brakes for cracks and
leaks and check that the brake disc is secure.
• Check the undercarriage leg and its attachment to the fuselage.
Popped rivets, buckling of the skin or other damage should be
brought to the attention of an engineer.
• Check the tyre for correct inflation, cuts and creep, and check
that the wheel is secure.
• Check the undersurface of the fuselage for any buckling of the
skin or other damage.
• Check the flap surfaces and flap actuating mechanism; check
the trailing edge of the wing and aileron for free and correct
movement (one up - one down).
• Check the wingtip and navigation light for damage and
security.
• Check the leading edge of the wing for smoothness -
contamination from ice, frost or insects can greatly diminish
the lifting ability of the wing.
• Check that the cover is removed from the pitot tube (otherwise
the airspeed indicator will not operate correctly in flight).
• Check that the fuel vent is clear (to allow pressures inside and
outside the tanks to equalise as fuel is used and/ or altitude is
changed).
• Ensure that all inspection panels on the wing are secure.
• Check that the wing strut (if one exists) is secure at both ends.
• Check that the static vent is open and clean (for correct
operation of the airspeed indicator, altimeter and vertical speed
indicator).
• Check the nose section of the fuselage - loose screws, popped
rivets and any buckling of the skin could indicate structural
damage from a previous flight.
• Check the propeller for damage (especially nicks along its
leading edge), cracks and security.
• Check the propeller spinner for damage, cracks and security.
• Check that the engine air intake and filter is clean, secure and
not blocked by things such as a bird's nest, rags, etc.
• Check the nosewheel and tyre.
• Check the nose oleo strut for correct extension (usually 2-3
inches), and the shimmy damper and other mechanisms for
security.
• Open the engine inspection panel and check the oil contents
(replacing the oil cap securely), inspect for any obvious loose
cables or wires, cracked manifolds, etc., and then lock the
inspection panel.
• Ensure that the windscreen is clean.
• Continue the check around the other side of the aeroplane.
• Check that luggage lockers are securely closed.
• Check radio aerials for security and no loose wires.

• Check all visible cables, lights, etc.
• Check the tailplane, rudder, elevator (for free movement) and
trim tab.
• Remove and stow tie-down ropes and chocks (provided the
parking brake is on).
• Stand back and check the general appearance of the aeroplane.
It cannot be emphasised enough just how important this pre-
flight inspection by the pilot is. Even if you have no experience of
mechanical things, you must train yourself to look at the aeroplane
and notice things that do not seem right. Bring any items that you
are unsure of to the attention of your flying instructor or an
engineer.
At this stage, you are. now ready to seat yourself in the
aeroplane and begin the internal inspection.
The Internal Inspection

The internal inspection should include: Always performa thorough
• Confirm the brakes are - ON (parked). internalinspection.
• Fuel- ON.
• Seat position and harness.
• Ignition switch (magnetos) - OFF (i.e. the engine is not 'live').
• Master switch- ON (for electrical services such as fuel gauges).
• Flight controls for full and free movement (elevator, ailerons,
rudder and trim wheel or handle - set the trim to the take-off
position).
• Engine controls for full and free movement (throttle, mixture
control and carburettor heat control).
• Scan the instruments systematically from one side of the panel
to the other for serviceability and correct readings.
• No circuit breakers should be popped nor fuses blown (for
electrical services to operate).
• The microphone should be plugged in if you are to transmit on
the radio.
• Safety equipment (fire extinguisher, first-aid kit) on board.
• Loose articles stowed.
• Checklists available (if required).
Once the pre-flight inspection is completed and you are
comfortable in your seat, you should then brief your passengers on
the use of their safety belts, and on any relevant emergency
procedures. Now the engine starting procedure can begin, and
this is covered in the next exercise.
2b - Startingand Stoppingthe Engine 19
Exercise 2b
Startingand Stoppingthe Engine
Aim
To start and stop the engine.
Considerations
Prior to starting the engine, check that the surrounding area is
suitable for start-up. The aeroplane should be on a surface suitable
for taxiing and well away from any buildings, fuel storage areas and
public areas. The aeroplane should be parked facing in a direction
that will not cause loose stones or gravel to be blasted back over
other aircraft or into open hangars when the engine is running.
Also, there should be no fuel spills in the vicinity as this creates a
fire risk.
The engine then needs to be properly prepared for the start-up.
The correct procedure for this is found in your Pilot's Operating
Handbook.
The Pre-Start and Starting Check

The pre-start and starting check will include such items as:
• Brakes - ON.
• Unnecessary electrical equipment - OFF.
• Fuel- ON.
• Carburettor heat control - COLD.
• Mixture - RICH.
• Throttle - CLOSED ( or cracked 1/ 4 inch open).
• Fuel primer - LOCKED (following 1-3 priming strokes, if
applicable).
• Rotating beacon - ON (as a warning to other people).
• 'All clear' - the area around the aeroplane, especially near the
propeller, should be all clear. The pilot is responsible for people
around the aeroplane. Loudly call, "Clear propeller!" to warn
anyone who may be approaching the aeroplane.
• Starter - ENGAGE to crank the engine; then, once the engine has
started, release the starter and check that it has disengaged
(which, in most aeroplanes, is indicated by a red light going
out).
After Starting
After engine start, various items to be checked may include:
• Starter warning light - OUT.
• Oil pressure - sufficient pressure within 30 seconds of start-up
(slightly longer in very cold weather).
• Set idling rpm with the throttle (usually 1,000 to 1,200 rpm) to
ensure adequate cooling.
• Ammeter - indicating recharging of the battery following the
drain on it during start-up.
• Vacuum gauge (if fitted) - check for sufficient suction to
operate the gyro instruments.
• Magneto check of the LEFT and RIGHT magnetos individually, as
well as with the ignition switch in the usual BOTH position (the
rpm should decrease slightly on each individual magneto and
return to the previous value when the switch is returned to
BOTH), but, if the engine stops, then a problem exists.
• Radio - ON, correct frequency selected, volume set and
squelch set.
• If your engine is fitted with a turbocharger, it is important to
let the engine idle for a couple of minutes before taxying.
Increasing the engine power before the turbocharger has had a
chance to warm up can cause damage to it.
The Pre-Take-Off Check of the Engine

After the aeroplane has been taxied to the holding point or run-
up bay prior to entering the runway, it is brought to a halt and the
brakes parked while the pre-take-off vital actions are performed.
One of these actions is a check of the engine. This is detailed in
Exercise 12 of this manual.
Shutting Down the Engine

There will be a shut-down procedure specified in the Pilot's
Operating Handbook for your aircraft which will include such
items as:
• Brakes - PARKED, with the aeroplane (ideally) pointing into any
strong wind.
• Ensure that the engine is cool (having taxied or set 1,000 to
1,200 rpm for a minute or two should be sufficient). If a
turbocharger is fitted, the engine must be idled for
approximately two minutes to ensure that it has had sufficient
time to cool.
• Magnetos - CHECK: both magnetos should be checked
individually. There should be a slight rpm drop as you go from
BOTH to an individual magneto, and a return to the set rpm
when the switch is returned to BOTH.
2b - Startingand Stoppingthe Engine 21
NOTE Sometimes a 'dead-cut' check is made by moving the

ignition switch very quickly from BOTH to OFF and back to BOTH,
to check that the engine will actually cut. This checks that the OFF
position does indeed break the circuit to each magneto by earthing
them. If this were not the case, the engine and propeller would be
live even with the magneto switched to OFF. An innocent
movement of the propeller could start the engine unexpectedly -
a dangerous situation! Some engine manufacturers advise against
this check as it may damage the engine, especially if the switch is
held too long in the OFF position. Seek your instructor's advice.
• Electrics - OFF (radio, lights, etc.).
• Mixture control- IDLE CUT-OFF (fully-out), to starve the engine
of fuel and stop it running.
• After the engine stops, switch the ignition OFF and remove the key.
• Consideration should be given to switching the fuel cock OFF.
Problems During Start-Up

Most engine starts are uneventful if correct procedures are followed
but, occasionally, problems may arise.
A Flooded Engine
It is possible to 'flood' an engine with too much fuel, making a
start difficult and placing a strain on the battery which supplies
electrical power to the starter motor. If 'flooding' is suspected,
adopt the following procedure:
• Ignition switches - OFF.
• Throttle - FULLY OPEN.
• Fuel- ON.
• Mixture control - IDLE CUT-OFF (i.e. no fuel supplied to the
engine).
• Crank the engine through several revolutions with the starter
(which should clear the intake passages of excess fuel); then
repeat the starting procedure without priming the engine.
Engine Fire on Start-Up

Engine fires are a very rare event these days but they can still
occur, possibly as a result of over-priming the engine with fuel. In
such a case:
• Starter - if still engaged, CONTINUE CRANKING.
• Mixture control - IDLE CUT-OFF.
• Fuel selector - OFF.
• Throttle - OPEN ( to allow maximum airflow through to purge
the induction system and engine of fuel).
Once the fuel has been eliminated, the fire should stop. Release
the starter.
If the fire continues:
• Ignition switch - OFF.
• Master switch- OFF.
• Brakes - ON.
• Evacuate, taking any suitable fire extinguisher with you. Do
not attempt to restart the engine.
2c - Post-Flight
Actions 23
E:xercise le
Post-FlightActions
. he post-flight duties required of e~ch pilot are to. s~cure the

T aeroplan - and complete the post-flight ocumentat1on.
A flight is not really completed until the engine is shut down
and the aeroplane parked and secure. The post-flight
documentation must be finalised, since it is a requirement that
certain records be kept and that any faults in the aeroplane be
made known so that maintenance action will be taken.
An aeroplane has a life of its own in the sense that it passes
continually from the command of one pilot to .the command of
another - the post-flight check of one being followed by the pre-
flight check of the next. To a certain extent, each pilot relies on
the fact that previous pilots have performed their duties, even
though we must all accept individual responsibility.
Securing the Aeroplane

The aeroplane should not be left unattended unless it is adequately
secured against movement and possible damage.
• Ensure that the parking brake is ON (if required) and that the
wheel chocks are in place, in front of and behind the wheels.
• Carry out a brief external inspection.
• Fit the pitot covers, control locks and tie-down ropes if required.
• Secure the seat belts.
• If yours is the last flight of the day, consider refuelling to
minimise overnight condensation of water in the fuel tanks.
• Lock the door and return the key.
Post-Flight Documentation
• 'Book in' the flight if necessary with the Air Traffic Service
Unit.
• Complete the Flight Authorisation Sheet, recording the time
and nature of the flight.
• Report any aeroplane defects to your flying instructor or to an
engineer and, when appropriate, note them on the maintenance
document to ensure that necessa1y maintenance will be attended
to and that the following pilot will have a serviceable aeroplane.
• Complete your personal logbook.
During your training, debriefing by your flying instructor will
probably occur following the completion of your post-flight duties.
24 BEFORE AND AfTER FLIGHT
Flying Training 25
Exercise 3
Air Experience
Your First Flight
T hi flight ~snot part of your fo1111al_instr~ction, ut rath r_an

oppor unity to get the feeJ' of b ing a1rb rn . Your flying
instructor, an experienced and professional pilot, will use this first
flight to let you experience son~e of the more common sensations
of flying an aeroplane.
In the Cockpit
Sit comfortably in your seat and relax. Since you will be trained
to become the captain of your aeroplane, you may as well start by
sitting in the left-hand seat - the captain's seat by tradition and
design. It needs to be positioned so that you can reach the
appropriate controls comfortably with your hands and feet. The
seat belt or harness should be firm.
Even though this may be your very first flight, it is important
that your seat is positioned correctly, since the position of the
natural horizon in the windscreen is a vital element in assisting the
visual pilot to fly accurately.
Fresh air is available through vents, and directing these towards
your face and body makes the cockpit more comfortable.
Communication in the cockpit is very important, so ensure
that your headset is comfortable and the intercom is working
properly.
Leaving the Ground

While taxiing out, you can assist in maintaining a good lookout
for other aircraft and for obstructions.
During the take-off roll you should look well ahead.
Maintaining a straight path down the runway, and also judging
height above it, is best achieved by looking into the 'middle
distance'. Develop good habits right from the start! Even though
the take-off appears full of action, in reality it is a straightfoiward
manoeuvre and you will soon master it.
As the aeroplane climbs, ground features take on a different
perspective, being viewed more in plan than in profile - towns,
roads, rivers, mountains and coastlines appearing as they would on
a map. The sensation of speed also diminishes and the aeroplane
feels as if it is flying in slow motion.
26 FLYING TRAINING
1.nFlight
You will have the opportunity to 'follow' your instructor on the
flight controls by placing:
• your left hand lightly on the control wheel (or control column);
• your right hand on the throttle or on your lap; and
• both feet lightly on the rudder pedals (with your heels on the
floor to ensure that the toe brakes are not applied).
■ Figure3-1 A light touch on the controls
Control of the Aircraft

During the course of your training, control will be passed from
your instructor to you and then back again quite frequently. Your
flying instructor will say "You have control" (or words to that
effect), when he wishes you to take control. On hearing this
instruction, you should place your hands and feet on the controls
lightly, but firmly, and, once you feel comfortable to take control,
respond by saying "I have control." Each change of control should
be preceded by an initial statement followed by a response from
the other pilot.
■ Figure3-2 Be clear at all times as to who has control
Keep a Good Lookout

'Visual' flying requires that the pilot maintains a high visual
awareness of the environment outside the cockpit, to relate the
attitude (or nose position) of the aeroplane to the natural horizon,
to look out for other aircraft, to check passage over the ground
and to remain clear of cloud.
3 - Air Experience 27
■ Figure3-3 The view from the cockpit
The most efficient means of scanning for other aircraft takes

into account the fact that the eyes see better when they are
stationary. Use a series of short, regularly spaced eye movements,
moving the eyes about 10° each time, to position them to scan an
area for about one second before moving on.
■ Figure3-4 Scanning for other traffic
There is a blind spot under the nose of the aeroplane that the
pilot cannot see, which you should periodically clear by making
shallow turns that enable you to see this area out of the side
window. Get to know the blind spots of your aeroplane, and
periodically take action to clear the areas normally obscured.
The position of other aeroplanes in relation to your own is best
described by using the clock code, based on a horizontal clock
face aligned with the aeroplane's heading.
An aeroplane ahead of you, but higher, would be described as
'12 o'clock high', while one slightly behind and below you on the
left-hand side would be at 'left, 8 o'clock low'.
28 FLYING TRAINING
■ Figure3-5 The clock code
Note any landmarks that can assist in your return to the

aerodrome and remain well clear of cloud at all times.
The Instruments
The aeroplane has instruments which can provide useful
information regarding altitude, direction, airspeed and engine
operation. The basic division is into flight instruments and
engine instruments. An occasional glance at a particular
instrument for one or two seconds is all that is necessary for visual
pilots - your visual awareness of the world outside the cockpit
must not suffer.
Landing
As the descent, approach and landing proceed, the pilot's
workload increases. During the landing, you should again look
into the 'middle distance', to allow better judgement in the flare
and touchdown when you are making the landing. The approach
and landing seems full of action, but it will not be long before you
have mastered this manoeuvre!
A flight is not complete until the aeroplane is parked and
secured, and the post-flight duties of the pilot completed. Your
first flight is now over, but a marvellous hobby or career awaits
you. Preparing for the next flying lesson carefully on the ground
by reading the appropriate exercise of this manual (as outlined by
your instructor) will ensure that you derive the maximum benefit
from your next lesson in the air.
The Controls 29
Exercise 4a
The PrimaryEffectof EachMain
FlightControl
Aim
To observe the primary effect of moving each main flight control.
Considerations
Aeroplane Movement
An aeroplanemoves To describe an aeroplane's attitude, or position in flight, three
in three dimensions. mutually perpendicular reference axes passing through the centre
of gravity (CG) are used. Any change in aeroplane attitude can be
expressed in terms of motion about these three axes.
Motionabout the lateralaxis is known as pitching.

Motionabout the longitudinalaxis is known as rolling.
Motionabout the normalaxis is known as yawing.
■ Figure4a-1 Angular motion is described using three reference axes
NOTE The word normal in geometry means perpendicular. We

therefore refer to the yaw axis as the normal axis, because it is
perpendicular to both the longitudinal axis and the lateral axis. It
is preferable not to call it the vertical axis, because it is only
vertical when the aeroplane is in the cruise attitude. Whenever the
aeroplane is banked, or the nose is pitched up or down, the
normal axis is not vertical.
Motion about an axis can be described as motion in a plane. For
instance, the nose pitching up and down can be described as either
rotation about the lateral axis, or motion in the pitching plane.
30 THE CONTROLS
Pitching plane Rolling plane

of motion of motion
Yawing plane
of motion
■ Figure4a-2 Angular motion can occur in three ,planes
Aeroplane Stability
Stability is the natural ability of the aeroplane to remain in its
original attitude or to return to it following some disturbance
(such as a wind gust), without any action being taken by the pilot.
Most training aeroplanes are reasonably stable in the pitching
plane. If correctly trimmed, they will maintain steady flight with
the pilot flying 'hands-off. In other words, the nose position
relative to the horizon will remain reasonably steady without too
much attention from the pilot.
The stability of most aeroplanes in the rolling and yawing
planes, however, is usually not as great as in the pitching plane. If
the wings are moved from their position (say by a gust), the
aeroplane will eventually enter a descending spiral turn unless the
pilot actively does something about it - in this case by levelling the
wings.
The Main Flight Controls

The pilot controls motion about the three axes (or in the three
planes) with the main flight controls:
• the elevator controls pitch;
• the ailerons control roll; and
• the rudder controls yaw.
4a - ThePrimaryEffectof EachMain FlightControl 31
Elevator
Elevator for pitch
■ Figure4a-3 The three main flight controls: elevator, ailerons and rudder
The Elevator
The elevatorcontrols The elevator is operated by fore and aft movements of the control
pitching. column and controls pitching. The conventional elevator is a
control surface hinged to the rear of the tailplane (also known as
the horizontal stabiliser). Some aircraft have an all-flying tail (or
stabilator) which is a single moving surface acting as both the
tailplane and the elevator. Either type has the same effect on the
aeroplane when the control column is moved.
■ Figure4a-4 Fixed tailplane and moving elevator (le~),

and the all-flying tail (right)
Deflecting the elevator with the control column alters the airflow
around the tailplane and changes the aerodynamic force generated by
it. Moving the control column back deflects the elevator up, causing
an increased speed of flow beneath the tailplane and reducing the
static pressure in that area. This results in a downward aerodynamic
force on the tailplane, causing the aeroplane to rotate about its centre
of gravity. The tail moves down and the nose moves up.
Upward aerodynamic
Control column Control column force
back
Nose
I forward
Nose
up down
\
■ Figure4a-5 The elevator controls pitching
32 THE CONTROLS
The rate of pitching of the aeroplane increases with larger

elevator deflections. At normal flight speeds, the movement of the
control column can be quite small and may feel more like pressure
changes than actual movements. Fore or aft movement of the
control column is used to place the nose in the desired position
relative to the horizon (i.e. to set the pitch attitude). The control
column is then centralised.
The Ailerons
The ailerons are hinged control surfaces attached to the outboard The aileronscontrolroll.
trailing edge of each wing. The ailerons in some aeroplanes are
controlled by rotation of the control wheel and in other
aeroplanes by left/ right movements of the control column. The
control column or control wheel therefore serves two functions:
1. Fore and aft movement operates the elevator.
2. Rotation or left/right movement operates the ailerons.
■ Figure4a-6 A control column and a control wheel

perform the same function
As one aileron goes down and increases the lift generated by

that wing, the other aileron goes up and reduces the lift on its
wing, causing the aeroplane to roll. For example, moving the
control column to the left causes a roll to the left by raising the left
aileron and lowering the right aileron.
L
Reduced lift L Increased lift

L
..~~t~. CG
11.,
..
---c_
■ Figure4a-7
~~=::::::c
~d~
Left wing
A roll to the le~

--
- Right wing
The aeroplane will continue to roll while the ailerons are

deflected, the roll rate being determined by the amount of aileron
deflection. Holding the control column central places the ailerons
in the neutral position and stops the roll.
The Rudder
Theruddercontrols
yaw.. The third (and final) main flight control is the rudder, which is a
hinged control surface at the rear of the fin (vertical stabiliser).
The rudder is controlled with both feet on the rudder pedals.
These pedals are interconnected so that as one moves forward the
other moves back.
Moving the left rudder pedal forward deflects the rudder to the
left. This increases the speed of airflow on the right hand side of
the fin, reducing the static pressure there and creating an
aerodynamic force to the right. The aeroplane rotates about its
centre of gravity and so, with left rudder, the nose yaws left.
Conversely, moving the right rudder pedal forward yaws the nose
of the aeroplane to the right.
Yaw
Left rudder
applied
l!C::l Center
'-' of gravity
Aerodynamic
Left rudder
force
■ Figure4a-8 The le~ rudder ,pressure yaws the nose le~
Yawing the aeroplane can be uncomfortable and is

aerodynamically inefficient because it causes drag to increase. It is
neither a comfortable nor efficient means of turning an aeroplane
in flight; a yawing turn falls into the same category as trying to
turn a bicycle without leaning it into the turn.
Although it can yaw the aeroplane, one of the main functions
of the rudder is to prevent unwanted yaw, a function known as
'maintaining balanced flight'. This is indicated to the pilot by the
small balance ball on the instrument panel and also by the 'seat of
his pants'. If the aeroplane is out of balance, the ball moves out to
one side (and the pilot, reacting in the same way as the ball, will
feel pressed to the same side).
34 THE CONTROLS
Balance can be restored by applying same-side rudder pressure,

i.e. if the ball is out to the right, apply right rudder pressure (and
vice versa).
■ Figure4a-9 Apply 'same-side, rudder pressure to centre the balance ball
Aeroplane Attitude and Control

Each of the three primary aerodynanuc controls operates in the
same sense relative to the aeroplane, irrespective of its attitude in
pitch or bank. For example, moving the control column forward
will move the nose in a direction away from the pilot, even if
(taking an extreme case) the aeroplane is inverted.
■ Figure4a-10 Motion is referred to the aeroplane axes
Flying the Manoeuvre

Good flying requires the coordination of all three flight controls;
however, in this exercise we will use them individually. It is a
necessary step because the individual effects need to be
appreciated before smooth coordination of the flight controls in
normal flight is possible.
Your instructor will demonstrate the aircraft's normal flight
attitude relative to the earth's horizon, then move each of the
controls individually and relate the effects to the three axes. Repeat
with the aeroplane banked.
Airmanship
You are training to be a visual pilot, so develop good habits early.
Look out of the cockpit most of the time, both to check the
attitude of the aeroplane relative to the horizon and to look for
other aircraft. Follow the correct "You have control" _:__ "I have
control" procedures so that it is quite clear at all times who has
control.
Hold the controls lightly and move them smoothly and fluidly.
Occasionally, large control movements are required to achieve the
desired effect but, at normal flying speeds, pressures rather than
large movements will achieve the desired effect.
36 THE CONTROLS
Airwork 4a
The PrimaryEffect ofEachMain FlightControl
Aim To observethe primary effect of movingeach main flight control during flight.
1. The Primary Effect of the Elevator is to Pitch the Aeroplane and to

Select an Attitude
(a) Establishthe aeroplane in its normal level

attitude. Maintain a good lookout.
(b) Smoothly and gently move the control
column forward.
..
• The nose of the aeroplane pitches down.
Centralise the control column to hold the new
attitude and the airspeed will increase.
2. The Primary Effect of the Ailerons is to Roll the Aeroplane
(a) Establishthe aeroplane in its normal (b) Initially hold the wings level. Then
level attitude. Maintain a good smoothly rotate the control column
lookout. to the left.
• The aeroplane rolls to the left.
4a - ThePrimaryEffect ofEachMain FlightControl 37
Airwork 4a
■ Pitching up ■ Pitching down
(c) Smoothly and gently move the control

column rearward.
• The nose of the aeroplane pitches up.
Centralise the control column to hold the new
attitude and the airspeed will decrease.
(e)
(d)
( c) Centralise the control (d) To regain the wings level (e) When the wings are level
column. attitude, smoothly rotate centralise the control
control column to the right column.
• Rollingceasesand a steady
bank angle is maintained. • The aeroplane rolls to (f) Repeat this exercise for rolls
the right to the right and left using
Further effect will be a yaw - in
different amounts of control
this case left (see next Exercise).
movement.
■ Rolling le~ ■ Rolling right

38 THE CONTROLS
Airwork 4a
The PrimaryEffectofEachMain FlightControl
3. The Primary Effect of the Rudder is to Yaw the Aeroplane
(a) Establish the aeroplane in its

normal level attitude. Maintain a
good lookout.
(b) Select a reference point on the
horizon. -
■ Steady, straight and level flight
( c) Smoothly apply left rudder

pressure.
• The nose of the aeroplane
yaws left (and the balance ball
is thrown out to the right).
■ Le'ft rudder - nose yaws le'ft and balance

ball thrown right
(d) Centralise the rudder pedals (by removing left rudder pressure).
(e) Repeat using right rudder pressure and observe the reverse results.
4a - The Primary Effect of Each Main Flight Control 39
Airwork 4a
4. The Controls Work the Same when the Aeroplane is not Flying
Straight and Level
(a) Establish the aeroplane in its

normal level attitude. Look out.
(b) Bankthe aeroplane with the aileron
control.
• Forward pressure on the
control column pitches the
nose down and away from
the pilot.
• Aft pressure on the control
column pitches the nose up
and towards the pilot.
■ Aeroplane banked to the le~ - forward

control column pressure still pitches the
nose down
(c) Set the aeroplane with a high nose

attitude.
• Rotating the control column
left causes the aeroplane to
roll left.
• Rotating the control column
right causes the aeroplane to
roll right.
■ With a high nose attitude the aeroplane

still responds to the aileron control - rolls
right (and le~)
(d) Bank the aeroplane with the ailerons.

• Pushing the left rudder pedal causes the nose to yaw left relative to the pilot.
• Pushing the right rudder pedal causesthe nose to yaw right relative to the pilot.
40 THE CONTROLS
Exercise 4b
The Further Effectof EachMain Flight
Control
Aim
To observe the further effect of moving each main flight control.
Considerations
Control Effects
Operating a single flight control can have more than one effect.
When either the ailerons or rudder are used individually there is
both a primary and a secondary (or further) effect.
Roll Causes Yaw

Banking the aeroplane tilts the lift force generated by the wings. Rollcausesyaw - the
A sideways component of the lift force now exists, causing the furthereffect ofailerons.
aeroplane to 'slip' towards the lower wing. In this sideslip, the
large keel surfaces behind the centre of gravity (such as the fin and
the fuselage) are struck by the airflow, which causes the aeroplane's
nose to yaw in the direction of the sideslip. The nose will drop
and a spiral descent will begin (unless prevented by the pilot
levelling the wings).
Yaw
-
~
......
Airflow
w
■ Figure4b-1 Bank causes sideslip followed by yaw
Moving the ailerons with left/ right movements of the control

column has two effects - a roll followed by a yaw. Therefore:
• the primary effect of the ailerons is to roll the aeroplane; and
• the further effect is to yaw the aeroplane.
4b - The FurtherEffectof EachMain FlightControl 41
Yaw Causes Roll

Yawcausesroll- the Applying rudder will yaw the nose of the aeroplane - a yaw to the
furthereffectofrudder. left if left rudder pressure is applied, a yaw to the right if right
rudder is applied. As a result of the yaw, the outer wing will tend
to rise because:
• it is moving faster than the inner wing and so generates more
lift; and
• the aeroplane will continue to move in its original direction
due to inertia, causing the outer wing, if it has dihedral, to be
presented to the airflow at a greater angle of attack, generating
increased lift. (Dihedral describes a wing that is angled up
towards the wingtip.)
The inner wing will be somewhat shielded from the airflow by
the fuselage, and therefore produce less lift.
Operating the rudder, therefore, causes yaw followed by roll,
and unless the pilot takes corrective action (by preventing
unwanted yaw with opposite rudder or by levelling the wings) a
spiral descent will result.
When rudder is applied:
• the primary effect is to yaw the aeroplane; and
• the further effect is to roll the aeroplane.
Yaw
Outer wing moves Airflow and dihedral -

:er - more lift more lift on outer wing - roll
~~~)
■ Figure4b-2 Rudder causes yaw followed by roll
Pitch and Airspeed

The primary effect of elevator is to change the pitch attitude. For
example, by moving the control column back the nose is raised.
Following a pitch change, the inertia of the aeroplane (i.e. its
resistance to any change) will cause it to follow the original
flightpath for a brief period. The airflow will then strike the wings
at a greater angle of attack and, as a consequence, they will
generate a different aerodynamic force. Drag will increase, causing
the aeroplane to slow down. Thus, raising the nose with the
elevator will lead to an airspeed decrease.
42 THE CONTROLS
Conversely, by moving the control column forward, the nose is

lowered and the airflow will strike the wings at a lesser angle of
attack, less drag will be created and so the airspeed will increase.
Thus, lowering the nose with the elevator will lead to an airspeed
increase.
When deflected by moving the control column, the elevator
has:
• the primary effect of pitching the aeroplane; and
• the further effect of changing the airspeed.
~ Slow Fast
■ Figure4b-3 The further effect of elevator is to change the airspeed
NOTE When the elevator changes the pitch attitude of the

aeroplane, it will gradually settle at a new airspeed. Whether the
aeroplane climbs, descends or stays at the same level depends on
the power that is set. The effect of power is discussed shortly.

Established in normal level flight, observe the effects of moving
each main flight control individually. Allow time after the initial
effect for the further effect to become apparent. The effects
should be related to the three aeroplane axes.
Observing the effects of each of the main flight controls is a
prelude to learning how to coordinate their use to achieve
smooth, comfortable and efficient flight.
Airmanship
Maintain a good lookout, both with respect to the horizon and
landmarks and looking for other aircraft. Be very clear at all times
about who has control of the aeroplane. When you have control,
exert gentle, but firm and positive pressure on the controls as
required.
4b - The FurtherEffect of EachMain FlightControl 43
Airwork 4b
The FurtherEffect of EachMain FlightControl
Aim To observethe further effect ofmovingeach main ~ightcontrol.
1. Roll Causes Yaw - the Further Effect of the Ailerons

(a) Establish normal level flight, maintaining a good lookout.
(b) Remove your feet from the rudder pedals.
(c) Apply a small aileron input by moving the control column.
• The aeroplane banks and then, because of the resulting sideslip,
yaws towards the lower wing, i.e. the nose drops into the turn.
■ Aileron applied ■ Le~ bank ... ■ Causes a yaw to the le~
2. Yaw Causes Roll - the Further Effect of the Rudder

(a) Establish normal level flight, maintaining a good lookout.
(b) Take your hands off the control column.
(c) Apply rudder pressure.
(d) The aeroplane yaws and then, because of the yaw, rolls in the same direction.
■ Le~ rudder applied ■ Le~ yaw ... ■ Causes a roll to the le~
NOTE The effects seen in steps 1 and 2 will also be the same when the aeroplane
is banked, is climbing, or is descending.
44 THE CONTROLS
Airwork 4b
3. Changing the Pitch Attitude Alters the Airspeed -

Another Effect of the Elevator
(a) Establish normal level flight, and look out.
(b) Easethe control column forward:
• The nose pitches down and the airspeed increases.
(c) Easethe control column back:
• The nose rises and the airspeed decreases.
(c) /
(a)
---------- ~
4c- TheArt of Trimming 45.
Exercise 4c
The Art of Trimming
Aim
To use the trim to relieve prolonged control pressures.
Considerations
Trimming is Vital to Accurate Flight
The trimming devicescan All training aeroplanes have an elevator trim that can relieve the
decrease your workload pilot of steady fore and aft pressures on the control column. Some
tremendously.
aeroplanes also have a rudder trim to relieve steady pressures on
the rudder pedals.
The trim is used to relieve prolonged control pressures in
steady conditions of flight, such as straight and level, climbing and
descending. The trim should not be altered in transient
manoeuvres, such as turning.
Using the trimming devices can ease the workload on the pilot
tremendously, so the effect of trim and how to use it correctly
should be clearly understood at an early stage.
Trim wheel Elevator trim tabs
■ Figure4c-1 The elevator trim tab and trim wheel
Why is Trim Needed?

Use trim to relievesteady The elevator is controlled by fore and aft movement of the control
control pressures. wheel and is used by the pilot to hold the desired pitch attitude.
If this requires a steady pressure, then flying becmnes quite tiring,
making precision flight almost impossible. Trim can be used to
relieve this steady pressure on the control column and, used
precisely, can reduce it to zero.
Trin1 is not used to alter the attitude of the aeroplane; it is only
used to relieve steady control pressure.
46 THE CONTROLS
Elevator Trim
Elevator trim in most aeroplanes is achieved using a small trim tab Elevatortrim can holdthe
located ori the trailing edge of the elevator. The trim tab is elevatorde~ected.
operated by a trim wheel (or handle) in the cockpit. The purpose
of the trim tab is to hold the elevator displaced with an
aerodynamic force, rather than a force that the pilot exerts via the
control column.
If the trim tab is deflected downwards, the airflow over the
upper surface of the elevator speeds up, reducing the static
pressure. An aerodynamic force now exists to deflect the elevator
upwards.
Trimming Technique
A steady back pressure exerted by the pilot on the control column Whileyou are trimming
to hold the elevator up can be relieved by winding the trim wheel the aeroplane,the pitch
back. This deflects the trim tab down, reducing the static pressure attitudeshouldnot change.
above it. If the static pressure is sufficiently low for the elevator to
remain deflected upwards to the same degree, then the pilot need
not continue to hold steady back pressure on the control column.
Flying now becomes less tiring.
Trim wheel
■ Figure4c-2 Using elevator trim to relieve steady-pressures on the

control column
NOTE The description above applies to the 'aerodynamic' trim

tab that is found on most aeroplanes. On others, however,
trimming is achieved by applying a spring loading to the control
column to relieve the pilot.
Retrimming
The demands placed on the elevator change from time to time
and so retrimming will be necessary:
• after a new pitch attitude is selected;
• after a power change;
• after a configuration change (e.g. alteration of flap position);
• after a change in the position of the centre of gravity (say
as fuel burns off, passengers move, baggage is shifted or
parachutists depart).
Whenever a steady pressure is required on the control column
in steady flight, then trim it off.
4c - TheArt of Trimming 47
- .
Change Check, Hold, Adjust, Trim

■ Figure4c-3 Control sequence when trimming: select - hold - trim

Correct trimming is achieved by moving the trim wheel in a
natural sense. If you are holding back pressure on the control
column, then wind the trim wheel back, trimming coarsely, then
gradually release the pressure, trimming finely, so that the pitch
attitude does not change.
Conversely, if fo1ward pressure is needed to maintain pitch
attitude, then wind the trim wheel fo1ward until there is no steady
pressure required on the control column.
While you are trimming the aircraft, the pitch attitude should
not change.
The sequence of events that is applicable to most flight exercises is:
• SELECT a sensible pitch attitude;
• HOLD the pitch attitude (make small adjustments if necessary);
• TRIM.
Select - hold - trim.
NOTE In aircraft fitted with a rudder trim the same procedure is

used. With the aeroplane in balance, trim off any steady rudder
pressure without allowing the nose to yaw. Throughout this
manual, the word trimimplies use of the elevator trim, and also use
of rudder trim, where it is installed.
Airmanship
Maintain a good lookout.
Do not be reluctant to use the trim. If you feel a steady pressure
then trim it off, but do not use the trim in transient manoeuvres
such as turns. Use the trim only to ren1ove steady pressures. Do
not use the trim to change the attitude of the aeroplane.
Trimming is an art. As you develop the skill of trimming an
aeroplane, smooth and precise flying becomes much easier.
48 THE CONTROLS
Airwork 4c
TheArt of Trimming
Aim To use the trim to relieve steady pressures on the control column.
1. Trimming the Aeroplane Correctly

This exercise involves use of the pitch trim
wheel or control.
To trim the aeroplane correctly in pitch:
I
• Hold the desired pitch attitude with Tr·m
pressure on the control column; then
• Without looking, place your hand on the trim
wheel and trim (in a natural sense)to relieve
pressuresso that the desired attitude is held
without exerting any pressure on the control
column. If the load is high,trim coarsely.As the load reduces,trim more finely. Gradually,the
pressure on the control column can be relaxed. Then the controls may be reieased briefly
to check that the nose attitude remains constant.
2. Getting the Feel of Incorrect Trim

(a) Out-of-trim forces can be powerful. To get the feel of incorrect trim, fly straight and level,
holding the desired pitch attitude with elevator.
(b) Then, without letting the pitch attitude change,gradually wind the trim wheel fully forward.
• You will need considerable back pressure on the control column to hold the nose up
in the level flight attitude.
(c) Gradually wind the trim wheel back until the control column back pressure is again
reduced to zero.
(d) Repeat the procedure, winding the trim fully aft this time, noting the considerable forward
pressure required on the control column to maintain the level flight attitude.
NOTE This is not a normal procedure. It is done only for you to experience the effect of
incorrect trim, which makes flying almost impossible.
3. Common Situations Requiring Retrimming

Practise trim changes by holding a particular pitch attitude and then:
(i) adopt a new pitch attitude;
(ii) change the power setting; or
(iii) change the aircraft configuration (e.g. lower flaps).
After each change, hold the pitch attitude constant for a short period (10 or 20 seconds) and
allow the aeroplane to settle into the new flightpath and/or airspeed before retrimming.
• If strong pressure is required on the control column, it is advisableto relieve most of
it fairly quickly and then, after the aeroplane has settled down, trim more finely.
NOTE For aeroplanes fitted with rudder trim these exercises can be repeated. The same
technique applies - use rudder trim to relieve steady pressure on the rudder pedals which
are necessary to balance the aeroplane.
4d - The Effectof Airspeedand Slipstream 49
Exercise 4d
The Effectof Airspeedand Slipstream
Aim
To observe the effect of an increased speed of airflow over the
control surfaces.
Considerations
Control Effectiveness
Increasedairflow increases The effectiveness of the three main flight controls and the rate at
control effectiveness. which the aeroplane moves in all three planes (pitch, roll and yaw)
depends on:
• the amount of control deflection;
• the airflow over the control surface, which can be increased by:
a higher airspeed; and/ or
- slipstream from the propeller.
Airspeed
All ffight controls are more The elevator, ailerons and rudder will all experience an increased
effective at airflow when the aeroplane is flying at a higher airspeed. Each
higher airspeeds.
control will feel firmer and only small movements will be required
to produce an effective response.
~
. or Elevator
Slow
Small control movements Small control movements
very effective not very effective
■ Figure4d-1 All of the flight controls are more effective at high airspeeds
Conversely, at low airspeeds the airflow over each of the flight

controls is less and their effectiveness is reduced. The elevator,
ailerons and rudder will all feel 'sloppy' and large movements may
be required to produce the desired effect.
50 THE CONTROLS
The Propeller Slipstream

The slipstream from the propeller flows rearwards around the
aeroplane in a corkscrew fashion, which increases the airflow over
the tail section, making the rudder and elevator more effective.
■ Figure4d-2 The slipstream increases elevator and rudder effectiveness
The ailerons, being outside the slipstream airflow, are not

affected by it and will remain 'sloppy' at low airspeeds irrespective
of the power set. The elevator on T -tail aircraft may also be
somewhat out of the slipstream and therefore not affected by it to
the same extent as the rudder.
The Slipstream Causes a Yaw Tendency

The slipstream from the propeller flows back in a corkscrew fashion
over the tailplane, meeting the fin at an angle of attack. This generates
a sideways aerodynamic force, which tends to yaw the nose of the
aeroplane. The pilot can balance this yawing effect with rudder
pressure.
Slipstream effect is most pronounced under conditions of
high power and low airspeed (e.g. during a climb), when the
'corkscrew' is tighter and its angle of attack at the fin is greater.
Left yaw tendency ~=:::::J:=

/,... •••••••• ·······•
•••
\ ..Clockwise
\ 1 . ,./} propeller
- . ,. rotation
r:&_=;~~~~~=~··~---1~- ~r····;··
===__J_==r=\::::-~;~
Right rudder required

to balance slipstream effect
■ Figure4d-3 Slipstream tends to yaw the aeroplane
The direction of the yaw resulting from the slipstream effect

depends on the direction of propeller rotation. If the propeller
rotates clockwise when viewed from the cockpit (as is the case for
many rn.odern training aircraft), the slipstream passes under the
4d - The Effectof Airspeedand Slipstream 51
fuselage and strikes the fin on its left-hand side. This causes a
tendency for the nose to yaw left, which can be balanced with
right rudder.
If the propeller rotates anti-clockwise as seen from the cockpit
(e.g. the Tiger Moth, Chipmunk, and ARV Super 2), the slipstream
passes under the fuselage and strikes the fin on the right-hand side.
The nose will tend to yaw right and will require left rudder to
balance.

To observe the effect of airspeed on the flight controls, first
establish a glide (to eliminate the effect of slipstream) at a high
airspeed and operate each of the three main flight controls. Each
one will feel firm and be effective.
Then raise the nose to glide at a lower airspeed and operate
each of the three main flight controls. Each will feel 'sloppy' and
less effective than before.
Next apply climb power, maintaining the same low airspeed by
raising the nose. This will introduce a strong slipstream effect, but
keep the airspeed effect constant. The elevator and the rudder,
being in the slipstream, will feel firm and effective. The ailerons,
which are outside the slipstream, will still feel 'sloppy' and less
effective.
Airmanship
Maintain a high visual awareness. Keep an eye out for other traffic
and remain aware of the position of the aeroplane and the
direction to be flown back to the aerodrome. Exert firm, positive,
but smooth control over the aeroplane.
52 THE CONTROLS
Airwork 4d
Effect of Airspeed and Slipstream
Aim To observethe effect of increasedairflowovereachof the main flightcontrolsurfacesas a

resultof airspeedand slipstream.
1. The Effect of Airspeed

(a)
- ~~=-=':l~t:1t-------
(a) Commence a glide.

Throughout the manoeuvres,
• Mixture RICH. look out for other aircra~
• Throttle closed (carb heat HOT) - to
remove the effect of the slipstream.
(b) Glide at a high airspeed and operate each flight control.

• Elevator, ailerons, rudder each feel firm and
resistant to movement.
• Small movements of each control produce a
strong response.
(c) Glide at a low airspeed.
• Each of the primary controls feels 'sloppy'.
• Large control deflections are easy to make
against little resistance.
• The aeroplane is less responsive to movements
of the controls and so large movements may be
required to elicit a response.
2. The Effect of Slipstream
Continuing directly from the exercise above, with the aeroplane in a glide at low airspeed.
(d) Apply climb power (carb heat COLD) and raise pitch attitude to maintain same low airspeed.
• Ailerons (outside slipstream) still feel 'sloppy'. Large aileron control movements
necessary to roll the aeroplane.
• Elevator and rudder are firmer and more effective due to the higher airflow over
them from the propeller slipstream.
• Result of a low airspeed and high climb power (and, therefore, strong slipstream) -
aeroplane is responsive in pitch and yaw, but not in roll.
4e - The Effectsof PowerChanges 53
Exercise 4e
The Effectsof Power Changes
Aim
To observe the effects of applying and removing power, then to
counteract any undesirable tendencies resulting from power
changes.
Considerations
Throttlemovementsto Pushing the throttle in (or 'opening' it) increases power, which is
increaseand decrease indicated by increased rpm on the tachometer. This causes the
powershouldbe smooth propeller to rotate faster and generate increased thrust. Pulling the
and not too fast.
throttle out (or 'closing it') reduces power.
Reducing Power
Reducingpower causesa Most aeroplanes are designed so that, if power from the engine is
pitch-downtendency. lost, the aeroplane will 'automatically' assume the glide attitude
without action being taken by the pilot. This is a safety feature
designed into the aeroplane to ensure that flying speed is
maintained in case of engine failure.
In normal flight, when power is reduced with the throttle, the
tendency for the nose to pitch down still occurs but can be
counteracted with back pressure on the control column.
Adding Power
Increasingpower causesa When adding power, the reverse effect occurs; the nose will tend
pitch-up tendency. to pitch up. This can be counteracted with forward pressure on
the control column.
Yawing
Changingpower also Adding power increases the slipstream effect on the tail of the
causesa yawing tendency. aeroplane, causing the nose to yaw to the left (for propellers
rotating clockwise when viewed from the cockpit). This yawing
tendency can be counteracted with right rudder pressure to keep
the aeroplane balanced (i.e. balance ball centred).
Conversely, reducing power reduces the slipstream effect on
the tail, causing a yawing tendency in the other direction, which
can also be counteracted with opposite rudder.
Some aircraft are fitted with rudder trim, which is used to trim
off any steady pressure on the rudder pedals, e.g. on the climb.
54 THE CONTROLS
Pitch up Yaw right
Yaw left Pitch down

Adding power Reducing power
■ Figure4e-1 The effects of ,power changes (for a clockwise-rotating ,propeller)
The Mixture
Under certain conditions the fuel/air mixture can be 'leaned' using Set the mixtureto RICH
the mixture control in the cockpit (a procedure considered later in for significantpower
this section). Opening the throttle to a high power setting with the changes.
mixture lean can cause damage to the engine, so it is usual to enrich
the mixture prior to making any significant power increases.
Carburettor Ice
The air mixing with fuel in the carburettor is cooled and, if mois- When closingthe throttle,
ture is present, there is always the possibility of ice forming, even protectagainstcarburettor
at temperatures of +25°C and higher. This can block the flow of ice.
induction air/fuel to the cylinders, and so, if you intend to close
the throttle for a prolonged period, apply full hot carburettor heat.

The Throttle
The engine has moving parts that should not be subjected to Operatethe
shock treatment, so operate the throttle smoothly. As a guide to throttlesmoothly.
how rapidly the throttle should be opened, from idle power to full
power should take approximately the same time as to count
'1-2-3'. This also applies when closing the throttle.
Pitch/Yaw
INCREASING POWER (clockwise-rotating propeller) will cause the Counteractany pitch/yaw
nose of the aeroplane to rise and yaw left. These unwanted tendencywithelevatorand
tendencies can be counteracted with: ruddercontrol.
• forward pressure on the control column to hold the desired
attitude; and
• right rudder pressure to prevent the unwanted yaw and keep
the ball centred.
• Residual pressures can then be trimmed off
4e - The Effectsof PowerChanges 55
DECREASING POWER will cause the nose of the aeroplane to drop

and yaw right. These unwanted tendencies can be counteracted
with:
• back pressure on the control column to maintain the desired
attitude; and
• left rudder pressure to balance the unwanted yaw.
• Residual pressures can then be trimmed off.
Airmanship
Maintain a high visual awareness. Look out for other aircraft and
note landmarks so that you do not get lost. Make full use of the
natural horizon when holding the pitch and bank attitude.
Have the mixture control in full RICH prior to any significant
power changes.
When about to reduce power, consider whether you need
protection from carburettor ice. If so (and this is usually the case
when reducing the power to idle), apply full hot carburettor heat
before closing the throttle.
When changing power, consider the engine. It has lots of
reciprocating and rotating parts moving at high speeds and any
sudden shock to the system is not good for it. Move the throttle
smoothly and handle the engine with care.
Make coarse power changes by engine note sound and the feel
of the throttle movement (sound and feel). Make smaller throttle
adjustments by reference to the rpm gauge.
Monitor the engine gauges, especially during the climb when
high power is set and there is reduced cooling because of the
lower airspeed.
Handle the aeroplane smoothly, but firmly. Anticipate the
effect of power changes - be prepared to hold the desired pitch
attitude and prevent unwanted yaw.
56 THE CONTROLS
Airwork 4e
Effectof MakingPowerChanges
Aim 1. To observethe effect of changingpower.
2. To counteractundesirabletendenciesresultingfrompower changes.
1. The Effect of Changing Power

(a) Trim the aeroplane to cruise (b) Smoothly open the throttle (c) Smoothly close the throttle:
at the normal level attitude. to full power.
• Nose pitches down; and
• Remove your hands • Nose pitches up; and yaws.**
from the control yaws.*
column and your feet
from the rudder pedals.
■ Cruise power, normal level ■ *Yaw to le~ in most ■ **Yaw to right in most
attitude training aircra~ training aircra~
2. The Correct Pilot Response When Changing Power

(a) When increasing power:
• Hold desired nose attitude with elevator (forward pressure).
• Balance with rudder pressure.
• Trim.
(b) When reducing power:
• Hold desired nose attitude with elevator (back pressure).
• 'Trim .
NOTE A good means of practising this is to maintain the normal level pitch attitude
with the nose on a reference point on the horizon.
Smoothly move the throttle from idle to full power and back again, anticipating the
changes and holding pitch attitude constant and balancing the unwanted yaw.
Increasing
airspeed(byloweringthe nose)willcausean increasein enginerpm withoutanythrottlemovement
4f- The Effectof UsingFlaps 57
Exercise 4f
The Effectof Using Flaps
Aim
To observe the effect of altering the flap position and to control
the aeroplane smoothly during flap alteration.
Considerations
Flapsmove symmetrically. The flaps are attached to the inboard trailing edge of each wing.
They are operated from the cockpit - in some aeroplanes
electrically by a switch and, in others, mechanically by a lever.
They operate symmetrically on each wing.
■ Figure4f-1 The wing flaps
Flapsincreasethe li~ing Flaps alter the shape of the wings and the airflow around them.
abilityofthe wingby This changes the lifting ability of the wings, altering both the lift
changing itsshape.
and drag generated. In a sense, flaps create new wings. They are
used to:
• generate the required lift at a lower speed (allowing safe
flight at low airspeeds as well as reducing take-off and landing
distances);
• increase drag and steepen the descent path on approach to
land;
• improve forward vision as a result of the lower nose attitude.
The flaps may be used to serve various purposes simultaneously:
for example, to steepen the descent path while at the same time
allowing better forward vision and safe flight at a lower airspeed.
58 THE CONTROLS
As the flaps are lowered the changes in lift and drag will cause
a pitching tendency. This may result in the aeroplane 'ballooning'
unless counteracted with pressure on the control column.
Conversely, when flap is raised, there may be a pitching tendency
in the opposite direction and a tendency to sink.
Once attitude and power changes are complete, and the
airspeed has stabilised at the desired value, these pressures can be
trimmed off. In general, a lower pitch attitude is required to
achieve the same airspeed when flaps are lowered compared to
when the wings are 'clean'.
Clean Trailing-edgeflaps extended, Flapped

and the pitchattitudechanged
■ Figure4(-2 Flaps require a lower pitch attitude
The initial stages of flap are sometimes called lift flaps, because
the lifting ability of the wing is increased considerably even
though there is the cost of a small amount of extra drag. Flaps
allow the required lift to be generated at lower speed.
The larger flap settings are sometimes called dragflaps, because
they cause a marked increase in drag for little improvement in lift-
ing ability. If airspeed is to be maintained, the increased drag must
be balanced by either:
• additional thrust; or
• a greater component of the weight force acting along the
flightpath (achieved by steepening the descent).
D ~ ~--1T• _________ ◄D1---~.cre~as•ed thrust ►--

◄
/' ;,~ ► ~ ◄ -~
Clean --..............;.__ '
~ Flaps down
✓
~A I~
I ~
/ (,l ~
/ /\
I t Component
/ / of weight
I I
Component 1 1
of weight _, 1
..._..._ I
..._..._ I/
'-...y Weight (W)
■ Figure4(-3 Flaps require increased power or a steeper flightpath if

airspeed is to be maintained
4f - The Effectof UsingFlaps 59
The Flap Operating Speed Range

To avoid overstressing the structure, ensure that the airspeed is less
than the maximum speed allowed for flap extension (VFE). This
figure is stated in the Pilot's Operating Handbook and is shown on
the airspeed indicator as the high speed end of the white arc.
Two straight and level stalling speeds (at maximum aircraft
weight) are available on the airspeed indicator:
1. With full flap - the low speed end of the white band;
2. With a 'clean' wing - the low speed end of the green band.
They mark the approximate minimum flying speeds straight
and level that the aeroplane is capable of in these configurations.
■ Figure4f-4 The flap operating range on the airspeed indicator

Move~apsinstages, Raising or lowering large amounts of flap may cause large changes
andretrim. in pitch attitude and in the trim required. For this reason it is usual
to operate the flaps in stages, retrimming after each selection.
To operate the flaps:
• lower (or raise) one stage at a time;
• hold the desired pitch attitude with elevator and make any
necessary power changes;
• trim off the steady pressure on the control column.
Airmanship
Do not exceed the maximum flap operating speed (VFE) and do
not raise them below the 'clean' stalling speed. Ensure that you are
aware of the flap LIMITATION speeds, the method of OPERATION and
the flap position INDICATOR (LOI). The last stage of flap (lift flap)
should never be raised less than 200 ft above ground level (agl) as
the aircraft may sink towards the ground.
60 THE CONTROLS
Exercise 4g
Carburettor Heat
Aim
To operate the carburettor heat control correctly.
Considerations
Why is Carburettor Heat Necessary?
Vaporisation of the fuel causes cooling in the carburettor, which Carburettorheat is used to
may reduce the temperature to below freezing. If the air is preventor removeice that
sufficiently moist, ice may form in the induc ion sy t m, partially can form in the carburettor
undercertainconditions.
blocking the flow of fuel/ air to the cylinders. arbur tto • •c can
occur at outside air temperatures of +25°C or more and affects
engine power adversely. Noticeable effects of carburettor ice include:
• a drop in rpm;
• rough running; and
• possible engine stoppage.
How Carburettor Heat Works

The carburettor heat control, which is usually a knob situated
near the throttle, can be used to direct hot air into the carburettor
to prevent ice forming or to melt any ice which has already
formed. Being less dense that cold air, hot air lowers the mass of
each fuel/ air change burned in the cylinders, reducing the
maximum power available from the engine. Consequently, as
carburettor heat is applied, the engine rpm will drop. If ice is
present, the rpm will rise following the initial drop as the ice is
melted by the warm air.
As a precaution when operating at low rpm it is usual to apply
FULL HOT carburettor heat, such as in a prolonged descent. The
control is returned to FULL COLD when higher power is required
(and if protection from carburettor ice is not required).
TAXIING. In many aeroplanes, the hot air for carburettor heat is As carburettorheat air
supplied from around the engine exhaust and is unfiltered (unlike is not filtered,taxi with
the cold air which is filtered in the normal engine air intake). For carburettorheat off.
this reason, it is usual to taxi with the carburettor heat control in
the full COLD position to avoid introducing dust and grit into the
engine, as this would seriously affect engine life.
4g - CarburettorHeat 61
Airwork 4g
Use of CarburettorHeat
Aim To learn the correctuse of carburettorheat.
1. If Carburettor Icing is Suspected (rough running and/or rpm decay)

• Apply FULL carburettor heat (by pulling the carb heat control knob fully OUT) .
• Note drop in rpm (due to the less dense air now entering the engine cylinders) .
• If carburettor icing was present and has been melted, a slight rise in rpm will occur
following the initial drop.
• Pushcarb heat knob to FULL COLD. Note rpm rise (denser air is now enteringthe cylinders).
1. Pull carburetor heat

control fully out
Throttle Mixturecontrol
2. Using Carburettor Heat as a Precaution

(Normal procedure on descent and approach to land.)
(a) When reducing power to IDLE:
• Select carb heat to FULL HOT.
• Throttle CLOSED.
(b) When about to increase power:

• Carb heat to FULL COLD (if hot air to carburettor no longer required) .
• Apply power with the throttle, as required .
NOTE Your flying training organisation's procedure for using carb heat as a precaution may
differ from that given above, in which case you should follow it. (There may be
variation in the order of operating the throttle and carb heat when both reducing and
increasing power, perhaps due to manufacturer's recommendations.)
If in doubt as to the correct procedure to follow, consult your flying instructor.
62 THE CONTROLS
Exercise 4h
The Mixture Control
Aim
To operate the mixture control correctly.
Considerations and Operation

The mixture control is usually a red knob situated near the
throttle. Its two functions are:
1. To 'lean' the mixture and achieve optimum fuel usage; and
2. To cut off fuel to the carburettor and stop the engine.
Air density decreases with increase in height. This results in a The mixtureis normally
lower weight of air being mixed with the same weight of fuel in leanedon the cruiseto
improvefueleconomy.
the carburettor as an aeroplane climbs. Thus, the fuel/ air mixture
becomes 'richer' as height is gained and an increasing amount of
fuel will remain unburned because of the reduced air available for
the combustion process. This fuel is wasted in the exhaust.
Corrective action to avoid the fuel wastage is usually taken on TheAirPilot's
ManualVol.4
a level cruise (usually above 2,000 ft and when the power is less coversleaningprocedures
in detail.
than 75% maximum continuous power). This action is called
leaning the mixture and is accomplished by moving the mixture
control partially out, which reduces the weight of fuel mixing
with the air being taken into the carburettor.
As the 'fuel/ air' mixture is leaned and returns to its optimum It is prefererableto operate
value, the engine rpm will show a slight increase. Leaning the an engineslightlyon the
rich side.
mixture past the optimum ratio will cause the rpm to fall, at
which point the mixture control should be moved back in slightly
to the rich side of optimum. It is preferable to operate an engine
slightly on the rich side, rather than too lean (when detonation
may occur and damage the engine). Note that range figures
published by the manufacturer assume cruising with the mixture
correctly leaned.
The Pilot's Operating Handbook for the specific aircraft type
contains information on leaning procedures and how to achieve
the best power to mixture and best economy to mixture settings.
Moving the mixture control fully out to the IDLE CUT-OFF Shut down the engineby
position cuts off fuel to the carburettor completely. This is a safe movingthe mixture control
to IDLECUT-OFF.
way of shutting an engine down, since there will be no fuel left in
the cylinders or induction system.
4h - The Mixture Control 63
Airwork 4h
Use of the MixtureControl
Aim To operate the mixturecontrol(red knob)correctly.
1. To Lean the Mixture at Altitude

(for improved range and fuel economy)
• Set desired engine rpm (with the throttle).
• Slowly move red mixture control knob OUT towards lean position .
• Observe the rpm rise. If rpm doesn't rise, return mixture to RICH.
• Continue moving mixture control OUT until a slight drop in rpm occurs.
• Move the knob IN slightly to restore maximum rpm. It might be advisable to move the
mixture control slightly further in so that the mixture is slightly on the rich side (too rich
is preferable to too lean), where rpm will be slightly lower than peak value.
NOTE Whenever the power setting or cruise level are changed,repeat the above procedure.
---------.
t I
I
. 'j
• ',,
. I f -0 0
:o - - -
..... ::.
Carburettor Throttle Mixture control

heat control (red knob)
2. On Descent
Prior to commencing descent and reducing power:
• Enrich the mixture. Select mixture to FULL RICH before landing.
3. A~er Landing
To stop the engin~:
• Close the throttle (pull it fully out) to reduce engine rpm.
• Move the mixture control to IDLE CUT-OFF by pulling it fully out - this starves the engine
of fuel.
• Complete other actions as per the procedure in your Pilot's Operating Handbook .
64 THE CONTROLS
Exercise 4i
Usingthe Radio
M t eroplan-s are equipp d with at least one high-quality

conu11unications set. It op rates in the very high fr q ,1ency
(VHF) radio band. Such a set, known as a VHF-COM, is both a
transmitter and a receiver and is quite simple to operate. VHF
provides high-quality 'line-of-sight' communications and is the
usual form of communication used in aviation.
Many VHF-COM sets are combined in the same unit as a radio
navigation receiver - and the whole unit is called a COM/NA V
or NAV /COM. It is usual for the COM set to be on the left-hand
side.
Connected to the radio are:
• a microphone for transmitting and a speaker for listening;
• an optional headset with a boom microphone;
• the electrical master switch (and possibly an avionics power
switch) to connect the power supply to the radio;
• an audio control panel (in some aircraft) to connect the radio
set to the microphone and speaker or headset.
To cockpit Audio selector panel -
speaker switching desired radio
to speaker or headset
' , ....-- ..., ,,,,.--.......

'
\ II '
\ II '
\ ~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
\
To headset
I \ I \
,
_....,
....... I .._
....__ .,..,
I ,
_
, ... .......
/
VHF-COM
I
, ,,,.--... ....
\ I
, ....--...
'\ I
, ....--...' \
I \ I \ I \
J I I I I I
\ I \ I I I
'\ I I I
'
...__ ,,,., '
.... --"' I .._
....__ ,,., ; ADF
Master
switch -
, ....- ',
[D s· Avionics ( ':
~:~ :@ © ® @
Transponder
W . masterswitch ', ,,
~·
---------0000
~~=
i1~0:-:0~,~1•••·•·w•,r1-------,
\I' ..__,,__.,
Headset Intercom
sockets panel
Microphone J. • b~~i~:s
■ Figure4i-1 Controls for a typical VHF-COM radio set (or ~transceiver')

u
4i - Usingthe Radio 65
Switching On the VHF-COM

1. Check the master switch ON (and avionics power switch if
applicable).
2. Switch the radio ON.
3. Select the desired frequency.
4. Select audio to speaker of appropriate radio.

5. Adjust the volume to desired level and adjust 'squelch' control
(if fitted) to cut out undesired background noise.
6. Check that the microphone and headset (if used) is plugged in
correctly.
7. Select the transmitter to the desired radio, e.g. VHF No. 1 .
.---- VHF-COM ----. ---- VHF-NAV ----
COMM
1 NAV
1
OFFON TEST OFFVOICEIDENT
124.95 114.10
0 0
I
VOLO (!)SQ VOLO
■ Figure4i-2 A typical VHF-COM/NAVradio set
Squelch
The function of squelch is to eliminate unwanted weak signals
that cause background noise (static or hiss). Noise makes it
difficult to hear the desired stronger signals. Some squelch controls
are automatic and others manual. Your flying instructor will
advise you on your particular set.
To Adjust the Squelch Manually

• Turn the squelch control up high (i.e. clockwise) until
background noise or 'hash' is heard; then:
• Rotate the squelch knob anti-clockwise until the noise just
disappears (or is at least at an acceptably low level). This causes
the unwanted noise from weak signals to be suppressed,
allowing only the strong signals to be heard.
NOTE Take care adjusting squelch - turning it right down may
cut out the signal that you want to hear as well as the unwanted
n01se.
66 THE CONTROLS
What If the Radio Doesn't Work?

Occasionally you may find that the radio is not functioning
correctly. If so, then follow a simple fault-finding procedure:
1. Check switching as above under Switching on the VHF-COM.
2. Check the circuit breakers or fuses.
3. Check that the squelch is not turned down too far.
Transmitting
Before Transmitting
Before you begin transmitting:
1. Listen out on the frequency to be used and avoid interference
with other transmissions.
2. Decide exactly what you are going to say - your instructor will
help you with your first radio calls.
The Microphone
There are various microphone types, each having its own
operating characteristics. The hand-held microphone
incorporates a transmit switch. The boom microphone attached
to a headset worn by the pilot usually has its transmit switch
situated in a convenient position on the control column.
Training aeroplanes are usually equipped with a hand-held
microphone.
■ Figure4i-3 The hand-held and the boom microphone
When using a microphone the following rules are generally

satisfactory:
• actuate the transmit switch before commencing to talk and
do not release it until after your message is completed;
• speak with the microphone one or two centimetres from
your lips;
• do not significantly vary the distance between your lips and
the microphone;
• speak directly into the microphone and do not speak to one
side of it.
4i - Usingthe Radio 67
The microphone is used like a telephone, except that:

• the transmit button must be depressed for you to transmit;
• while transmitting, most radio sets are unable to receive
simultaneously; and
• only one transmission from one station within range can
occur on the frequency in use without interference. While you
are transmitting, no-one else can.
NOTE Your COM set will continue to transmit as long as the
transmit switch is depressed, even if you are not speaking. This
will block out other stations that may be trying to call on that
particular frequency. So at the end of your transmission ensure that
the transmit switch (or 'mike button') is released.
The Transponder
A transponder unit is fitted in most light aircraft and when
'squawking' enables an air traffic radar controller to identify a
particular aircraft more easily on his screen. There is no voice
communication through the transponder. Transponder code
selection is accomplished by dialling in the required code with the
knobs. When selecting a new code, avoid passing through the
emergency codes (7700 emergency, 7600 radio failure and
7500 unlawful interference) when the transponder is switched
ON, unless you really want to activate one of them.
Function Reply light and

selector ldent pushbutton Code windows
Control knobs
■ Figure4i-4 Typical transponder control panel
R/T and transponder phraseology, procedures and equipment

are covered in detail in Vol. 7 of The Air Pilot's Manual - Radio-
telephony. You should also refer to the CAA' s Radiotelephony
Manual (CAP 413), and check for amendments to procedures in
Aeronautical Information Circulars (AICs) and the Aeronautical
Information Publication (AIP). Your flying instructor will intro-
duce you to these documents.
68 THE CONTROLS
Exer·cise 4j
Cabin Heatingand Ventilation
. our comfort and well-being are most important to flight

Y safety, so maximise them with correct use of the cabin
ventilation and heating systems as explained in the Pilot's
Operating Handbook. Ventilation generally improves the cockpit
environment significantly.
The hot air for cabin heating is usually taken from around the
engine exhaust system. To protect the occupants of the aeroplane
from any fumes escaping from a leaking exhaust system, it is good
practice to use the fresh air vents in conjunction with cabin
heating. Carbon monoxide is colourless, odourless and extremely
dangerous. It is present in the exhaust gases and ventilation
provides good protection against it!
-0 Ram air flow

<$:m Ventilating air
Exhaust Heated air
muffler ¢=l Blended air
shroud
- - , Mechanical
connection
/ I
Cabin heat Cabin air n--,,..... __
control control
~Adjustable/
ventilators
■ Figure4j-1 Typical cabin heating and ventilation systems

Flying Training 69
Exercise 5
Taxiing an Aeroplane
Aim
To manoeuvre the aeroplane safely on the ground.
Considerations
Taxiing Speed
Use powerand brakesto Power is used to commence taxiing an aeroplane. The effects of
controltaxiingspeed. wheel friction and the brakes are used to stop it.
Like all objects, an aeroplane has inertia and is resistant to
change, so it requires more power to start moving than to keep
moving. Once the aeroplane is rolling at taxiing speed, the power
can be reduced simply to balance the frictional forces and any air
resistance so that a steady speed is maintained. On a straight and
sn1ooth taxiway with no obstructions, a fast walking pace is a safe
taxiing speed and this can be judged by looking ahead and to the
left of the aeroplane. In a confined area, the ideal speed is
somewhat less.
The amount of power required to maintain taxiing speed
depends on the ground surface and its slope - a rough, upward-
sloping grassy surface requiring much more power than a flat,
sealed taxiway. High power may also be required to turn the
aeroplane, especially at low speeds.
Brakesshouldbe To slow the aeroplane down, the power should be reduced.
used gently. Friction may cause the aeroplane to decelerate sufficiently,
otherwise the brakes can be used gently, but firmly.
Do not use power against Generally speaking, power should not be used against brakes. It
brakes. is a waste of energy and can lead to overheated brakes and
increased brake wear. There are some aircraft, however, which
have engines requiring a high idling rpm, and occasional braking
may be required to avoid the taxiing speed becoming excessive.
Toe brakes are situated on top of each rudder pedal. They are
individually applied using the ball of each foot. Normally, taxi
with your heels on the floor and the balls of your feet on the
rudder pedals, thereby avoiding inadvertent application of the toe
brakes. When braking is needed, slide your feet up and, with the
ball of each foot, apply the toe brakes as required. To brake the
aeroplane while taxiing in a straight line, the toe brakes should be
applied evenly.
70 FLYING TRAINING
Applying rudder Rudder pedals Applying brakes
■ Figure5-1 Using rudder and using toe brakes
Brakes should be used gently so that the aeroplane responds

smoothly - harsh braking being avoided except in an emergency.
For a normal stop, a good technique is to relax the braking
pressure (or perhaps even release it) just as the aeroplane comes to
a halt. The resulting stop will be smooth.
Differential braking is available by pressing each toe brake
individually. This is useful both for turning sharply and for
maintaining directional control when taxiing in a strong
crosswind.
Test the brakes early. Once taxiing has commenced from the Test the brakesas
parked position, the power should be reduced and the brakes you beginto taxi.
tested, but in a manner that causes the aeroplane to respond
smoothly.
During extended taxiing, the brakes should be tested occasion-
ally, and they should certainly be tested just prior to entering a
congested tarmac area. Pay due attention to the ground surface,
especially in wet weather when taxiways and tarmacs can become
slippery. Always have an escape route in mind to avoid collisions
in case the brakes fail to stop the aeroplane.
Allow for the fact that the wings of an aeroplane are wide and Ensurethat the taxi path is
the tail-section is well behind the main wheels. Maintain a good dear.
lookout ahead and to the sides. If the taxi path is obscured by the
nose, then turning slightly left and right will permit a better view.
Should you unfortunately run into something while taxiing,
stop the aeroplane, shut-down the engine, set the brakes to PARK
and investigate. Do not fly!
Ground Surface Condition

Ensure that propeller clearance will be adequate when taxiing in Be awareofthe ground
long grass or over rough ground, especially if there are small surfacecondition.
ditches or holes since striking grass or the ground can seriously
damage the propeller.
Loose stones or gravel picked up and blown back in the When taxiingon loose
slipstream can also damage both the propeller and the airframe. surfaces,avoidusinghigh
Damage may even be caused to other aeroplanes or persons quite powerwhereverpossible.
some distance behind. So when taxiing on loose surfaces, avoid
the use of high power as much as possible.
5 - Taxiing an Aeroplane 71
Small ridges or ditches should be crossed at an angle so that the

wheels pass across the obstruction one at a time. This will minimise
stress on the undercarriage and avoid the nose pitching up and
down excessively, which not only stresses the nose-wheel but also
puts the propeller at risk. Large ditches or ridges should be avoided.
If necessary, park the aeroplane and investigate before proceeding.
■ Figure5-2 Cross small ridges and ditches at an angle
Wind Effect
The flight controls should be held in a position to avoid either the
tail or a wing being lifted by a strong wind.
Headwind
When taxiing into a strong headwind, hold the control column
either neutral or back. This holds the elevator neutral or up, and
the tail down, and takes the load off the nosewheel.
Tailwind
When taxiing with a strong tailwind, hold the control column
forward to move the elevator down. This stops the wind lifting
the tailplane from behind.
* Wind
*Wind
:■ Figure5-3 Taxi into-wind with the control column neutral or back,

and taxi downwind with the control column forward
72 FLYING TRAINING
Crosswind
A crosswind will t1y to weathercock the aeroplane into-wind because
of the large keel smfaces behind the main wheels. Using the 1udder
pedals, especially if nosewheel steering is fitted, should provide ade-
quate directional control, but, if not, then use differential braking.
To avoid a crosswind from ahead lifting the into-wind wing,
raise its aileron by moving the control column into-wind.
Left
quartering
-¾i'.
Wind
--==~i;;==-
head wind Left
quartering~\ )!Vind
headwind ~
UP
■ Figure5-4 Taxiing with a le~ quartering headwind

To avoid a crosswind from behind lifting the into-wind wing,
lower its aileron so that the wind cannot get under it, by moving
the control column out-of-wind.
Lett . ,
quartering ~ '- ~i nd
UP
tailwind ~
Left #wind
quartering
tail wind
DOWN
■ Figure5-5 Taxiing with a le~ quartering tailwind
When the airflow is from

this hemisphere -
control wheel neutral
1
or back, and into the wind.
When the airflow is from

this hemisphere -
control wheel forward
and out of the wind.
■ Figure5-6 Summary of the use of controls when taxiing in windy conditions

The propwash or jet blast of another aeroplane will produce
the same effect as a wind, so always be cautious if you have to taxi
close behind other aircraft, especially at an angle.
5 - Taxiingon Aeroplane 73
Taxiing Rules
Taxiing frequently occurs on crowded tarmac areas and taxiways.
Five si1nple rules understood and followed by all pilots make life
easier for everybody.
1. Regardless of any A TC (Air Traffic Control) clearance, it is the
duty of the pilot to do all possible to avoid collision with other
aircraft or vehicles.
2. Aircraft on the ground must give way to aeroplanes landing or
taking off, and to any vehicle towing an aircraft.
3. When two aircraft are taxiing and approaching head on or
nearly so, each should turn right.
4. When two aircraft are taxiing on converging courses, the one
that has the other on its right must give way, and should avoid
crossing ahead of the other aircraft unless passing well clear.
5. An aircraft which is being overtaken by another has right of
way. The overtaking aircraft must keep out of the way by
turning left until past and well clear.
If in any doubt - STOP.
l-J1 ~ 3.
mrir---tii-- ► "1-- .....

Landing aircraft
has right of way
➔• -,
'
t~rns
'
Each '
right
'-' ~ •. •
~
1.
The onus
' ' .....--....
~. isonyou!
4. This pilot has+,
right of way
◄------- • =fl 5. This pilot has
right of way
◄--,\. +m/ ..---+

.,,,,,.-►
/
I
I
~ Stopor , / Keep clear on left
~ pass behind ' ...___ - .,,,,,. of other aircraft so
pilot can see you
■ Figure5-7 Five rules for taxiing

74 FLYING TRAINING
Marshalling
Although the pilot is ultimately responsible for the safety of the
aeroplane on the ground regardless of who gives guidance, taxiing
guidance on a tarmac area may be given by a marshaller. Some of
the basic signals are illustrated below, but you should only follow
them if you consider it safe to do so.
On a crowded tarmac area or in very strong winds, it may be pref-
erable to have wingtip assistance from experienced personnel, or to
shutdown the engine and move the aeroplane by hand or tow-bar.
■ Figure5-8 Some useful marshalling signals
Checks while Taxiing

Several items are checked once clear of the tarmac area and
moving along on a straight taxiway. The rudder should be
checked for full and free movement, and 'directional' flight
instruments for correct operation:
Heading decreasing Heading increasing

Turning left, skidding right Turning right, skidding left
■ Figure5-9 Instrument indications when taxiing
TURNING LEFT:
• the compass and direction indicator should decrease in heading;
• the turn coordinator or turn indicator should indicate a left
turn; and
• the balance ball should show a skid to the right: "Turning left,
skidding right." (The attitude indicator should stay level.)
TURNING RIGHT:
• the compass and direction indicator should increase in heading;
• the turn coordinator or turn indicator should indicate a right
turn; and
• the balance ball should show a skid to the left: "Turning right,
skidding left." (The attitude indicator should stay level.)
5 - Taxiing an Aeroplane 75
SE. Taxiing Emergencies

Brake Failure
If the brakes fail:
• close the throttle;
• steer away from other aircraft and obstacles and towards a high-
friction surface if possible (e.g. grass)
If a collision is imminent:
• Mixture control - IDLE cuT-OFF;
• Magnetos - OFF;
• Fuel- OFF
'
• Master switch - OFF.
When stopped, check the aeroplane. Call for assistance. Do not
attempt to taxi the aeroplane.
Failure of Steering
As for brake failure, consider applying differential braking to avoid
obstructions. When the aircraft is stopped call for assistance. Do
not attempt to taxi the aeroplane.
The Manoeuvre
Before commencing to taxi, have a reasonable idea of the path that
you will follow to the take-off position, taking note of the surface
and the position of other aircraft. If required, obtain a taxi
clearance from ATC by radio. Ensure that tie-down ropes and
chocks have been removed before releasing the parking brake.
Test the brakes shortly after the aircraft starts to roll. Maintain
a suitable taxiing speed for the conditions and avoid using power
against brake (unless a high idling speed is required for better
engine cooling). Cross ridges and small ditches at an angle,
avoiding long grass and rough ground, and have an escape route in
mind in case of brake failure. On the taxiing run, check the
1udder and flight instruments for correct operation.
Once the aeroplane is stopped, the parking brake should be
applied and the engine set to idling speed.
Airmanship
Maintain a good lookout ahead and to either side. Follow the
accepted taxiing rules and do not blast debris back over your
aeroplane, other aeroplanes or into hangars.
Operate the throttle and brakes smoothly so that there are no
sudden stops, starts or turns. Do not use power against brakes and
maintain a listening watch on the radio if appropriate.
76 FLYING TRAINING
Airwork 5
Taxiingan Aeroplane
Aim To manoeuvrethe aeroplanesafelyon the ground.
1. To Commence Taxiing
Look out:
• Survey the area around the aeroplane for obstructions and other aeroplanes. Consider
the taxiing surface.
• If permission to taxi is required at your airfield, obtain this by radio prior to taxiing.
• Loosen the throttle friction nut and reduce the power to idle.
• Releasethe parking brake.
Moving off:
• Parking brake released.
• Apply sufficient power with the throttle to get the aeroplane moving forward .
• Reduce the power to idle and gently test the brakes.
• Apply sufficient power to recommence taxiing .
• Reduce power as necessaryto maintain a safe taxiing speed (a fast walking pace).
2. Taxiing the Aeroplane

NOTE Steering is not possible until the aeroplane is rolling forward.
• Control direction with the rudder pedals and, if necessary,differential braking.
An increased slipstream over the rudder may assist also.
• Gently test the brakes from time to time without bringing the aeroplane to a stop .
• Remember to allow plenty of clearance for the wingtips and tail.
• Hold the control column suitably to counteract any wind effect from the side or behind .
• Cross rough surfaces slowly and at an angle.
• Monitor engine pressure and temperature gauges for correct engine operation and
adequate cooling.
3. Stopping the Aeroplane

(a) To stop the aeroplane:
• Anticipate by a few seconds.
• Close the throttle .
• Allow the aeroplane to roll to a stop with the nosewheel straight.
• If necessary,gently apply the brakes, releasing them just as the aeroplane stops so that
coming to a halt is smooth.
(b) When completely stopped:
• Set the brakes to PARK and set the correct
engine idling figure - usually 1,000 to 1,200
rpm.
Straight and Level 77
Exercise 6a
Flying Straight and Level in Balance
at Constant Power
Aim
To fly straight and level in balance using a constant power setting.
Considerations
Flying straight means maintaining a constant heading, and this
can be achieved by holding the wings level with the ailerons, and
preventing any yaw with rudder.
Flying level means maintaining a constant altitude, which can
be achieved by having the correct power set and the nose held in the
correct attitude. Altitude is displayed in the cockpit on the altin~eter.
Balancedffightmeansthat Steady, straight and level balanced flight, coordinated and in
the balanceballis trim, is desirable for both comfort and good aeroplane
maintainedin the central performance. Accurate straight and level balanced flying is one
positionwithrudder
pressure.
sign of a good pilot.
Lift The Forces that Act on an Aeroplane

There are four main forces that act on an aeroplane in flight:
• weight;
• lift generated by the wings;
• thrust from the propeller (using engine power); and
T;rust . . .or:.,<(il. • drag (or resistance to motion of the aeroplane through the air).
P -♦- In steady, straight and level flight, the aeroplane is in
Balancing equilibrium with no tendency to accelerate:
force • lift opposes weight; and
• thrust opposes drag.
It is unusual for the four main forces to counteract each other
Weight exactly. Almost always, a balancing force, either up or down, is
■ Figure6a-1 required from the tailplane and elevator. Most aeroplanes are
The four main forces designed so that the tailplane creates a downward aerodynamic
in steady, straight and force. This balancing force is controlled by the pilot with the
level flight elevator. In nonnal flight, continual small adjustments of the
elevator with the control column are required.
Aeroplanes are usually designed so that if thrust is lost through
the engine failing (or the pilot reducing power), the remaining
forces will automatically lower the nose into the gliding attitude,
78 STRAIGHT AND LEVEL
allowing a safe flying speed to be maintained. In the situation

illustrated, this is achieved by having the centre of pressure
(through which the lift acts) located behind the centre of gravity,
so that the lift-weight couple has a nose-down effect. In normal
flight, this is opposed by the thrust-drag nose-up couple. (A
couple is a pair of parallel opposing forces not acting through the
same point, and therefore causing a tendency to rotate.)
If thrust is lost, the nose-up couple is diminished, the lift-
weight nose-down couple predominates and the nose drops into
the gliding attitude. The same effect occurs when the pilot inten-
tionally reduces power - the nose dropping unless back pressure is
exerted on the control column.
Also, if power is reduced and the propwash airflow over the tail-
plane is reduced, then the downward aerodynamic force on the tail
is less, and so the nose of the aeroplane will drop. (This effect is less
on T-tail aeroplanes where the propeller slipstream mainly passes
beneath the tailplane, rather than flowing over and under its surfaces.)
Lift
Weight·'
■ Figure6a-2 The tailplane ,provides a final balancing force
-==--=---
_1 • --- • - -- - - --- -::::
.. - • - -_
--=~ -
.·~
-- ·-=- - ......:::::
=---=====
■ Figure6a-3 Reduction in ,pro,pwash reduces downward force on
tailplane (but not as much for T-tails)
Aeroplane Stability
Stability is the natural or inbuilt ability of an aeroplane to return
to its original attitude following some disturbance (such as a gust)
without the pilot taking any action. An inherently stable
aeroplane will return to its original condition unassisted after
being disturbed, and so requires less pilot effort to control than an
unstable aeroplane.
60 - FlyingStraightand Levelin Balanceat ConstantPower 79
Longitudinal Stability in Pitch

The tailplane (or horizontal If, for instance, a gust causes the nose to rise, then the tailplane is
stabiliser)provides presented to the airflow at a greater angle of attack. It will
longitudinalstability.
therefore generate a greater upward (or less downward)
aerodynamic force that will raise the tail and lower the nose.
®
......
Airflow
CG
3 Aerodynamic
erodynamic force
rce
®
~--=----
■ Figure6a-4 Longitudinal stability following an uninvited nose-up pitch
A good example of the stabilising effect of a tailplane is the

passage of a dart or an arrow through the air, in which the tail-fins
act as a tailplane to maintain longitudinal stability.
Aerodynamic
force
I
Centre of
gravity
■ Figure6a-5 Longitudinal stability is provided by the tail fins of a dart
CG POSITION AND CONTROL IN PITCH. A fo1ward centre of gravity

(CG) makes the aeroplane more stable because of the greater
restoring moment from the tail due to its greater leverage.
If the aeroplane is loaded so that the CG is too far forward:
• the excessive stability will require stronger controlling forces
from the elevator, which may become tiring for the pilot; and
• during the landing, the elevator will be less effective due to
the low airspeed, and the nose-heavy moment may make it
impossible to flare prior to touchdown.
If the aeroplane is loaded with the CG too far rearward:

• the aeroplane will be less stable at all airspeeds, and constant
attention will have to be given to maintaining the pitch
attitude; and
• the tail-heavy moment may cause a stall at low speeds when
the elevator is less effective, and it may even be impossible to
recover from stalled conditions.
Stability and control considerations make it imperative that an The centre of gravitymust
aeroplane is flown only when the CG is within the approved always be withinthe
range (as stated in the Flight Manual). It is the pilot's responsibility approvedrange.
to ensure that this is always the case.
Forward CG - stable (.)
lit--==--=;::::.~=----Zl1'----r~
Q)
Moment
<( Moment
arm a arm b
Smaller restoring moment
■ Figure60-6 Loading affects longitudinal stability and control
Stability in Yaw and Roll

If the aeroplane is disturbed from a straight path (a disturbance in The fin (or vertical
yaw), then the fin is presented to the airfl w at a greater angle of stabiliser)
provides
attack and generates a restoring aerodynamic force. directional
stability.
Uninvited yaw
Restori
aerodyn CG
Airflow
•I
/!
/i
l i
....... - : .,.. __ f .... ~
Aerodynamic
force\
■ Figure6a-7 Directional stability following an uninvited yaw

6a - FlyingStraightand Leve/in Balanceat ConstantPower 81
Highkeel surfacesand A disturbance in roll will cause one wing to drop and the other
wingdihedralprovide to rise. The lift force will be tilted, causing a slip sideways towards
lateralstability. the lower wing. If the aeroplane has high keel surfaces, such as
the fin and the side of the fuselage, then the airflow striking them
in the slip will tend to restore a wings-level condition.
If the wings have dihedral (a design feature in which each wing
is inclined upwards towards the wingtips), the lower wing is
presented to the airflow at a greater angle of attack in the slip
sideways, thereby generating a greater lift force which tends to
restore a wings-level condition.
'-itt
I
I
I
J
I
I
'I
Resultant
force
1
I
I
Sideways component
Weight of relative airflow
■ Figure60-8 High keel surfaces, such as the fin (le~),

and dihedral (right), ,provide lateral stability
Compared with stability in the pitching plane, the stability of

the aeroplane is not as great in the rolling and yawing planes. The
interrelationship between roll and yaw (see Exercise 4b) is such
that a disturbance in either roll or yaw will eventually lead to a
spiral descent, unless the pilot acts to level the wings and keep the
coordination ball centred.
In general terms, however, the natural stability designed into
the aeroplane will assist you in maintaining straight and level
flight. If the aeroplane is in trim, you can more or less let it fly
itself, with only a light touch on the controls being required.
Lift
The wingsgenerate lift. The main wings are designed so that the airflow speeds up over
their upper surface, creating a lower static pressure and an upward
aerodynamic force. The vertical component is known as lift and
the component parallel to the flightpath is called induced drag
(inducedbecause it is the byproduct of the production of lift).
The lifting ability of a particular wing - known as the
coefficient of lift (Ct) - depends on both the shape of the wing
and its angle of attack. (The angle of attack is the angle at which
the relative airflow strikes the wing.)
Lifl
:-a--k
~ - ~
Lift Uft
Wing tip vortices t
Lower
t
Lower
Wing tip vortices
cause drag pressure pressure cause drag
- -1- -1- -
+ + + + + + + +
Higher pressure Higher pressure
■ Figure6a-9 The wings produce Ii~ and (unfortunately) drag
To fly straight and level and obtain the required lift to balance
the weight:
• at low speed, a high angle of attack is required; and
• at high speed, a low angle of attack is required.
l Same lift
L
f
Low High
airspeed
-~
Large Small
angle of attack angle of attack
w Same weight w
■ Figure6a-10 The li~ing ability of the wings depends on the
angle of attack
NOTE The angle of attack, which is related to relative airflow, is

not to be confused with the pitch attitude, which is related to the
horizon.
Angle of Attack
Backward movement of the control column raises the nose of the The pilotcontrolsangleof
aeroplane. Because of the aeroplane's inertia (i.e. its resistance to attack with elevator.
any change in the flightpath), the aeroplane will continue in the
same direction at the same airspeed for a brief period, but with an
increased angle of attack. The wing will generate increase.cl lift
and the aeroplane will start to climb.
60 - FlyingStraightand Levelin Balanceat ConstantPower 83
Conversely, moving the control column forward lowers the

nose and decreases the angle of attack. Since the airspeed has not
had time to alter, the wings will generate less lift, and the
aeroplane will lose height.
Same airspeed
Control wheel
Elevator /
~tl-~)--
Relative airflow Increased
angle of attack
Aerodynamic
force
■ Figure 6a-11 The elevator controls angle of attack
The pilot cannot measure angle of attack in the cockpit, but

can ensure that suitable angles of attack are being flown by setting:
• a suitable power; and
• a suitable pitch attitude.
Performance
Powerplus attitude Power plus attitude determines the performance of the
determinesaeroplane aeroplane in terms of:
performance.
• airspeed; and
• rate of climb (which is, of course, zero for straight and level
flight).
Flying straight and level with constant power set, there will be
a particular pitch attitude for straight and level flight. If the nose
is too high, the aeroplane will climb; if the nose is too low, the
aeroplane will descend.
How do you know that you have set the correct pitch attitude?
Because the aeroplane maintains altitude! You can observe this on
the altimeter, with the vertical speed indicator (VSI) as a backup
instrument indicating any tendency to deviate from the altitude.

Flying Straight
Keep the aeroplanein trim The essential elements in flying straight are to keep the wings level
and relax on the controls. with aileron and to prevent yaw with rudder pressure.
The outside visual clue to the pilot of 'wings-level' is the
Keep the wings level. natural horizon being level in the windscreen. If it is not level,
then rotation of the control wheel or sideways movement of the
~ontrol column to operate the ailerons will remedy this.
Left wing down Right aileron to correct Wings level; controls neutral
■ Figure60-12 Level the wings with the ailerons
Balance is achieved by keeping the balance ball centred. If it is Keep the balance
out to the left, more left rudder pressure is required; if it is out to ballcentred.
the right, more right rudder pressure is required.
The rudder trim (if fitted) should be used to remove any
rudder pedal foot pressures.
Apply more left rudder

r Apply more right rudder
■ Figure60-13 Balance ball indications and corrective responses
In straight flight, a reference point ahead on the horizon will

remain in the same position relative to the nose of the aeroplane.
In the cockpit, straight flight is indicated by a steady heading on
the direction indicator and the magnetic compass.
If the aeroplane is deviating from straight flight, first of all stop
the deviation by levelling the wings and prevent yaw with rudder.
Then make a gentle bank (about 5°) back onto the desired
reference point.
Flying Level
The essential element in maintaining height is to establish the Establishthe correct
correct nose attitude for the power set. The external reference is nose attitude for the power
the natural horizon, which should appear at a particular position setting.
in the windscreen relative to the nose cowl or the top of the
instrument panel.
6a - FlyingStraightand Levelin Balanceat ConstantPower 85
Nose too high Correct nose attitude Nose too low

Aircraft climbs; Altitude maintained accurately Aircraft descends;
move control column forward move control column back
Altimeter Altimeter Altimeter
Up
VSI VSI VSI
■ Figure 6a-14 With cruise power set at cruise speed, maintain height
with elevator
The relationship between the horizon and the nose cowl will
differ for different pilot eye-heights in the aeroplane, so you
should establish a comfortable seating position and use it for every
flight. This will make it easier to commit to memory the correct
attitude for normal cruise. Then, with cruise power set at cruise
speed, you can place the aeroplane in this attitude and be
reasonably certain that level flight will result. This can be
confir:gied on the altimeter and vertical speed indicator.
• If the pitch attitude is too high and the aeroplane climbs,
lower the nose slightly and regain the desired altitude.
• If the pitch attitude is too low and the aeroplane descends,
raise the nose to regain the altitude.
• Then reselect a new nose-level attitude, monitoring the
altimeter to ensure that the chosen (datum) altitude is main-
tained. Therefore, the sequence to maintain .a datum altitude is
to select-hold-adjust nose attitude, then retrim.
Accuracy
Maintaining heading and height perfectly is almost impossible. Flyas accurately
There will inevitably be some deviations but these can be as possible.
corrected so that the aeroplane flies very close to the target
heading and height. More comfortable flight results from
continually making small corrections rather than occasionally
making large ones.
Keep the aeroplane in trim to make accurate level flight easier,
the correct procedure being to hold the desired attitude and then
trim off any steady control pressure.
Do not fly with crossed controls. It is possible to fly straight
and level with one wing down and the aeroplane out of balance.
For example, if the left wing is down, right rudder can be applied
to stop the aeroplane turning left. This is neither comfortable nor
efficient and is known as a sideslip or flying with crossedcontrols(since
the ailerons and rudder oppose each other). It degrades
performance by increasing drag and results in a reduced airspeed
and/ or a higher fuel consumption.
t Direction of flight
■ Figure6a-15 Crossed controls are inefficient
An out-of-balance
flight condition is frequently caused by a false
or poor horizon - for instance when the wings are aligned with a
sloping cloud base and rudder pressure is applied to suppress the
subsequent yaw (turn). Such out-of-balance conditions (crossed
controls) can be eliminated by moving the balance ball back into
the centre with rudder pressure and flying straight with the use of
ailerons towards a nearer ground reference point.
Recovering from Slightly Unusual Attitudes

If the aeroplane is.banked, level the wings with the ailerons. If the
nose is too high or too low, ease it into the correct attitude with
the elevator. If speed is excessively high or low, or if large
alterations to height are required, some adjustment of power may
be necessary.
60 - Flying Straight and Level in Balance at Constant Power 87
■ Figure 60-16 Nose high and turning left - level the wings first, then
lower the nose. Nose low and turning left - level the wings, then
raise the nose
Airmanship
Your eyes should be out of the cockpit most of the time to:
• look out for other aircraft above, below and to either side;
• check the correct nose position relative to the horizon;
• check the reference point on the horizon.
An occasional glance into the cockpit lasting only one or two
seconds is sufficient to cross-check relevant instruments. Only
look at the instruments from which you need information.
Yourwork cycleshouldbe: Maintain firm, positive and smooth control over the aeroplane
•Lookout and keep it well trimmed. This will decrease your workload
• Attitude considerably. Do not allow large deviations from the desired
• Instruments
altitude, heading or airspeed to occur. Small and subtle
movements of the controls, made sufficiently early, will avoid this,
and these small movements are preferable to occasional large
corrections.
Follow the basic Rules of the Air:
• Give way to airships, gliders, balloons and aircraft towing
gliders or banners.
• Give way to the right and avoid passing over, under or ahead
of other aircraft unless well clear.
• Turn right if there is a danger of a head-on collision.
• Remain well clear of cloud.
Airwork 6a
Straightand Levelin Balanceat ConstantPower
Aim To fly straightand level at a constantpower setting.
• Look out.
• Select a horizon reference point on which to keep straight.
• Keep the wings level with the ailerons .
• Prevent yaw with rudder pressure .
1. With Cruise Power Set and at Desired Height

• Place the nose in the cruise attitude with elevator, and with constant power set:
- cross-check the altimeter and vertical speed indicator;
- make small attitude adjustments with elevator.
• Allow the airspeed to settle:
- check the airspeed indicator for airspeed information;
- cross-check the altimeter and vertical speed indicator for attitude information;
- trim off elevator pressure, while holding the new pitch attitude constant
POWERplus ATTITUDEequalsPERFORMANCE
■ Maintain pitch attitude with elevator
2. The Correct Trimming Technique

• Select attitude .
• Hold correct attitude with elevator pressure.
• Trim to relieve the control load .
If rudder trim is fitted, trim off rudder pressure while maintaining the reference point and
keeping the balance ball centred.
60 - FlyingStraight and Level in Balanceat Constant Power 89
Airwork .6a
3a. If the Aeroplane Tends to Climb
• To regain the desired altitude, select a lower nose attitude in order to descend
(and reduce power if necessary).
Then hold nose attitude slightly lower than previously with elevator:
allow airspeed to settle;
- check altimeter and vertical speed indicator.
• Trim off elevator pressure for the new attitude .
■ Climb tendency ■ Regain height ■ Slightly lower attitude, retrim

3b. If the Aeroplane Tends to Descend
• To regain the desired altitude, select a higher nose attitude in order to ascend (and add
power if necessary).
• Then hold nose attitude slightly higher than previously:
- allow airspeed to settle;
- check altimeter and vertical speed indicator.
• Trim off elevator pressure .
■ Descent tendency ■ Regain height ■ Slightly higher attitude, retrim
3c. If the Aeroplane Wanders off its Reference Point

• Gently bank the aeroplane towards the desired
reference point using aileron.
• Maintain height with elevator (fore or aft control
column pressure). desired
reference
When on desired reference point: point
• Level the wings with aileron.
• Prevent yaw with rudder.
• Maintain height with elevator.
A""g o:j o:j .,, "'°
C)
STRAIGHT AND LEVEL Air Exercise 6a ~._..(1)(1)~
..... ::::s o'='°'l,.......""
crq Ci O u,
::r-' I-'• H .c:-j I
Aim: To learn to fly the aircraft in a constant direction, at a constant altitude and in balance. ,..,.t-c:t
...-
(1) <;
)-,,A•-
-n
~ (1) (1) Cl) -·
Airmanship: Lookout, location, intro to cruise checks (fuel, mixture, temperatures and pressures, carburettor heat). ::::sCl)~...,.OQ
0.. 0 Ci P"' ::::r
,....... H, P"' (1) ,...
Air Exercise: Revise Effects of Controls Part 2 and Trim. Set Power (cruise) __ to_ rpm. (I) ........
<...,.
(1)
~
P"' ~ ::::s -
'=:I") ~
,....... (I) ;:: 0 -·
STRAIGHT LEVEL BALANCE ('I) ::::S
• H ti)
>< ~ crq 8 :!'I
Wings level - coaming level with the Select a sensible pitch attitude. Out-of-balance flight condition can be (I)
H (1) ~
,....... ...,.,..,.:::I
Ci H ('I) ._.. """
horizon and establish a reference Hold the attitude. caused by a false horizon. ._.. Ci Cl) 0 u,
~ ~- Cl) ::::s
point. • (I) 0 Ci
Trim the elevator. Demonstrate a gross out-of-balance ...,. ::::s 0
Prevent yaw. Check altimeter for level flight. flight condition. 0 '-< ::::s
0 ...,.
To maintain or regain reference Adjust pitch attitude if required. Demonstrate a slight out-of-balance
cr" C
('I) H
e:.
::::S
(I)
point flight condition. ~ ..... 0..
To maintain level flight 0 ::::s .....
Use about 5° bank. ~ ;:q.::::s
Look out. ::::S H ~
Attitude - check steady.

Instruments - check altimeter.
To regain datum altitude

C!Z'1
If ball out
•
t-3 0
::r-' H
~-
(1)
>:1 0 H
~ C (I)
~ ~
Cl)
t-c:t
0·
e.
P"' t-c:t
Raise or lower the nose attitude Centre the ball with rudder and t::! ,....... I
p 0.. ~
(small amount). t-c:t .....
maintain straight flight with ailerons. ,.......0 crq
(1) C P"'
When datum regained, reselect level Ci C ...,.
attitude. 0 ..... cr"
<
(I)
::::s ::l.
(I) (I)
If error more than ±100 ft consider H .-,. O')
P"' ::::s
Cl)
using power. ~ (I) C!C/
Work cycle: Lookout - Attitude - Instruments (LAI)

IJ)
-I
~
ci
I
-I
)>
z
0
rm
<
m
r
6b - FlyingStraightand Levelin Balanceat a SelectedAirspeed 91
Exercise 6b
FlyingStraight and Level in Balance
at a Selected Airspeed
Aim
To fly the aeroplane straight and level at a selected airspeed.
Considerations
Straight and level flight can be maintained over a range of speeds
- from a high-speed cruise to low-speed flight just above stalling
speed. While a normal cruise or high-speed cruise is suitable for
cross-country flying, manoeuvring in the circuit in preparation
for landing requires a low speed.
Accelerating and Decelerating

In the cruise, thrust balances drag - the source of the thrust
being engine power. If the desired airspeed is less than that being
maintained, then, by reducing power, the thrust will not balance
the drag and consequently the aeroplane will slow down (i.e.
decelerate). If, however, the desired airspeed is somewhat greater
than that being maintained, then, by increasing power, the thrust
will exceed the drag and the aeroplane will accelerate until the
drag is again equal and opposite to the thrust.
..
t
POWER
* Cruising flight not possible •
~o
~~0,
High power
at high cruise
speed
at these very low speeds
co~
o'1~~
Medium power
High power for nor~al speed
at low cruise Minimum
speed Maximum speed :
.....--*
a;;_ __ ..,. ______
power.:....-
speed________ ....,.. ___
straight and level-==.-: AIRSPEED__._.
:.._ ___
O Stall ~ Slow flight ---1..... 1---- Nor~I flig~t range

~-- ~ ~
Slow cruise Normal cruise Fast cruise
■ Figure6b-1 Vary the cruising airspeed by altering power
Power
Once the aeroplane has accelerated or decelerated to the target
airspeed, the power is adjusted to maintain it. Subsequent
adjustments to the power may be required for the selected speed

to be maintained accurately.
Attitude
Since the lift generated by the wings depends on both the angle As airspeedincreases,
of attack and the airspeed, the lift will increase as the airspeed lower the nose to maintain
increases and, unless the nose is lowered, the aeroplane will start height.
to climb.
If the speed is decreasing, then the lift will decrease and the As airspeed decreases,
aeroplane will lose height unless the nose is raised. raise the nose to maintain
height.
Slow cruise Normal cruise Fast cruise
D
◄ ..
T
,-.,
T
~
D
..
T
High thrust required; Less thrust required High thrust required;
high angle of attack low angle of attack
■ Figure6b-2 Maintain straight and level flight with ,power and attitude
Trim
Any changes in power and/ or attitude will require a trim change.
Set the power, hold the desired attitude, and trim off any steady
control pressures.

Prior to any significant power changes the mixture control should
be in the RICH (fully in) position. Add power to increase airspeed
or remove power to decrease airspeed, while maintaining height
with elevator. Be prepared for the pitch/yaw tendency that occurs
with power changes (nose-up and yaw as power is added, nose-
down and yaw as power is reduced), counteracting it with control
pressure. Once the desired airspeed is attained, adjust the power to
maintain it. Then trim the aeroplane.
At very low airspeeds, where high power is required, close
attention must be given to maintaining the speed using power.
Frequent, and sometimes large, power adjustments may be
required. The reasons for this are considered in detail in Exercises
10a and 10b of this manual.
Airmanship
Maintain a good lookout. Be positive in achieving the desired
airspeed and height. Maintain them! Constant attention to power
and attitude is required.
Airwork 6b
.Straight
and Levelin Balanceat a SelectedAirspeed
Aim To ~y straightand levelat a selected airspeed.
1. To Increase Speed in Level Flight

• Increase power (balance with rudder pressure).
• Lower nose gradually to maintain level flight as airspeed increases (trim).
• Adjust power to maintain desired airspeed.
• Trim off residual elevator pressure (nose-down).
• Make minor adjustments of power, attitude and trim as required.
■ Add power ■ Lower nose attitude ■ Adjust power and trim
2. To Decrease Speed in Level Flight

• Decrease power (balance with rudder pressure).
• Raise nose gradually to maintain level flight as airspeed decreases (trim).
• Trim off residual elevator pressure (nose-up).
• Make minor adjustments of power, attitude and trim as required.
■ Decrease power ■ Higher nose attitude ■ Adjust power and retrim
Remember P-A-T:power-attitude-trim.
FurtherPoints
There are sound reasons for maintaining certain selected airspeeds;
for example, when the maximum range for a given quantity of fuel
is desired.
Different airspeeds straight and level require different power Totaldrag,and thrust
settings. The thrust must balance the drag, which (like lift) required,va,y with
depends on airspeed and angle of attack. At high airspeeds the airspeed.
drag is high; at medium speeds it is somewhat less. This is because
the parasite drag decreases as airspeed decreases - the parasite
drag being similar to the air resistance that you feel on a bicycle.
What is different with an aeroplane, however, is that, unlike a
bicycle (which is supported by the ground), an aeroplane in flight
must generate its own support, i.e. lift. A by-product of the
production oflift by the wings is induced drag, and this is greatest
at high angles of attack, i.e. at low airspeeds. As a result, the total
drag is high when the aeroplane is flying slowly.
<
Indicated airspeed 60 knots Indicated airspeed 90 knots Indicated airspeed 120 knots
~ \~:::..-=:_~~r:t ~ ~~Q' DRAGt ~,_~--=--~~cl

Mainly induced drag Minimum drag Mainly parasite drag
■ Figure6b-3 Minimum drag occurs at an intermediate airspeed
A high power is required at both low and high airspeeds for the
drag to be balanced. At intermediate speeds, the power require-
ment is less. The rate at which fuel is consumed depends on the
power set, and an important aspect in operating an aeroplane effi-
ciently is to obtain the maximum benefit from the fuel available.
The Best-Endurance Speed

For minimum fuel consumption, fly at the rmmmum power
airspeed. This will achieve the maximum flight time for a given
quantity of fuel. Since 'delaying' flight is sometimes required (for
example, if holding near an aerodrome waiting for fog to clear),
flying at the airspeed for maximum endurance provides the
minimum fuel burn for a given flight time.
The best-endurance airspeed is nominated in the Pilot's
Operating Handbook.
The Best-Range Airspeed

A more common requirement is to achieve the maximum
distance for a given quantity of fuel - the maximum range. Since
most flights are over a fixed distance, another way of expressing
'best range' is minimum fuel burn to covera given distance.This occurs
at the airspeed where the ratio fuel/ distance is least, known as the
best-range airspeed.
The best range airspeed is nominated in the Pilot's Operating

Handbook and is higher than that for maximum endurance. The
range distances published by the manufacturer assume correct
leaning of the mixture when cruising at power settings less than
75% maximum continuous power (usually occurring when
cruising above 5,000 ft amsl).
Power
Best-endurance Best-range
airspeed airspeea Airspeed
■ Figure6b-4 Airspeeds for best endurance and best range
Best rangeis achievedat Referring to the best range airspeed as shown on the graph
the airspeedwherethe above, the rate effuel consumptiondepends on power. The rate ef
power/speedratiois /east.coveringdistanceis the speed.
Therefore the ratio of Juell distancewill be the same as the ratio
Best enduranceis achieved of power/speed, and so the minimum fuel consumptionfor a given
at the airspeedwhere
distance(i.e. the best range) will occur at the airspeed where the
powerrequiredis least.
power/speed ratio is least, as illustrated above.
The line from the origin to any other point on the graph has a
steeper gradient, i.e. the power/speed ratio is greater and so more
fuel per mile will be burned.
Exercise 6c
Cruisingwith FlapExtended
Aim
To fly the aeroplane straight and level at a selected airspeed with
flap lowered.
Considerations
Cruising with an early stage of flap extended is desirable when
you wish to fly at a low speed: for example, when inspecting a
prospective precautionary landing field or when greater
manoeuvrability is required.
Because the lifting ability of the wings is increased as the flaps Avoidballooningwhen
are extended, a lower nose attitude will be required to maintain loweringthe flaps.
height. If the nose is not lowered as the flaps are extended, the
aeroplane will 'balloon'.
Balloon
~~7~-~
Trailing-edge flaps
extended here
-~-~-~-~:
I
Trailing-edge flaps extended together
with a change in the pitch attitude
■ Figure6c-1 A ~balloon' can be avoided by lowering the nose as flaps
extend
The flaps should not be operated at high speeds, since this Onlyextendflapswhenthe
places unnecessary stress on the airframe. The maximum flap airspeedis in the
extension speed (VpE)is the high-speed end of the white band on flap-operating
range.
the airspeed indicator.
A low nose position improves the forward view from the
cockpit - very useful, together with the low speed, when you
want to inspect a potential landing field.
6c - Cruisingwith FlopExtended 97
■ Figure6c-2 Lowering flaps improves the forward view (right)
Lower speeds are possible with flap extended because of the

increased lifting ability of the wings and the lower stalling speed.
The stalling speed straight and level with flap extended is the low-
speed end of the white band on the airspeed indicator; the stalling
speed 'clean' is the low speed end of the green band. (See Figure
10a-2.)
Because extending flap increases the drag, power must be
added if airspeed is to be maintained in straight and level flight.
This increases the fuel consumption, making cruising with flap
extended much less efficient than cruising 'clean'.
Increased thrust and drag
D T
Flaps extended
■ Figure6c-3 Flap increases drag

As the flap position is changed, be prepared to make any necessary
adjustments to power and attitude to achieve the desired
performance.
• Lowering flap will require a lower nose position to avoid
'ballooning' and an increase in power to maintain airspeed.
Once the adjustments are made, any steady control pressure
should be trimmed off
• Raising flap will require a higher nose position to avoid
'sinking' and an adjustment to power to maintain airspeed.
Trim off any steady control pressures.
Do not operate the flaps at too high a speed: VFE is the limit. Do
not raise the flaps below the 'clean' stalling speed.
Airwork 6c Part(0
The Effect of usingFlap
Aims (a) To observethe effect ofalteringflap position.

(b) To controlthe aeroplanesmoothlyduringflap alteration.
1. Changing Flap Position Causes a Pitching Tendency

(a) With the wing 'clean' (i.e. flaps up),
establish the normal level flight
attitude.
(b) Reduce the airspeed to within flap
operating range (white arc on ASI)
and retrim. (Higher nose attitude
required to maintain height as
airspeed is reduced.)
___ <a_>~ _________ <b_l~ ____ <_c_)~
2. The Flaps Increase Lifting Ability and Drag
(a) Establishthe normal level flight (b) Lower first stage of flap, holding pitch
attitude. attitude constant.
• Wings clean (flaps up). • The aeroplane gains some height
• Airspeed below V FE (high speed (due to the wing's increased
end of white arc). lifting ability).
• And slows down (due to the
Leave the power constant
increased drag).
throughout the operation.
....
___ <a_)~-~(~b)--------~-
6c - Cruisingwith FlapExtended 99
Airwork 6c Part (i)
(c) To illustrate the pitching tendency (d) To illustrate the pitching tendency
when lowering the flaps, remove your when raising the flaps, once again
hands from the control column temporarily remove your hands from
(although normally you never do this). the control column.
Lower flap in stages ( using a firm, Raisethe flaps fully in one selection
steady movement if the flaps are (an incorrect procedure not used in
manually operated). normal operations).
• Note the pitching tendency . • Note the effect. (There will most
likely be a strong pitching tendency,
Trim for the desired attitude.
accompanied by a height loss.)
Re-establish the normal level flight
attitude and retrim.
NOTE In normal flap operations you will control any unwanted pitching tendency
when flap is changed with pressure on the control column.
(c) Lower the nose to maintain (d) Lower the rest of the flaps in (e) Raise the flaps in stages and
height and retrim. stagesand maintain height by maintain height by raising
lowering the nose; retrim the nose; retrim after each
• Notice the lower nose
after each flap selection. selection.
position and lower
airspeed. • Notice the lower • Note the higher
airspeed asthe extra drag airspeed resulting from
slows the aeroplane. the reduced drag.
Airwork 6c Part(i)
The Effect of UsingFlap
3. Using Flaps to Allow Safe Flight and to Improve Forward Vision
(a) Establishthe normal level flight

attitude at a speed less than V FE•
but within the green arc.
(b) Lowerthe flaps in stages,retrimming

after each selection. Maintain
airspeed with elevator and height
with power.
Note the lower nose position and
the better forward vision when full
flap is lowered.
(a) (b)
--~---~--
6c - Cruisingwith Flap Extended 101
Airwork 6c Part(0
(c) Reduce airspeed to a figure just less (d) Increase speed (by applying power)
than the clean stalling speed (i.e. to and raise the flaps in stages,
below the green arc on the ASI). retrimming after each selection.
Maintain height with power.
Do not raise the final stage of flap
• . The aeroplane can fly quite until you are above the 'clean' stalling
comfortably at lower airspeeds speed (low speed end of green arc).
with flaps extended compared to
when the wing is 'clean'.
--~-(-c) -~---~--
102 STRAIGHTAND LEVEL
Airwork 6c Part(iO
with FlapExtended
Cruising
Aim To ffystraightand levelwith ffap extended.
NOTE Be aware of your aircraft's flap LIMITATIONspeeds, method of flap OPERATIONand

the flap position INDICATOR(LOI).
• Reduce power .
• Establish the aeroplane in straight and level flight 'clean'
(flaps fully retracted).
1. To Lower Flap, Maintaining Straight and Level Flight

• Ensure airspeed is below maximum flap extension speed (VFE),
i.e. in white ASI band.
• Extend flaps in stages.
• Place nose in lower attitude (to avoid 'ballooning' and maintain height) .
• Trim off elevator pressure for each stage of flap.
2. To Raise Flap
• Check that the airspeed is suitable.
• Raisethe flaps in stages, holding the nose in a higher attitude to
prevent 'sink' and maintain height.
• Adjust power to maintain desired speed .
• Trim off elevator pressure.
NOTE In a go-around situation, when you want to discontinue an approach,
apply full power first, before altering the flap position.
Flying Training 103
Exercise 7
Climbing
Aim
To enter and maintain a steady climb on a constant heading and
to level off at a particular height.
Considerations
The Forces in a Climb
For an aeroplane to climb steadily the thrust must exceed the drag,
otherwise it would slow down and the nose would have to be
lowered to maintain airspeed. The thrust in excess of that needed
to balance the drag is called the excess thrust.
In a climb, the vertical component of the excess thrust supports
a small part of the weight and the lift generated by the wings
supports the remainder - hence the surprising result that lift is
less than weight in a steady climb.
~lative
airflow
Angle of \
climb \..- Component of W to oppose L
, at 90° to flightpath
\
\
....-'51Component of W to oppose (T - D)
w ..__ along flightpath
■ Figure7-1 The four forces in a steady climb
A component of the weight acts in the direction opposite to

the flightpath and opposes the climb.
Performance
Powerplusattitudeequals The power applied and the attitude of an aeroplane determine its
performance. performance in terms of:
• airspeed; and
• rate of climb.
104 FLYING TRAINING
■ Figure7-2 Climb power plus climb attitude provides climb performance
The power in a cli1nb is usually greater than that used for the
cruise and for many training aeroplanes is in fact maxinmm
power. The greater slipstream effect striking one side of the tail in
a climb will have a yawing effect, especially at low airspeeds.
Counteract the yawing tendency with rudder pressure and keep
the aeroplane in balance.
Left yaw tendency 4E:.■
~ ~--~··· -•·~~~
....
/ ··-.\ Clockwise
:. I propeller
\ / rotation
et;;:~~~····~··•
..
Right rudder required

•■ Figure7-3 Balance the yawing tendency from the slipstream
with rudder pressure
In a climb, the usual balance rule applies. If the ball is out to the
right, for example, move it back into the centre with right rudder
pressure. Most training aeroplanes have a propeller that rotates
clockwise when viewed from the cockpit (see Figure 7-3).
As climb power is applied, a coordinated increase in right
rudder pressure will maintain the aeroplane in balance. Some
aeroplanes have a rudder trim, which may be used to relieve
steady foot pressures in the climb (and at any other time).
7 -Climbing 105
With climb power set, pitch attitude controls the airspeed.

Raising the nose will decrease airspeed (and vice versa). Do not
'chase' the airspeed after altering the nose attitude - allow time for
the airspeed to settle before making any further (and minor)
changes in attitude. If the power and attitude are correct, then
climb pe1formance will be as desired and reference to the airspeed
indicator need only be made to make fine adjustn1ents.
Normal climb Cruise
■ Figure7-4 The climb attitude is higher than the normal cruise attitude
Once established in the clin1b, trim off any steady control

pressures with the elevator trim, and the rudder trim (if fitted).
An out-of-trim aeroplane is difficult to fly accurately.
Clin1b performance can be measured in the cockpit on the
flight instrun1ents:
• airspeed - prin1a1uy on the airspeed indicator;
• rate of climb - on the vertical speed indicator and altimeter.
. ' Altimeter
ASI··
Stea~y climb •. • · Altitude increasing
airspeed • ,, ,,
VSI
Rate of climb
■ Figure7-5 Monitor the climb performance occasionally on the

flight instruments
106 FLYING TRAINING
Forward View in a Climb

Your forward view in a climb is restricted by the nose cowl. The Periodicalfy
makesmalf
restricted view ahead could mean danger - other aeroplanes may clearingturnsduring
a climb.
be hidden by your nose cowl. It is good airmanship to carry out
a small turn left and right (or to lower the nose) every 500 ft or so
in the climb to look ahead and 'clear' the area under the nose into
which you are climbing. A reference point on the horizon will
assist in returning to the original heading.
Forward field of view

in the climb
■ Figure7-6 Periodically clear the area obscured by the nose cowl
The attitude in a normal climb will provide better forward

vision than the higher nose attitudes required for best-angle and
best-rate climb speeds.
Engine Considerations
During a climb using high power the engine is producing more Ensurethat the engine
heat energy than at lesser power settings. The lower airspeed is adequatelycooledduring
reduces the air cooling of the engine, so there is a risk of overheat- a climb.
ing and the pilot must ensure that sufficient cooling is taking place.
The engine instruments should be monitored periodically in
the climb and, if the engine temperature is too high, better
cooling may be achieved by:
• increasing airspeed; or
• reducing power; and
• opening the cowl flaps (if fitted).
It is usual to climb with the mixture fully RICH, because excess
fuel, as it vaporises, has a cooling effect in the cylinders;
Climb Speeds
The pilot can sacrifice some airspeed for a higher rate of climb (or Thereare variousclimb
vice versa). The choice of airspeed on the climb depends on what speeds to achievedifferent
the pilot wants to achieve. It may be: types of climb.
• a steep angle of climb to clear obstacles (best-angle climb, Vx);
• a rapid climb to gain height quickly (best-rate climb, Vy);
7 - Climbing 107
• a cruise climb (the most usual) which provides:

faster en route performance;
better aeroplane control due to greater airflow over the
control su1faces;
better engine cooling;
a more comfortable aeroplane attitude.
Altitude
gained in a
given time
Vx
Max angle ,
. 0
• Max Iate
er climb
----------------- \;,
~ Normal
climb
I
I
!
Distance travelled in a given time
■ Figure7-7 Different types of climb
The aeroplane can be made to climb at any of the above speeds.

Their values may be found in your Pilot's Operating Handbook.
With climb power set, simply fly the aeroplane at the appropriate
indicated airspeed to achieve the desired type of climb - the lower
the nose attitude, the higher the climb airspeed. Engine cooling
will be poorer at the lower airspeeds.
Best-angle climb Best-rate climb Cruise climb

for example, 55 kt for example, 65 kt for example, 75 kt
■ Figure7-8 The various climb attitudes

108 FLYING TRAINING

Before E'1tering the Climb
Decide on an appropriate climb speed, select a reference point
well ahead and look out to check all clear of other aeroplanes and
obstacles ahead, above, below and to either side.
To Enter the Climb

Increase power (first ensuring mixture RICH) by opening the To enter a climb,
throttle to climb power. Balance the unwanted yawing effect with remember P-A-T:
rudder. Raise the nose to the correct climb attitude, allow the air- power-attitude-trim.
speed to settle and trim. An easy way to remember the sequence
of events when entering a climb is P-A- T, power-attitude-trim.
To Maintain the Climb

Maintain the wings level with aileron and the balance ball centred
with rudder pressure. Maintain the desired airspeed with elevator
- the higher the nose, the lower the airspeed.
Every 500 ft or so, either lower the nose or make clearing turns Duringa climb,remember
left and right to clear the area ahead. Periodically check engine L-A-1:look out-attitude-
temperatures and pressures, taking appropriate action if the engine instruments.
is overheating, such as opening the cowl flaps (if fitted), increasing
the airspeed and/ or reducing the power.
A simple way to remember the sequence of events during a
climb is L-A-1: look out-attitude-instruments.
To Level Off from a Climb

Anticipate reaching the cruise level by 40 ft or so and begin
lowering the nose towards the c1uise attitude before the cruise
level is actually reached. This will make levelling off a smooth
manoeuvre and avoid overshooting the cruise level. The greater
the rate of climb, the more you should anticipate the level-off
altitude - say by 10% of the rate of climb, e.g. if climbing at 500
ft/ min, begin lowering the nose 50 ft before reaching the desired
altitude.
Since cruise speed is higher than climb speed, it is usual to
lower the nose gradually as the intended cruise level is
approached, leaving climb power set. Allow the aeroplane to
accelerate until cruise speed is attained, lowering the nose
gradually to maintain altitude as airspeed increases.
As cruise speed is reached, reduce to cruise power, keeping the To leveloff from a climb,
balance ball centred with rudder pressure. Trim. rememberA-P-T:
The sequence of events for levelling off is: A-P-T: attitude- attitude-power-trim.
power-trim.
7-Climbing 109
Once established in the crmse, engine operation should be

considered:
• mixture leaned as required;
• carburettor heat as required;
• cowl flaps (if fitted) possibly closed; and
• engme oil temperature and pressure checked from time to
time.
Airmanship
Airmanshipis lookinga~er Ensure that the engine is adequately cooled during the high powerI
the enginein a climb,and low airspeedclimb. The mixture should be set to RICH before power
keepinga good lookout- is increased.
especiallyunderthe nose.
Clear the area and maintain a continuous lookout. Clear the
'blind spot' under the nose every 500 ft or so in the climb. Do not
climb too close to clouds, and do not fly into clouds (unless you
are instrument-rated and in a suitably equipped aeroplane).
Be aware of the nature of the airspace above you. For example,
do not inadvertently climb into controlled airspace without a
clearance to do so from ATC. Follow correct altimetry procedures
- normally the Regional Pressure Setting is set during training so
that the altimeter reads altitude above mean sea level. However, if
flying below an overlying portion of controlled airspace (a CT A
or a TMA), aerodrome QNH should be used to ensure correct
separation from aircraft operating in the lower areas of the
controlled airspace above you.
Exert firm, positive and smooth control over the aeroplane.
ATC Air Traffic Control

CTA ControlArea
QNH Indicated altitude above mean sea level
TMA Terminal ManoeuvringArea
110 FLYING TRAINING
Airwork 7
TheClimb
Aims (a) To enter and maintaina steady climbon a constantheading,and

(b) To leveloff at a particularheight.
1. Prior to Entry
• Decide on an appropriate climb speed.

• Select a reference point well ahead,
slightly to the left of the nose.
• Look out - clear the area ahead, above,
below and to either side.
Clearingturn or
lowerthe nose
~
(3) ~~
Ina climbmaintain
airspeedwith elevator
2. Entry to a Climb
Look out.
P - mixture rich;
- increase to climb power;
- balance with rudder.
A - raise nose to climb attitude;
- allow airspeed to reduce and
settle;
adjust attitude to achieve
desired speed (check ASI).
T - trim off steady elevator
1. Set climb power.
pressure.
2. Select climb attitude.
3. Trim.
7 -Climbing 111
Airwork 7
(4) A-P-T
Levelling off from a Climb

Look out
Clearing turn or
/wer the nose A - gradually lower nose to cruise
attitude (monitor altimeter);
- allow airspeed to increase to
cruise speed (monitor ASI).
3. Maintaining a Climb P - at cruise speed, reduce to

cruise power;
Look out. - relax rudder pressure to
Maintain: balance.
• Wings level with aileron. T - trim off steady elevator

pressure.
• Balance with rudder.
• Airspeed with elevator.
Periodically check engine temperatures
and pressures.
Look out for attitude reference and for
other aircraft. Make clearing turns left
and right every 500 ft or so, to clear area
ahead; or lower nose.
(Look out - attitude - instruments)
ASI Altimeter
Control airspeed Height
with elevator increasing
•o•
1. Select cruise attitude
and accelerate.
2. Set cruise power.
ooe VSI
Rate of climb
3. Trim
■ Monitor climb performance

112 FLYING TRAINING
FurtherPoints
Climb Performance
The curve below shows the power that is required for an
aeroplane to maintain straight and level flight at various airspeeds.
If the engine can provide power greater than this, then the
aeroplane is capable of climbing at that airspeed. Power is the rate
at which energy is supplied, so the best rate of climb will be
achieved at the airspeed at which maximum excess power is
available.
0 Vy Airspeed
Climbing is possible in this speed range since

power available exceeds that required to maintain
straight and level flight at that speed. Outside this
speed range there is insufficient power available
to climb.
-
1/J
:::I
1-
.t::.
I-
Maximum
exoes thrust
0 Airspeed
■ Figure7-9 The power curve and the thrust curve

(also known as the drag curve)
Power is defined as the product of thrustx velocitJ',so for a given

power output, the higher the velocity the lower the thrust. This
explains the different shapes of the power and thrust curves in the
diagrams above.
7 - Climbing 113
The angle of climb depends on how much thrust is available

over and above the drag (i.e. the excess thrust), and so the steepest
climb, i.e. the best-angle climb, is achieved with maximum
power set and at the airspeed where maximum excessthrust occurs.
This is slightly lower than the best rate speed.
NOTE At low gross weights and low altitudes, the aeroplane will
climb better than at high gross weights or high altitudes (where the
air is less dense).
Climbing with Flap Extended

Take-off is often made with some flap extended, because it:
• allows the same lift to be generated at a lower airspeed,
shortening the take-off run;
• reduces the stalling speed, allowing slower flight; and
• may enable a steeper climb-out angle to be achieved
(depending on the aircraft type).
Use onlyrecommended Full flap causes a large drag increase and greatly reduces climb
flap settings for take-off. pe1formance, so always ensure that only take-off flap is set for
take-off. This is typically the first stage, or 10-15 °. On some
aeroplanes it is zero flap.
Normal climb Normal climb with

without flap take-off flap extended
■ Figure7-10 Nose position in the climb is lower with flap extended
Raising the Flaps in the Climb-Out

When climbing out after take-off, it is usual to raise the flaps
when well clear of the ground (say 200 ft above aerodrome
level).To avoid any tendency for the nose to pitch or for the
aeroplane to 'sink' as the flaps are raised:
• hold the nose in the normal attitude for a clean climb;
• allow the airspeed to settle at the desired airspeed;
• trim.
Check the airspeed indicator and adjust the nose attitude with
the elevator if required (but do not 'chase' the airspeed).
114 FLYING TR/\INJNG
Descending 115
.Exercise Sa
The Glide
Aim
To enter and maintain a steady glide and to level off at a particular
height.
Considerations
A descentwithoutpower is An aeroplane may be descended in two ways:
calleda glide.
1. In a glide, where engine power is not used and the pilot
accepts the resulting rate of descent; or
2. In a powered descent, where power is used by the pilot to
control the rate of descent.
The Forces in a Glide

Thenose must be lowered If power is removed when the aeroplane is in level flight, the drag
whenthrustis totally will be unbalanced and, if height is maintained, the aeroplane will
removedto maintainflying decelerate. Only three forces will act on the aeroplane when the
speed.
power is totally removed- drag (no longer balanced by thrust), lift
and weight.
C.i.
I\
I\
I I
I \
I \
\
\
\
A high
LID ratio ~~-.b?J \
A small 0
A lower LID ratio
component Clean
of weight to \
counteract drag 1
I
\
\
' \
\
configuration
X laps down
/increased drag)
w A larger · \
component of \
weight is required\
to countera.ctthe \
increase drag w
■ FigureBa-1 The forcesin a glide
116 DESCENDING
To maintain flying speed when the thrust is removed, the nose

must be lowered and a glide commenced. Drag (which by
definition always acts in the direction opposite to the flightpath)
now has a component of the weight available to balance it. A
steady gliding speed will be achieved when the three forces (L, W
and D) are in equilibrium.
Steepness of the Glide

If drag is increased more than lift (say by lowering flaps, High drag meansa steeper
sideslipping or flying at an incorrect airspeed), a greater glide.
component of the weight is required to balance it and maintain
airspeed. A steeper flightpath is the result.
The gliding range through the air depends on the lift/ drag
ratio. For instance, ifL:D is 6:1, for every 1,000 ft lost in height,
the aeroplane will glide 6,000 ft (approximately 1 nm); if L:D is
10:1, for every 1,000 ft lost in height, the aeroplane will glide
10,000 ft (1.7 nm).
G:liding Range
Changing the angle of attack with the control column changes the Maximum glide range is
airspeed and the lift/ drag ratio. This will have a significant effect achievedat the speedfor
best li~ldrag. Low drag
on the glidepath. A typical training aeroplane, flown at the best
means a shallowerglide.
gliding speed, can achieve a lift/ drag ratio of about 10: 1. Flown at
the wrong airspeed, the lift/ drag ratio will be significantly less and
consequently the glidepath will be steeper.
Best LID ratio spe ·

gives best glid o slow-
/
rying to 'stretch'
/ the glide
/
/
/ Speeds shown are
for example only
■ FigureBa-2 Glide at the recommended speed to obtain best

still air range
NOTE The Pilot's Operating Handbook specifies the best gliding

speed when the aeroplane is at maximum weight. At lower
weights, the best gliding speed is less but, since training aeroplanes
do not have significant variations in gross weight, the one speed is
generally acceptable at any weight.
Bo - TheGlide 117
Establishthe target glide If the aeroplane is gliding at an airspeed below the

speed by settingthe correct recommended gliding speed, then, provided that the aeroplane is
pitchattitude.
still well above ground level, it will pay to lower the nose and gain
airspeed. While the glide angle will initially steepen, the final glide
angle will be flatter once the correct speed is achieved and
maintained. The aeroplane will in fact glide further.
The Effect of Wind

A headwindsteepens the At the normal gliding speed, a headwind will retard the
descent overthe ground;a aeroplane's passage over the ground; a tailwind will extend it.
tailwindflattensit.
In a tailwind, reducing the gliding airspeed slightly below the
recommended gliding speed may increase the range a little by
reducing the rate of descent, allowing the aeroplane to remain
airborne longer and be blown further by the wind.
Conversely, the effect of a headwind can be minimised by
gliding at a higher airspeed. The rate of descent will be increased,
but the higher speed will allow the aeroplane to 'penetrate' further
into the wind and cover more ground. Increasing speed could be
an important technique to use on an undershooting gliding
approach to land in a strong headwind.
Note the identical

Headwind aeroplane pitch
attitudes in all
three glides
Flightpath
No wind 1 over the
und
~
Tailwind
i■
r:
FigureBo-3 Compared to still air, more ground is covered when gliding
with a tailwind and less with a headwind
Estimating the Gliding Range

A practical way to estimate how far the aeroplane could glide at a
constant airspeed is to note a ground feature that remains
stationary in the windscreen. In the situation illustrated below, it
appears that the glide will reach the trees beyond the first road, but
not as far as the second road.
118 DESCENDING
Raising the nose in an attempt to reach the second road may

have the reverse effect. If the speed falls significantly below the
best gliding speed, the glidepath will steepen and fall well short of
even the first road.
■ FigureBa-4 Estimating the gilding distance
Cockpit Controls
Mixture Control
It is usual to move the red mixture control to FULL RICH (i.e. fully Move the mixturecontrol
in) before commencing the descent, so that the mixture is not too to RICH for a glide.
lean when power is reapplied at a lower level where the air is
denser. An excessively lean mixture can cause detonation that is
very damaging to an engine.
Carburettor Heat
The usual clues of carburettor ice forming (reduced rpm and Set carburettorheat to HOT
rough running) may not be evident because of the low engine for the glide.
speed in a glide. Power, when it is needed, may not be available.
Consequently, during the glide the carburettor heat should be set
to HOT to prevent the formation of carburettor ice (but it must be
the carburettor heat knob that is pulled right out and not the
mixture control!).
Selecting carburettor heat HOT prior to closing the throttle is a
good practice so that some hot air passes through the induction
system before the engine goes to idle. Done in the reverse
sequence, there may be sufficient time after closing the throttle for
ice to form before HOT air is selected. Discuss the correct
technique for your aeroplane with a flying instructor.
Power
Once the mixture and carburettor heat are attended to, the power Reducepower,and control
can be reduced by smoothly pulling the throttle out. Full move- airspeedwithelevatorand
ment of the throttle should take about the same as a slow '1-2-3' balancewithrudder.
count. The reduced slipstream effect will require rudder to
balance and prevent unwanted yaw. The tendency for the nose to
drop too far will require back pressure on the control column.
Ba - TheGlide 119
NOTE Some aeroplanes have a rudder trim which may be used to

relieve steady foot pressure in the descent. The tendency for the
nose to drop as power is reduced is a safety feature that is designed
into an aeroplane to ensure that it will adopt a safe gliding attitude
without any help from the pilot if the engine fails.
Warm the Engine

Warm the engine Every 1,000 ft or so on a prolonged descent, the pilot should
periodicallyduring a apply approximately 50% power for a few seconds to:
prolongeddescent
• keep the engine and oil warm;
• avoid carbon fouling on the spark plugs; and
• ensure that the carburettor heat is still supplying warm air.
Monitor Descent Rate

The rate of descent is a measure of how fast height is being lost (in
ft/ min) and can be monitored on either:
• the vertical speed indicator; or
• the altimeter and clock combined.
The Best Endurance Glide

Generally, the aim in a glide is to achieve the maximum range (i.e.
the greatest distance over the ground) and this is the situation that
we have addressed so far. Occasionally, time in flight (rather than
distance covered) becomes important, say if the engine has
stopped at 5,000 ft directly over an airfield and you want as long
as possible to restart it.
The best endurance glide is achieved at the speed which
results in the minimum rate of descent as indicated on the vertical
speed indicator. Typically, it is some 25% less than the more
common gliding speed used for maximum range.
Gliding at speed for

Gliding at speed for C
best gliding range,
best gliding endurance, for example, 80 knots.
for example, 60 knots, gives
minimum rate of descent.
Aircraft loses less altitude per minute.
~:::__
■ FigureBa-5 Select the best gliding speed for range or for endurance
120 DESCENDING

Prior to commencing the descent, decide on an appropriate gliding
speed, select a reference point well ahead and look out to check all
clear of other aeroplanes and obstacles ahead, below and to either
side. A clearing tum (weave) to view under the nose is advisable.
To Commence the Glide

Before reducing the power, place the mixture control to RICH (i.e.
fully in), carburettor heat to HOT (i.e. fully out, so do not confuse
it with the mixture control), then close the throttle (i.e. fully out).
This removes the thrust. Back pressure on the control column and
rudder pressure will be required to counteract the 'pitch/yaw'
tendencies as the power is changed.
Hold the nose attitude and maintain height, allowing the
airspeed to decrease. When at the desired gliding speed, lower the
nose to the gliding attitude and maintain airspeed with fore and aft
pressures as required on the control column. Trim.
An easy way to remember the sequence of events when begin-
ning a descent is P-A-T, which stands for: power-attitude-trim.
To Maintain the Glide

Maintain the wings level with ailerons and the balance ball centred
with rudder pressure. Control airspeed with elevator - a higher
nose attitude for a lower speed.
Maintain a good lookout in the descent, possibly with clearing
turns left and right every 500 ft to clear the area hidden by the
nose. To enable you to maintain the original direction, select a
reference point on the horizon or use the direction indicator and/
or the magnetic compass. The sequence of events during the glide
is: look out-attitude-instruments (L-A-1).
Warm the engine periodically. Also, remain very aware of your
height above the ground at all times, and of the height still to be
descended to your selected level. Ensure that the altimeter
subscale is set correctly.
To Level Off
Anticipate by about 10% of the descent rate, e.g. at 600 ft/min
RoD, start increasing the power (mixture should already be rich,
throttle smoothly forward to cruise rpm, carburettor heat COLD)
60 ft above the desired level and then commence raising the nose.
Allow the nose to gradually pitch up to the cruise attitude.
The yawing and pitching effects of adding power should be
counteracted with rudder pressure and forward pressure on the
control column to stop the nose rising too far. Once the cruise
speed is achieved, trim.
Ba- The Glide 121
An easy way to remember this sequence is P-A-T, power-

attitude-trim.
To ChmbAway
To climbawayfrom Climbing away hardly differs from levelling off, except that you:
a descent,such as in • smoothly apply full power (mixture RICH, a silent '1-2-3' for
a go-around,P-A-T correct timing, carburettor heat COLD); there will be a greater
stillapplies.
'pitch/yaw' tendency which you can counteract with pressures
on the rudder and control column;
• hold the higher pitch attitude for climb, maintaining climb
airspeed; and
• trim.
Airmanship
Airmanshipis knowing Maintain a high visual awareness and clear the area under the nose
exactlywhereyou are in every 500 ft or so in the descent. Maintain a listening watch on
the air,and keepinga good the radio if appropriate.
lookout.
Remain very conscious of your height above the ground when
descending. Set the altimeter subscale correctly so that you can
level off exactly at the desired altitude. QNH will normally be
set in training so that altitude above mean sea level (amsl) is
displayed.
If the level-off height is to be below 1000 ft agl, engage the fuel
pump to ON (if fitted).
122 DESCENDING
Airwork Ba
TheGlide
Aim To enter and maintaina steady glideon a constant headingand to leveloff at a particular
altitude.
--~---(_2_)-:..._ Lookout during

the manoeuvre.
Clearing turn
1. Prior to Descent to look out
• Decide on a gliding speed.
• Select a reference point
• Look out
2. To Commence a Glide
Look out
P - power off: mixture RICH, throttle CLOSED ( carburettor heat HOT);
- balance with rudder;
- maintain nose attitude and allow speed to reduce to chosen gliding speed.
A - (when speed reached) lower nose to glide attitude;
- maintain airspeed with elevator.
T - trim.
■ 1. Reduce power, maintain ■ 2. Select the glide attitude.

altitude.
■ 3. Trim.
80- TheGlide 123
Airwork Ba
ASI Altimeter
Monitor airspeed, and Monitor
3. To Maintain the Glide control it with elevator descent
• Look out - make clearing turns if necessary.
• Maintain:
-
-
wings level with ailerons;
balance with rudder pressure;
airspeed with elevator. •o•
• Monitor engine instruments and warm
engine periodically.
Remember: look out-attitude-instruments (LAI).
oo• VSI
Monitor descent
■ Do not attempt to stretch the

glide by raising the nose. It will
not work. Maintain gliding
airspeed.
4a. To Level Off

Look out.
Anticipate desired level-off altitude.
P - set cruise power with throttle
(carb heat COLD);
Do not attempt to - balance with rudder.
stretch the glide by raising
the nose - it will not work! A - raisenoseto straightand level attitude.
Maintain the gliding airspeed. T - trim.
(4b) P-A-T
4b. To Establish a Climb from
.
the Glide
p - ■ 1. Set power.
apply climb power (as in step 4a).
A- set climb attitude.
,
2. Set attitude .
T - trim. ·■ 3. Trim.
124 DESCENDING
Exercise 8b
The Powered Descent
Aim
To control the rate of descent and the flightpath using power,
while maintaining a constant airspeed.
Considerations
The Forces in a Powered Descent
If power is applied in a descent, the resulting thrust will balance Thepitchattitudefora
some of the drag. Consequently, the component of weight acting powereddescentisnotas
along the flightpath need not be as great for the same airspeed to lowas forthe glide.
be maintained. The pitch attitude will be higher and the rate of
descent less, resulting in the descent being shallower.
L
Component of
weight acting
along flight path
/11____.-/
t ',,
- ♦ ~~~~~~-o• \
T \\ '\
\ \
\ \
I
I
w
I
I
I
I
w
■ FigureBb-1 Adding power flattens the descent
Performance
Power plus attitude equals performance. The performance
achieved by an aeroplane depends both on the power selected and
the attitude. To alter the rate of descent and the flightpath, while
maintaining a constant airspeed, both power and attitude must be
adjusted - power with the throttle and attitude with the control
column. This is precisely what happens on a normal approach to
land and on a cruise descent.
Bb - The PoweredDescent 125
The cruise descent is used to save time, say at the end of a long
cross-country flight, by commencing descent to the destination
airfield from the cruise level some miles out, by reducing the
power slightly and lowering the nose to maintain the same speed
as on the cruise.
■ FigureBb-2 Control airspeed with elevator

and rate of descent with power
The Aiming Point

The aimingpoint on the A practical means of estimating where the descent would reach
groundduringdescent ground level is to note the particular ground feature which
stays fixed in the
remains 'stationary' in the cockpit windscreen while a constant
windscreen.
nose attitude is maintained. This becomes particularly important
when you are on an approach to land, and adjusting your
flightpath to arrive at the chosen aiming point on the runway.
■ FigureBb-3 The aiming point stays cr,xed' in the windscreen

126 DESCENDING

You can monitor the rate of descent on:
• the vertical speed indicator; or with
• the altimeter and a clock.
To decrease the rate of descent and flatten the descent
flightpath:
• increase power;
• raise the nose to maintain airspeed;
• trim.
To increase the rate of descent and steepen the descent path:
• decrease power;
• lower the nose to maintain airspeed;
• trim.
The pitch/yaw tendency as power is altered should be balanced
with appropriate pressures on the rudder and control column.
On an approach to land, the pilot monitors the descent by
constantly referencing the aiming point on the runway and
estimating whether his flightpath will take him there. If not, he
takes positive action with power and attitude to ensure that it
does.
Airmanship
Take positive action to achiev the d sired airspeed and rate of Afrmanshipis posiuvely
d c nt. If on approach to land, firmly control the airspeed and controlling
yourflightpath
the flightpath. andairspeed.
Consider the engine. Warm it periodically on a prolonged
descent and use the carburettor heat as required.
Maintain a good visual awareness.
8b - The Powered Descent 127
Airwork 8b
The Powered Descent
Aim To controlthe rate of descent and the flightpathusingpower,

whilemaintaininga constantairspeed.
1. · If the Descent Rate is Too High

• Add power with throttle - balance with rudder.
• Hold a higher nose attitude to maintain airspeed (monitor airspeed indicator: power+
attitude = performance).
• Trim.
Rate of descent will decrease (monitor vertical speed indicator and altimeter), and the descent
flightpath will be shallower (more distant ground aiming point).
Attitudecontrolsairspeed.
Powercontrolsrate of descent.
(2)
2. If the Descent Rate is Insufficient

• Reduce power further .
• Hold a lower nose attitude to maintain airspeed (monitor ASI).
• Trim.
The rate of descent will increase (monitor VSI and altimeter), and the descent flightpath will
steepen (closer ground aiming point).
■ Descent attitude with higher ■ Descent attitude with less

power and lower rate of power and high rate of
descent descent
128 DESCENDING
Exercise Be
Use of Flapin the Descent
Aim
To use flap to steepen the descent.
Considerations
Flaps, Drag and Glide Angle
Extending the flaps causes a small increase in lift and a greater Flapsincreasedragand
proportional increase in drag, i.e. the L/D ratio is decreased. If steepentheglidepath.
maintaining a constant airspeed in the glide, the flightpath will be
progressively steeper following the extension of each stage of flap.
\.
In a glide, /1
clean ~-
~~O
\
\
\
In a glide \
\
with flaps ~
extended d \
\
,. , ~ .......____
Steeper descent \
\
/~ with flaps extended
w
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
w
■ FigureBc-1 Flaps steepen the glide
Nose Attitude
The increased drag as the flaps extend requires a lower pitch Withflapextended, a
attitude if airspeed is to be maintained. The lower nose position lowernoseattitudeis
affords a better view through the windscreen in a flapped descent. required.
This is a significant advantage, especially on an approach to land.
The greater the flap extension, the lower the nose position.
The desired airspeed is maintained by adjusting the pitch
attitude with elevator, trimming off any steady control column
pressure.
Be - Use of Flapin the Descent 129
New aiming
~-
- "" point on ground
...
much closer
with flap
~__.
Clean With flaps
■ FigureBc-2 A lower nose attitude is required to maintain speed with

flaps extended
Stalling Speed
Flap lowers the Extending the flaps alters the shape of the wing and increases its
stalling speed. lifting ability. The stalling speed is reduced and so safe flight at a
(slightly) lower airspeed is possible, retaining an adequate safety
margin above the stall.
Flap Extension and Retraction

Operate the flaps at a As flap is lowered, the changing shape of the wing and the
suitable airspeed and be different aerodynamic forces produce extra stress on the airframe
prepared for a pitch
structure. For this reason, flap should only be extended when the
change.
airspeed does not exceed the maximum flap operating speed
(known as VpE)-
The flap range is shown on the airspeed indicator as a white
band. VFE is at the high-speed end of this white arc; stalling speed
with full flap extended and wings level is at the low-speed end (see
Figure 10b-2, page 174).
There may be a pitching tendency as the flaps are lowered due
to the centre of pressure (through which lift acts) moving its
position fore or aft on the wing. This can be counteracted with
movements of the control column to hold the desired nose
attitude.
Flyingthe Manoeuvre
Extending the Flaps
With the aircraft established in a normal descent, check that the
airspeed is below VFE (i.e. in the white band). Extend the flaps in
stages as required, holding the desired pitch attitude for each stage
of flap and controlling the airspeed with elevator. Trim.
The more flap that is extended, the lower the required nose
position. Retrimming will be required after each stage of flap is
extended to relieve control column pressures. If the original
130 DESCENDING
airspeed is maintained, a higher rate of descent will occur. If the

airspeed is reduced slightly (e.g. as on an approach to land), then
the increase in the rate of descent will not be quite as much.
Raising the Flaps

As the flaps are raised, the loss of lift will cause the aeroplane to
'sink' unless a higher nose attitude is set. Do not raise the flaps at
speeds below the green band on the airspeed indicator; the lower
end of the green arc is the stalling speed wings-level with a 'clean'
wing.
To raise the flaps, retract them in stages, holding the desired
nose attitude for each configuration and controlling the airspeed
with elevator. Trim.
The flaps are generally used on an approach to land, so it is not
a common procedure to raise flap in a continued descent once
having lowered it if the landing is to proceed. It is, however,
necessary to raise the landing flap in a 'go-around' from a
discontinued approach because the high drag would compromise
the ability to climb out.
There is a very strong pitch-up tendency as maximum power
is applied to go-around, and this has to be resisted with forward
pressure on the control column.
Full flap generates too much drag for a good climb-away and
should be retracted in stages at a safe speed. This very important
manoeuvre (the go-around) is covered in detail in Exercise 13b.
Airmanship
Do not exceed the maximum speed for flap extension (VpE)and Airmanshipis ffyingthe
do not raise flap at airspeeds below the 'clean' stalling speed. aeroplanewithin its
limitations.
Fly the aeroplane smoothly as flap is extended or raised; hold
the desired pitch attitude, changing it smoothly as required when
the flap position is changed.
Be aware of your airspeed.
Avoid ballooning as flap is lowered, and avoid sinking as flap is
raised.
Be- Use of Flapin the Descent 131
Airwork Be
Use of Flapsin the Descent
Aim To extend the flaps in a descent.
To Lower the Flaps

(a) Check at desired speed- speed must be definitely below maximum flap extension speed
- VFE (high-speed end of white band on ASI).
(b) Lower the flaps in stages.

(c) Hold a lower nose attitude and control airspeed with elevator.
(d) Trim off any steady elevator pressure.
Note the increasedrate of descentresultingfromthe flap extensionin the descent.
Clean
Approachflap extended-
steeper descent
~ I
~..:-, i"
Landing flap extended -
an even steeper descent
Maximum -----VFE
speed with
flaps extended
132 DESCENDING
Airwork Be
Repeat for each stage of flap until full flap To recover back to a climb
is extended. Note:
• Apply full power
• A lower nose attitude is required to (carb heat cold, prevent yaw).
maintain a constant airspeed. • Select the desired climb attitude for
• Improved forward visibility. the flap that is set, then raise the flap
• Increased rate of descent. in stages, retrimming after each
selection.
This is similar to an approach to land. • Resumethe climb, then return to the
normal level flight attitude.
NOTE Increasing and decreasing power In other words, control the rate of
with flap selected will also increase and descent with power and control the
decrease the rate of descent. The airspeed with elevator.
elevator is used to change the pitch
A good understanding of this exercise is
attitude (nose attitude relative to
vital preparation for flying the base leg
horizon through windscreen) and
and final approach of the landing phase.
therefore changes or maintains the
airspeed.
Bd - The Sideslip 133
Exercise 8d
The Sideslip
Aim
To increase the rate of descent and steepen the descent flightpath
at a constant airspeed by sideslipping using 'crossed controls' and
without using flap.
Considerations
What is a Sideslip?
The sideslip is an out-of-balance flight condition. In days gone by,
it was mainly used to steepen the glide without gaining airspeed
in aeroplanes not fitted with flaps. A sideslip is an especially
valuable manoeuvre when too high on an approach to land in
such aeroplanes. Nowadays, of course, flap is generally used to
increase the steepness of the flightpath.
When an aeroplane is banked using the ailerons alone, it will
slip towards the lower wing and (due to its large keel surfaces,
especially the fin) the nose will yaw towards the lowered wing.
This yaw can be prevented by applying opposite 1udder
(sometimes referred to as 'top rudder'). If the bank is to the left,
right rudder would be applied - the greater the bank angle, the
greater the opposite rudder.
A sideslipis flownwith The aeroplane will be out of balance with the balance ball on
crossedcontrols. the low wing side. You will have 'crossed controls' - the control
column one way and the rudder the other. This is a sideslip.
Pitch attitude and airspeed control can be maintained with back
pressure on the control column, but do not rely heavily on the air-
speed indicator since it may not give a reliable reading due to the
unusual airflow around the pitot tube and static vent(s) in a sideslip.
A Sideslip Steepens the Descent

Presenting the wing-down side of the aeroplane to the airflow
causes a large increase in drag and therefore the L/D ratio is
significantly decreased. This causes the rate of descent to increase,
resulting in a steeper flightpath. The greater the bank angle and
top rudder used, the steeper the descent.
Aircraft Limitations
The sideslipping manoeuvre is restricted for some aeroplanes
when flap is extended. This is to avoid high rates of descent
developing and situations where the elevator and rudder, which
134 DESCENDING
are used in the sideslip, lose their effectiveness through

'blanketing' of the airflow over them. The aeroplane Flight
Manual or the Pilot's Operating Handbook will contain this
restriction if it applies. There may also be a placard in the
aeroplane itself
Sideslippingis not an
approvedmanoeuvrefor all
aeroplanes.
■ FigureBd-1 The sideslip

To Enter a Sideslip
To enter a sideslip, ensure that you have adequate height above the
ground to recover, since a high rate of descent can be achieved in
a sideslip. Close the throttle, bank the aeroplane and apply
opposite rudder to stop the yaw. The nose may want to drop and
back pressure on the control column may be required. Do not
trim, since sideslipping is a transient manoeuvre.
To Maintain a Sideslip
To maintain the sideslip, maintain the bank angle with ailerons
and control the heading with opposite rudder. The greater the
bank angle and rudder used, the steeper the flightpath. Airspeed
is controlled with the elevator, but bear in mind that the airspeed
indicator may be unreliable.
To Recover from a Sideslip

To recover from a sideslip, level the wings with ailerons and
centralise the balance ball by removing the excess rudder pressure.
Resume a normal, in-balance descent.
Airmanship
Maintain a good visual awareness of other aircraft and your
proximity to the ground due to the very high descent rates. Do
not sideslip in non-approved configurations.
8d - TheSideslip 135
Airwork Bd
TheSideslip
Aim To increaserate of descentand steepen the descent flightpathat a constantairspeedby

sideslipping
using'crossedcontrols'and withoutusingflap.
1. To Enter the Sideslip

From a normal descent:
• Apply bank with ailerons.
• Maintain heading with coarse use of opposite rudder .
• Hold nose attitude and maintain airspeed with elevator .
2. To Maintain the Sideslip

• Maintain bank angle with ailerons - (the steeper the bank,
the greater the rate of descent).
• Control heading with opposite rudder.
• Maintain airspeed with elevator.
SLIPPING TO
THE RIGHT
Important
Throughoutthe manoeuvre
look out for other aircra~.
3. To Remove the Sideslip

• Level wings with aileron .
• Remove opposite rudder - balance normally.
• Maintain desired airspeed with elevator .
136 DESCENOING
Turning 137
Exercise 9'a
The Medium Level Turn
Aim
To fly a medium level turn at constant power.
Considerations
What is a Medium Level Turn?
A medium level turn is a turn performed:
• at a constant height; with
• a medium angle of bank (30° or less);
• at constant power; and
• in balance.
Apart from the medium level turn, other turns which you will
master in the course of your training are:
• climbing turns;
• descending turns;
• rate 1 turns (a rate of turn to achieve 360° in 2 minutes);
• steep turns (banl<-"11gle45° or greater).
The Forces in a Turn

A turn is achieved
by Banking the aeroplane tilts the lift, which provides a horizontal
bankingthe aeroplane.turning force (known as the centripetalforce). Since there is no
other horizontal force to counteract it, the aeroplane is no longer
in equilibrium and will be pulled into a turn. The greater the
bank angle, the greater the turning force. •
!
w
■
w
Angle of attack
increased to
maintain altitude
Figure9a-1 Banking an aeroplane creates a turning force

w
138 TURNING
Maintaining Altitude
Tilting the lift reduces its vertical component, which will result in To maintainaltitudein a
a height loss unless the pilot increases the lift generated by the /eve/turn,you must apply
wings. Applying the correct amount of back pressure on the back pressure to increase
the lift.
control column as the aeroplane is banked increases the angle of
attack, and thus the total lift, so that the vertical component of lift
continues to balance the weight.
Airspeed
Airspeed tends to decrease in a turn, due to increased drag. The Airspeeddecreases in
lift is increased by increasing the angle of attack, which also results a turn.
in increased induced drag. As a consequence of this increased
drag, the aeroplane will tend to slow down, usually by 5 kt or so
in a medium level turn. At normal flight speeds, this small
airspeed loss at medium bank angles is acceptable.
Stalling Speed
The stalling speed increases in a turn. The wings are at a higher Stallspeed increasesin
angle of attack in a turn than when the aeroplane is flying straight a turn.
at the same speed. They carry an extra load (i.e. they generate
increased lift) and so experience a higher load factor. The
stalling angle will therefore be reached at a higher speed in a turn
than when straight and level. It is about 7% higher in a 30° banked
tum, increasing a stall speed of 50 kt to 54 kt.
For medium level turns at normal flight speeds, the small drop
in airspeed (due to the increased drag) still allows an adequate
speed range for safe flight above the new and slightly increased
stalling speed.
Stall speed increases

in a turn
■ Figure9a-2 Airspeed decreases and stalling

speed increases in a level turn
Bank Angle
Estimate the bank angle using the natural horizon. A specific
bank angle can be flown quite accurately by estimating the angle
between the nose cowl of the aeroplane and the natural horizon.
9a - TheMedium LevelTum 139
This is referred to as the bank attitude. It can be verified in the

cockpit on the attitude indicator using either the angle between
the index aeroplane and the artificial horizon, or by using the
bank pointer at the top of the instrument.
■ Figure9a-3 Estimate the bank angle
Pitch Attitude
The pitch attitude is higher Lift is increased in a turn by applying back pressure on the control
in a levelturn. column to increase the angle of attack. For this reason, the nose
attitude of the aeroplane will be higher in a level turn than when
flying straight and level.
Estimating the correct pitch attitude against the natural
horizon requires a little experience, especially if you are flying in
a side-by-side cockpit, as is the case in most modern training
aeroplanes. The pitch attitude for a given bank angle and airspeed
will be correct if the aeroplane neither gains nor loses height.
Nose Cowl and the Horizon

The nose cowl/horizon These remarks apply to a side-by-side cockpit. In a left turn, the
relationshipappears pilot in the left seat will be on the low side of the aeroplane's
different in le~ and longitudinal axis and the position of the centre of the nose cowl
right turns.
will appear to be higher relative to the natural horizon.
Conversely, when turning right, the centre of the nose cowl
should appear lower against the horizon. After one or two turns
left and right, you should have these attitudes fixed in your mind.
■ Figure9a-4 Different nose positions for le'ft and right turns

140 TURNING
Balancing the Turn

The pilot banks the aeroplane using the ailerons, and exerts back
pressure on the control column, using the elevator to increase the
angle of attack and the lift produced. The natural stability of the
aeroplane will cause it to turn its nose into the turn, due to the
sideslip effect on keel surfaces behind the centre of gravity.
There is an effect that tends to turn the nose away from the
turn - known as aileron drag. As the outer aileron goes down
into the high pressure area under the wing, it not only causes
increased lift (to bank the aeroplane by increasing the angle of
attack of the up-going wing), but also suffers increased induced
drag.
This increase in drag on the up-coming wing causes the nose
to yaw in the direction opposite to the turn - and this is neither
comfortable nor efficient. The aircraft is said to be slipping into the
turn. The rudder ball will be on the down-side of the turn. You
will feel as though you are slipping down to the low side of the
aircraft (see Figure 9a-5).
SLIPPING TURN
■ Figure9a-5 Slipping turn: more right rudder required
By pressuring the rudder ball back into the centre with the
appropriate foot, the nose of the aircraft (and the tail) is yawed so
that the longitudinal axis of the aeroplane is tangential to the turn.
The rudder ball will be in the centre and the turn will be
balanced. You will feel comfortable in the seat and not as though
you are slipping down into the turn.
BALANCED TURN
■ Figure9a-6 A comfortable and balanced turn

9a - TheMedium Leve/Tum 141
If the tail tends to skid onto the outside of the turn, the rudder
ball (and you) will also be thrown to the outside. If the ball is out
to the left, use left rudder pressure to move it back into the centre.
SKIDDING TURN
Pilot thrown
to outside of turn
■ Figure9a-7 Too much right rudder in this case - a skidding turn
Turning Performance
The two aspects of turning performance are:
• the rate at which the heading changes; and
• the radius of the turn (its 'tightness').
Turning performance increases at steeper bank angles.The
steeper the bank angle (for a constant airspeed), the better the
turning performance - the rate of heading change increasing and
the radius of turn decreasing as bank angle is increased.
Same speed,
different bank angle,
different radius of turn
■ Figure9a-8 A steep bank angle increases turning performance
Turning performance increases at lower airspeeds. For the same

bank angle, a lower airspeed will give a s1naller radius of turn and
a greater rate of heading change.
142 TURNING
Same bank angle,

different speeds,
different radius of turn
■ Figure9a-9 Turning performance is increased at low airspeeds

Rate 1 Turns
Changing heading at 3 ° per second is known as a rate 1 tum and
is marked on the turn coordinator (or turn indicator). It is the
standardrate of turn commonly used in instrument flying (IF) and
will achieve a turn of 180° in 1 minute or 360° in 2 minutes
(hence the label '2 MIN' shown on many tum coordinators).
■ Figure9a-10 Rate 1 turn indications

To achieve rate 1 turning performance at different airspeeds,
different bank angles will be required. These are easily estimated
using a simple rule of thumb:
Dividethe airspeedby 10, and add 7.
For example, the required bank angle for a rate 1 tum at 120 kt
is 120-:- 10 = 12, plus 7° = 19° ofbank.
If the airspeed indicator (ASI) is calibrated in statute miles per
hour (mph) the formula is modified to: 1/lo of the airspeed in mph,
plus 5°. For example, the required bank angle for a rate 1 turn at
120 mph is 120 -:- 10 = 12, plus 5° = 17° ofbank.
The estimate gives you a target bank angle to achieve a rate 1
tum, which can be verified in the turn by checking either:
• the tum coordinator (or tum indicator); or
• the direction indicator and clock combined.
9a - The Medium Level Tum 143
Overbanking
Thereis a tendencyto The higher speed of the outer wing in a level turn will create extra
overbankin a levelturn. lift on that wing, which tends to increase the bank angle. There
is no need for you to be particularly conscious of this - simply
maintain the desired bank angle using the control column.
Lift
reduced Distance bis greater than a in
the same time :. higher speed
:. more lift
■ Figure9a-11 There is a tendency to overbank in a level turn

Trim the Aeroplane
Be in trim beforeentering Unless an immediate turn is necessary, trimming the aeroplane
a turn. properly for steady, straight and level flight makes it easier to
maintain height before and after the turn. Do not trim during the
turn since it is only a transient manoeuvre.
Thereis no need to trim Prior to applying bank, glance at the cockpit instruments and
duringa turn. ensure that you are flying at the desired:
• indicated airspeed; and
• altitude (altimeter reading desired height; VSI zero, or fluctu-
ating about zero, indicating no tendency to climb or descend).
Scanning for Traffic

Alwayslookout and Develop a thorough scanning technique from side to side and
clearthe area. both up and down before turning, remembering that aeroplanes
move in three dimensions.
A good sky-scanning technique is:
• first look in the direction of turn, raising/lowering the wing
to give you a view above and below;
• look in the direction opposite to the turn and as far behind
as cockpit vision allows; then
• commence a steady scan from that side of the windscreen
both up and down until you are again looking in the direction
of turn.
144 TURNING
■ Figure9o-12 A suitable scan before a le~ turn
Reference Point
While scanning for other aircraft, you can note visible landmarks Select a referencepoint on
helpful for orientation (i.e. knowing where you are). Select a whichto rollout.
landmark as a reference point on which to roll out following the
turn. Anticipate the desired heading by commencing the roll-out
about 10° prior to reaching it, since the aeroplane will continue
turning (although at a decreasing rate) until the wings are level.
Altimeter
Height constant
increases
VSI
No rate of climb
or descent
Ball
In balance
DI
Heading increasing
■ Figure9o-13 Flight instrument indications in a medium level turn

9a - TheMedium LevelTum 145
The Controls
Control bank angle ROLL INTO THE TURN with a coordinated use of'stick and rudder'.
with ailerons. Apply bank with ailerons and balance with same-side rudder
pressure (keeping the ball in the centre). Back pressure on the
control column will be needed to maintain height, which can be
checked on the altimeter and VSI. Estimate the bank angle against
the horizon, checking it on the attitude indicator if desired.
Hold altitude with elevator. To MAINTAIN THE TURN, control the bank angle with ailerons,
balance with rudder and height with elevator. Do not forget to
look out for other aircraft. If gaining height, either the bank
angle is too shallow or the back pressure is too great - increase
Note noseattitudes relative bank angle and/ or lower the nose. If losing height, either the
to the horizon.
bank angle is too steep or the back pressure is insufficient -
decrease bank angle and/ or raise the nose. The sequence of events
during a turn is LAI: lookout-attitude-instruments.
Keep the baff centred with KEEP IN BALANCE using rudder pressure. Rolling right requires
rudder pressure. more right rudder pressure, rolling left requires more left rudder
pressure. Thereafter, the balance ball indicates the precise balance
of the aeroplane during the manoeuvre - if the ball is out to the
right, more right rudder is needed (and vice versa). Aim to keep
the ball centred throughout the turning manoeuvre .
•
Slipping turn Balanced turn Skidding turn
Pilot slips into turn- Pilot skids out of turn-
more right rudder required too much right rudder has
to balance the turn been applied
■ Figure9a-14 Keep the aeroplane in balance with rudder ,pressure

146 TURNING
To ROLL OUT OF A MEDIUM LEVEL TURN, anticipate reaching the

reference point by about 10°, look ahead and start removing bank
with aileron, balancing with same-side rudder pressure. Gradually
release the back pressure and lower the nose to the straight and
level attitude. Adjust the heading and height as required.
Airmanship
Remain aware of landmarks and keep yourself orientated with Airmanshipis scanningthe
respect to the airfield. Your aeroplane will be changing heading in sky beforebeginninga
turn.
a turn, so maintain a good lookout.
Since a constant power will be set, you can concentrate on
placing the nose just exactly where you want it on the horizon.
Become familiar with these attitudes for both left and right turns.
Do not trim in the turn since it is only a transient manoeuvre.
Develop an awareness of balance and use rudder pressure to keep
the ball in the centre at all times. Aim for smoothly coordinated
use of controls.
9a - The Medium Level Tum 147
Airwork 9a
The Medium LevelTurn
Aim To enter, maintainand rollout ofa medium levelturn, usingconstantpower.
4. Rolling Out of the Turn

• Look out.
Maintainheightwith elevatorand
• Anticipate reference point.
accept the slightloss ofairspeed.
• Roll off bank with ailerons.
• Release back pressure.
-------~
(4)
3. Maintaining the Turn

• Look out.
• Maintain bank angle with ailerons.
• Maintain balance with rudder.
• Maintain height with elevator (back pressure
on the control column).
NOTE Remember L-A-1:
Lookout-Attitude-Instruments
2. Entry to a Medium Level Turn

(2 ) • Look out.
• Roll on bank with aileron.
• Balancewith rudder pressure
(right rudder in this example)
• Exert back pressure on control column
(1)
to maintain height.
1. Prior to Entry
• At desired height and airspeed.
• In trim. START
• Look out for other aircraft. HERE
• Select reference point for roll out.

NOTE Trim is not used during this transient manoeuvre.
148 TURNING
Exercise 9b
The ClimbingTurn
Aim
To change heading while climbing at a constant airspeed.
Considerations
The Forces in a Climbing Turn
The forces in a climbing turn are similar to those in a straight
climb except that, because the lift is tilted to turn the aeroplane,
its contribution to supporting the weight is reduced. The result is
a decreased climb performance (reduced rate of climb) if airspeed
is maintained.
............ . ............................... 1.:···················· .. . ..... ...................
~ .
Tilted lift force
(increased
:f angle -of attack}
Reducedvertical "'"._,.,.....,,, I
I~---'
..•·• ...............
.. componentcauses. I
~WJHii~ a reduced rate
-
STRAIGHT CLIMB
of climb
CLIMBING
lnwar
component
TURN provides the
w w W turning force
■ Figure9b-1 A straight climb and a climbing turn
Rate of Climb
The rate of climb depends on the excess power, i.e. the amount The rate ofclimb
of power available in excess of that required to overcome the drag. decreases in a
climbing turn.
Tilting of the lift and the increased drag in a climbing turn reduces
the excess power available for climb performance. The result is a
decreased rate of climb in a turn, as indicated on the vertical speed
indicator and the altimeter.
The steeper the bank angle in a climbing turn, the poorer the Umit the bank angle
rate of climb. To retain a reasonable rate of climb, the bank angle in a climbing turn.
in climbing turns should be limited to 15° or 20°.
Airspeed
Climb performance depends on the correct climb speed being Maintain airspeed in a
flown with climb power set. For many training aeroplanes, climb climbing turn by lowering
power is maximum power, so the tendency to lose airspeed cannot the nose.
be overcome by adding extra power (since there is no more). To
maintain the correct climb speed in a tum it is therefore necessary
to lower the nose.
9b - The ClimbingTurn 149
There is a natural tendency for the nose to drop too far as bank
is applied in a climbing turn, but this can be checked with slight
back pressure on the control column. Hold the desired pitch
attitude with elevator and monitor the airspeed with an occasional
glance at the airspeed indicator.
■ Figure9b-2 Maintain airspeed in a climbing turn by lowering the nose
Slipstream Effect
Keep the ball centredwith Most aeroplanes are designed so that slipstream effect is balanced
rudderpressure. at cruise speed with cruise power set. Climbs are carried out ,vith
high power at an airspeed less than the cruise, with the result that
steady rudder pressure is usually required to balance the slipstream
effect on the tail.
The usual rules for maintaining balance apply, no matter what
the manoeuvre involved, i.e. move the balance ball back into the
centre with same-side rudder pressure. The balance ball tells you
which rudder pressure is needed.
Overbanking
Controlbank angle The higher speed and greater angle of attack of the outer wing in
with ailerons. a climbing turn creates a tendency for the bank angle to increase.
Aileron may have to be held off in a climbing turn, but this will
occur naturally as you monitor the bank angle against the horizon.
L increased
Larger angle
Gain in of attack
altitude
Horizontal distance traveled
■ Figure9b-3 There is an overbanking tendency in a climbing turn

150 TURNING

To enter a climbing turn, establish the aeroplane in a straight
climb at the desired airspeed and in trim. Look out and select a
reference point on which to roll out. Roll into the turn by apply-
ing bank in the direction of turn, using sufficient rudder to keep
the ball in the centre. Limit the turn to 15-20° bank angle and
hold the nose in a slightly lower position to maintain airspeed.
To maintain the climbing turn, control bank angle with
ailerons, balance with rudder pressure and maintain the desired
airspeed with nose attitude. Keep a constant airspeed throughout
the climbing turn, even though the rate of climb will decrease.
Continue a steady lookout.
To roll out of a climbing turn, commence removing the bank
some 10° before reaching your reference point. Roll off bank
with aileron, balance with rudder pressure and raise the nose to
the normal climb attitude. Level the wings and keep the balance
ball centred, adjusting the heading and airspeed as required.
Airmanship
Limit the bank to 15-20° and maintain a constant airspeed with
elevator. Exert firm, positive and smooth control over the aero-
plane. Maintain a lookout.
9b - TheC/imbi(]gTum 151
Airwork 9b
The ClimbingTurn
Aim To changeheadingwhile climbing at a constant airspeed.
Rolling Out of the Climbing Turn

• Look out
• Anticipate the reference point
• Roll off bank with aileron.
• Balancewith rudder pressure.
• Raise nose to straight climb position with elevator.
Throughoutthismanoeuvre,maintainairspeed
withelevatorand acceptthe lowerrate ofclimb.
3. Maintaining a Climbing Turn

• Look out
• Maintain balance with rudder pressure.
(3) • Maintain airspeed with elevator.
2. Entering a Climbing Turn

• Look out
(2)
• Roll on bank with aileron (20° maximum).
• Lower nose to maintain climb speed (elevator).
1. Prior to Entry
• Aeroplane at desired climbing speed
with climb power set
START
HERE • In trim.
• Look out for other aircraft.
• Select reference point for roll out
NOTE Trim is not used during this
transient manoeuvre.
152 TURNING
Exe,rcise 9c
DescendingTurns
The four types of descending turn covered are:

(i) The gliding turn.
(ii) The descending turn using power.
(iii) The descending turn with flap extended.
(iv) Sideslipping in a descending turn.
Part (i)
The GlidingTurn
Aim
To enter, maintain and roll out of a gliding turn, while
maintaining airspeed.
Considerations
The Forces in a Gliding Turn
The forces acting on an aeroplane in a gliding turn are similar to
those in a straight glide, except that the aeroplane is banked and
the lift is tilted.
\.. - L
• ••• •••••••••• Lift less than weight •••••••• ••••••••••.. • •••••• .. • • .....Tiiiect·····. ·--·;s····••·••···················
... lift force : : ~/
~~ -------- 1
:
I~
I •
ning ... ' ___ I·... : .. Reduced
. vertical
• component
causes an
increased
Inward component rate of descent
provides the
turning force
w w w
STRAIGHT GLIDE GLIDING TURN
■ Figure9c-1 The forces in a straight glide and in a gliding turn

9c - DescendingTurns 153
Banking the aeroplane to create a turning force:

• reduces the amount of lift available to oppose the weight
force - resulting in an increased rate of descent and a steeper
glide; and
• increases the drag - resulting in a tendency to decrease the
airspeed (undesirable since an aeroplane's stalling speed
increases in a turn).
Airspeed
Maintainairspeedin a The increased drag in a turn will tend to decrease airspeed, so, to
glidingturn by loweringthe maintain the desired airspeed in a gliding turn, the nose should be
nose. held in a lower attitude.
As in all turns, there will be a tendency for the nose to drop,
requiring back pressure to stop it dropping too far. Simply hold
the attitude that gives the desired airspeed. For side-by-side
cockpits, the position of the nose cowl relative to the horizon will
differ for left and right turns.
■ Figure 9c-2 Entering a gliding turn, lower the nose to maintain airspeed
Rate of Descent
The rate of descent in a Tilting of the lift in a gliding turn, and the lower nose position to
glideincreasesin a turn. maintain airspeed, result in an increased rate of descent and a
steeper flightpath. The steeper the turn, the greater the effect, so
be careful near the ground!
Limit the rate of descent in a gliding turn by restricting the
bank angle. In a gliding approach to land, the turn to join final
500 ft above aerodrome level (aal) should be flown at about 20°
and certainly should not exceed 30°.
Overbanking
Hold desiredbank angle Two effects tend to cancel each other out in descending turns,
with aileron. both when gliding and when using power. They are:
• an overbanking tendency due to the outer wing travelling
faster; and
• an underbanking tendency due to the inner wing 1n a
descending turn having a higher angle of attack.
154 TURNING
There is no need to be conscious of this when flying - simply

maintain the desired bank angle with aileron.
''
''
' \
\
\
\
\
I
I
I
I
/
/
/
.... ✓
Loss in
altitude
Horizontal distance traveled
■ Figure9c-3 There is less tendency to overbank in a descending turn
Slipstream Effect
Most aeroplanes are designed to be in balance and require no Keepthe ballcentredwith
rudder pressure when cruising. In a glide (in which there is no rudderpressure.
slipstream effect) rudder pressure may be required for balance, i.e.
to keep the balance ball in the centre.
For an aeroplane fitted with a propeller that rotates clockwise
as seen from the cockpit, the lack of slipstream effect in the glide
will require steady left rudder pressure. If the aeroplane has a
rudder trim, then make use of it to relieve this steady pressure.
Normal balance rules apply. If the ball is out to the left, apply left
rudder pressure. Left rudder pressure should be increased when
rolling left in a descent and decreased when rolling right.
Engine Temperature
As in a normal straight glide, apply power from time to time if the Keepthe enginewarmin a
gliding turn is prolonged. This will keep the engine and its oil prolongedglide.
supply warm and clear any spark plug fouling that may have built
up while the engine was idling in the glide.

To enter a gliding turn, establish the aeroplane in a straight glide
at the desired airspeed and in trim. Look out for other aircraft and
select a reference point on which to roll out. Roll into the turn
with aileron and apply sufficient rudder pressure to keep the
balance ball centred.
9c - DescendingTums 155
Lower the nose slightly to maintain airspeed (back pressure

may be required to stop it dropping too far). Do not exceed a
bank angle of 30°.
To maintain the gliding turn, control bank angle with
aileron, balance with rudder pressure and airspeed with elevator.
Accept the higher rate of descent and maintain the desired
airspeed. Keep a good lookout.
To roll out of the gliding turn, anticipate reaching the
reference point by 10° or so and commence removing bank with
aileron, balancing with rudder pressure. Hold the nose in the
straight glide attitude (slightly higher than in the turn). Level the
wings and then make minor adjustments to maintain the desired
heading and airspeed.
Airmanship
Airmanshipis keeping Maintain a good lookout - especially important in any turn. Be
a goodlookoutin aware of your altitude, since descent rates in descending turns can
descendingturns,and be high. Maintain airspeed with elevator and exert firm, positive
beingveryawareof your
heightabovethe ground.
and smooth control over the aeroplane. There is no need to trim,
since the turn is a transient manoeuvre.
156 TURNING
Airwork 9c, Part (i)

The GlidingTurn
Aim To enter, maintainand rollout ofa glidingturn, whilemaintainingairspeed.
(1) Established 1. Prior to Entry

in a glide
• At desired descent speed.
• In trim.
2. Entry to a Gliding Turn

• Look out.
• Lower nose to maintain descent speed (elevator).
3. Maintaining a Gliding Turn

• Look out.
• Maintain balance with rudder .
• Maintain airspeed with elevator .
4. Rolling Out of the Gliding Turn

• Look out.
• Anticipate the reference point.
• Raise nose slightly to straight ahead
descent position.
Throughout thismanoeuvre
maintainairspeedwithelevatorand
acceptthe higherrate ofdescent.
9c - DescendingTurns 157
Part (ii)
The Descending Turn Using Power
Aim
To alter heading in a descent at a constant airspeed with a
controlled rate of descent.
Considerations
Descent Performance
Therateof descentcanbe A descent may be either a glide with the throttle closed, or a
controlled
withpower. powered descent in which power is used to control both the rate
of descent and the flightpath.
Descent performance is controlled by power and attitude -
control airspeed with the elevator and the rate of descent and
flightpath with power. The nose attitude in a powered descent is
higher compared to that in a glide at the same airspeed.
Flyingthe Manoeuvre
Establish the aircraft in a powered descent at a steady airspeed and
a specific rate of descent (e.g. 300 ft/min) using power as required,
with the wings level and in trim.
Enter the turn normally, adding power to maintain the desired
rate of descent and controlling airspeed with elevator.
The steeper the bank angle in a descending turn, the greater
the additional power required to keep the rate of descent constant.
To reduce the rate of descent and flatten the descent path:
• add power; and
• raise the nose to a slightly higher attitude to maintain airspeed.
To increase the rate of descent and steepen the flightpath:
• reduce power; and
• lower the nose to a slightly lower attitude to maintain
airspeed.
Rolling out of the turn, gradually reduce the power to
maintain the desired descent rate and adjust the pitch attitude to
maintain the airspeed.
158 TURNING
Airwork 9c, Part (ii)

The DescendingTurn Using Power
Aim To alter heading in a descent at a constant airspeed, with a controlled rate of descent.
1. Prior to Entry (1) Established

in a powered descent
• At desired descent speed.
• In trim.
Entry to a Descending Turn

• Look out.
• Add power to maintain the desired rate of
descent.
• Adjust nose attitude with elevatorto maintain ,
airspeed.
3. Maintaining a Descending Turn

• Look out.
Maintain airspeedwith elevator. • Maintain balance with rudder pressure.
Controlrate of descentwithpower. • Maintain airspeed with elevator.
• Control rate of descent with power.
4. Rolling Out of a Descending Turn

• Look out.
• Anticipate turn onto reference point.
• Reduce power to maintain constant rate of
descent.
• Adjust nose attitude to maintain airspeed with
elevator.
Part (iii)
The Descending Turn with Flap Extended
Aim
To alter heading in a descending turn with flap extended.
Flyingthe Manoeuvre
Turning with flap extended is a very common manoeuvre when
making an approach to land. Flying with flap extended:
• allows the required lift to be generated at a lower airspeed;
• reduces the stalling speed, making slower flight and shorter
landing distances possible;
• requires a lower nose attitude for the same airspeed.
A descending turn with flaps extended is flown exactly the
same as a clean descending turn except that the nose position is
lower. Because such manoeuvres are made during the approach
to land it is important that suitable airspeeds and rates of descent
are maintained. In general, do not exceed 30° bank angle.
■ Figure9c-4 With flap extended, the nose position is lower
As in all turns:
• maintain the bank angle with ailerons;
• maintain balance with rudder pressure;
• maintain airspeed with elevator; and
• (if desired) control rate of descent with power.
160 TURNING
Airwork 9c, Part (iii)

The DescendingTurnwith FlapExtended
The same procedureas in the previousexercise,9c Part(ii),applies,

except that the nose attitudeis lowerwith flap extended.
■ Typical horizon view in a descending ■ Typical horizon view in a descending

turn clean turn with full flap extended
Practisethese turns in both directions.

Part (iv)
Sideslippingin a DescendingTurn
Aim
To lose excess height in a gliding turn at a constant airspeed by
sideslipping the aeroplane in the turn using crossed-controls.
NOTE Refer to the Pilot's Operating Handbook to determine if
sideslipping is an approved manoeuvre for your particular
aeroplane type and, if so, in which configurations. For instance,
some aeroplanes are not to be sideslipped with flap extended
because of the disturbed airflow around the wings.
Considerations
Flightpath
Slippingcan steepen The rate of descent and the steepness of the :flightpath can be
the flightpath. increased dramatically by sideslipping, while the airspeed is kept
constant. This manoeuvre is especially useful in an aeroplane not
fitted with flaps when too high on approach to land.
The Importance of Slipping

Slipping is not as important as it once was. The means of steep-
ening the glide in most modern aeroplanes is to use the flaps,
which will provide a steeper glide angle than a slip. The power of
the rudder determines the amount of slip that can be achieved
and, since effective flaps have removed the need for the large and
powerful rudder deflections required to slip the aeroplane,
modern aircraft in general will not slip as well as some older types.
The Forces in a Gliding Turn when Sideslipping

Dragincreasesdramatically These are similar to the forces in a normal gliding turn, except
in a slipping,descending that drag is increased dramatically to steepen the descent. This is
turn,causinga highrate of achieved by applying significant rudder pressure opposite to the
descent.
turn, i.e. 'top rudder', causing the large keel su1faces of the
aeroplane to be presented to the airflow. The sideslip can only
occur in the direction of the turn, e.g. if turning to the left, apply
right rudder to sideslip to the left.
The aeroplaneis out of The aeroplane will be out of balance in the sideslipping turn
balancein a slippingturn. and this is indicated by the balance ball being on the 'downside' of
the slip, i.e. to the inside of the slipping turn. The imbalance can
also be felt by the occupants of the aeroplane. The rudder actually
opposes the turn and so the rate of turn will decrease unless the
bank angle is increased.
162 TURNING
To maintain airspeed, the nose attitude must be lower than in Backpressuremay

a straight descent. With a large keel surface presented to the be needed.
airflow, there may be a tendency for the nose to drop, and so back
pressure on the control column may be required to stop the nose
dropping too far. Do not rely too greatly on the airspeed indica-
tor, as the sideways airflow over the pitot tube and static vent may
cause indication errors. A safe airspeed must still be maintained.
The result of a sideslip is an increased rate of descent at a Do not use powerin a slip.
constant airspeed and a steeper descent angle. The greater the
bank angle and rudder pressure, the steeper the flightpath. It is not
usual to use power during this manoeuvre since the purpose of a
sideslip is to increase the steepness of the flightpath.
Since a sideslip, and especially a sideslipping turn, are transient Do not trim in a slip.
manoeuvres, do not trim.

Establish the aeroplane in a gliding turn, and maintain a good
lookout for other aircraft.
To establish a sideslip in the gliding turn apply 'top rudder'
and control bank angle with aileron and airspeed with the nose
position. The rate of descent and the steepness of the flightpath
can be increased by using a greater bank angle and more top
rudder.
To stop the sideslip in the tum, centralise the balance ball
with the rudder, maintain the desired bank angle with aileron and
the airspeed with elevator.
Airmanship
Only sideslip in approved aeroplanes and configurations (refer to Airmanshipis beingaware
your Pilot's Operating Handbook). of yourheightabovethe
Be aware that high rates of descent and steep flightpaths can ground.
result from sideslipping, so allow sufficient height to recover
balanced flight at the end of the manoeuvre.
Airwo,rk 9c, P,art (iv)

Sideslippingin a GlidingTurn
Aim To lose excessheight in a gliding turn at a constant airspeedby sideslippingthe aeroplanein

the turn using crossedcontrols.
NOTE Refer to the Pilot's Operating Handbook to determine if sideslipping is an approved

manoeuvre for your particular aircraft type.
1 & 2. Enter a Gliding Turn

As per Exercise 9c, Part (i).
During the sideslip,maintain airspeed with

elevator,and control rate ofdescentwith
bank angle and out-of-balancerudder.
3. To Cause a Sideslip in a
Gliding Turn
• Look out.
• Apply rudder opposite to the direction of
turn.
• Maintain bank angle with aileron.
• Maintain airspeed with elevator (a lower
nose attitude).
• Control rate of descent with bank angle and
rudder.
4. To Stop the Sideslip During the Turn

• Centralise balance ball with rudder.
• Control bank angle with aileron.
• Resume gliding turn procedure as per Part (i)
164 TURNING
E.xercise 9d
Turning onto Selected Headings
Aim
To turn onto a selected magnetic heading using:
1. The direction indicator; or
2. The clock and the turn coordinator; or

3. The magnetic compass.
Flying the Manoeuvres

Reference Point
Whenever possible, select a distant reference point onto which to Selecta visualreference
turn. This acts as a back-up to the instrument indications as well pointas a guide.
as aiding you in orientation.
1. Using the Direction Indicator

The direction indicator (DI) is easier to use and more accurate in
a turn than a magnetic compass because it is a gyroscopic
instrument and consequently does not suffer acceleration and
turning errors. It must, however, be correctly aligned with the
magnetic compass in steady flight.
■ Figure9d-1 The direction indicator
To turn onto a specific heading using the direction indicator (DI):

1. Fly at a steady speed, straight and level.
2. Align the DI with the magneticcompass (uncaging the DI if
necessary).
3. Decide the shorter way to turn (left or right) to reach the
desired heading (e.g. from 090°M, to 240°M, turn right 150°);
9d - Turningonto SelectedHeadings 165
4. Look out and clear the area.

5. Carry out a normal turn with occasional reference to the DI.
6. Commence the roll-out approximately 10° prior to reaching
the desired heading on the DI.
7. Make minor adjustments to maintain the desired heading.
2. Using the Clock and the Turn Coordinator

The turn coordinator allows you to turn at a constant rate and the
clock can be used to time the turn. A rate 1 turn (3° per sec) for
30 seconds will alter the heading by 90°.
To turn onto a specific heading using a rate 1 timed turn:
1. Divide the change in heading by 3 to obtain the number of
seconds (e.g. from 090°M to 300°M is 150° to the left, which,
at 3° /sec, will take 50 seconds).
2. Carry out a normal rate 1 turn with reference to the turn
coordinator (at say 120 kt, this will require an angle of bank of
1/Io of 120 kt plus 7 = 12 + 7 = 19°).
3. Time the turn using the second hand on the clock .
•
For example:
A turn from 090°M to
300°M is 150°.
Time seconds.
on clock 150° at rate 1 (3°/sec)
= 50 seconds.
Set bank angle with reference

to turn coordinator
■ Figure9d-2 A timed turn using the clock and turn coordinator
3. Using the Magnetic Compass

This is the least-preferred method since the magnetic compass
suffers considerable indication errors in a turn. It can, however, be
used to verify heading once the aeroplane has settled into steady
wings-level flight and the compass oscillations have ceased.
The construction of a magnetic compass is such that, when an
aeroplane is turning (especially through north or south), it will
give false indications of magnetic heading. To allow for this in the
northern hemisphere observe the following:
Heading 090°M
• When turning onto northerly headings, roll out when the
■ Figure9d-3 magnetic compass indicates approximately 30° before your
Magnetic compass desired heading.
• When turning onto southerly headings, roll out when the
magnetic compass has passed approximately 30° past your
desired heading.
166 TURNING
An easy way to remember this is uNos:
Undershooton North. Overshooton South.
The above allowances should be reduced:

• when turning with bank angles less than 30°; and
• when turning onto headings well removed from north and
south - in fact, when turning onto due east or due west, no
allowances need be made.
NOTE The allowances described above only apply to the magnetic
compass because of the turning and acceleration errors associated
with it. They do not apply to the direction indicator because it is
a gyroscopic device which does not suffer from these errors and
hence is easier to use.
If the aeroplane has an unserviceable direction indicator,
perform a timed rate 1 turn (using the turn coordinator and the
clock), using the magnetic compass as a back-up.
In the southern hemisphere, the allowances required when
turning onto particular headings using the magnetic compass are
reversed.
• When turning onto northerly headings, roll out when the
magnetic compass indicates approximately 30° past your
desired heading.
• When turning onto southerly headings, roll out when the
magnetic compass indicates approximately 30° before your
desired heading.
Slow Flight and Stalling 167
Exercise 1Oa
Slow Flying
Aim
Note thatyourinstructorTo develop an awareness of the aeroplane's handling characteristics
mayprefer to sequence at abnormally low airspeeds, and to return the aeroplane to a safe
stalling(Ex.1Ob)before flying speed.
the slowflyingexercise.
Considerations
Slow Flight
Slowflyingis anawareness This exercise is designed to provide exposure to flight at
exercise. abnormally low airspeeds so that the pilot can:
• recognise an inadvertent approach to the stall;
• experience how the aeroplane handles at an abnormally low
airspeed; and
• take recovery action by returning the aeroplane to a safe
flying speed.
The exercise also provides handling practice for those brief
periods of low airspeed that do occur in normal flight, when the
aeroplane is accelerating to climbing speed immediately after lift-
off, and during the landing flare as the airspeed decreases prior to
touchdown.
Power Required for Steady Flight

To maintain a steady airspeed, engine power must produce
enough thrust from the propeller to balance the total drag. The
power-required curve is therefore similar in shape to the drag
curve. It shows that high power is required for steady flight at both
high and low speeds, with minimum power occurring at a specific
speed in between.
Minimum power will give minimum fuel consumption and
consequently maximum endurance, so this speed is often listed as
the endurance speed in the Pilot's Operating Handbook.
Flight at speeds less than the best endurance speed is slow flight.
Power Handling
At normal cruising speeds, higher speeds require higher power
settings. Also, any minor speed variations due to gusts will
automatically correct themselves in the normal flight range - a
slight increase in speed causing a drag increase that will slow the
aeroplane down.
168 SLOW FLIGHT AND STALLING
Conversely, a slight decrease in speed reduces drag, allowing

the aeroplane to regain speed. An aeroplane is speed stablein the
normal flight range.
POWER
Maximum speed
/ Speed for best endurance straight and level -........_ AIRSPEED
0 Stall .---- Slow flight ---• -•----- Normal flight range
~-·
1 I
---~--
I •
1 Thelower the steady, The higher the steady speed,
,speed, the higher the 1 the higher the power required
• power required
I
!
~ Unstable -:------- Speed stable -----------.-
■ Figure10a-1 The -power curve
In the slow flight range the situation is reversed, i.e. the lower the The slowerthe steady
speed, the higher the power required. This is because at low speeds a speed you wantto
high angle of attack is needed to produce the required lift, greatly maintain,the more power
you require.
increasing the induced drag. The increase in total drag will slow the
aeroplane down unless power is applied. The lowest steady speed that
can be maintained by an aeroplane may be limited either by the max-
imum power that the engine/propeller can deliver, or by the stall.
In the slow-speed range, the aeroplane is not speed stable
because an airspeed loss due to a gust will result in an increase in
total drag which will slow the aeroplane down further (and con-
tinue to do so) unless the pilot takes corrective action by adding
power. An airspeed gain, conversely, will reduce the total drag and
the aeroplane will accelerate unless the pilot reduces power.
Control Effectiveness
At low airspeeds, the controls will feel 'sloppy' and less effective. The effectivenessofthe
Large control movements may be required to obtain the desired flightcontrolsdependson
the airflowoverthem.
response. Since the elevator and rudder are in the propeller
1Oa - SlowFlying 169
slipstream, they may be somewhat more effective when high

power is set. The ailerons will not be affected by the slipstream.
A high power and a low airspeed will lead to a strong
slipstream effect, which may require significant rudder deflection
to balance the yawing tendency. At very low speeds and high
power, the large rudder deflection might require extra aileron
movement to hold the wings level, i.e. crossed-controls.
The 'feel' of the aeroplane becomes ve1y important in slow
flight. The low speed, the less-effective controls, the high nose
attitude, the high power required and the large rudder deflection
are all clues that the stalling angle is not far away. Slow flight at
10 kt above the stall (and then possibly only 5 kt above) will be
practised. Stalling speeds straight and level at maximum weight are
delineated on the airspeed indicator: V51 at the lower end of the
green band for a clean wing and V50 at the lower end of the white
band for full flap.
The airspeed needs to be monitored closely in slow flight. It
should be controlled accurately with power and attitude changes
due to the proximity of the stall. The tendency to lose speed in a
turn should be counteracted with additional power. Do not
attempt steep turns at slow speeds near the stall - the stalling speed
will increase to meet your actual airspeed!

1. To Attain Slow Flight
To reduce airspeed to the selected value (5 or 10 kt above the stall):
• reduce power and gradually raise the nose to maintain
altitude;
• when the desired airspeed is reached, increase power and
continually adjust both power and attitude to maintain that
speed;
• retrim and check the balance ball for correct balance.
2. Manoeuvring in Slow Flight

To maintain speed and altitude, be prepared to work the throttle
vigorously and to readjust the attitude as necessa1y. The longer
you leave corrections, the greater they will have to be. As always:
power + attitude = performance.
TO CORRECT SPEED VARIATIONS:
• if speed increases - raise the nose and reduce power;
• if speed decreases - lower the nose and add power.
TO CORRECT HEIGHT VARIATIONS:
• if the aeroplane climbs - reduce power and lower the nose;
• if the aeroplane sinks - add power and raise the nose.

The use of elevator, power and rudder must be coordinated.
Every time power changes there will be a pitch/yaw tendency that
you will have to counteract. Slow flight is very good practice for
your coordination.
TO ENTER A SLOW-SPEED CLIMB:
• increase power;
•· slowly adjust attitude to maintain airspeed;
·• trim.
To LEVEL OFF FROM A SLOW-SPEED CLIMB:
• lower the nose;
• slowly reduce power;
• trim.
TO COMMENCE A DESCENT:
• reduce power;
• lower the pitch attitude to maintain airspeed;
• trim.
TO LEVEL OFF FROM A DESCENT:
• add power;
• gradually raise the nose to cruise attitude to maintain airspeed;
• trim.
TO TURN AT A LOW AIRSPEED:
• add power to maintain speed as bank angle is applied.
MAXIMUM PERFORMANCE CLIMB:
To make a maximum performance climb away from a descent:
• open the throttle fully (and balance with rudder);
• allow the nose to rise and hold it in the climb attitude;
• control airspeed with elevator;
• trim.
TO APPROACH THE STALL:
• raise the nose until a stall is imminent;
• recover by easing the control column forward and applying
power.
TO RETURN TO NORMAL CRUISE SPEED:
• increase power;
• lower the pitch attitude to maintain altitude;
• adjust power as desired speed is attained;
• trim.
These manoeuvres should be practised both clean and with flap
extended.
1Oa- SlowFlying 171
Airmanship
Airmanshipis flying the Exert firm, positive and smooth control over the aeroplane, being
aeroplaneaccuratelyand prepared to make large and prompt power changes when
positively,especiallyat the
required.
criticallyslow air-speeds,
and keepinga good
Maintain airspeed in level turns at a low airspeed with the use
lookout of additional power. Coordinate the use of power/ elevator/
rudder.
Monitor the engine instruments to confirm adequate cooling
of the engine at the high power and low airspeed.
Maintain a safe height above ground level and obstacles if the
slow flying is associated with low flying.
Remember that a continuing lookout is important in all phases
of visual flight. Weave the aircraft regularly because the higher
nose attitude may preclude forward and downward vision.
Airwork 10a
SlowFlying
Aim To developan awarenessofthe aeroplane'shandling characteristicsat abnormally low

airspeeds,and to return the aeroplane to a safe '{lyingspeed.
1. Establishing Slow Flight, Flaps Up
Fast cruise Slow cruise
-~-(1_> __ ·~---~-(2_> __
To adopt a slow cruise: To maintain a slow cruise:

• Reduce power . • Set power and attitude to maintain
• Raise nose to reduce airspeed and height and airspeed.
maintain height. NOTE The controls are lesseffective at
low airspeed.
--~-----------
Add power to maintain airspeed
Look out
in a low-speedturn.
...i
fl,,_.....
~,.,.
Descent
Level flight
Practise gentle climbs, descents and turns at a constant airspeed.
2. Recovering from Slow Flight

• Increase power .
• Lower pitch attitude to maintain altitude .
• Adjust power as desired airspeed is approached .
• Trim .
Repeat the above procedure with '{lap extended.

1Ob- Stalling 173
Exercise 1Ob
Stalling
Aim
To recognise the stall, and to recover from it with a minimum loss
of altitude.
Considerations
What is Stalling?
Stallingoccurswhen the Streamline flow over the wings breaks down and becomes
critical angle of attack is turbulent when the critical (or stalling) angle of attack is
exceeded,irrespective
exceeded. This causes:
of airspeed.
• buffeting (shaking or shuddering) of the aiiframe, felt through
the controls;
• a marked decrease in lift, resulting in sinking;
• rearward movement of the centre of pressure (through
which the lift acts), resulting in the nose dropping;
• a marked drag increase.
Stalling will occur whenever the critical angle of attack is
exceeded, irrespective of airspeed. The only way to recover is to
decrease. the angle of attack (i.e. relax the back pressure and/ or
move the control column forward).
Straight and level Descending
50 knots AS
16° angle
of attack
-~~~;:::;;,::::........._..1...+_
60° banked steep turn

16°
■ Figure10b-1 Stalling occurs at the critical angle of attack
The pilot can increase the angle of attack (and reduce airspeed)
by pulling the control column back. This happens in many
manoeuvres such as:
• establishing slow flight;
• turning (especially steep turns);
• pulling out of a dive; and

• landing.
Also, an upward gust of wind encountering the wing will
increase its angle of attack.
What Is Stalling Speed?

The basic stalling speed is considered to be the speed at which the
aeroplane stalls when it is at maximum weight, with the wings
'clean' (i.e. no flap) and flying straight and level with the power
removed. The stall is made to occur by the pilot progressively
raising the nose.
The basic stalling speed is called Vsi · It is published in the
Pilot's Operating Handbook and shown on the airspeed indicator
as the lower end of the green arc. Vs1 for your aeroplane should be
memorised as it is a valuable guide.
The stalling speed with full flap extended (at maximum weight,
straight and level, and idle power) is called VSO·It is also found in the
Pilot's Operating Handbook and at the lower end of the white arc
on the airspeed indicator. The Vsospeed should also be memorised.
VNE
never-exceed speed
(maximum speed for all Vso
operations) stalling speed,
landing gear down,
flaps lowered,
power off
Vs1
stalling speed,
VNO __J,..--,r:::; landing gear up
maximum structural (if retractable},
cruising speed flaps up, power off
(for normal operations)
ee,,.
• norma1operating
I
VFE
maximum speed, flaps extended
■ Figure10b-2 Colour coding on the ASI
The published stalling speeds are only a guide, since stalling Treatpublishedstalling
always happens at the same angle of attack and not the same speedsas a guideonly.
indicated airspeed. Turns, pulling out of dives and contaminated
wing surfaces (e.g. frost or snow) will increase the stalling speed;
high power and decreased weight will reduce it.
1Ob- Stalling 175
Effect of the Flight Controls in the Stall

The flightcontrolsare less A reduced airflow over the controls will cause them to become
effectivenearthe stall. less effective as speed reduces and the stall is approached. Control
pressures will decrease and larger movements of the elevator and
rudder will be required.
It is the main wing that stalls. The fin and the tailplane remain
unstalled (by design) so that during the stall the elevator and
rudder remain effective. The ailerons may or may not remain
effective during a stall, depending on the aeroplane type.
The Ailerons
Be carefulusingailerons A dropping wing can normally be 'picked-up' by moving the
nearthe stall. control column in the opposite direction. This causes the aileron
on the dropping wing to deflect downwards, increasing the angle
of attack, and producing more lift on that wing. If the wing is near
the stalling angle, the aileron deflection could cause the critical
angle to be exceeded on that wing and, instead of rising, the loss
of lift would cause the wing to drop further. With any yaw, a spin
could develop.
Normalresponse
Normal flight
Control column to right

but airplane rolls Left
Slow flight near the stall
■ Figure10b-3 Near the stall, use of aileron may not pick-up the wing
The ailerons on some more recently designed aeroplanes are

effective right through the stall and their use, coordinated with
rudder, may be possible. This point should be discussed with your
flying instructor.
The Rudder
Near the stall, any tendency for the aeroplane to yaw can be
prevented with opposite rudder.
■ Figure1Ob-4 If awing drop is experienced during a stall, further yaw

may be prevented with opposite rudder

Stalling in Straight and Level Flight
Stalling is first practised in straight and level flight by reducing
power and raising the nose to maintain height. The angle of attack
will gradually increase.
Warnings of an impending stall include:
• a reducing airspeed and air noise level, decreasing control
effectiveness and a 'sloppy' feel;
• operation of a pre-stall warning (such as a horn, buzzer, light
or whistle);
• the onset of buffet, felt in the airframe and through the
control column;
• a high nose attitude for the manoeuvre being flown.
The actual stall may be recognised by:
• the nose and/ or the wing dropping (caused by the centre of
pressure moving rearwards);
,. a high sink rate.
Stall Recovery
To recover from a stall reduce the angle of attack by moving the Stallrecoveryrequires
control column centrally forward (releasing the back pressure may decreasingthe angleof
be sufficient) until the buffet or stall warning stops. attack.
Once the wings are unstalled buffeting ceases, the airspeed
increases, and the aeroplane can be eased out of the slight dive
back into normal flight. The altitude loss will be of the order of
200 ft. Power can be added to regain or maintain altitude,
otherwise flying speed should be maintained in a glide.
1Ob- Stalling 177
Altitudelossduringa stall Altitude loss during the stall can be minimised with power.
can be minimisedwith Adding power is not required to recover from the stall; however,
power.
altitude loss will be minimised if full power is applied as the
control column is moved centrally fo1ward (back pressure is
released) and the nose is lowered. Recovery can be achieved with
a altitude loss of less than 50 ft.
Stall Recovery without power Resume normal flight
■ Figure 1Ob-5 Stall and recovery attitudes
After Stalling
Avoid entering a secondary Following stall recovery, ease the aeroplane into normal flight by
stall during a stall recovery. gently raising the nose and applying power as the nose passes
through the horizon.
The ine1tia of an aeroplane causes it to follow the original flight-
path for a brief time before the change in attitude and resulting
change in forces move it into a new flightpath. Pulling the nose up
too sharply during the stall recovery may not give the aeroplane time
enough to react and ease out of the dive, but may merely increase the
angle of attack beyond the stalling angle again. A secondary stall will
be induced, and a second recovery from the stall will be necessa1y.
Initial stall
Attempted pull-up;
secondary stall
\
■ Figure 1Ob-6 Raising the nose too sharply during recovery may induce
a secondary stall
Stalling with Flap Extended

When the trailing-edge flaps are lowered, the angle of incidence
is increased, which allows a lower nose attitude for the same angle
of attack. This allows the aeroplane to fly at a slower speed with a
lower nose attitude. In addition, flap extension increases camber
and/ or wing area, which lowers the stall speed. The stall with flap
extended will occur with a much lower nose attitude and a lower
airspeed than when the wings are clean. With full flap extended
on an approach to land, for instance, the stall could occur with the
nose well below the horizon.
ccC1G
~ ~1---~~·
X. .,
Stalled attitude
(nose-high)
■ Figure10b-7 The clean stall
■ Figure10b-8 The pitch attitude in a flapped stall - nose much lower
Airmanship
Unexpected stalls should never occur. Airmanshipis never
Carry out the HASELL check (page 179) prior to practising stalls allowinga stallto develop
inadvertently-
and stall recovery.
but knowinghow to
Exert smooth, but firm and positive control over the aeroplane. recover,just in case.
Be particularly conscious of any other aircraft in the vicinity,
your height above ground level and the area over which you are
flying. Ensure that stalling is only practised at altitude. Note
landmarks and the direction to the airfield. Maintain a high visual
awareness.
10b-Stalling 179
The Pre-AerobaticHASELL Checklist

Stalling is the first aerobatic-type manoeuvre that you will
perform.
Prior to doing any aerobatics, it is usual to carry out a series of
checks to ensure safe operation. The Pilot's Operating Handbook
will contain a suitable check covering items such as those in the
HASELL check below. The items it contains start with these letters.
- -- -
PRE-AEROBATIC 'HASELL' CHECKLIST
H Height
Sufficientto recoverby 3,000 ft aboveground level.
A Airframe
Flapsand landinggear as desired,brakes off, in trim.
s Security
- hatchesand harnessessecure;
- no loosearticlesin the cockpit (e.g.fire extinguishers,tie-downkits, etc.);
- gyroscaged (if necessary).
E Engine
- normal engineoperation;
- fuel contentsand selectionchecked(fullest tank selected,fuel pump on if
appropriate);
- mixture and carburettorheat as required.
L Location satisfactory
- away from controlledairspace,towns,active aerodromesand other
aircraft, and in visualconditions.
L Look out
- make an inspectiontum (usually 180°, or 2 x 90°) to clear the
area around and below you. Beginthe manoeuvreimmediatelyon
completionof the clearingtum.
NOTE Realign the direction indicator with the magnetic compass

once the manoeuvre is completed.
Airwork 10b
TheStandardStalland RecoveryProcedure
Aim To stallthe aeroplanefullyand then recoverwith a minimumJossof altitude.
1 Prior to Entry 2. Stall Entry

Pre-aerobatic check (see also expanded • Power OFF - throttle CLOSED
version on previous page): (carburettor heat HOT).
• Prevent yaw and maintain balance
H - Height sufficient to recover by
with rudder.
3,000 ft agl.
A - Airframe (flaps AS DESIRED, in trim).
• Continue bringing control column
S - Security:
fully back.
hatches and harnesses secure;
no loose articles;
gyros CAGED (if applicable). 3. Symptoms of an Approaching
E - Engine: Stall
operating normally; • Decreasing airspeed and noise level.
fuel contents and selection checked; • Controls less firm and less effective.
mixture and carburettor heat as • Pre-stall warning (light, horn or
required. buzzer).
L - Location satisfactory. • Shuddering airframe.
L - Look out: clearing turn to check for • A relatively high nose-up attitude.
any other aircraft.
Begin the manoeuvre as soon as area is
clear.
(1) ~ ~---(-2)~ ____ (3}~
Look out and During the stall use rudder

clear the area. only to prevent further yaw.
Practisestallsin various
configurations:
Clean,poweroff
Clean,poweron
Flapped,poweroff
Flapped,poweron Recognise the actual stall:
Climbing,descending and turning • nose drop
• sink rate
1Ob- Stalling 181
Airwork 10b
4a Stall Recovery without Power
• Move the control column centrally forward to unstall the wings.
• Prevent yaw or further yaw with rudder .
• Level wings with aileron if necessary.
• Attain safe flying speed.
• Resume normal flight and regain altitude as required.
Height loss approximately 200 to 300 ft.
~ .. - (3) Stall
. -
(4a) Recovery
without power
-----------►
4b. Standard Stall Recovery with Power (SSR)
Simultaneously:
• Move the control column centrally forward to unstall the wings.
• Add full power- throttle smoothly FULLYOPEN (carb heat COLD) .
• Prevent yaw or further yaw with rudder .
• Level wings with aileron if necessary.
• Attain safe flying speed and regain altitude .
Should the wing not drop at the point of stall, maintain aircraft balance on
application of power with rudder.
Height loss approximately 50 ft.
~ " (3) Stall
b) Recovery with power
~~_~i-------►►
Variations on the Basic Stall

Recovery at the Incipient Stall Stage
The term incipient stall means the beginning stages of a stall. It Recoverimmediatelyat the
precedes the actual stall. If ever an unwanted stall appears firstsignofan inadvertent
imminent, then recover at the incipient stage. This is especially stall.
applicable if the aeroplane is near the ground, say during take-off,
approach to land, going around or low-level flying.
The recovery from an incipient stall is simply:
• move the control column centrally forward (relaxing the
back pressure may be sufficient); and simultaneously
• apply power smoothly; and
• use the controls normally (i.e. the ailerons), since the wing is
not stalled.
Recovery from an Incipient Spin

The incipient spin (i.e. the initial stages of a spin) generally may be
said to be the point at which the wing has dropped or flicked by
more than 45° of undemanded roll and autorotated up to one
complete rotation; beyond this point a full spin can be considered
to be developing.
The incipient spin recovery action is to:
• centralise the control column and rudder.
When the rotation has stopped:
• level the wings with aileron;
• apply full power and regain lost altitude.
NOTE If the nose is significantly below the horizon:
• close the throttle;
• centralise control column and rudder when the rotation has
stopped;
• level the wings with aileron;
• ease out of the dive;
• apply full power when the nose has pitched above the horizon.
If the rotation does not stop immediately, initiate full spin
recovery action - see Exercise 11b.
Wing Surface
If ice, frost, insects or any other contaminant is on a wing or if the Contaminatedor damaged
wing -is damaged (especially its upper leading edge), the airflow wingsincreasestalling
could become turbulent at a lesser angle of attack than normal. speed.
Stalling will then occur sooner and at a higher airspeed. Always
check the surface condition of the wings (especially the upper
leading edges) in your pre-flight inspection.
1Ob- Stalling 183
Stalls during Manoeuvres

Stallingspeed increasesin To turn or pull out of a dive, the wings must produce more lift.
manoeuvres. This is achieved by the pilot using back pressure on the control
column to increase the angle of attack. The relative air flow
striking the wings at a greater angle causes the stalling angle to be
reached at a higherindicated airspeed. For example, the stalling
speed increases by 7% at 30° bank angle and by 40% when pulling
2g in a 60° banked turn or dive recovery.
______ ...___.,___
w
- .----------- w w
■ Figure10b-9 Increased wing loading (g-factor) means increased
stall speed
You can physically recognise an increased load factor by the

increased g-loading, so any time your apparentweightis increased
in manoeuvres, the stall speed is increased.
When the aeroplane approaches a stall in manoeuvres (say in a
steep turn or pulling out of a dive), releasing back pressure is
usually sufficient to prevent the stall occurring. •
Stalling in a Turn
Acceleratedstalls- at a Back pressure on the control column increases the angle of attack
higherstallingspeed than and may cause a stall. Since the load factor is increased in a turn,
straightand level- can the stall will occur at a higher speed than in straight and level flight
occurwiththe higher
g-loadingin manoeuvres
- by how much depends on the g-loading. Stalls at a higher speed
suchas turns. than normal are called accelerated stalls.
Follow the standard recovery of moving the control column
centrally forward (relaxing the back pressure may be sufficient),
and when the wings are unstalled, use coordinated rudder and
ailerons to roll the wings level. Apply power as required and
resume the desired flightpath.
The Effect of Flaps

Extending~ap lowersthe The stall with flaps extended will differ somewhat from the clean
stallingspeed and affects stall. For a start, flaps increase the lifting capability of the wings,
the stallcharacteristics. allowing the required lift to be generated at a lower speed. The
stalling speed will be lower. The increased drag will cause the
aeroplane to decelerate more rapidly when power is reduced and
the lower speed may make the controls feel very 'sloppy'. Also,
the changed distribution of lift on the wings may cause a greater
tendency for a wing to drop.
With flaps extended, the nose attitude will be lower in each
phase of flight, therefore stalling will occur at a lower pitch
attitude than when 'clean'.
The recovery from a stall with flaps extended is standard.
Altitude loss can be minimised by applying full power as the
control column is moved centrally forward, but be prepared to
hold forward pressure on the control column so that the nose does
not rise too far with the strong pitch-up moment that full power
produces. Do not use ailerons to roll the wings level until the
wings are unstalled. If full flap is used, a climb-away may be
difficult unless some flap is raised once a safe speed is attained.
Stalling on Final Approach

Initiate a recovery immediately you suspect an impending stall on Do not stallon
approach to land. Lower the nose and apply power to minimise finalapproach.
height loss.
It is worthwhile practising the developed stall in the approach Never allowa stallto occur
configuration at altitude so as to familiarise yourself with it. This near the ground.
should ensure that you never allow a stall to occur near the ground.
A situation in which a stall might occur could be an approach
that has got out of hand: for example, full flap extended and a
tendency to undershoot, with the pilot raising the nose (instead of
adding power). The airspeed will decrease and the undershoot
will worsen. If the pilot continues to pull the control column
back, a stall could occur. With full flap and possibly high power
applied, the stall could be fairly sudden and with a wing drop.
The standard recovery technique would be used. The control
column may have to be moved well forward to unstall the wings,
and care should be taken to avoid using ailerons until the wing is
unstalled. The substantial drag from full flap may make a climb-
away difficult; gain speed in level flight or a slight climb, reduce
the flap in stages and then climb away as desired.
Power-On Stalls
With power on, the propeller creates a slipstream over the inner
sections of the wings which may delay the stall. This will occur at Powerdecreases
a higher nose position. The slipstream makes the elevator and the stallingspeed.
rudder more effective, but not the ailerons. The increased airflow
may delay the stall on the inner sections of the wing - the stall
occurring first on the outer sections, perhaps leading to a greater
wing-dropping tendency. Standard recovery technique is used,
1Ob- Stalling 185
any further yaw being prevented with opposite rudder to prevent

a spin developing.
■ Figure1Ob-10 Power reduces stalling speed
The Effect of Weight

Stallingspeed decreasesas The lighter the aeroplane is, the less lift the wings must generate
weightdecreases. for straight and level flight, and so the smaller the required angle
of attack at a given speed. Therefore a light aeroplane can be
flown at a slower airspeed before the stalling angle of attack is
reached.
-
y
____
J~------ ---- - - - _ _ __ _ _ 1 Greater
w weight
---- ---- ------
■ Figure10b-11 Stalling speed is less at lower weights
Centre of Gravity Position

A forwardcentreofgravity In many aircraft, the tailplane generates a small downward force to
increasesthe stalling balance the four main forces and prevent the aeroplane pitching.
speed. The lift from the main wings in straight and level flight will
therefore have to support both the weight and this downward
aerodynamic force on the tail.
Lift
..
D
Thepositionof the CGis
shownin diagramswith
a centroidsymbol: S,
tre of
gravity (CG)
Weight
■, Figure10b-12 The forces straight and level
The further forward the CG, the greater the downward

tailplane force and so the greater is the lift required from the main
wings. This requires a greater angle of attack at a given airspeed,
therefore the stalling angle will be reached at a higher airspeed.
This is one very good reason why the aeroplane must be correctly
loaded with the CG within approved limits.
Spinning 187
Exercise 11a
Incipient Spins
Aim
To recognise the onset of a spin and recover before a full spin
develops.
Considerations
Incipient spin means the beginning or onset of a spin. It is, if you
like, a recovery from a spin before the spin actually occurs - with
a minimum loss of height.
While spinning is not permitted in many training aeroplanes,
the incipient spin is. Recovery should be made before the wings
go through a bank angle exceeding 90°.

An incipient spin can be induced from almost any flight
conditions by:
• flying slowly, continually bringing the control column back
and then, when almost at the stall, applying rudder to generate
yaw in the desired spin direction; or
• entering a shallow climbing or level turn (10-15° ofbank) with
a little power to the point of the stall, which will frequently
ensure an incipient spin in the opposite direction of the turn.
NOTE Turns should normally be to the right with right-hand
turning propellers and vice versa.
To recover from an incipient spin, simultaneously:
• move the control column to the central position (while
keeping the ailerons neutral and holding the rudder central).
When the rotation has stopped:
• level the wings with coordinated use of ailerons and rudder;
and
• apply maximum power and regain altitude (see note below).
NOTE If the nose has dropped steeply below the horizon, close
the throttle, move the control column to the central position, hold
ailerons and rudder neutral, and when the rotation has stopped, level
the wings, ease out of the dive and regain lost altitude with power.
188 SPINNING
Airwork 11a
The IncipientSpin
Aim To recognisethe onsetofa spin and recoverbefore a full spin develops.
1. To Induce an Incipient Spin

• Fly slowly, applying progressive back pressure, maintaining altitude as the speed
reduces.
• Just prior to the stall, apply rudder in the desired spin direction.
-
~~ 7 \ ·,.'-,.~-~
2. Recovery Procedure
As the spin commences, simultaneously:
• move the control column to the central position (sufficient to unstall the wings); and
• centralise the rudder.
When the rotation has stopped (ailerons and rudder held in neutral position):
• level the wings with coordinated use of ailerons and rudder; and
• apply maximum power and regain altitude (see note below) .
Downelevatorpitches·the
nose.down,whichunstalls
. the wings
I . b~ • ' ith allern,ns

: trr,atl ,f ru:dcter.
NOTE If the nose has dropped steeply below the horizon, close the throttle, move the
control column to the central position(ailerons and rudder held neutral). When rotation
has stopped, level the wings, ease out of the dive, then regain lost altitude with power.
11b - FullSpins 189
Exercise 11 b
FullSpins
Aim
To enter, maintain and recover from a fully-developed spin
(provided it is an approved manoeuvre for the aeroplane).
NOTE This exercise is not mandatory.
Considerations
What is a Developed Spin?
A spin is a condition of stalled
flight in which the aeroplane
describes a spiral descent.
As well as the aeroplane
being in a stalled condition,
one wing is producing more
lift than the other (caused by a
roll at low speed). Greater drag
from the stalled lower wing
results in further yaw, further
roll, etc., etc. Pitching of the
nose may also occur.
The aeroplane is in motion
about all three axes. In other
words, lots of things are
happening!
In a spin, the aeroplane is:
• stalled·
'
• rolling;
• yawing;
• pitching;
• sideslipping; and
• rapidly losing height, even
though the airspeed may
not be increasing.
NOTE In a developed spin the
aircraft is also acting as a
gyroscope. Therefore mass ■ Figure11b-1 The spin
distribution will have an effect
on the form the spin takes and
how easily it will recover.
190 SPINNING
In a spin the wings will not produce much lift, since they are
stalled. The aeroplane will accelerate downwards until it reaches
a vertical rate of descent where the greatly increased drag balances
the weight. The height loss will be rapid as the aeroplane spins
downwards about the vertical spin axis.
Characteristics of a developed spin include a low indicated air- A well-flownspin will
speed (which does not increase until recovery action is initiated) not stressa properly
certificated aeroplaneany
and a high rate of descent. A vital part of the spin recovery is to
more than a normal stall.
unstall the wings by moving the control column centrally forward
(which reduces the angle of attack), and to build up flying speed.
Spin Rotation
If the aeroplane adopts a higher nose attitude and the spin flattens: The flatnessofthe spin
• the rate of rotation will decrease; and determinesthe rate
• the rate of descent will reduce (due to increased drag from ofrotation.
the higher angle of attack).
A spinning ice-skater moves her arms in and out from her body
to alter the rate of rotation. The same effect occurs in an
aeroplane. In a steep nose-down attitude, the mass of the
aeroplane is close to the spin axis and the rate of rotation is high.
If the spin flattens, some of the aeroplane's mass is distributed
further from the spin axis and the rate of rotation decreases.
■ Figure11b-2 A steep spin (le~) and a flat spin

If the nose pitches up and down in the spin, the rate of rotation
will vary - becoming slower when the spin is flatter and faster
when the nose position is steeper. Since the nose is purposely
11b - FullSpins 191
lowered in the recovery from a spin, you can expect a temporary

increase in the rate of rotation until the recovery is complete.
A rearward CG will encourage a flatter spin and it will be
more difficult to lower the nose in the recovery. This is one (very
important) reason for ensuring that you never fly an aeroplane
loaded outside its approved weight and balance limits.
Conversely, a forward CG normally results in a steeper spin with
a higher rate of descent and a higher rate of rotation. It may make
recovery much easier and, in fact, may even prevent a spin occurring.
Spiral Dives
Do not confusea spin A manoeuvre that must not be confused with a spin is the spiral
(stalled)with a spiraldive dive, which can be thought of as a steep turn that has gone wrong.
(not stalled). In a spiral dive the nose attitude is low, the wing is not stalled, the
airspeed is high and rapidly increasing and the rate of descent is
high. Because the wing is not stalled, there is no need, in the
recove1y from a spiral dive, to move the nose forward. Spiral dives
are considered in Section 15 on Advanced Turning.
Practising Spins
During your first spin, you will probably be a little overcome by
the sensations and not really know exactly what is happening.
After a few practice spins, however, you will become reasonably
comfortable and the whole manoeuvre will seem to slow down
enough for you to recognise the characteristics, count the turns,
recognise landmarks and so on.
■ Figure11b-3 The spin as you first see it, and as you will see it
The Three Stages in a Spin Manoeuvre

The incipient phase is said The spin manoeuvre can be considered in three stages:
to beginwhenan
uncommanded 1. The incipient spin (or the beginning of the spin), which is an
(or commanded)yaw and unsteady manoeuvre in which the entry path of the aeroplane
rolloccursat the pointof is combined with a phenomenon called autorotation.
the stalland can last from
one,even up to three, 2. The fully developed spin, in which the aeroplane has settled
rotations. into a comparatively steady rate of rotation and a steady rate of
descent at a low airspeed and a high angle of attack. Gyroscopic
forces will now be stablilised.
192 SPINNING
3. The recovery from a spin, initiated by the pilot who:

opposes the rotation with rudder;
unstalls the wings with forward control column;
centralising all controls when the spin stops; and
eases out of the ensuing dive.
How a Spin Develops

A spin is a condition of stalled flight, so the first prerequisite is that
the wings be at a high angle of attack. This is achieved by moving
the control column progressively back, as in a normal stall entry.
A wing drop is essential to enter a spin and this may occur by itself
or (more likely) be induced by the pilot yawing the aeroplane with
rudder or 'misusing' the ailerons just prior to the aeroplane stalling.
Autorotation will commence through the dropping wing
becoming further stalled, with a consequent decrease in lift and
increase in drag. The aeroplane will roll, a sideslip will develop
and the nose will drop. If no corrective action is taken, the rate of
rotation will increase and a spin will develop. It will be an
unsteady manoeuvre with the aeroplane appearing to be very
nose-down. The rate of rotation may increase quite quickly and
the pilot will experience a change of g-loading.
An aeroplane will not usually go straight from the stall into a
spin. There is usually a transition period which may va1y from
aeroplane to aeroplane, typically taking two or three turns in the
unsteady and steep autorotation mode, before settling into a fully-
developed and stable spin.
\
\ \
\ \
\ •
• Relative airflow
ROLL
■ Figure11b-4 The aeroplane in a spin

11b - Full Spins 193
Misuse of Ailerons
Misuse of ailerons Trying to raise a dropped wing with opposite aileron may have the
can causea spin. reverse effect when the aeroplane is near the stall. If, as the aileron
goes down, the stalling angle of attack is exceeded, instead of the
wing rising it may drop quickly, resulting in a spin. This is the spin
entry technique on some aircraft types.
Control wheel to right
but aeroplane rolls left
Stalled
"I L---i
<.)
ciJLGL
~.:=j,-C'
L~Q-~
Flight near the stall
■ Figure11b-5 Inducing a spin with opposite aileron
Use of Power
Powermay destabilisean At the incipient (early) stage of a stall, having power on may cause
aeroplanebefore a greater tendency for a wing to drop, which could lead to a spin.
and during a spin.
Once the aeroplane is in a spin, power may destabilise it as the slip-
stream will tend to flow across the outer wing, increasing its lift and
consequently increasing the rate of roll. If power is applied, the
entire spin manoeuvre may be speeded up or flatten and slow down.
It is essential, therefore, to remove power by closing the throttle
either before or during the spin recovery.
Flaps
The ffaps should be raised The flaps tend to decrease the control effectiveness of the elevator
for spinning. and rudder and so should be raised either before or during the
.spin recovery. For many aircraft, practising spinning with flaps
down is not permitted, since the aerodynamic loads on the flap
structure may cause structural failure.

Entering a Spin
It is usual to enter a spin About 5 to 10 kt prior to the aeroplane stalling, with the control
by yawing with rudder to column being progressively moved fully back, a smooth and firm
generate a low-speedroll
large-scale deflection of the rudder will speed up one wing and
just prior to the stall.
cause it to generate more lift. The aeroplane will begin to roll and
a spin will develop.
The spin entry may require full travel of the rudder. If the left
rudder pedal is pushed fully forward, the aeroplane will yaw and
roll to the left and a spin to the left will develop. If the right rudder
is pushed fully forward, the aeroplane will yaw and roll to the right
and a spin to the right will develop.
194 SPINNING
Maintaining the Spin

To allow a steady spin to develop and continue: Note: In many aircra~
• hold the control column fully back; relaxing of rudder or
elevator pressuresduring
• hold on full rudder;
the manoeuvremay induce
• keep ailerons neutral. a high rotational spin.
Recognition of a Spin
You can recognise a spin by the following characteristics:
• a steep nose-down attitude;
• continuous rotation;
• buffeting (possibly);
• an almost constant low airspeed;
• a rapid loss of height at a steady rate of descent.
The gyroscopes may topple in a spin, so information from the
attitude indicator will be of no value. Some aircraft have gyro-
scopic instruments (e.g. the AI) which should be caged (locked)
prior to performing any aerobatic manoeuvre in order to protect
them.
Airspeed indicator Attitude indicator Altimeter
low airspeed toppled and useless altitude decreasing rapidly
Turn coordinator Heading indicator Vertical speed indicator

unreliable toppled and useless high rate of descent
■ Figure 11b-6 The flight instruments in a spin
The precise spin recovery depends on the spin direction. In The turn coordinatoris the
practice, of course, you will know the direction of the spin that best clue to spin direction.
you have induced. In an inadvertent spin, however, where the
direction of spin may not be obvious, it can be obtained from the
turn coordinator indicating left or right. Pay no attention to the
balance ball in a spin. Your outside view of the ground may also
assist you, but the turn coordinator is the best clue to spin direc-
tion.
11b- FullSpins 195
Standard Spin Recovery

CAUTION: The technique is:
Youmust consultthe Pilot's • check throttle closed and flaps up;
OperatingHandbookfor ., verify direction of spin on the turn coordinator;
youraircraft.type priorto
spinning,as the spin entry •
apply full opposite rudder;
and recoverytechniques • pause (to allow the rudder to become effective and stop the
may not be standard. yaw, which turns a stall into a spin);
• move the control column centrally forward to unstall the
wings (full forward if necessary);
• as soon as the rotation stops, centralise the rudder (it may
take one, two or more complete turns for the rotation to stop);
• level the wings and ease out of the ensuing dive;
• as the nose comes up through the horizon add power and
climb to regain height.
In the process of unstalling the wings, the nose attitude will
become steeper and the mass of the aeroplane will move closer to
the spin axis. The result may be a noticeable increase in the rate
of rotation just before recovery.
Airmanship
Airmanshipis knowinghow Ensure that your aeroplane is certified for spins and that weight
to recoverfroma spin, and balance aspects are correct.
even thoughyou may never Ensure that you know the correct spin recovery technique for
haveto do it.
your aeroplane type (found in the Pilot's Operating Handbook).
The spin is an aerobatic manoeuvre and so the pre-aerobatic
HASELL check should be performed prior to practising. A proper
aerobatic harness should be worn. A thorough lookout is essential
as a spin and recovery will consume a lot of height (possibly 500 ft
per rotation). Commence your practice at a height plus an
allowance that will allow you to recover fully before 3,000 ft
agl.
Exert firm control over the spin entry and recovery. You
should fly the aeroplane - not vice versa.
Moving your head during a spin can cause severe
disorientation - it is better to just move your eyes to check inside
and outside the aircraft.
Never spin inadvertently! When climbing away after each spin
recovery, reorientate yourself using familiar landmarks.
196 SPINNING
Airworl< 11b
FullSpins
Aim To enter, maintain and recoverfrom a fullydevelopedspin
(providedthat it is an approvedmanoeuvrefor the aeroplane).
NOTE Full recovery from the spin should be made before 3,000 ft agl.
Stall
--~--===-c1~~J'---~•~~-- ~d4i/' Yaw and
~ wing drop
1. Complete the Pre-Aerobatic ~HASELL,
Check (see page 179)
2. Inducing a Spin
Normal stall entry:
• Power OFF (carb heat HOT).
• Maintain altitude with increasing control back
pressure, wings level, balance with rudder.
Just prior to stall:
• Smoothly apply full rudder in desired direction of
spin.
• Hold control column fully back.
3. Maintaining the Spin
• Control column fully back.
• Full rudder in direction of spin. Applyingpower
• Hold ailerons neutral. whilethe noseis still
belowthe horizon Fully
4. Recovery from the Spin willcausea greater ~ de_veloped
• Throttle CLOSED ( check flaps UP). lossofheight. ' spin
~
• Ailerons neutral.
• Confirm spin direction on turn coordinator.
• Apply full opposite rudder.
• Pause (if required) and move the control column
centrally forward progressively (to unstall wings)
until the rotation stops.
• When rotation stops, centralise rudder and level the ~
~
wings.
• Ease out of the ensuing dive.
Recovery \}l,
• As the nose rises past the horizon, add power (carb
stage ~
heat COLD) and climb away.
.._~ . -__J/1~~
-----~==----~
NOTE The spin entry and recovery technique in the Pilot's Operating Handbook for your
aircraft may differ slightlyfrom this procedure. For example, T-tail aircraft may not require a
pause before moving the control column forward. Use the technique recommended for
your aeroplane.
Flying Training 197
Exercise 12
Standard Take-Off and Climb to
Downwind Leg
Aim
To take off into wind and climb out in the circuit pattern to
downwind leg.
Considerations
This manoeuvre involves:
• flying the aeroplane off the ground and clearing any obstacles;
• a climb to circuit altitude; and
• positioning the aeroplane on downwind leg.
The Take-Off
Take-off
intowind During the take-off, the aeroplane must be accelerated to an air-
if possible. speed at which it is capable of flying. Having a headwind compo-
nent on a runway 'gives' you airspeed even before you have started
rolling. For example, a 10 knot headwind component gives you
10 kt of airspeed over and above the groundspeed on take-off.
Taking off into wind is good airmanship because it gives:
• the shortest ground run;
• the lowest groundspeed for the required take-off airspeed;
• the best directional control, especially at the start of the ground
run, when there is not much airflow over the control surfaces;
• no side forces on the undercarriage (as in a crosswind);
• the best obstacle clearance because of the shorter ground run
and the steeper flightpath over ground;
• the best position in the climb-out from which to make an
into-wind landing straight ahead (or slightly to one side) in the
case of engine failure immediately after take-off.
Taking off downwind

is not recommended.
~ .."'~ ~
■ Figure12-1 Take-off into wind

198 FLYING TRAINING
Wind Direction
The circuit direction will normally be into wind, since this Alwaysbe awareof the
benefits both take-offs and landings. Knowing the wind, you can surfacewinddirection.
choose the most suitable runway and work out what the circuit
pattern will be. You can determine the wind direction:
• as you walk out to the aeroplane;
• from the wind direction indicator (i.e. the windsock);
• from other clues such as smoke being blown away from a
chimney;
• by asking Air Traffic Control (ATC), who will advise you of
the (magnetic) direction from which the wind is blowing and
its strength, e.g. 360/25 is a north wind at 25 kt.
Runway Distance
The take-off performance chart should be consulted if you are not Ensurethattherunway
certain that the runway is adequate in all respects. High-elevation is adequate.
aerodromes and high temperatures will increase the runway dis-
tances required, because of the decreased air density which
degrades both engine and aerodynamic performance. Runway
upslope and a tailwind component will also degrade the take-off
Flaps
Use of take-off flaps shortens the take-off run. Most training aircraft
use either zero flap or an early stage of flap for take-off. Extending
take-off flap increases the lifting ability of the wings, enabling the aer-
oplane to take off at a lower airspeed and with a sho1ter ground run.
Clean takeoff·~
Iii - .. ,.
···Takeoff
with flaps
Less distance _. - - • • extended
but less climb _.• - - - - • •
-.,.---------------.-..---------
1■ Figure12-2 Flap allows a shorter take-off ground run
Do not use landing flap for take-off, because the significant

increase in drag will degrade the take-off and climb-out perform-
ance. Do not exceed the recommended flap settings for take-off1
Landing flap
--l,,.lt~~ ........
✓ Typically 10° to 15° flaps )( Not to be used for takeoff
■ Figure12-3 Flap for take-off is less than that used for landing
12 - StandardTake-Offand Climbto DownwindLeg 199
The Standard Circuit

To maintain some form of safe and orderly flow of traffic at an
aerodrome, and to allow easy and safe access to the active runway,
aircraft are flown in the standard circuit pattern. For good
operational reasons, the preferred direction of take-off and
landing is into wind, hence the same direction will generally be
used by aircraft both taking off and landing.
{Left) Downwind
{Left) LEFT-HAND PATTERN {Left)

Base Crosswind
*
Short Windsock
final CII> Wind
Final J Upwind
Upwind '
..
I
Holding points
;I
I (Right) (Right) I
1 Base Crosswind
1
I
(Right) Downwind
...... - - - - - - - - - - - ~- - - (RIGHT-HAND PATTERN)
- - - - - - ....
■ Figure 12-4 The circuit ,pattern is rectangular
The standardcircuit The circuit is a rectangular pattern, based on the runway in use.
pattern is le~-handed. The standard circuit is left-handed, with all turns being made to
the left. This gives a better view from the captain's seat than turns
to the right. At some aerodromes and on some particular
runways, however, the circuits are right-handed to avoid built-up
areas, high terrain, restricted airspace, etc.
The circuit is referred to the runway on which it is based, e.g.
"join the circuit for 36" refers to the circuit based on Runway 36.
The '36' indicates that the runway heading is somewhere in the
range 355° to 360° to 005°M.
The Legs of a Circuit
Following take-off, climb straight ahead on the upwind leg to at
least 500 ft above aerodrome level (aal).
At 500 ft, commence a turn onto the crosswind leg and
continue the climb to circuit height, which for most aerodromes
is 1,000 ft aal, and level out.
200 FLYING TRAINING
Circuit height at some aerodromes may be different for various

reasons (to avoid terrain or remain beneath certain airspace), but
will almost certainly lie in the range of 750 ft to 1,250 ft aal.
A turn is made onto downwind leg and the aeroplane is flown
at circuit height parallel to the runway. A 'downwind' radio call as
you fly abeam the upwind (i.e. take-off) end of the runway is
often made to alert other aircraft and Air Traffic Control to your
position.
At a suitable point on downwind a turn onto base leg is made
and a descent commenced. Ideally, a turn onto final approach
should be completed by 500 ft above aerodrome level (aal).
Circuit height - usually 1,000 feet

above aerodrome elevation (aal)
----~----- Downwind leg 1
Commence 1 ,
descent 1 , Crosswind
.., ; leg )
', * ...
·,•, •• ···•••·•···•••·•··•••••••••·•·•·•··•••···•·•··•·••••••·••·•••·•••••••··•j••••
t ''- I
'
'
I
'•
. •
. I
',
•, Wind
I
Ideally, the turn to final Begin the turn

should be completed by when at or above
500 to 600 feet aal 500 ft aal
■ Figure12-5 The normal circuit pattern is flown at 1,000 ~ aal
Wind
While flying in the circuit, you should aim to fly a rectangular Allowfor wind effect in the
pattern over the ground. This means that, on any leg where there circuit.
is a crosswind component, drift should be laid off to compensate
for the wind effect. This is most easily achieved by selecting a
reference point on the ground well ahead of the aeroplane and
making sure that the aeroplane tracks directly towards it.
The wind at circuit height may differ from that on the ground
- simply adjust your heading so that the track over the ground is
correct.
.Flyingthe Manoeuvre
Before Take-Off
Taxito a suitableposition Taxi towards the runway and position the aircraft clear of the
for the pre-take-offchecks. runway (or in a run-up bay if provided) to carry out your engine
run-up and pre-take-off checks. Ensure that:
• the slipstream will not affect other aircraft;
• a brake failure will not cause you to run into other aircraft or
obstacles;
• loose stones will not damage the propeller or be blown
rearwards.
A suitable position is usually at 90° to the runway, giving you
a good view in either direction, although, in strong winds, it is
better to face into wind. This ensures adequate cooling of the
engine and avoids spurious rpm fluctuations due to wind gusts
during the run-up.
Set the brakes to PARK and set idling rpm (typically 1,000 to
1,200 rpm). This allows the engine to continue warming-up, yet
be adequately cooled.
# ~Windsock
■ Figure12-6 Position aircra~ for pre-take-off chec~

preferably into wind
Vital Actions
The pre-take-off check contains vital actions. Set the brakes to
PARK and complete the pre-take-off vital actions. You are just
about to take the aeroplane off the ground and into the air, so it
is vital that everything is as it should be. The pre-take-off check
should confirm this.
A Typical Pre-Take-Off Check

Use the pre-take-off check in your Pilot's Operating Handbook.
The mnemonic TMPFISCH covers the pre-take-off items well;
but still read the checklist! It will probably contain such items as
those shown on the following pages.
202 FLYING TRAINING
TYPICAL TMPFISCH CHECKLIST
T Trim: set for take-off.

Throttle Friction Nut: sufficientlytight (to prevent the throttle slippingonce
it has been set), but not so tight that the throttle is difficult to move.
M Mixture: RICH.
P Primer: fuel primer in and locked.

F Fuel:correctfuel tank selectedand contentssufficientfor fiight
Fuel Pump: ON (if fitted - most likely in /ow-wingaeroplanes)and fuel
pressureadequate.
Flaps: set for take-off.
I Instruments: ~ight instrumentscheckedfor correctsettingsand indications
and engineinstrumentscheckedfor correctindications.Followa systematicscan
aroundthe instrumentpanel.
FlightInstruments
Airspeed indicator: indicatingzero or well below the stallingspeed.
Attitude indicator: set the model aeroplaneagainst the artificial horizon.
Altimeter: set AerodromeQNH and check that correctelevationis indicated
(or vice-versa,i.e. set the known aerodromeelevationand confirm that a
reasonableQNH is displayedin the subscale);or set QFEso that the altimeter
indicateszero.
Vertical speed indicator: showingzero (neither a climb nor a descent).
Direction indicator: align with the magneticcompass(whichyou also
check).
Turn coordinator: previouslycheckedwith le~ and right turns during the taxi
(if it is driven electricallyor by an engine-drivenvacuumpump - if venturi-
driven,it cannot be tested prior to fiight).
Balance ball: tested during the taxi with le~ and right tums.
Clock: wound (yes,the clock is a ~ight instrument);check that the correcttime
is set.
Engineand Other Instruments
Tachometer: rpm remainingsteady as set (at idling rpm, typically 1,000 to
1,200 rpm).
Oil pressure: normal.
Oil temperature: normal.
Fuel pressure: already checkedif a fuel pump (or boost pump or auxiliary
pump) is fitted.
Ammeter: to indicate that the electricalsystemis charging.
Suction gauge: for correct 'suction'from engine-drivenvacuumpumps (if a
vacuum-drivengyroscopicattitude indicatorand/or directionindicatoris fitted).
Thisseemsa lot but, if you work your way around the panel systematically,you
will coverthem all.
12 - StandardTake-Offand Climb to DownwindLeg 203
TYPICAL TMPFISCH CHECKLIST
S Switches
Magnetos: confirm that there are no aircraft behindyou and run the engine
up (typicallyto 1,800 or 2,000 rpm).
While at high rpm, the carburettorheat can be tested at HOT,which should
causethe rpm to drop by about 100 rpm. Thisindicatesthat the systemis
working,the warm air enteringthe enginebeing lessdenseand causinga drop
in the power produced.An rpm increaseduringthe 10 secondsor so you leave
the carburettorheat HOTindicatesthat carburettorice was present and has
been melted. At the end of this test, return carburettorheat to COLD.The
magnetoscan now be checkedknowingthat the carburettoris free of ice. If you
think carburettorice may re-form prior to take-off, take appropriate action (see
later).
Switchfrom BOTHto LEFr(and note an rpm drop, typicallybetween 75 rpm
and 175 rpm, due to the right magneto systembeing earthed and only the left
spark.plug in each cylinderfiring,then back to BOTH,when the rpm should
return to that set).
Switchfrom BOTHto RIGHT(and note an rpm drop, typicallybetween 75 rpm
and 175 rpm, due to the left magneto systembeing earthed and only the right
spark plug in each cylinderfiring,then back to BOTH,when the rpm should
return to that set).
No rpm drop, a 'dead cut' (i.e.the enginestops firing) or an imbalancein the
two rpm drops (exceeding75-100 rpm) indicatesa problem.
If you inadvertentlygo to OFFwhen testing the magnetos,allow the engineto
stop. An experiencedpilot will be able to keep the enginegoing,but quick
action is needed,otherwisebackfiringand possibledamage could occur.It is no
problem to stop the engineand then restart it again normally.
Closethe throttle and checkrpm (typically600 to 700 rpm); then return to
1,000 or 1,200 rpm.
Other Switches: as required(includingpitot heaters,rotating beacon,if
fitted).
C Controls: full and free movement.
Carburettor heat: COLD(or as advisedby the Pilot'sOperatingHandbook if
you are in conditionswhere the formation of carburettorice is likely).
Cowl flaps: set for take-off (if fitted);
H Hatches: doorssecure,and no loosearticlesin the cockpit.
Harness: secure,seat firmly lockedin place on the ~oar,passengersbriefed.
Hydraulics: as required(if appropriate).
204 FLYING TRAINING
NOTE 'TMPFISCH' is only one mnemonic to help pilots

remember the items in the pre-take-off check. There are others
such as 'TTMFGHH' and so on. The important thing is that you
learn the check as described in your own Pilot's Operating
Handbook. Checks are a vital part of safe flying.
Line-Up
ATC and Radio Procedures
Consider Air Traffic Control (ATC) and radio procedures before
lining up on the runway. The category of the aerodrome will
determine whether take-off clearances are required. Consider this
and other ATC aspects before entering the runway, checking 'all
clear left' and 'all clear right' along the runway and on final
approach before you do. Aircraft already taking off or landing
have right of way over a taxiing aeroplane.
Straighten the Nosewheel

Line up and ensure that the nosewheel is straight. Make full use of
the runway length available (within reason). One of the most
useless things in aviation is runway behind you!
The take-off run should be along the centreline of the runway,
and the easiest way to achieve this is to line up with one main
wheel either side of the centreline markings (if the runway has
them). Roll forward a metre or two, thereby ensuring that the
nosewheel is straight (before applying brakes if used); but do not
waste runway length.
Have a good look out. Scan the runway and circuit area for
other aircraft that could conflict with you. Maintain an awareness
of other circuit traffic, both visually and aurally (by listening to the
radio). It is good habit to check the windsock at this time, just
before you roll.
The Take-Off Roll

Release the Brakes and Open the Throttle Smoothly
Select a reference point at the end of the runway (or beyond) on Selecta distant
which to keep straight. In side-by-side cockpits, you should view referencepoint.
this reference point straight ahead (parallel with the longitudinal
axis of the aeroplane), and not over the propeller spinner.
Release the brakes and smoothly apply full power. A mental Keep straightand
count of "one-two-three" will occupy the time required to acceleratesmoothlyin the
advance the throttle to full power. Glance at the tachometer early firstfew secondsof the
groundroll.
in the take-off run to confirm that the correct rpm has been
achieved. Have your heels on the floor with the balls of your feet
on the rudder pedals to control steering (and not high enough to
apply the toe brakes).
Applying rudder Rudder pedals Applying brakes
■ Figure 12-7 Heels on the floor (and no ,pressure on brakes)
Keep Straight with Rudder

Use your reference point at or beyond the far end of the runway
centreline to assist you in keeping straight. Even though you are
focusing well ahead, the edges of the runway in your peripheral
vision and the runway centreline disappearing under the nose
provide supporting guidance.
With the application of power, there may be a tendency to yaw
because of the:
• slipstream effect on the tail-fin; and
• torque reaction pressing one wheel down.
For an aeroplane whose propeller rotates clockwise as seen
from the cockpit, the tendency is to yaw left on take-off. If the
propeller rotates anti-clockwise, the tendency is to yaw right.
Torque reaction
_....•········ ······•
••.
\ Clockwise
;" 1 propeller
/ rotation
More friction on left wheel,

Right rudder required more left yaw
■ Figure 12-8 There is a tendency to yaw on the take-off run
Any yawing tendency should be counteracted with rudder. If

yawing left, apply right rudder (and vice versa). Large rudder
pedal movements may be required early in the take-off run but, as
the airflow over the rudder increases, smaller movements will be
sufficient. Just look ahead and keep the aeroplane tracking straight
down the centreline. Steer the aeroplane with your feet (and not
your hands). Keep straight with rudder.
206 FLYING TRAINING
■ Figure12-9 Keep straight using your feet on the rudder pedals
NOTE A brief mention of crosswinds (which are covered more

fully in Exercise 13) in case an into-wind runway is not available.
Any significant crosswind will tend to lift one wing. The wings
can be kept level by holding the control column sufficiently into
wind (by a large amount at the start of the take-off run, reducing
the amount as speed is gained and the ailerons become more
effective). Keep the wings level with aileron.
Protect the Nosewheel

On the ground, the nosewheel carries a fair load, especially if the Protectthe nosewheelby
take-off surface is rough or soft. During the normal take-off roll holdingthe weightoff it
of a tricycle-gear aeroplane, hold a little back pressure on the
control column. This takes some of the weight off the nosewheel
and protects it somewhat.
Back pressure also prevents 'wheelbarrowing' - a situation
where the nosewheel is held on the ground after sufficient lift has
been generated for flight. 'Wheelbarrowing' is bad news for the
nosewheel!
Slight back 'Wheelbarrowing'

pressure
~4------
Good Not good
■ Figure12-10 Protect the nosewheel by holding the weight off it

Check the Power

Checkthe power early After maximum power has been set and tracking down the
in the take-off run. runway centreline is under control, glance at the engine
instruments to check that full power is indeed being delivered.
Engine rpm should be as expected. Oil pressure and temperature
should both be within limits. This glance should take no more
than one or two seconds.
Lift-Off
Li~ the aeroplaneoff When flying speed is reached, take the aeroplane off the ground
the groundwhen you reach with elevator. A gradual backward movement of the control
flyingspeed. column will allow the aeroplane to become airborne when flying
speed is reached.
Climb speed
Acceleration ----~-
~
Lift-off .... ~----
' ~
~::::::~~--=-~f--~•
~~--~·
■ Figure12-11 When flying speed is reached, Ii'~ off gently with elevator
If you lift off too soon, the aeroplane may not fly and will settle
back onto the ground; if you lift off too late, the wheels and tyres
will have been subjected to extra stress, the airspeed will be
excessive and the take-off will have been unnecessarily
lengthened. Obstacle clearance might also be a problem.
■ Figure12-12 Gradually assume the climb attitude with elevator
The 'cushioning' of ground effect when the aeroplane is flying

close to the ground allows flight at lower speeds than when the
aeroplane is well clear of the ground. It is important that the
aeroplane accelerates to the correct climbing speed soon after lift-
off to avoid 'sink'.
208 FLYING TRAINING
The Climb-Out
Initial Climb-Out
• Look out, both at the horizon to check your attitude and your When airborneand
tracking, and to look for other aircraft. climbing,checkattitude
• Keep the wings level with ailerons. and tracking,and lookout
for othertraffic.
• Maintain balance with rudder pressure.
• With the elevator, hold the nose attitude in the correct
position relative to the horizon for the climb-out, glancing at
the airspeed indicator to confirm that climb speed has been
achieved.
• Trim.
At a safe height (say 200 or 300 ft aal) raise the take-off flaps (if
used). During the climb following take-off, look out to check
your attitude and to check for other aircraft. Confirm that you
have achieved the desired climb speed and adjust the attitude if
necessary. After the aeroplane has settled into a steady climb, trim-
off any steady control pressure.
The procedure for aircraft that have a fuel pump switched on
for take-off is to switch it off at a safe height (say 500 ft aal). Then
check that fuel pressure remains satisfactory.
NOTE In more advanced aeroplanes with a retractable
undercarriage, the wheels will be raised once a positive climb is
established after lift-off. Most training aeroplanes have fixed
landing gear and so this is not a consideration.
If your Pilot's Operating Handbook calls for an after-take-off
check (with respect to flaps and fuel pump for instance), then it
would be appropriate to perform this check when you are
established in the climb-out (say at about 600 ft aal).
Climb-Out to Circuit Height

As you climb-out following take-off:
• Look out to check your attitude and scan ahead, above and to
either side. Check your reference point to confirm that you are
tracking on the extended centreline of the runway and not
drifting to one side.
• At 500 ft aal, first scan the area into which you will be turning
and then turn (usually left) onto the crosswind leg using a
normal climbing turn (bank angle 20° or less). Balance with
rudder pressure and maintain climbing speed with elevator.
Selecting a new reference point will assist you to track correctly
on this crosswind leg. Allow for any drift due to wind effect.
• Complete the after-take-off check (if required).
Anticipate reaching circuit height and, as you approach it, start

lowering the nose to the cruise attitude. To level off from a climb,
use A-P-T:
• A ATTITUDE - lower the nose to the straight and level attitude;
- allow the speed to increase to the desired airspeed.
• P POWER - reduce power to maintain the desired airspeed.
• T TRIM.
Downwind Leg
At (or approaching) circuit height, check 'all clear' for other traffic
and turn onto downwind leg, selecting a reference point well
ahead on which to parallel the runway. You may be required to
call "Downwind" on the radio as you pass abeam the upwind end
of the runway (i.e. the climb-out end of the runway).
At circuit height (usually 1,000 feet above the Reference X

airport elevation), or at an appropriate distance point ahead, :
from the runway (if you are still climbing) Crab to for tracking 1
turn to downwind leg. counteract
A.fl Complete the after- drift
:~fi~~~f~/oint (~for drift~ take-off checklist ~
~ when time permits.
X------tooott;;---...C-he_c_k_ • --------- • ______ C_h_e-ck-.
clear CROSSWIND LEG clear
DOWNWIND Above 500 fl aal,

LEG
turn to crosswind leg.
I I
At circuit Raise the flaps
height (if used)
l UPWIND LEG
Figure 12-13 Take-off to downwind
Airmanship
Maintain a good lookout prior to entering the runway and in the
circuit area.
The take-off roll, lift-off and climb-out to circuit height is one
continuous manoeuvre that you should endeavour to fly
smoothly, with firm control over the aeroplane. Hold your
heading accurately, and adjust the pitch attitude to hold the climb-
out speed as closely as possible, but certainly within 5 kt.
Fly an accurate circuit and follow the basic Rules of the Air.
210 FLYING TRAINING
Airwork 12
StandardTake-Offand Climbto DownwindLeg
Aim To take off into wind and climbout in the circuitpattern to downwindleg.
rL ...... Downwind
.......,..~leg~--..,
Crosswind
*
leg
Wind
_J
I START
, HERE
1. Taxi for
into-wind
runway.
~ 2. Pre-take-off
~:-
............' ------
checks. 3. Take-off clearance
if required .
Look out
4. Look out.
- ...
....
I
Check runway and 5. Line up on runway centreline;
approaches are nosewheel straight. Select
'all-clear' left and right. reference point straight ahead.
~ Brakes OFF, heels on floor.
Apply full power smoothly.
Airwork 12
15. Medium level turn onto

16. Downwind downwind leg (bank angle 30°,
radio call maintain height with elevator).
if required. Use reference point to turn to.
14. Level off at
.,-----~D,::.ow:n~w:i~nd~·~ circuit height.
- leg 13. Allow for drift:
Look out -----------.....,_ continue climb
Lookout to circuit height.
CroSs
'-Yina
~leg
12. At 500 ft aal. make a climbing tum onto
crosswind leg (bank angle 20° maximum,
maintain climb speed with elevator, and
select a reference point to turn to).
11. After-take-off check if required.

-···········..........
.........
,. ...............
.
...,,,,.
9. Wings level with aileron; Referencepoint
balancewith rudder. Maintain ,,,,.
,,,.well ahead to help
climb attitude with elevator. ,,,,.~ maintaintracking
a'.'~.::~~b attitude.
,J'lfT 7. ~gspeed, liftoff with gradual

back pressure on control column.
..'" '''''
•' ''
.,., ,,, ,
, , , •' •''
,. .••'
6. Keep straight with rudder.
•••' Wings level with aileron.
~ Easeweight off nosewheel with elevator.
~ Check engine rpm (power).
212 FLYING TRAINING
12E. Emergencies During the Take-Off

There are two emergencies in the take-off for which you should *• • • * Underthe EASA
be prepared (even though they may never happen): *.•. / Part-FCL,
Emergenciesduring
1. Engine failure after take-off (fortunately not as common Take-offand Landingare
these days as it once was!). numberedExercises12E
and 13E.
2. The discontinued take-off while still on the ground (pilot-
initiated).
Prior to opening the throttle on each take-off, it is a good idea
to run through both of these procedures in your mind.
Engine Failure After Take-Off
If engine power is lost in the climb-out following take-off, the
options open to the pilot will vary according to how high the
aeroplane is, the nature of the terrain ahead, the wind conditions
and so on. An event such as engine failure close to the ground
requires prompt and decisive action by the pilot.
No matter when the engine fails in flight, the first priority is to Immediatelylower the nose
maintain flying speed. Immediately lower the nose to the gliding to the glidingattitudeto
attitude to maintain flying speed. maintainflyingspeed.
A controlled descent and landing, even on an unprepared
surface, is preferable by far to an unwanted stall in the attempted
climb-out. Close the throttle, in case the engine comes back to
life at an inopportune time.
Do Not Turn Back to the Field
The height at which the failure occurs determines how you Landstraightahead.
manoeuvre but, in general, you should plan to land fairly well
straight ahead. Height is rapidly lost in descending turns and, from
less than 500 ft aal, it is doubtful if you would make the runway.
Look for a landing area ahead and within range.
Make yourself familiar with suitable emergency landing areas
in the vicinity of your aerodrome, so that in the unlikely event of
engine failure you already have a plan of action in mind.
Following engine failure, and having established the glide,
quickly select the best landing area from the fields available ahead
and within approximately +30° of the wind if possible, otherwise
+60°. Make only gentle turns (say 15° angle of bank maximum).
Gliding turns at low level can be dangerous due to:
• high rates of descent; and
• a tendency for the pilot to raise the nose to stop a high rate of
descent and inadvertently stalling or spinning the aeroplane.
Complete checks and make a Mayday call if time permits. Any
attempt to switch fuel tanks and/ or to restart the engine depends
on time being available.
Maintaining flying speed is vital, more important than any

radio call or even starting the engine. If the selected field looks
rough and you think damage may result, then, when committed
to carrying out the landing:
• Ignition OFF.
• Fuel OFF.
• Doors - unlocked (or as advised in the Pilot's Operating
Handbook) in anticipation of a quick evacuation.
After landing:
• Stop the aeroplane and set the brakes to park.
• Stop the engine (if it is still running).
• Check fuel OFF/ignition OFF/ electrics OFF.
• Evacuate.
After lift-off on a long runway, you may have sufficient runway
ren1aining to land on. This is one reason why it is good airman-
ship to start such a take-off using the full length of the runway.
One of the most useless things in aviation is runway behind you!
5. Stop, shut down,

and secure the
aeroplane.
4. Complete checks
(time permitting).
3. Use flap - make the

approach as much
upwind as possible.
2. Select a field, preferably

within ±30° of the wind.
DO NOTTURN BACK
unless no other options
are available, e.g. over a
town or water.
1. Immediately adopt
the gliding attitude.
Wind*
■ Figure 12-14 E.ngine failure a~er take-off
The Discontinued Take-Off

A pilot may decide to abort a take-off during the ground run for
many reasons, such as:
• an obstruction on the runway;
• engine failure or loss of power;
• engine or fuel problems;
• faulty instrument indicators (e.g. airspeed indicator zero);
214 FLYING TRAINING
• a doubt that the aeroplane is capable of flying;

• an insecure seat that feels as if it might slip backwards; or
• any other condition that may, in your opinion, make the take-
off inadvisable.
This 'accelerating-and-then-stopping' manoeuvre is known by
various names, including accelerate-stop, discontinued take-
off, aborted take-off or abandoned take-off.
Aborting the Take-Off

You must make a firm and conscious decision to abort the take-
off, and then act positively:
• Close the throttle fully.
• Keep straight with rudder.
• Brake firmly (immediate maximum braking if required),
avoiding skidding or slipping, while maintaining directional
control.
• Stop the aeroplane, set the brakes to PARK, and establish the
cause of the problem.
• Shut down the engine if necessary (preferably clear of the
runway).
• Notify the A TS unit and seek assistance if required.
Decision
to stop
• Throttle - CLOSE
• Brakes - APPLY
• Keep straight
1-------Accelerate--------+------- Stop------1
■ Figure12-15 The aborted take-off
Variations on the Standard Take-Off

A restricted runway length, a soft surface, and a runway crosswind
component, are all variables which require the pilot to adopt a
slightly different technique on take-off, compared to the basic
technique covered in this exercise.
To avoid interrupting the flow of learning to fly a standard
circuit by describing these variations now, they are covered in the
next section, within the relevant Exercises:
• The crosswind take-off- Exercise 13f, CrosswindOperations.
• The short-field take-off- Exercise 13g, Short-FieldOperations.
• The soft-field take-off - Exercise 13h, Soft-Field Operations.
However, in the UK these take-offs actually form part of
Exercise 12 for the purpose of standard Flying Training Records.
Circuits, Approaches and Landings 215
Exercise 1Ja
The Circuit, Powered Approach and
Normal Landing
Aim
To continue a normal circuit for a powered approach and landing
into wind.
Considerations
Continuing from Exercise 12, this manoeuvre involves:
• flying an accurate circuit based on the runway used;
• making a powered descent, an approach; and
• an into-wind landing.
(Left) Downwind
(Left) LEFT-HAND CIRCUIT (Left)

Base Cross-
wind
Windsock
Final
CE> Upwind
I
I
'
(Right) I I .
(RIGHT-HAND CIRCUIT) (Right}
Base I I Cross-
I wind
(Right) Downwind /
- - - - - - - ,◄◄- - - - - - - - - _...,,,.
■ Figure13a-1 The circuit pattern
Wind
Landinto a headwind Landing into wind is desirable because:
if possible. • for a given airspeed on approach, a headwind gives the lowest
groundspeed;
• there is no tendency to drift sideways;
• it allows the best directional control both in flight and on the
ground; and
• the landing distance required is least.
216 CIRCUITS, APPROACHES AND LANDINGS
Landing Distance
If necessary, consult the landing chart to confirm that the runway Ensurethatthelanding
is adequate for the conditions and aeroplane weight. High distance available
elevations and high temperatures decrease air density and increase is adequate.
the landing distance required, as does a tailwind component, a
downslope, or a contaminated runway.
Power
An engine-assisted approach is the normal procedure, since: Usepowerintheapproach
• you can control the rate of descent and approach flightpath andlanding.
in varying winds;
• the engine is kept warm (ensuring power is available for a go-
around); and
• the change of attitude in the round-out from a powered
approach to the landing attitude is less compared with that for
a glide approach.
Flap
Using flap provides: Useflapintheapproach
• a lower stalling speed, thus permitting a lower approach andlanding.
speed while retaining an adequate margin over the stall;
• a steeper flightpath at a given airspeed, because of the
increased drag;
• a lower nose attitude at a given airspeed, providing a better
view of the approach and landing path;
• a shorter hold-off and a shorter landing run because of the
increased drag and the lower airspeed.
NOTE The amount of flap used will depend on the aeroplane and
the wind conditions actually prevailing. In strong and gusty winds
it may be preferable to use less than full flap (possibly no flap at all)
for better controllability and power response. Your flying
instructor will advise you.

Flying the Circuit
A good landing is most likely following a good approach. Fly an
accurate circuit and get setup early. Make a "Downwind" call
abeam the take-off end of the runway, complete the pre-landing
drills and keep a good lookout, both for other aircraft and to
check your position relative to the runway.
The Pre-Landing Check
Completing the pre-landing check by about the mid-point on the Thepre-landing
check
downwind leg allows you to concentrate fully on your base turn, shouldbe completed
approach and landing. ondownwind leg.
13a - TheCircuit,PoweredApproachand Nonna/ Landing 217
Know the pre-landing drill for your aeroplane. It will include

such items as:
• Brakes OFF;
• Mixture RICH;
• Fuel: correct tank(s) selected, contents sufficient, fuel pump
on (if fitted) and fuel pressure normal, fuel primer locked;
• Flaps as required (and consider what flap you will use on
approach, since this may affect where you turn onto base leg);
• Hatches (doors) and harnesses (seatbelts): SECURE.
Turning Base
A medium level turn from dowhwind onto base leg is made when
the touchdown point on the runway lies approximately 30°
behind. This is the 8 o'clock position from the track of the
aeroplane. In a strong wind, the turn should be commenced
earlier to keep base leg closer to the aerodrome boundary.
Allow for drift on base leg so that the wind does not carry the
aeroplane too far from the field and to maintain the rectangular
circuit pattern. The amount of drift can assist you in estimating
wind strength - the greater the drift angle on base, the stronger
the headwind on final.
-=m
=o
-
~= -
- N=
..
- 0 Commence
.... descentat any
pointfrom here on
....
~ I
I
I
I
* Wind '\
...
•
\°
0 Turn at
approx.
8 o'clock
\, position Look!
'.
I
I
Base
leg
+
'oo__, ___ out I
I
..,,, .... I
n...Jl►-1--~-0>~
~;!---
Downwind leg
·-/
01
0 Downwind 8 Pre-landing 8 Observe
radio call checks passing abeam (.,)
(if appropriate) the threshold.
■ Figure 1Ja-2 Positioning in the circuit and turning base
Commencing Descent on Base Leg

An approximate descent point for a normal engine-assisted approach
to the aiming point on the runway lies at 45° to the aeroplane's track
on base leg. In strong winds, when base is usually flown closer to the
aerodrome boundary, the descent point at 45° will still be suitable.
The descent should be judged so that you roll out on final no
lower than 500 ft above aerodrome level (aal). This means that the
turn onto final should be commenced not below 600 ft aal. With
a little experience, you will get a feel for just where to commence
descent to achieve this. Judgement develops with experience.
The availability of power and flap also gives you the ability to
control your descent flightpath as you wish.
Flap for the approach and landing should be used as
recommended in the Pilot's Operating Handbook and as advised
by your flying instructor.
• Reference point
-
: for tracking
r---=
N= +Final--.....,~
'•,,. \J
'"",,,_ I,
I Base
Wind '•,, I leg
'• •,
•.•, I
Commence descent:
·-----d
• Reduce power
~
(carb heat as
required)
Down;nd leg ➔··- __ Normal

ba_s_e_p_o_s_iti_o_n
_/
/ • Flaps as required
• Attitude for descent
speed
• Trim
■ Figure1Ja-3 Commencing descent on base leg
Final Approach
The turn onto final is a medium descending turn in which you Aimto be linedup on final
should: by at least 500 ~ above
• limit the bank angle to 30° or less, maintaining balance with aerodromelevel.
rudder pressure;
• adjust the bank angle to coincide with the interception of the
runway centreline;
• aim to be lined up on final at or above 500 ft aal;
• maintain airspeed with elevator.
The runway perspective as seen from the cockpit will indicate
whether you are in line with the runway or not. If not, then do
something about it!
■ Figure1Ja-4 Runway perspective on final approach

13a - The Circuit, Powered Approach and Norma( Landing 219
Steep turns near the ground should be avoided. If you

overshoot the turn onto final, rather than steepen the turn, fly
through final and rejoin it from the other side without exceeding
a medium bank angle.
Final .,..- ,,.- - - - , , If overshooting final,
----- ~ ~--:.....---- , steepen to a maximum of 30°
89
\ bank angle - no steep turns.
If undershooting f
ease off the bank a
Ideally 15° to _
20° bank angle -
maximum of 30°
■ Figure1Ja-5 Turning onto final approach
Wind Effect
Allow for wind effect when A tailwind on base will increase the aeroplane's speed over the
turning f,naf. ground and the turn should be commenced a little early to avoid
flying through final. Conversely, if there is a headwind on base,
the turn onto final can be delayed. If any crosswind exists on final,
then lay-off drift so that the aeroplane tracks along the extended
centreline of the runway, ensuring that the aeroplane is in balance.
Crab into the wind Crab into the wind
Delay the
Wind~ Wind* turn to final
Begin the turn Delay the

I to final earlier descent
Wind~ Wind*
Begin the
descent
earlier
Tailwind Headwind
on base leg on base leg
■ Figure1Ja-6 Allow for wind effect when turning final
Windshear and Turbulence on Final

The wind o~en changes in It is usual for the wind to change in strength and direction near
strength and direction near the ground due to friction and other causes. A sudden reduction
the ground.
in the headwind component will cause a reduction in indicated
airspeed, which can result in an increased sink rate. Turbulence on
final also causes airspeed and descent rate fluctuations.
If a strong wind gradient is suspected, then consider flying the

approach using a lower flap setting (or no flap at all) and a higher
approach speed than normal. The aeroplane will be more stable
and more responsive compared to when full flap is lowered and a
slow airspeed flown.
Runway Perspective
The perspective of the runway seen on approach will depend on
the position of the aeroplane. If it is too high, then the runway
will appear longer and narrower than usual and a steep flightpath
will be required to arrive near the aiming point for round-out. If
the aeroplane is too low, then the runway will appear shorter and
wider than usual and the aeroplane will have to be 'dragged in'
with power.
Either of these situations can be remedied and the earlier the bet- Take positiveactionwith
ter! Adjust the rate of descent and the flightpath (using power and power and attitude
attitude) so that the runway assmnes its n01mal perspective as soon to stay on slope and
on speed.
as possible. This n1ay require fi1m and positive action, but the
sooner you do it, the n1ore likely you are to make a good landing.
Too high Just right Too low
■ Figure13a-7 Runway perspective on approach
Fly a Stabilised Approach

The approach path to the runway is three-dimensional. A good A stable approachsets you
approach requires tight control of the flightpath and of the up for a good landing.
airspeed (i.e. a stabilised approach), and this will set the scene for
a good landing. Landing flap should be selected by at least 300 ft
aal and the aeroplane retrimmed.
✓
Aim Aim
point point
----
■ Figure130-8 Fly a stabilised approach
13a - TheCircuit,PoweredApproachand NormalLanding 221
Approach at the selected indicated airspeed (IAS) on a suitable

slope and remain aligned with the extended runway centreline.
This will require positive and firm action on your part. The
approach speed chosen will depend on the flap selected and the
prevailing conditions (wind strength and direction, or the
suspected presence of gustiness, windshear, turbulence or wake
turbulence).
The Aiming Point

Ideally, the aiming point should remain fixed in the windscreen -
the runway appearing larger and larger as it is approached,
without its perspective changing.
■ Figure 1Ja-9 Ideally, the aiming point remains fixed in the windscreen
If the aiming point moves progressively up the windscreen,

then the aeroplane is undershooting. Conversely, if the aiming
point moves progressively down the windscreen, then the
aeroplane is overshooting. In either case, you must take positive
action to modify the approach path .
.■, Figure 1Ja-10 Fly the aeroplane down the desired approach path
Airspeed Control
Controlairspeedwith Power plus attitude equals performance. Any change in power
elevatorand ~ightpathwith will require a change in pitch attitude if the same airspeed is to be
power. maintained.
• If power is added, raise the nose to nuintain airspeed.
• If power is reduced, lower the nose to maintain airspeed.
Keeping the aeroplane in trim during the approach will make

your task considerably easier.
Undershooting
If the actual approach path projects to a point short of the aiming
point (indicated by the aiming point moving up the windscreen
and the runway appearing shorter and wider), then regain the
desired flightpath by adding power and raising the nose to
maintain airspeed.
■ Figure1Ja-11 Undershooting: to correct, add power and raise the nose
Overshooting
If the actual approach path projects beyond the aiming point (indi-
cated by the aiming point moving down the windscreen and the
runway appearing longer and nan_-ower),steepen the descent by:
• increasing flap and adjusting the pitch attitude; or
• reducing power and lowering the nose to maintain airspeed.
■ Figure1Ja-12 Overshooting: to correct, reduce power and lower the

nose, or increase flap
Flightpath Corrections
You will make many corrections to the approach flightpath. Most
flightpaths fluctuate between a slight overshoot and a slight
undershoot and continual minor corrections are required. Ideally,
of course, you will always be on the perfect slope.
Short Final
A good landing is most likely following a good approach, so aim
to be well established in a stabilised approach, with the aeroplane
nicely trimmed, by the time you reach short final. Shortfinal for a
training aeroplane may be thought of as the last 200 ft. Do not
allow significant deviations in flightpath, tracking or airspeed to
develop and destabilise the approach.
Carburettor heat will normally be returned to COLD on short
final in case maximum power is required for a go-around;
however, ificing conditions exist, follow the guidance provided in
your Pilot's Operating Handbook.
Throughout the final approach and landing, have your:
• left hand on the control column to control attitude; and
• right hand on the throttle to control power.
The Landing
The landing starts with a round-out commencing at about 20 feet
above the runway and does not finish until the end of the landing
run. Once you reach the round-out height, forget the aiming
point because you will fly over and well past it before the wheels
actually touch down. It has served its purpose and you should now
look well ahead.
A normal landing is similar to a power-off stall, with
touchdown just prior to the moment of stall. This method of
landing allows the lowest possible touchdown speed (significantly
less than the approach speed), with the pilot still having full
control.
The landing consists of four phases:
1. The flare (or round-out).
2. The hold-off
3. The touchdown.
4. The landing run.
Flare
(or round-out)
~
Hold-off period
(throttle closed)
Approx. 20 ft • -~~x;t.
'
■ Figure 1Ja-13 The landing
1. The Flare
Breaktherateof descent During the flare (or round-out) the power is reduced and the nose
asyounearthe ground. is gradually raised to break the rate of descent. The rate of sink is
checked with the control column - a high rate of sink requiring
a greater backward movement to check it.
2. The Hold-Off
The hold-off should occur with the aeroplane close to the ground Hold the aeroplaneoff for
(within a foot or so). The throttle is closed and the control column as long as possible,juSt
progressively brought back to keep the aeroplane flying level with above the runway.
the wheels just off the ground. If sinking, apply more back pressure;
if moving away from the ground, relax the back pressure. The
airspeed will be decreasing to a very low figure, but this is of no
concern to you. You should be looking well ahead from the
beginning of round-out until touchdown. Any sideways drift
caused by a slight crosswind can be counteracted by lowering the
into-wind wing a few degrees and keeping straight with rudder.
3. The Touchdown
In the touchdown, the main wheels should make first contact Touchdown on the
with the ground (which will be the case following a correct hold- main wheels.
off). The nosewheel is kept off the ground using the control
column while the speed decreases.
4. The Landing Run
During the landing run the aeroplane is kept rolling straight down Keep on the runway
the centreline using rudder and the wings kept level with aileron. centrelineduringthe
The nosewheel is finally lowered to the ground before elevator groundrollusingrudder,
and keep the wingslevel
control is lost. Brakes (if required) may be used once the
with aileron.
nosewheel is on the ground. Remember that the landing is not
complete until the end of the landing run when the aeroplane is
stationary or at taxiing speed.
■ Figure130-14 Some typical attitudes in the approach and round-out

13a - TheCircuitPoweredApproachand NormalLanding 225
Judgement in the Flare and Landing

To assist in judging the height of the wheels above the ground and
the rate at which the aeroplane is 'sinking', your eyes should
remain 'outside the cockpit' from shortly before commencing the
flare (when airspeed is no longer important) until the end of the
landing run.
To achieve the best depth perception and develop a feel for just
where the main wheels are in relation to the ground, it is best to
look ahead and to the left of the aeroplane's nose. If you look too
close, the ground will be blurred as it passes by; too far and your
depth perception will suffer.
Avoid looking directly over the nose. This makes it difficult to
raise the nose in the flare and still retain depth perception, as well
as causing a tendency to fly the aeroplane into the ground,
resulting in a heavy touchdown (possibly nosewheel first) and
even a bounce.
The After-Landing Check

Once clear of the runway, stop the aeroplane, set idle rpm (1,000
to 1,200 rpm as recommended) and complete the after-landing
check as specified in the Pilot's Operating Handbook. It will
contain such items as:
• Flaps RETRACT;
• Carburettor heat check COLD (hot air may be unfiltered);
• Fuel pump OFF (if fitted);
• Throttle friction nut LOOSEN.
Airmanship
Airmanshipinvolvesflying Fly a neat circuit pattern, on height and on speed. Commence
accuratelyand smoothly, descent once on base leg to position the aeroplane for a turn that
and exercisinggood will have you lined up on final at or above 500 ft aal. Use flap as
judgement.
appropriate.
Fly a stabilised approach on slope, on the extended centre-
line and on speed. Maintain firm, positive and tight control of all
three.
Although you will be very busy, remain aware of other aircraft.
Keep a good lookout.
Airwork 13a
PoweredApproach and Normal Landing
Aim To make an approach with power and land into wind.
21. Keep straight with 17. Raise nose to

rudder and wings level reduce sink rate.
with aileron.
22. Stop - using

~---~------
20. Gently lower the 19. Touch down on main 18. Progressively raise nose
brakes as nosewheel onto wheels and hold nose- to hold off just above
necessary. the runway. wheel off, keeping the runway.
straight with rudder.
*
Wind
START
HERE
Downwind leg Lookout
l:1eg,npre-landing checks
PATH OVER THE GROUND

-------· :
------------------------- ;
13a - TheCircuit,PoweredApproachand Normal Landing 227
Airwork 13a
14. Keep aiming point in a __,,,.

constant position in the
15. Carb heat windscreen. Control
COLD in case flightpath with power and
16. Begin flare of go-around. airspeed with elevator.
and fully close
the throttle.
t
approx. 20 ft 9. A medium
descending turn,
* 10. Select
ideally 15-20° bank
(30° maximum).
11. Hold attitude landing
Control airspeed
to attain final flap.
12. Lower nose with elevator.
approach
to maintain
speed.
13. Trim. approach
speed. l
a:Aim to begin
~ l turn onto final
(continued
above) I lj at between
600-700 ft aal.
___ ,__ . -- r - ~
'L' -'-'+-*'""""""·
.• 'r; ~?'
(Y ---=
..
'
6. Control rate ~f descent wi~ power
and airspeed with elevator .
. . /
5. Lower early stage of flap and lower·
..
,,
'
nose to commence descent.
'
'' i Maintain height; reduce 'speed. )'
.. /
' 3. Redu·ce power (carb heat as required). /
-l- /
!/
1. 30° banked level iurn (maintain height) //
8 o'clock I
position /
/
/
/
/ Final
/ ..
•,
i/ •,
•,•, Base
./
/ \,. ~
Wind
/ \ leg
/ 8 o'.clock\. .
position 0/ J
/
[ /
_,,_,,,- J
--'-'-
Further Points
Common Faults in the Landing
Every pilot learns how to land through experience. It is inevitable
that many landings will be far from perfect, but progress will be
made when you can recognise faults and correct them. Three very
common faults are the balloon (when the aeroplane moves away
from the ground before touchdown), the bounced landing (when
it moves away from the ground after touchdown, perhaps after
several touchdowns) and rounding out too high.
The Balloon
A balloon can be caused by either:
• too much back pressure on the control column; and/ or
• too much power left on; and/ or
• too high an airspeed; and/ or
• a gust of wind.
To correct for a small balloon:
• relax some of the back pressure on the control column;
• allow the aeroplane to commence settling (sinking) again;
• when approaching the hold-off height, continue the backward
movement of the control column; and
• complete the landing normally.
-
■ Figure1Ja-15 Correcting for a small balloon
A LARGE BALLOON. A large balloon may call for a go-around,
certainly for an inexperienced pilot. As experience is gained, it
may be possible to reposition the aeroplane (possibly using power)
for the flare and landing, but this uses up lots of runway. The
decision to attempt a recovery from a large flare will therefore
depend on the extent of your experience and on the runway
length remaining.
The Bounced Landing

A bounce can be caused by:
• a failure to round out sufficiently;
• touching down on the nosewheel (possibly caused by looking
over the nose);
• touching down too fast;
• excessive backward movement of the control column; or
• flaring too high.
An inexperienced pilot should consider an immediate

go-around following a bounce. With experience, however, a
successful recovery from a bounce can be made (provided that the
runway length is adequate) by relaxing the back pressure and
adding power if necessary to reposition the aeroplane suitably to
recommence the landing. Avoid pushing the nose down as a
second bounced landing may result.
Avoid a second touchdown on the nosewheel - a series of
kangaroo hops down the runway is not a desirable way to land an
aeroplane! Prior to touchdown, make sure that the aeroplane is in
the correct nose-high attitude (even if it is the second
touchdown).
The nose rises, the wings

produce more lift and the
airplane flies away from Hold the pitch attitude
the ground and add power if necessary When the aeroplane is close
to the runway again, flare
\
_ru~-~-~1"4'~,,.~~---
and hold off normally
■, Figure 13a-16 Recovery from a bounced landing
Rounding Out and Holding Off Too High

The hold-off is best completed within a foot or so of the ground.
Any more than this and a landing somewhat heavier than usual
will result.
If you recognise before 'impact' that you are too high, add
power; this will break the descent rate somewhat and allow a less
heavy touchdown. Immediately the wheels touch the ground,
close the throttle, otherwise the aeroplane may not decelerate.
Holding off too high usually results from either:
• not looking far enough into the distance, with the result that th~
ground rushing by is blurred and depth perception is poor; or
• a second attempt to land following a balloon or bounce.
NOTE The more experienced you become, the less likely you are
to find yourself bouncing, ballooning or rounding out too high. It
is part of the average student pilot's lot to become somewhat of an
expert at recovering from misjudged landings, but this phase will
not last too long.
The Go-Around or Baulked Approach

If at any stage during the approach or landing you feel
uncomfortable about the situation, carry out a go-around (also
known as a baulked approach, overshoot or discontinued
approach). This manoeuvre is covered fully in Exercise 13b.
Touch-and-Go Landings
The number of practice circuits per hour can be greatly increased
by doing touch-and-go landings. This involves a normal approach
and landing and then, when established in the landing run and
after the nosewheel has been gently lowered onto the ground (and
with sufficient runway length remaining):
• move the flap to the take-off setting;
• apply full power and perform a normal take-off without
having stopped.
In a touch-and-go take-off, the trim may not be set for take-
off and so there will be a reasonable amount of forward pressure
required on the control column to hold the nose in the climb
attitude. Once established in the climb away from the ground, this
pressure can be trimmed off.
2. Flaps to take-off
Normal flare position and apply Normal ~
~...-... and touchdown 1• Keep full power takeoff "
straight (carb heat - COLD) 3. Accelerate _.--
_________ _..., _____ ~~~~----------1 ...,_-----
■ Figure1Ja-17 The touch-and-go landing
If the landing is misjudged and excessive runway is used, then

bring the aeroplane to a stop as in a normal landing, rather than
continue with a doubtful take-off on possibly insufficient runway
with a degraded obstacle clearance in the climb-out.
Turbulence in the Circuit Area
Friction affects the air flowir:ig over the earth's surface, leading to
the wind at ground level being different from that at circuit height
and higher. Any change in wind speed and/ or direction is called
windshear, and it can cause turbulence.
Uneven heating of the earth's surface will cause vertical
convection currents, also leading to turbulence. You experience
this as a bumpy ride with a fluctuating airspeed .
......
~
Lift
A ploughed field
(experiences greater heating)
■ Figure1Ja-18 Turbulence has various causes

In turbulent conditions, it is advisable to carry a few extra

knots on the approach to give you better controllability. A flapless
approach should be considered, since it will make the aeroplane
more responsive to a power increase (due to the lower drag).
Wake Turbulence
Significant wake turbulence can form behind the wingtips oflarge
aeroplanes flying at high angles of attack (e.g. during take-off and
landing). The vortices that cause the turbulence drift downwards
and with the wind. They are best avoided! Never be afraid to
delay a take-off or approach if you suspect that wake turbulence
from another aircraft (fixed-wing or rotary) could be a problem.
For more about wake turbulence see Volume 4 of The Air Pilot's
Manual.
--
-
>
,,,_._---~
----- L ~-...
~
Wind
...-
;;, - ··,
....~
.,.,.,
,..~-,
.,-::-~-
Hea;
.....111,-----=:,,,.._--=
• s flight-:-..
Pa.tf,
✓,,,../ Manoeuvre/
to windwid
■ Figure13a-19 Avoid wake turbulence from large aircra~

Exercise 1Jb
The Go-Around
Aim
To enter a climb fron1 a flapped approach.
Considerations
Why Go-Around?
It may be necessa1y to perform a go-around for various reasons: The go-around is a climb-
• the runway is occupied by an aeroplane, a vehicle or animals; away from a discontinued
approachto land.
• you are too close behind an aeroplane on final approach that
will not have cleared the runway in time for you to land;
• the conditions are too severe for your experience (turbulence,
windshear, heavy rain, excessive crosswind, etc.);
• your approach is unstable (in terms of airspeed or flightpath);
• you are not aligned with the centreline or directional control is
a problem;
• the airspeed is far too high or too low;
• you are too high at the runway threshold to touch down safely
and stop comfortably within the confines of the runway;
• you are not mentally or physically at ease;
• following a balloon or bounced landing.
The Effect of Flap

Full flap causes a significant increase in drag. This has advantages Full ffap makes a climb-
in the approach to land - it allows a steeper descent path, the away difficult.
approach speed can be lower and the pilot has a better fo1ward
view.
Full flap has no advantages in a climb - in fact establishing a
reasonable rate of climb may not be possible with full flap
extended. For this reason, when attempting to enter a climb from
a flapped descent, consideration should be given to raising the
flap. It should be raised in stages to allow a gradual increase in
airspeed as the climb is established.

Establish a Descent
Follow the usual descent procedures and lower an appropriate
stage of flap. Initially, it may be desirable to practise the go-around
manoeuvre with only an early stage of flap extended (or perhaps
none at all), as would be the case early in the approach to land.
13b- TheGo-Around 233
A go-around with full flap requires more attention because of

the aeroplane's poorer climb performance.
Initiating a Go-Around
A successful go-around requires that a positive decision be made
and positive action taken. A sign of a good pilot is a decision to
go around when the situation demands it - the manoeuvre being
executed in a firm, but smooth manner.
The procedure to use is similar to that already practised when
entering a climb from a 'clean' descent. P-A-T: power-attitude-
trim. The additional consideration is flap, which will be raised when
the descent is stopped and the climb (or level flight) is initiated.
To INITIATE A GO-AROUND smoothly apply full power (counting
"one-two-three" fairly quickly is about the correct timing to
achieve full power) and move the carburettor heat to COLD.
Keep the aeroplanestraight Be prepared for a strong pitch-up and yawing tendency as the
and the wingslevel. power is applied. These tendencies can be counteracted with
forward pressure on the control column and rudder pressure. Hold
the nose in the desired climb attitude for the flap that is set, and
then trim. The initial pressure and trim required may be quite
significant, especially with full flap.
Full flap creates a lot of drag and only a poor climb
performance at a suitable airspeed may be possible. In this case
level flight might be necessa1y while the flap setting is initially
reduced. If only an P'.lrly stage of flap is extended, a reasonable
climb can be entered without delay .
• Power - FULL • Initially retract flap • Clear of obstacles, accelerate • Accelerate to the best
(carb heat - COLD) to a take-off setting. , to the best angle of climb rate of climb airspeed,
• Attitude change • Target airspeed is the airspeed, Vx (say 60 kt). Vv (say 76 kt).
• Trim obstacle-clearance • Retract the flaps. •Trim as necessary. •
airspeed (say 55 kt). • Trim as necessary.
• Trim as necessary.
Make a
timely decision
,to go around.
P-A-T
Control the airspeed
with elevator.
■ Figure13b-1 The go-around
As the aeroplane accelerates to an appropriate speed, raise the

flap in stages and adjust the pitch attitude to achieve the desired
speeds and climb performance. Lift flap (the last stage of flaps is
not normally retracted below 200 ft agl). Trim as required.
Airmanship
Make a positive decision to go-around, then perform it decisively. Airmanshipis
Exert firm, positive and smooth control over the aeroplane. Firm beingdecisive.
pressure must be held on the control column and rudder pedals
when the power is applied. Correct trimming will assist you
greatly.
Ensure that a safe airspeed is reached before each stage of flap
is raised. Once established comfortably in the climb-out, advise
the Air Traffic Service unit (and the other aircraft in the circuit) by
radio that you are going around.
It is usual, once established in the go-around, to move slightly
to one side of the runway so that you have a view of aeroplanes
that may be operating off the runway and beneath you. The
'dead-side' away from the circuit direction is preferred.
Following the go-around, delay turning onto crosswind leg
until at least at the upwind end of the runway to avoid conflict in
the circuit.
13b- TheGo-Around 235
Airwork 13b
The Go-Around
Aim To enter a climb from a flapped descent
With the Aeroplane Established in a Flapped Descent

1. Make a firm decision to go around.
2. P-A-T:
P - power-throttle OPEN FULLY (carb heat COLD);
A - attitude - raise nose to appropriate pitch attitude;
T - trim.
3. Raisethe flaps slowly, in stages.
4. Adjust pitch attitude (higher as flaps are retracted), and maintain
speed with elevator.
5. Retrim for the climb-out.
Look out during the manoeuvre,especiallyin a real go-aroundsituation.
• Power - FULL • Initially retract flap • Clear of obstacles, accelerate • Accelerate to the best
(carb heat - COLD) to a take-off setting. to the best angle of climb rate of climb airspeed,
• Attitude change . • Target airspeed is the airspeed, Vx (say 60 kt). Vv (say 76 kt).
• Trim obstacle-clearance • Retract the flaps. •Trim as necessary.
airspeed (say 55 kt). • Trim as necessary.
• Trim as necessary.
Make a
timely decision
to go around.
Exercise 1lc
Departing and Joining the Circuit
Aim
The aim of this Exercise is to become familiar with standard
procedures and considerations when:
1. Departing from the circuit after take-off on a flight to the
training area or on a cross-country flight; and
2. Returning to the aerodrome from outside the circuit area with
the intention of joining the circuit for an approach and landing.
Considerations
A lot of your early training will be carried out away from the
airfield and this gives you a chance to develop good habits in
departing from and rejoining the circuit. It should be noted that
procedures for circuit departure and circuit joining vary between
countries and, if flying overseas, you should ask to be briefed on
them. The procedures here refer to the United Kingdom.
For flights away from the circuit area, you need to be confident
of your:
• local area knowledge (landmarks and airspace restrictions);
• circuit departure and rejoining procedures for your
particular aerodrome;
• altimet1y procedures;
• radio procedures;
• en route or regular checks to ensure satisfactory operation of
the aeroplane;
• ability to fly a particular heading using the magnetic
compass.
Departing the Circuit

Follow any Air Traffic Control instructions given. If ATC is not
active at your field, then you should plan a circuit departure that
will not conflict with other aircraft in the circuit or joining it.
Also, follow any special procedures applicable to your field.
An efficient means of departing an uncontrolled field is to
extend the upwind leg as you climb out after take-off and then,
when clear of other circuit traffic, manoeuvre to set heading for
the local training area (or the first leg of your cross-country flight).
13c- DepartingandJoiningthe Circuit 237
Depart here
/
\
- --
\
Depart
\
here
\
\
Continue climb in the circuit pattern

until over the aerodrome at 2,000 ft aal,
and then depart in any direction
■ Figure 13c-1 Departing the circuit
Once outbound to the local training area, ensure that Q NH is

set in the subscale so that the altimeter will read height above
mean sea level (amsl). Heights of mountains, radio masts, etc., are
shown as heights amsl on charts.
Joining the Circuit

You should always have prior knowledge of the elevation of the
aerodrome you intend to use.
Approaching the circuit, set the altimeter subscale to QNH or
QFE (as advised by the ATS unit) according to your normal
procedure. With QNH set the altimeter will read height above
mean sea level; with QFE set the altimeter will read height above
aerodrome level (aal).
Height aal Height amsl

(above aerirome level) (above mean sea level)
Spot
height
t
Aerodrome
on chart
~
elevation
■ Figure 13c-2 The altimeter reads height amsl with QNH set; height aal
with QFE set
When arriving at an aerodrome, follow any Air Traffic Control

instructions given. If ATC is not active at your field, then you
should plan an arrival that will not conflict with other aircraft in the
circuit and follow any special procedures applicable to the field.
The usual methods of entering the circuit pattern are either:
• to join on downwind leg at circuit height, provided you
know the circuit in use; or
• overhead join: overfly at 2,000 ft above aerodrome level,
determine the circuit direction (if not already known) from the
windsock or signals area, descend to circuit height on the
inactive ('dead') side and then join the circuit by crossing the
upwind end of the runway.
, -- ......,_ - - --.\
I I \
I I I I
T I T I
♦
Establish
On dead side of field circuit
commence descent / direction
to circuit height
I I
T T
Be at
circuit
height
' ---►-----
Descend to circuit
'
---►---
I
height well before

entering on Overfly field at
downwind leg 2,000 ft aal
■ Figure1Jc-3 Joining the circuit
FurtherPoints
Orientation
In poor visibility you may not be able to see the aerodrome from Flyingmagneticheadings
your local training area. You should become familiar with all the can assistyour orientation
local landmarks (e.g. reservoirs, railway lines, motorways, towns, in the vicinityofthe
aerodrome.
villages, churches, other airfields, radio towers, etc.) that will lead
you to your home field. You should also know the approximate
magnetic heading to steer to return home.
13c - DepartingandJoiningthe Circuit 239
The magnetic compass suffers errors when the aeroplane is

turning or otherwise accelerating. It gives accurate headings only
when the aeroplane is in straight flight at a steady airspeed.
Therefore, to maintain an accurate magnetic heading, fly straight
at a constant speed, making use of external reference points on the
horizon if you can.
If a turn is needed, select a new external reference point and
turn onto it. Allow the compass to settle down and then check the
heading. If you use the direction indicator, ensure that it is aligned
with the magnetic compass during straight and steady flight.
Being a gyroscopic instrument, the DI (once aligned correctly) is
easier to use than the compass.
QDM
Some ATS units are able to determine the position of an aircraft
from its radio transmissions. This is a useful facility if you are lost
and request navigation assistance.
In such a situation, the ATS unit will advise you of the
magnetic track to the station, known as QDM. You can then steer
a suitable heading to allow for drift due to the wind to make good
this track. The QDM may be revised by the ATS unit, if
necessary, as the return to the field progresses.
Wind
HDG
330
■ Figure1Jc-4 An ATS unit can provide a QDM (magnetic track) to the

aerodrome
In-Flight Checks
In-flight checksof the While flying the aeroplane for long periods, either en route, in the
aeroplaneshould be made local training area, or for prolonged periods in the circuit area,
regularly. periodic checks (say every 15 minutes or so) should be made of
the various systems that are vital to safe flight.
Your flying instructor will ensure that you perform the

appropriate check, but it will contain items such as are included in
this FREDA check:
FREDA IN-FLIGHT CHECK
F Fuel
Fuelon and sufficient.
Fuel tank usage monitored.
Mixture rich or leaned as required.
Fuelpump on (if fitted and if required)and fuel pressure checked.
R Radio
Radiofrequencycorrectlyselected,volumeand squelchsatisfactory.
Make any necessary radio calls.
E Engine
Engineoil temperature and pressure; mixture set correctly;carburettorheat if
required;checkof other systems (ammeter for electricalsystem; suctiongauge
for air-drivengyroscopes if installed).
D Direction
Directionindicatoralignedwith magneticcompass (only realignthe DI with the
magneticcompass in steady straight and level ~ight).
A Altitude
Altitude checkedand subscalesetting correct(normallyRegionalQNH
en route, and AerodromeQNH or QFEif joining a circuit).
It is good airmanship to perform these checks at regular

intervals on every flight and also just prior to entering the circuit
area (where your workload generally increases).
Important Emergency Radio Transmissions

As well as the more usual traffic-type radio calls, you may
occasionally hear distress or urgency signals. If ever you have to
make an emergency call or a distress call, you should also squawk
7700 on your transponder. This will alert the radar controller.
Example of a distress call:
MaydayMaydayMayday
GolfAlphaBravoCharlieDelta- Cessnaone seventwo
Enginefailed
Losingheight
Intendto landfivemilessouthof Ponte/and
Passingtwo thousandfeet
Headingtwo eightzero
Studentpilot
13c - Departing and Joining the Circuit 241
The use of the word Mayday (an anglicised version of the

French m 'aidez - 'help me') signifies a distress signal and it takes
priority over all other calls. It informs A TC that the pilot of the
aeroplane registered G-ABCD has a serious problem.
While A TC may offer helpful suggestions, the pilot in distress
must not be distracted from his main duty, which is to fly the
aeroplane as safely as possible. Remember that an aeroplane does
not need a radio to fly.
Example of an urgency call:
Pan-PanPan-PanPan-Pan
GolfBravoCharlieDelta Echo- PiperWarrior
Unsureofpositionin poor visibilitynorthof Airdrie
Cruisingtwo thousandfeet
Headingthree fourzero
Studentpilot
The use of the term Pan-Pan signifies that this is an urgency

signal. It informs ATC that the pilot of G-BCDE is requesting
assistance, but the use of Pan-Pan indicates that the aeroplane is in
no immediate danger. A Pan-Pan call is also appropriate if you
wish to report another aeroplane or ship in difficulty.
Hopefully, you will never have to make a distress or urgency
call of this nature but, if you do, remember to fly the aeroplane
first and make radio calls second. If you hear another pilot make
such a call, then impose a temporary radio silence on yourself for
a suitable period to avoid jamming these important transmissions
and ATC responses.
Light Signals from the Tower

If radio contact cannot be maintained at a towered aerodrome, the
tower controller can pass instructions to the pilot by means of
light-gun signals. Figure 13c-5 summarises the meanings of
these light signals. Refer to CAA CAP 637, Visual Aids Handbook,
for a full description.
. If ever you experience radio failure, you should squawk 7700
on your transponder for 1 minute, then 7600 for 15 minutes; and
repeat. This will alert the radar controller to your radio
communications failure.
For more about emergency radio calls and radio failure
procedures, see Vol. 7 of The Air Pilot's Manual - Radiotelephony.
Steady Red Give way to other White Flashes Green Flashes Return to this
aircraft and continue circling Land at this aerodrome aerodrome for landing
(await further instructions) after receiving a steady
♦•
green light (to appear
after Hashing green}
Red Flashes Aerodrome unsafe, ♦ ♦•

steady Green Authorised to land ii
♦♦
---
do not land (go somewhere else) pilot satisfied no colilis[on risk exists
~-- •♦
----- ..♦...
--- ..♦
♦•
.... - ---
Red Flashes • ..- ..... Steady G.reen Authorrsed to take off
Move clear of
landing area • • • • • •
• • • • • !!
<)'<>
if pilot satisfied no collision risk exists
.
Steady Red Stop
"- ..-2Owhite Flashes Return to Green Flashes Authorised to taxi if
~ starting point on aerodrome ~~;;;I pilot satisfied no collision risk exists
■ Figure13c-5 Light signals that can be beamed to aircra~

13d - TheFlaplessApproachand Landing 243
Exercise 13d
The FlaplessApproach and Landing
Aim
To approach and land without the use of flaps.
Considerations
A flapless approach will be necessary if a failure of any part of the
flap system occurs (a rare event), and is advisable- in strong and
gusty winds. Crosswind landings are often made in such
conditions.
Compared to a normal approach and landing with flap, the
main features of a flapless approach and landing are:
• a flatter flightpath (but not normally below a 3° approach)
requiring an extended circuit;
• a higher approach speed (due to the higher stalling speed);
• a higher nose attitude and poorer forward vision;
• almost no round-out and a longer float (due to less drag) if the
hold-off is prolonged before the aeroplane touches down;
• a risk of scraping the tail if the nose is raised too high on
touchdown; and
• a longer landing run.
It is most important to control the flightpath and airspeed fairly
tightly on a flapless approach. As usual, airspeed is controlled with
elevator and flightpath with power. If too high, reduce power and
lower the nose slightly - if the power is already at idle, consider a
sideslip to increase the rate of descent and lose height.
A 'clean' wing has less drag than a flapped wing, which means
that excess speed takes longer to 'wash-off, i.e. a flapless aero-
plane is 'slippery'. This can lengthen the hold-off and float con-
siderably. To avoid using too much runway and also to avoid the
risk of scraping the tail, do not prolong the hold-off, particularly
on a short runway.
Once the nosewheel is on the ground, brakes can be used if
required.
Airwork 13d
The FlaplessApproachand Landing
Aim: To approach and land without the use of flaps.
- -
(5)
9. A longer landing run.

1. Complete pre-landing
checks and decide 8. Touchdown.
on the approach
speed to be used.
7. A longer hold-off in ~- ,_ ,-
nose-high attitude. - £ l 1
6. Less attitude change

in the round-out.
Garb heat-COLD
in case of a go-around
5. Control the airspeed

precisely on final
(refer to the landing
profile at top).
T _
•-
2. Extend
downwind.
3. Begin descent earlier; 4. Begin the turn

carb heat as required. to final earlier.
13e- TheGlideApproachand Landing 245
Exercise 1:Je
The GlideApproachand Landing
Aim
To carry out an approach and landing without using power.
Considerations
Why Not Use Power?
The glide approach and landing made without the assistance of
power is very good for developing your judgement and is good
practice for emergency forced landings following an engine
failure. On a glide approach, the flightpath angle to the runway is
controlled mainly by the use of flaps to steepen it.
The Approach Flightpath

The flightpath on a glide On a normal, engine-assisted approach, power is used to control
approach is steep and the the rate of descent and the flightpath to the aiming point on the
round-outmore
runway. Without power, the descent rate is greater and the pitch
pronounced.
attitude of the aeroplane must be lower to maintain the desired
approach speed. The result is a steeper approach path to the
runway on a glide approach and so the aeroplane must be
positioned higher on final than normal. The lower nose position
in the glide, especially with full flap, will mean that the change of
pitch attitude required in the round-out will be greater.
Glide Glide
approach approach
Power-on ~ ~
approach ~- .. •
withflap ~
Zero-fl~
approach
with power
■ Figure 1Je-1 A glide approach is steep and the round-out more

pronounced
Flyingthe Manoeuvre
Base Leg Position
To achieve a steeper approach path to the aiming point on the Flya closerbase leg for a
runway, make the downwind leg shorter than normal, with base glideapproach,especially
leg flown closer to the field than in the normal power-assisted in strongwinds.
approach. In strong wind conditions, the base leg should be flown
even closer to the field to ensure that you do not undershoot.
Descent Point
Descent point on base leg should be carefully chosen since the aim Delaythe descentfrom
is, once power is removed, not to have to use it again. Use the circuitheighton a glide
amount of drift required on base to estimate the wind strength on approach.
final.
Ideally, if you have judged the closer base leg correctly, descent
may be commenced when the runway is at 45° (as for a normal
engine-assisted approach, except that the closer base leg means
that you are closer to the runway). Initially, aim well down the
runway (the initial aiming point should be approximately one
third to half way down the runway) so that the aeroplane is
definitely higher than normal on approach. The approach can
later be steepened with flap, whereas it cannot be flattened
without the use of power.
-"""T---~-
45°
- - - -..... - - - - - - - - - ....
\ ..,
\ 'I
Delay power reduction in a

4
Flapless
glide approach compared approach
with a powered approach
Glide approach -
turn base earlier
- ____ \x - - -
;
,I
Note: Turn all base legs Normal 8 o'clock base turn
sooner in strong winds position for powered approach
■ Figure13e-2 Turn base earlier and delay descent for a glide approach
Controlling the Flightpath

Use flap and tracking Use of the flaps in stages will steepen the glidepath and bring the
modifications to control the aiming point nearer the threshold. It is preferable to be high on
flightpath.
approach rather than too low.
If you are high on approach:
• extend some flap, lower the nose to achieve the correct
airspeed, and retrim; or
• widen out the base leg a little; or
• fly S-tums on final (but these can lead to an unstable approach
and so are best avoided).
If you are low on approach:
• delay the selection of flap; and/ or
• cut in on base leg to shorten final.
If hopelessly low, use power to reposition the aeroplane on the
glidepath or to go around and start again.
co- (!)-
N_
(\!_
'
' \\
I
1
I
Too high Too low I
t
I
Widen base Cut in base
Extend flap Delay selection
earlier of flap
--
■ Figure 1Je-3 Use flap to control flightpath, backed-up by tracking
modifications
Turns
Theglidepath will steepen Avoid steep gliding turns, since the descent rate will increase
in a turn. significantly and stalling speed will increase. Be prepared for an
increased rate of descent and a steepening of the glidepath in the
medium turn onto final.
Glide Distance
Do not allow airspeed to get too low by trying to 'stretch' the Do not try to
glide - it will not work! At very low airspeeds the flightpath will 'stretch'the glide.
steepen even though the nose position is high. Raising the flaps is
not advisable, since it will initially cause the aeroplane to sink. In
a strong headwind, a slightly higher approach speed may give the
aeroplane more 'penetration' even though the descent rate is
increased. Apply power and go around if the approach has been
badly misjudged.
Landing Flap
If the aiming point with partial flap is, say, a third of the way down Delaythe selectionof
the runway, selection of more flap will give you a new aiming landingffap untilcertainof
point nearer the threshold. Progressively lower the flap as reachingthe field.
required, but delay the selection of landing flap until you are
absolutely certain that the runway will be reached comfortably. In
a glide approach, a slight overshoot of the aiming point is
preferable to an unrecoverable undershoot.
.
' ' ''
'
:.... ··•i t· ...:
l •.
f u J •
■ Figure1Je-4 Bringing the aiming -point closer by lowering

additional flap
The Round-out
With full flap and no power, the glidepath will be steep and the In a glide approach,
nose attitude will be quite low to achieve the desired approach commencethe round-out
speed. The change of attitude in the round-out will be quite slightlyhigherthan normal.
pronounced and a gentle flare should be commenced a little
higher than normal. Make the appropriate type of landing
applicable to the conditions (crosswind, short-field, soft-field,
etc.).
Airwork 13e
TheGlideApproachand Landing
Aim To carryout an approachand landingwithoutthe use of power.
11. More pronounced 10. Carb heat COLD in 9. Select full flap when
round-out. case of go-around. absolutely certain of
reaching the field.
tJ~~~~ -----.,~ - - .,,., - ...., 8. Medium descendingturn, 20°

, ' \ angle of bank (30° max.).
', \\ \ Monitor airspeed closely.
Aiming \ \ I
points \ \ I
Look \ I I
out \ I I
\ I I 7. Adjust baseto arrive
\ I I higher than normal
\ I : on final.
I I I
II I
11I
I I 6. Select partial flap
as required.
5. Initially descend
45° clean (no flap).
• power OFF
(Carb heat HOT);
• maintain height until
speed reduces-to
glide speed;
• select glide attitude;
• trim.
START
HERE 3. Reassesswind effect.
Look
out
1.-Pr-e--1-an-d-in-g-ch_e_c-ks-.
-, -------2-. _T_u_rn-ba_s,._e
;.;;ier than usual,
especially in strong winds.
-®
Normal 8 o'clock
base turn position
Exercise 1 Jf
Crosswind Operations
Aim
To take off, fly a full circuit and land using a runway which is
experiencing a significant crosswind component.
Considerations
Not all aerodromes have a runway which is facing into wind on a
given day. For this reason, take-offs and landings on runways
where there is a crosswind component are frequent events.
Every aeroplane type (from the smallest trainer up to the Airbus Do not operatein
A340 and Boeing 7 4 7) has a maximum crosswind component crosswindconditions
specified in the Flight Manual and Pilot's Operating Handbook. If that exceedaircra~or
personallimits.
the actual crosswind component on the runway exceeds the limit
for the aeroplane and/ or what you feel is your own personal limit,
then use a different runway (which may even mean proceeding to
a different aerodrome).
Crosswind Strength
The crosswind component on a runway can be estimated from the
wind strength and the angle that the wind direction makes with
the runway.
100%----- .,.....___
Headwind
components
(10 kt wind)
50% - - -- -
50% 70% 90% 100%

Crosswind components
(10 kt wind)
■ Figure13(-1 Estimating crosswind component

13( - CrosswindOperations 251
As a rough guide:
• a wind 30° off the runway heading has a crosswind component
of 112the wind strength;
of 3I4 the wind strength;
of 7/8 the wind strength (nearly all);
• a wind 90° off the runway heading is all crosswind.
The Crosswind Circuit

The crosswind circuit is a rectangular pattern over the ground and
is based on the runway used. The standard names are given to the
various legs of the crosswind circuit, even though the actual wind
effect experienced on each of those legs may differ from what the
name of the leg suggests.
Adjustments should be made to allow for the wind effect in the
circuit, such as laying off drift and modifying the turns. Since the
wind at circuit height may differ in direction and strength from
that at ground level, make use of ground features to assist in
correct tracking around the circuit.
I
'I
I
I Standard
circuit
I
I
I
(
~
' ' Crosswind~
Wind
j '
circutt
' ,~ /
.
I
■ Figure13(-2 Lay-off dri~ to maintain a rectangular circuit pattern
When flying in a crosswind circuit, be aware that other aircraft

may be operating in a standard into-wind circuit and that their
traffic pattern may conflict with yours.
Aeroplanes in the standard circuit will generally have right of
way, so the 1nain responsibility for avoiding conflict is with the pilot
in the crosswind circuit. A crosswind circuit might sometimes be
flown at a different level to avoid conflict with the standard circuit.
Part (i)
Crosswind Take-Off

Weathercocking
In a crosswind, an aeroplane will tend to weathercock into wind Keep straightwith
because of the large keel surfaces behind the main wheels. ruddercontrol.
Provided that the crosswind limit for your aeroplane is not
exceeded, it will be possible to keep straight on the ground with
rudder without too much difficulty. A crosswind from the right will
require left rudder to counteract its effect - more rudder at slow
speeds and less as the airflow over the rudder increases. Use what-
ever rudder is required to keep straight. Holding the nosewheel
gently on the ground until lift-off will assist in directional control.
Lift on the Wings

A crosswind blowing under the into-wind wing will tend to lift it. Keep the wingslevel
Counteract this effect and keep the wings level with aileron, i.e. with aileron control.
move the control column into wind. While full deflection might
be required early in the take-off run, this can be reduced as the
faster airflow increases control effectiveness. You do not have to
think consciously of aileron movement; just concentrate on
keeping the wings level.
Weathervaning
tendency
DQWN UP
*
Rudder~J:l:;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;11
Wind
Aileron to keep the wings level
deflected to counteract yaw
■ Figure13(-3 Keep straight with rudder; and wings level with ailerons
Crossed Controls
A right crosswind, for example, requires right control column and The controlsare crossedin
left rudder, i.e. crossed controls. A glance at the windsock before a crosswindtake-off.
you open the throttle for the take-off run will allow you to
anticipate this and position the controls correctly.
13( - CrosswindOperations 253
As speed increases, the amount of aileron and rudder required

will reduce until, at lift-off, there will probably be some rudder
still applied, but little or no aileron. There is no need consciously
to think about this; just:
• keep straight with rudder; and
• keep the wings level with the ailerons.
Drift after Take-Off

Hold the aeroplane As the aeroplane enters the air mass after lift-off, it will tend to
firmly on the ground during move sideways with it. Any tendency to sink back onto the
the take-off run but do not
ground should be resisted to avoid the strong sideways forces that
allow any weight
transferenceon to the
would occur on the undercarriage.
nosewheel For this reason it is usual, in a crosswind take-off, to hold the aer-
(wheelbarrowing). oplane firmly on the ground during the ground run (with slight
forward pressure on the control column) and then lift off cleanly
and positively with a backward movement of the control column.
Li~ off cleanly. It may be advisable to delay lift-off until 5 kt or so past the
normal rotation speed to achieve a clean lift-off.
A~er li~-off. establish Once well clear of the ground, turn into wind sufficiently to
balancedµ;ght and apply a counteract the drift and climb out normally on the extended
wind correctionangle.
centreline of the runway. Any remaining crossed-control should
be removed once airborne by centralising the balance ball and
keeping the wings level.
1. Hold the aeroplane firmly 2. Lift off cleanly and
on the runway (slight establish the climb
forward pressure); turn attitude.
the control wheel into the 3. Remove 'crossed controls' 4. Normal climb-out,
wind to keep the wings as you turn into wind to maintaining the extended
level, with opposite rudder allow for drift. runway centreline by
to stay on the centreline. allowing for drift
■ Figure13(-4 The crosswind take-off
Airmanship
Maintain an exceptionally good lookout and give way to
aeroplanes using the into-wind runway and standard circuit,
which may conflict with your circuit.
Exert firm, positive control during this manoeuvre and ensure
a clean lift-off.
Airwork 13(, Part (i)

CrosswindTake-Off
Aim To take off on a runwaywitha crosswind
componentthat is belowthe limitfor the aeroplane.
Allow for Reference •

drift (if any) point :
11. Level off at circuit b bb• '
:i~rence height; A-P-T. y ftcr,
a • '". g ;
•--···-··~)(----- L.:::k--....,_ i
Look out _ ___\
10. This is still called crosswind 9. Climoing tum
f leg,but allow for the head- after 500 ft aal.
Allow or tailwind by adjusting
for drift position of turn onto I
I downwind leg.
Look
out
I
12. "Downwind" radio

call (if required).
8. Adopt climb attitude, and

simultaneously remove
crossed-controls - turn
into wind to allow for
drift.
7. When airspeed is slightly

above normal lift-off
speed, lift off cleanly.
This is still called 6. Keep straight with rudder,

downwind wings level with into-wind
aileron. Hold nosewheel
gently on the ground.
Check engine rpm
(power).
5. Line up on centreline,
2. Pre-take-off check windsock; brakes
START checks.
OFF, heels on floor,
HERE aileron into wind. Apply
full power smoothly.
1. Taxi for
crosswind
runway.
__ _,,.
3. "Ready for departure" 4. Look out - check runway

call (if required). approachesall clear left and right Also
check other runways in use.
13f - CrosswindOperations 255
Part (ii)
Crosswind Approach and Landing

Ensure that the crosswind component on the selected runway does
not exceed the limit for the aeroplane (or your own personal limit).
Adjust turn onto

final to allow for
_:;- -~ _ h".::d,o:tailwind
I
I Adjust descent
Adjust time on • ~ point to allow for
crosswind leg
to allow for head
- J.. head or tailwind
' on base
or tailwind I
\ I
Plan flap to
be used
■ Figure1Jf-5 Flying the crosswind circuit
Crosswind Circuit
Flythe crosswindcircuit Planning for the crosswind approach and landing starts early in the
accordingto the wind. circuit, even as you turn onto the crosswind leg shortly after take-
off A tailwind on the crosswind leg will tend to carry you wide;
a headwind will hold you in too close. Adjust each leg of the
circuit to position the aircraft suitably with respect to the runway.
Tailwind on Base Leg
Anticipatethe effect ofa A tailwind on base leg will increase your speed over the ground
tailwindon base leg. and tend to carry you past the runway. For this reason, you should
show some anticipation and:
• commence descent early;
• begin the turn onto final early; and
• continue the turn onto final beyond the runway heading to
allow for drift.
NOTE If you fly through final, avoid any tendency to overbank
(30° bank angle is a reasonable maximurn). Simply rejoin final
from the other side.
Headwind on Base Leg

Flyinginto a headwindon A headwind on base leg will decrease your speed over the ground,
base leg,you can affordto and so you can:
delaythe turn to final. • delay descent until later than usual;
• delay the turn onto final until almost in line with the runway;
and
• stop the turn short of runway heading to anticipate the
expected drift.
If you turn too early then you may not reach final, and a
positive turn will have to be made into wind to become
established. If you turn too late and fly through final, fly the
runway heading and the wind will most probably carry you back
onto the extended centreline. Once in line with the runway, lay
off drift to track directly down final.
--~-~- Crab into the wind Crab into the wind
Delay the
turn to final
Begin the turn Delay the

I to final earlier descent
Begin the
descent
earlier
Tailwind Headwind
on base leg on base leg
■ Figure1Jf-6 Allow for wind effect when turning final

Tracking Down Final
Because of the 'crab' angle needed to maintain the extended Positivelycontrol
centreline, the runway will appear to one side of the nose, but will trackingdown final.
still look symmetrical. On final for a crosswind landing, you
should have a view directly down the runway centreline. If the
aeroplane drifts downwind, then make a very definite turn into
wind and regain final without delay (do not just aim the nose of
the aeroplane at the runway!). Keep the aeroplane in balance.
■ Figure1Jf-7 An into-wind approach; and a crosswind approach

1Jf - CrosswindOperations 257
Wind strength often decreases near the ground, so continual

adjustments to heading will have to be made to maintain your track
down final. This is especially the case in strong and gusty conditions.
■ Figure13(-8 Get tracking under control early on final approach
Once tracking is under control, then achieving a stabilised

descent path and a workmanlike landing becomes a simpler task.
It is particularly true in the crosswind case that a good landing
requires a good approach.
Align the Wheels

Following a crosswind While an aeroplane is airborne, the fact that its longitudinal axis
approach,alignthe wheels is not aligned with the runway is not significant. It would be
with the runwaypriorto uncomfortable to touch down in this situation, however, since the
touchdown.
wheels are not aligned with the path of the aeroplane down the
runway in a crosswind. A strong sideways force on the
undercarriage could do structural damage or, in an extreme case,
tip the aeroplane over. On touchdown, the wheels should be
aligned with the runway direction.
The trick in a crosswind landing is to:
• align the axis of the aeroplane (i.e. the wheels) with the
runway direction prior to touchdown; and to
• avoid any sideways drift across the runway before the wheels
touch down.
To do this requires the coordinated use of the controls (ailerons,
rudder, elevator and power). As your skills develop with practice,
you will gain great satisfaction from consistently performing good
crosswind landings.
There are three accepted crosswind landing techniques:
(a)The crab method.
(b)The wing-down method.
(c) The con1bination n1ethod (incorporating the best features of
each of the above) - a crab approach and a wing-down landing.
Your flying instructor will teach you his or her preferred

method. A description of each method begins on page 259.
General Considerations
Strong crosswinds are often accompanied by gusts and turbulence,
and consideration should be given to using only partial or zero
flap and a slightly higher approach speed than normal to give you
better controllability.
The round-out in a crosswind landing is normal, but the hold- Rememberto flare,but do
off should not be prolonged (otherwise sideways drift could not prolongthe hold-off.
develop). The aeroplane should be placed on the ground, wheels
aligned with the runway, while the flight controls are effective and
with the aeroplane tracking along the runway centreline.
Once on the ground, directional control is more easily
achieved if the nosewheel is lowered onto the ground at an early
stage in the landing run. Light forward pressure on the control
column may be required. You must retain positive control
throughout the whole manoeuvre until the aeroplane is stopped
or at least has slowed to taxiing speed.
During the landing run: On the ground,keep on the
• keep straight with rudder (the crosswind will cause an into- centrelinewith rudderand
wind weathercocking tendency); keep wingslevelwith
aileron.
• lower the nosewheel to the ground to assist in directional
control;
• keep the wings level with progressive into-wind aileron as the
airspeed decreases (the crosswind will tend to lift the into-wind
wing). Full into-wind control column may be required by the
end of the landing run.
Airmanship
Be firm and positive 1n your handling of the aeroplane. Be Airmanshipis beingpositive
decisive! and alertto the effects of a
Remember that your crosswind circuit may conflict with the crosswind.
standard circuit, so keep a good lookout.
If at any stage you feel distinctly unhappy about the approach
and landing, go around and start again.
13(- CrosswindOperations 259
Method (a) - The Crab Method

In the crab method, drift should be laid off all the way down final
and through the round-out. This will keep the aeroplane tracking
down the centreline, but the wheels will not be aligned with the
landing direction.
Just prior to touchdown, yaw the aeroplane straight with
smooth and firm rudder pressure to align its longitudinal axis (and
the wheels) with the centreline of the runway. Keep the wings
level with ailerons.
The hold-off period should not be prolonged and the main
wheels of the aeroplane should be lowered onto the runway
before any sideways drift has a chance to develop. Do not allow
the nosewheel to touch first as this could cause a bounce as well
as overstress the structure; however, the nosewheel should be
lowered to the ground early in the landing run to aid in
directional control.
Align the aeroplane with the
runway centreline using the
rudder just prior to touchdown
"V"
Round-out and
reduced hold-off
■ Figure1]f-9 In crab method, align the aeroplane just ,prior to touchdown
Judgement and Timing

Judgement and timing are important when using the crab
method. Failing to remove the crab angle prior to landing will
result in the wheels touching down sideways; removing it too
early will allow a sideways drift to develop and, as well as landing
downwind of the centreline, the wheels will still touch down with
a sideways component. In both cases the landing will feel heavy
and the undercarriage will be unnecessarily stressed. A reasonable
touchdown can only be achieved with fine judgement in
removing drift and contacting the ground.
If any sideways drift looks like developing before touchdown,
it can be counteracted by: •
• a small amount of wing-down into wind; and
• keeping straight with rudder.
This is really a lead-in to the next method of crosswind
landing, the wing-down or forward slip method.
Airw,ork 13f, Part (i.i), Method (a')

CrabMethod of CrosswindLanding
Aim To carryout a crosswindapproachand landingby crabbinginto winduntiljust prior

to wheel contacton touchdown.
1. On Final Approach 2. During the Round-out

• Track down extended centreline • Reduce power and raise nose
by heading aircraft into wind. normally.
• Control airspeed with elevator, • Maintain track above centreline by
flightpath with power and keep crabbing into wind.
in balance with rudder. The wings
should be level except when
adjusting crab angle.
Align the
aeroplane just
before touchdown
Touchdown
3. Just Prior to Touchdown 4. The Landing Run
• Align the aeroplane with the • Keeping straight with rudder, lower
centreline with smooth, firm rudder the nosewheel onto the ground.
pressure. • Keep wings level with progressive
• Hold wings level with aileron. into-wind aileron.
• Hold nosewheel on the ground to
obtain positive steering.
Round-outand hold-offperiod
-----~- ------
_L.._ __ ..___~__,_, ______ Reducedhold-offcompared --------
with normalinto-windlanding
Method (b) - The Wing-Down Method

This method can be employed in the latter stages of the approach.
In some places it is taught to be used all the way down final - in
others, just for the last few feet. At this stage of your training we
will discuss this method as applying to the last 300 ft or so.
The aeroplane is made to track down the extended centreline,
not by crabbing, but by 'slipping'. Because the aeroplane tracks
'forward' towards the runway in a 'slip', this manoeuvre is called
a forward-slip.
To initiate a forward-slip:
• lower the into-wind wing a few degrees; and
• apply opposite rudder pressure to stop the aeroplane turning
and to align its longitudinal axis with the runway centreline.
The aeroplane is out-of-balance and so the balance ball will not
be centred. The stronger the crosswind, the more wing-down and
opposite rudder required.
«<Wind
■ Figure1]f-10 The wing-down or forward-slip crosswind technique
Drift Control
Controldri~ with If the aeroplane starts to drift downwind across the runway, you
wing-down,and have applied insufficient wing-down, so:
headingwith rudder. • lower the wing a few degrees further; and
• keep straight with rudder.
If the aeroplane starts to slip into wind across the runway, you
have applied too much wing-down, so:
• raise the wing a few degrees; and
• keep straight with rudder.
Stay alignedby varyingthe In gusty conditions especially, you will be continually varying
amount ofwing-downand the degree of wing-down and opposite rudder to remain aligned
rudderpressure. with the runway centreline.
The Touchdown
The wing-down and opposite rudder is held on through the Touchdown on the
round-out and touchdown, which will occur on the into-wind into-windmain wheel.
main wheel. Throughout the manoeuvre the aeroplane will be
tracking straight down the runway with its longitudinal axis
aligned with the centreline. No sideways drift across the runway
should be allowed to develop.
■ Figure13(-11 The view from the cockpit in a le~ crosswind
When the wing-down main wheel touches first, there may be

a tendency for the aeroplane to yaw into wind, but the aeroplane
can easily be kept straight with rudder. The other main wheel will
touch down naturally, after which you should lower the nose-
wheel onto the ground to allow more positive directional control.
In the landing run:
• keep straight with rudder, holding the nosewheel on the In the groundroll,keep
ground; and straightwith rudderand
• keep wings level with into-wind aileron - full control wheel wingslevelwith aileron.
into wind perhaps being required as the aeroplane slows down.
Advantages of the Wing-Down Method

Less judgement and timing is required in the actual touchdown
using this method, since the aeroplane is aligned with the runway
centreline throughout the flare and hold-off There is no crab
angle to remove and no sideways drift. It is of less importance if
the aeroplane touches down a little earlier or a little later than
expected, whereas with the crab method good judgement 1n
aligning the aeroplane just before touchdown is required.
Airwork 13(, Part (ii), Method (b)

Wing-DownCrosswindLanding
Aim To land the aeroplane in a crosswind following a wing-down approach.
1. On Final Approach, Aligned

with Runway Centreline
• Lower the into-wind wing and use
rudder to remain aligned with runway
centreline.
• Control airspeed with elevators,
flightpath with power and the track with
wing-down (and opposite) rudder.
2. During the Round-out

• Reduce power and raise nose normally .
• Maintain track along the centreline with
wing down and opposite rudder.
3. The Touchdown 4. The Landing Run

• The touchdown will be on the into- • Keep straight with rudder.
wind wheel because of that wing • Lower the nosewheel to the ground.
being down.
• Wings level with into-wind aileron.
• The other main wheel will follow
naturally.
Normal
pattern
Keep straightwith rudder;
Introduce Wing-down keep the wings level with
wing-down landing aileron into the wind
Method (c) - The Combination M.ethod

Crab Approach Followed by a Wing-Down Landing
A distinct disadvantage of the wing-down technique being used
all the way down final is that the controls are crossed and the
aeroplane is out of balance (i.e. the ball is not centred). This is
both inefficient and uncomfortable.
A more comfortable approach can be flown if drift is laid-off to Crabinto wind
maintain the extended runway centreline by 'crabbing' and the on approach.
aeroplane is flown in balance (ball centred, pilot and passengers
comfortable).
An easier crosswind landing can be made if, prior to touch- Beforetouchdown,yaw the
down, the wing-down method is employed by lowering the into- nose straightwithrudder
wind wing, simultaneously applying opposite rudder to align the and preventdri~withwing-
down.
aeroplane. This aligns the wheels with the track along the runway
- the amount of 'wing-down' and opposite rudder required being
determined by the strength of the crosswind.
At just what point you transfer from the crab to the wing-down
depends on your experience and the wind conditions. Initially, it
may be better to introduce the wing-down at about 100 ft above
ground level but, as you become more experienced, this can be
delayed until in or after the round-out below 20 ft. In strong and
gusty crosswinds, it is better to introduce the wing-down earlier
than in steady conditions.
Introduce the wing-down

and opposite rudder as n # Wing-down landing
(align the nose with
Crab approach the flare is approached. V' the runway using rudder)
■ Figure1]f-12 The combination method of crosswind landing

13f - Crosswind Operations 265
Airwork 13(, Part (ii), Method (c)

The CombinedCrabApproachand Wing-Down
CrosswindLanding
Aim Tolandthe aeroplanein a crosswindusinga crabapproachfollowedby a wing-downlanding.
1. On Final Approach
• Adjust the heading to track (crab) down final along
the extended runway centreline.
• Keep the wings level, and balance with rudder
Crab approach
pressure.
2. At or Approaching
I
Round-out Height
(about 20 ~ above the runway,or hangarheight)
• Use smooth rudder pressure to align aeroplane
with runway centreline - and stay aligned. Introducethe wing-down
• Lower the into-wind wing to prevent sideways and oppositerudderas
drift. the flare is approached.
3. During the Round-out

I
• Reduce power and raise the nose no,,, ,ally.
• Maintain centreline with wing-down and opposite
rudder.
4. The Touchdown
• Touch down on the into-wind main wheel and
allow the other main wheel to follow.
• Maintain directional control with rudder.
5. The Landing Run

• Keep straight with rudder .
• Lower nosewheel to runway .
• Wings level with into-wind aileron (full control
wheel movement may be required).
Exercise 1lg
Short-Field Operations
Aim
To operate safely and efficiently out of and into a short field.
Considerations
What is a Short Field?
A short field is one at which the runway length available and/ or
the obstacle-clearance gradients are only just sufficient to satisfy
take-off and landing requirements.
Performance Charts
The take-off and landing performance charts for your aeroplane Referto the appropriate
should be consulted to ensure that a short field in a confined area performancechartsfor
is indeed adequate for the planned operations under the existing youraeroplane.An
additionalsafety factor
conditions. An inspection on foot of the proposed take-off and
of 1.33 shouldbe added to
landing surface and the surrounding area may be necessary. the take-offdistance.
During the inspection remember that the take-off is not complete
until all obstacles are cleared in the climb-out, so not only the
take-off surface, but also the surrounding area, need to be
considered.
CONDITIONS:
Flaps 10°
TAKEOFF DISTANCE
Full Throttle Prior to Brake Release
Paved, Level, Ory Runway
Zero Wind
ISHORT FIELD I
NOTES:
1. Short field technique II aptlCifledIn Section4.
2. Prior to takeoff from fields above3000 feet elwatlon, the mixture should be leanedto give maximum RPM In a full throttle,
static runup.
3. Decreasedistances10" for each9 knots headwind. For operation with tailwinds up to 10 knots, Increasedistancesby 10%
for each2 knots.
4. For operation on I dry, grassrunway, Increasedistancesby 15%of the "ground roll" figure.
TAKEOFF : ooc 10°c 20°c 30°c 40°C

SPEED PRESS .
WEIGHT
LBS KIAS ALT TOTAL TOTAL TOTAL TOTAL I I TOTAL
LIFT AT FT GANO TO CLEAR GANO TO CLEAR GANO TO CLEAR GRNO TO CLEAR GANO 1TOCLEAR
OFF SOFT ROLL 50FTOBS ROLL 50F!OBS ROLL 50FTOBS ROLL 50FTOBS ROLL 50F'l"__OBS 1
1670 60 64 S.L I 640. 1190 695 1290 755 1390 810 1495 875 1605
1000 705 1310 765 1420 825 1530 890 1645 960 1770
2000 775 1445 840 1 9 0 1690 980 20 05 1960
■ Figure1Jg-1 Consult the performance charts

13g - Short-Field
Operations 267

The Short-Field Take-Off
There are generally two considerations in the short-field take-off:
1. Use of only a short ground run.
2. Avoidance of obstacles in the take-off and climb-out flightpath.
A short-field take-off is a normal take-off, except that you

should pay special attention to the following points to achieve the
shortest ground run and steepest climb-out:
• Take off as much into wind as possible.
• Use the best flap setting for take-off.
• Ensure that the take-off run is commenced from as close to the
end of the field as possible.
• Apply power with toe-brakes on, holding the control column
back to avoid damage to the propeller, releasing the brakes as
full power is reached (although, if loose stones could damage
the propeller, a rolling start is preferred).
• Lift off at the minimum recommended flying speed with
elevator.
• Assume the nose attitude for the best-angle climb to avoid
obstacles (a higher pitch attitude than in a normal climb).
• At a safe height, when clear of obstacles, enter a normal climb.
When clear of obstacles,

raise the flaps (if used) and
accelerate to the normal climb Complete the
speed - usually the best-rate after-take-off
Achieve the airspeed climb speed, Vy (±5) kt. checklist.
\
for the steepest climb-out:
• with takeoff flap, this is the obstacle-
clearance airspeed (+5/-0) kt.
• with zero flap, it is Vx (+5/-0) kt.
Maximum power with Lift off at \

areoplane held on the the minimum ~
brakes,then release recommended ~
brakes. flying spe:d/ J
5
ft
End of Maximum-performance
runway ground run (short)
■ Figure1Jg-2 The short-field take-off
The Short-Field Landing

The short-field landing is useful when the chosen landing area:
• is of marginal length (obviously); or
• has a surface of which the pilot is unsure.
Land as much into wind as possible, since this will allow a

steeper approach and a shorter landing run. Position the aeroplane
as for a normal approach - the preferred technique being a power-
assisted approach at a low speed, with an aiming point as close to
the threshold as practicable. The aeroplane should touch down
without much float as soon as the throttle is closed.
Fly as slow an approach speed as is safe. Full flap is preferred if An additionalsafety factor
wind conditions are suitable (i.e. no significant gustiness), since of 1.43 shouldadded to
this allows a lower approach speed and there will be less float prior the land;ng diStance.
to touchdown due to the extra drag. A shorter landing distance
will result. The recommended approach speed for a short-field
landing may be less than for the normal approach (check your
Pilot's Operating Handbook); however, it should never be less
than 1.3 times the actual stall speed to give you a 30% safety buffer
over the stall when on approach.
Use power to control the flightpath and elevator to maintain
airspeed. If you are on 'the back side of the power curve' (also
known as 'the back side of the drag curve'), then frequent and
positive adjustments to power and attitude will be required to
maintain the desired flightpath and airspeed.
If there are no obstacles in the approach path, then a slightly
undershooting approach may be considered, with power being
used to ensure that you clear the nearside fence safely.
SHALLOW APPROACH PATH
■ Figure1Jg-3 Obstacle clear approach
Fly the approach so as to clear all obstacles. Obstacles in the

approach path may require that an aiming point further into the
short field be chosen. Having cleared the obstacles, do not reduce
power unduly, otherwise a high sink rate and a heavy touchdown
may result (since at a low speed the aeroplane has less-effective
controls and a reduced round-out capability). Given a choice, you
should select an approach path that does not have obstacles.
Aim to cross the airfield boundary at the selected speed and at
the minimum height consistent with adequate obstacle clearance
and with power on. Do not prolong the hold-off and touchdown;
then use brakes as required.
13g - Short-FieldOperations 269
STEEP APPROACH PATH

• Select your aiming point
• Airspeed as low as safely possible
• Maintain a stabilised approach
• Control airspeed with attitude
and flight path with power
• Less flare than normal, and at a
lower altitude above the runway
• Use·brakes
\ • Power off, with no float if required
■ Figure13g-4 Clear all obstacles in the approach path
Since the nose will be higher than in a normal landing due to

the lower speed and higher power, not as great a ro'und-out will
be required and the round-out should be commenced closer to
the ground than normal. Some power should be left on at the
commencement of round-out if the speed is low; touchdown will
follow immediately the throttle is closed.
If a high sink rate develops add power to prevent a heavy
landing. Power may be required all the way to the ground - if so,
close the throttle as soon as the wheels touch.
If an especially short landing run is required, brakes may be
used once all the wheels are firmly on the ground. Early in the
landing run, the wings will still be producing some lift and so all
of the weight will not be on the wheels. Excessive braking at this
time may cause skidding, leading to excessive tyre wear or even a
tyre burst.
Exercise 13 h
Soft-FieldOperations
Aim
To operate safely and efficiently from a 'soft' field.
Considerations
What is a Soft Field?
A soft field could be an area which has a soft surface such as sand
or snow, a wet grassy surface or a rough surface. A soft field may
be quite long and with no obstacle-clearance problems in the
climb-out or approach path. It may also be short, which means
the short-field considerations of obstacle-clearance also become
important. For this exercise, we assume a long take-off surface and
no obstacle-clearance problems.
Soft surfaces create extra frictional drag and stress on the So~ surfacesdegrade
wheels and therefore degrade the acceleration in the take-off run. acceleration.
The wheels may have a dangerous tendency to 'dig-in'. Only use
a soft field if you are totally satisfied that a safe take-off and/ or
landing can be made.
Flyingthe Manoeuvre
The Soft-Field Take-Off
The main concern in a soft-field take-off is to shift the weight
from the wheels to the wings as soon as possible and achieve a
short ground run. Consequently optimum flap and maximum
power should be used.
Apply elevator
back pressure to Initiate a
raise the nosewheel normal
off the ground as Lift off at an Accelerate in climb-out
soon as possible early stage ground effect
■ Figure13h-1 The so~-field take-off
During the take-off run, keep the weight off the nosewheel
with the control column held well back. Lift the aeroplane off the
ground as soon as possible (at a lower speed than in a normal take-
off) and accelerate to climb speed close to the ground. The
13h- So~-FieldOperations 271
aeroplane can fly in ground effect at a lower speed than when it is

well away from the ground. For this reason, do not climb more
than about 10 ft above the ground until a safe flying speed is
attained, at which time a normal climb-out can proceed.
The Soft-Field Landing

Since the tendency on a soft field is for the nosewheel (and, to a
lesser extent, the main wheels) to dig in, the aim should be to:
• land as slowly as possible; and
• hold the nose up as long as possible during the landing roll.
Use full flap if conditions permit. Full flap reduces the stalling
speed and so touchdown can be made at a very low speed. If field
length is not a problem, a normal approach can be flown, with a
slightly modified round-out. Some power can be left on in the
flare as the nose is raised higher than normal in a prolonged hold-
off The higher the nose attitude and the lower the speed on
touchdown, the better.
Extract the maximum

airspeed loss out of Hold the nosewheel
the flare Touchdown off the ground (elevator)
■ Figure 13h-2 The so~-field landing

272 CIRCUITS, APPROACHtS AND I ANOINCS
Flying Training 273
Exercise 14
FirstSolo
Aim
To fly solo and be the pilot-in-command of an aeroplane for the
first time.

First solo is a great experience! When your instructor steps out of
the aeroplane and leaves you to your first solo flight you are being
paid a big compliment. You may feel a little apprehensive, but
remember that he or she is trained to judge the right moment to
send you solo. Your instructor will have a better appreciation of
your flying ability than anybody (including you).
Fly your first solo circuit in the same manner as you flew those
circuits before the instructor stepped out. The usual standards
apply to your take-off, circuit and landing. Maintain a good look
out, fly a neat circuit, establish a stabilised approach and carry out
your normal landing. Be prepared for better performance of the
aeroplane without the weight of your instructor on board. If at
any stage you feel uncomfortable, go around.
If an emergency, such as engine failure, occurs - and this is an
extremely unlikely event - carry out the appropriate emergency
procedure that you have been well trained in. Your flying
instructor, when sending you solo, not only considers you
competent to fly a circuit with a normal take-off and landing, but
also considers you competent to handle an emergency.
One take-off, circuit and landing will admit you to the family
of pilots!
Consolidation Flying
Further refinement and consolidation of the basic skills that you
now possess will follow, with solo periods being interspersed with
dual periods. The dual flights allow your flying instructor to
refine your skills and develop them further. In the solo periods
you will develop the skills of a captain, making your own decisions
and acting on them.
Your initial solo flights will be in the circuit area, practising
take-offs and landings, but, quite soon, you will be proceeding
solo to the local training area to practise other manoeuvres.
274 FLYING TRAINING
Advanced Turning 275
Exercise 1 Sa
The Steep Level Turn
Aim
To perform a steep level turn, maintaining constant height and
airspeed.
Considerations
A steep turn is a turn in which the bank angle exceeds 45°. It is a
high-performance manoeuvre which requires good coordination
and positive control.
Increased Lift
A steep levelturn requires In straight and level flight, the lift produced by the wings balances
increasedlift, and this the weight of the aeroplane. In turns, the lift force is tilted and
requiresback pressureon consequently the lift generated by the wings must be increased to
the controlcolumn.
provide not only a vertical component to balance the weight but
also a horizontal component (known as the centripetal force)to pull
the aeroplane into the turn. In a 60° banked turn, for example, the
lift produced must be double the weight if height is to be
maintained.
L
w w
■ Figure1Sa-1 A steep level turn requires increased Ii~
IncreasedIi~ in a turn The increased lift in a turn is generated by back pressure on the
is generatedby an control column which increases the angle of attack. The back
increasedangleof attack. pressure required to maintain height is quite significant in a steep
turn.
276 ADVANCED TURNING
Increased Load Factor

When you feel an increased g-loading during a turn you are Loadfactorand stalling
simply experiencing an increased load factor (which is the ratio speed increasesignificantly
lift/weight). The normal load factor is one (1) when the aeroplane in a steep turn.
is either stationary on the ground or in steady, straight and level
flight. You experience this as 'lg', i.e. your normal weight. In a
60° banked turn the load factor is 2 and you will feel twiceyour
normal weight because the lift generated by the wings is now
double the aeroplane's weight. The human body soon becomes
accustomed to these g-forces.
The steeper the turn, the greater the angle of attack required to
generate sufficient lift, and consequently the stalling angle of
attack will be reached at a higher airspeed than when the wings
are level. In a 60° banked turn, for example, the stalling speed is
some 40% greater (e.g. an aeroplane which stalls at 50 kt straight
and level will stall at 70 kt when pulling 2g).
The greater the load factor, the higher the stalling speed. Thegreaterthe loadfactor,
Feeling a g-force is a signal that the aeroplane structure is under the higherthe stalling
additional stress and that stalling speed has increased. At any hint speed.
of stalling in a steep turn, some of the back pressure on the control
column should be released. This will reduce the angle of attack
and move the wings away from the stalling angle. Reducing the
bank angle or adding power (if there is any in reserve) will also
assist in avoiding a stall in this situation.
The stall speed

increases 40% in
a 60° banked turn.
■ Figure1Sa-2 Be alert to the stall speed increase in a steep turn
Increased Drag
The greater angle of attack used to generate the increased lift Dragincreasessignificantly
required in a steep turn also creates additional induced drag. This in steep turns,so additional
must be balanced by increased thrust if the aeroplane is to thrustis requiredto
maintainspeed.
maintain airspeed. Whereas it was acceptable to lose a few knots
in medium turns, it is very important to maintain airspeed in steep
turns because of the higher stalling speed.
15a - TheSteepLevelTum 277
As well as coordinating the use of aileron, rudder and elevator

(as in medium turns), power now becomes an added ingredient as
the maximum achievable bank angle in a steady steep turn is
determined by the amount of power available.
■ Figure1Sa-3 Use power to maintain airspeed in a steep turn

The g-forces in a 45° steep turn are nowhere near as great as in a
60° banked turn. For this reason, you may find it easier to practise
steep turns at a 45° bank angle initially, progressing to 60° bank
angle turns later on in your training.
Prior to practising steep turns, your training organisation may
require you to carry out the pre-aerobatic HASELL check (as
described in Exercise 10a).
Rolling into a Steep Level T'urn

Be on speed,on altitude, Trim the aeroplane for straight and level flight at the desired
and in trim beforerolling airspeed and height. Look out for other aeroplanes and select a
into a steep turn. reference point on the horizon for the roll-out.
Tryto maintainthe entry
airspeedthroughoutthe
Roll into the turn just as you would into a normal medium
manoeuvre. turn except that as the bank angle increases through 30°:
• smoothly add power;
• progressively increase the back pressure on the control
column;
• adjust the bank angle and back pressure to place the nose in
the correct position relative to the horizon; and
• balance with rudder.
Do not apply too much back pressure entering the turn or the
aeroplane will climb - just gradually increase it as you steepen the
bank. The back pressure required in a steep turn will probably be
much greater than you had anticipated. Do not trim as the turn is
only a transient manoeuvre.
Maintaining a Steep Level Turn

The secret of flying an accurate steep level turn is to hold the nose Add power to
in the correct position relative to the horizon (even if it takes a lot maintainairspeed.
of back pressure), ensuring the airspeed is maintained by adding
sufficient power.
Keep a very good lookout during the steep turn to monitor the
nose position and the approach of your roll-out reference point, as
well as to look for other aircraft, especially in the direction of your
turn.
An occasional glance at the instruments will confirm that the Thework cycleis L-A-1:
turn is proceeding satisfactorily, but do not sacrifice your outside lookout,
reference by concentrating on the instruments. In just a second or attitude,
instruments.
two you can quickly check:
• height on the altimeter and vertical speed indicator;
• airspeed on the airspeed indicator;
• bank angle on the attitude indicator;
• balance on the balance indicator (ball in the centre).
Adjusting the bank angle and nose position is a continuing
requirement throughout the steep turn and keeps the pilot quite
busy. That is why it is such a good training manoeuvre! The
sooner the corrections are made, the smaller they can be and the
better the steep turn.
IF HEIGHT 1s BEING GAINED in the steep turn, it means that the
vertical component of the lift force is too great, and so either:
• steepen the bank angle; and/ or
• relax some of the back pressure.
IF HEIGHT 1s BEING LOST then the vertical component of the lift
force is insufficient to prevent height loss.
• reduce the bank angle slightly (about 10-15°);
• allow the nose attitude to rise with back pressure; and
• once the correct nose attitude has been achieved, reapply the
desired bank angle while maintaining sufficient back pressure
to maintain the selected new nose attitude.
IF THE NOSE DROPS BELOW THE HORIZON during a steep tum, trying to
raise the nose with back pressure will only tighten the tum rather
than raise the nose. Should the height loss rapidly increase, roll out to
straight and level, climb back to your desired height and start again.
Stall Buffet
If the aeroplane turns through more than 360°, you may in fact
strike your own slipstream and feel some turbulence. This is not
the stall buffet, but the sign of a well-executed steep turn. If,
however, the stall buffet is felt, then release some of the back
pressure to reduce the angle of attack before the stall actually
occurs. To avoid losing height, you will have to decrease the bank
angle slightly as back pressure is released.
15a- TheSteep Leve/Tum 279
When practising steep turns aim to achieve an accuracy of

+200 ft and + 10 kt initially and then, as your training progresses,
accept no variations at all.
•
--~~-~--------·--------
• I
------ :~~----'
■ Figure1Sa-4 Typical nose attitudes while flying the manoeuvre
Rolling Out of a Steep Turn

This is the same as rolling out of a medium turn, except that:
• greater anticipation is required to roll out on your reference point;
• there is a great deal more back pressure to be released,
otherwise height will be gained; and
• power should be reduced to cruise power before passing 30° of
bank.
Remember to keep the aeroplane in balance with rudder.
Concentration is required in the roll-out, especially to avoid
gaining height since you may be a little reluctant to relax all of the
back pressure. Rolling out of a 45° banked turn, relaxing back
pressure is usually sufficient. Rolling out of a 60° banked turn the
release of back pressure is so great that it may feel as though you
have to push the control column forward.
Do not forget to reduce the power as you start to roll out,
otherwise airspeed will rapidly increase.
After some practice at steep turns to the left and right, your
flying instructor may suggest that you roll from a steep turn one
way immediately into a steep turn the other way.
Airmanship
Airmanshipis keepinga Practise steep turns in an appropriate area and keep a very good
good lookout,and flyingthe look out for other aircraft.
aeroplanepositively. Note various landmarks that will assist in orientation during
Rememberthat your
workcycleduringthe
and after the turn. It is easy for an inexperienced pilot to become
manoeuvreis: disoriented in steep turns which involve large changes of heading.
Lookout, Handle the power smoothly and monitor the gauges to ensure
Attitude, engine limitations are not exceeded.
Instruments. Exert smooth, but firm, control over the aeroplane.
Airwork 15a
SteepLevelTurns
Aim Toperforma steep levelturn,maintainingconstantheightand airspeed.
1. Entry
• Complete the HASELL check.
• Look out.
• Select a prominent reference point on the horizon .
• Roll on bank with aileron .
• Balance with rudder .
• Apply sufficient back-pressure on control column to maintain height
• Add power progressively to maintain airspeed.
2. Maintaining the Stee-p Turn

• Look out.
• Maintain bank with ailerons.
• Maintain balance with rudder.
• Maintain airspeed with power.
• Notice increased downwards view.
NOTE Work cycle: Look out, attitude, instruments.
If height is gained: If height is lost:

• Reduce back pressure and consider • Reduce bank angle.
steepening the bank angle • Raise nose with increased back
temporarily, but do not over-bank. pressure; and then reapply bank.
3. Roll Out
• Look out.
• Locate roll-out reference point (anticipate by 30°) .
• Balance with rudder .
• Release elevator back pressure to maintain height.
• Before passing 30° of bank, reduce power to maintain the required cruise airspeed.
15a - The Steep LevelTurn 281
Further Points
Maximum Performance Turns

Maximum bank angle A maximum performance steep level turn at a particular airspeed
possiblein a steadysteep is flown like a normal steep turn except that power is progressively
turn is limited by power.
applied as the bank angle is increased, until maximum power is
reached.
The ability to maintain height and airspeed in this manoeuvre
depends on the amount of power available. For most training aer-
oplanes, the performance limit is reached at about 65° of bank.
Turning performance is measured in terms of:
• the rate of turn (the greater, the better); and
• the radius of turn (the smaller, the better).
At a constant airspeed, turning performance increases with
bank angle.
At a constant bank angle, turning performance is better at
low airspeeds. Therefore, the best turning performance can be
achieved at a relatively low airspeed and a high bank angle
(providing the aeroplane is not stalled or the airframe
overstressed).
Overstressing
Do not overstressthe The lift which can be generated by the wings with full rearward
airframe in a steep turn. movement of the control column is far greater at high airspeeds
than at low airspeeds and results in greater load factors occurring.
For example, pulling the control column fully back at 150 kt will
increase the g-loading considerably more than at 50 kt. At high
airspeeds, therefore, there is a danger of overstressing the airframe
by exceeding the maximum allowable load factor (+3.8g for most
training aeroplanes).
Manoeuvring Speed (V.A)

Large elevator deflection at high airspeed can cause the wings to
generate so much lift that the aeroplane's limit-load-factor is
exceeded without the wings reaching their stalling angle of attack.
At low airspeeds the aeroplane will stall before the limit-load-
factor is reached, i.e. the airframe is 'protected' aerodynamically.
Maximum turning The airspeed at which maximum elevator deflection causes the
performance is achievedat stall to occur right at the limit-load-factor is called the manoeu-
the manoeuvringspeed
vring speed (VA). The best aerodynamic turning performance
(VA).
can be achieved at this speed provided that sufficient power is
available.
For most training aeroplanes the engine performance is the
limiting factor in maximum-performance steep turns.
VA for maximum weight is specified in the Flight Manual. At

airspeeds lessthan manoeuvring speed (VA),full elevator deflection
will not overstress the airframe; above VAit will. At lesser weights,
when stalling speed is lower, the actual VAwill be a few knots less
than that published.
n Load factor (g-force)
Positive g-loading
+3.8
Normal straight +1 g
and level flight
OIE-----:-:------~-------:--:-"---"':"'!""--t,,.,.,.~..,.
Vs VA VNo
--NORMAL FLAPS-UP--~
OPERATING RANGE
Negative g-loading
-1.5
■ Figure1Sa-5 Airspeed (V) versus allowable load factor (n)

15b - RecoveryfromUnusualAttitudes 283
Exercise 1Sb
Recovery from Unusual Attitudes
Aim
To recognise and recover from an unusual aeroplane attitude that
may develop into a potentially hazardous situation. 1
Considerations
While a steep turn should be a straightforward manoeuvre, it is
possible that early in your steep turn training some unusual
attitudes may develop. It would be appropriate for you to reread
Exercises 10 and 11 at this stage.
What is an Unusual Attitude?

The two fundamental unusual attitudes are:
• nose-high with a decreasing airspeed; or
• nose-low with an increasing airspeed.
Unusual attitudes generally result from some form of
mishandling by the pilot. For example, the relatively low power
available in most training aeroplanes will not allow a steady climb
to be maintained in a steep turn. A nose-high/low-speed
unusual attitude can result if the nose is raised in an attempt to
achieve a steep climbing turn.
Flyingthe Manoeuvre
Nose High and Decreasing Airspeed
Nosehighand decreasing If the nose is well above the horizon and the speed is low and/ or
airspeed- bewareofa decreasing, a stall is a possibility.
stallor spin. To recover from a nose-high/low-airspeed unusual attitude
before a stall occurs:
• apply maximum power;
• apply sufficient rudder to prevent yaw;
• level the wings with coordinated use of rudder and aileron;
• ease the control column centrally forward.
If in a stalled condition, move the control column centrally
forward until the wings are unstalled, before levelling the wings
with aileron.
If a full spin develops from a mishandled steep turn, probably as

a result of the nose being raised too high and the speed allowed to
drop too low, then recover using the recommended spin recovery.
The spin-recovery technique is:
• throttle closed, flaps up and ailerons neutral;
• verify the spin direction on the turn coordinator;
• apply full opposite rudder;
• pause;
• move the control column centrally forward (to unstall the
wings) until the rotation stops;
• centralise all the controls once the rotation has stopped;
• level the wings and gently ease out of the ensuing dive; and
• as the nose rises through the horizon, add power and climb
away.
Nose Low and Increasing Airspeed

If the nose is low, especially if power is applied, exceeding the Nose lowandincreasing
maximum allowable airspeed (VNE- shown on the ASI as a red - bewareofan
airspeed
line) is a danger as this could overstress the aeroplane. A steep overspeedor spiraldive.
bank angle and a low nose attitude may develop into a spiral dive.
To recover from a nose-low/high-airspeed unusual attitude:
• reduce power (close the throttle);
• roll the wings level with aileron and rudder;
• ease out of the ensuing dive; and
• as the nose passes through the horizon, reapply power and
climb away.
A nose-low /increasing-speed attitude, if not corrected, can
develop into a spiral dive, which can be recognised by:
• a high g-loading;
• a rapidly increasing airspeed (that distinguishes it from a
spin); and
• a rapid loss of height, probably with the rate of descent
. .
1ncreas1ng.
The recovery from the spiral dive is the same as that for a nose-
lowlhigh-speed situation, but it is especially important to avoid
excessive elevator deflection when easing out of the dive,
otherwise the limit load factor for the aeroplanes could be
exceeded, overstressing the airframe. It is permissible to use the
ailerons as firmly as needed to roll the wings level.
15b - RecoveryfromUnusualAttitudes 285
Airwork 15b
Recoveryfrom UnusualAttitudes
Aim To recognise and recover from an unusual aeroplane attitude which has developed.
1. Nose High/Low Airspeed

Recognised primarily from ASI.
Recovery:
• Increase power (prevent yaw).
• Level the wings with aileron .
• Easethe control column forward .
• lfin a stalled condition, move the control
column centrally forward until the wings
are unstalled before levelling the wings
with aileron.
2. Nose Low/High Airspeed

Recognised primarily from airspeed and
vertical speed indicators.
Recovery:
• Reduce power (close throttle).
• Roll wings level with aileron and balance
with rudder.
• Ease out of dive.
• Add power as nose passesthrough the
horizon.
Exercise 1 Sc
The Steep Descending Turn
Aim
To perform a steep gliding turn.
Considerations
A steep descending tum can be made in:
• a glide; or
• a powered descent.
Fly Faster
It is usual to increase the flying speed as a steep descending turn is Flyfasterin a steep
commenced to retain an adequate safety margin above the stalling descendingturn becauseof
speed (which increases during a turn). Typical speed increases the increasedstalling
speed.
above the best gliding speed are:
• 10 kt for a 45 ° steep descending turn; and
• 20 kt for a 60° steep descending turn.
In a steep gliding turn, the rate of descent will increase
markedly. It can be controlled by reducing the bank angle.
Flyingthe Manoeuvre
A steep descending turn is flown like a steep level turn except that
the increased airspeed is maintained with the elevator.
The nose will tend to drop in a descending turn and so, even
though the nose position is lower to achieve a higher airspeed,
some back pressure on the control column may be needed to stop
it dropping too far.
If airspeed becomes excessive:
• ease off the bank angle with ailerons;
• raise the nose with elevator; and
• re-establish the desired steep turn.
The lack of slipstream in a glide will mean that more rudder is
required when rolling in one direction than when rolling in the
other.
Simply exerting increased back pressure on the control column
in a steep descending turn may tighten the turn and increase the
g-loading beyond acceptable limits. A spiral dive may also result if
attitude and airspeed are not monitored.
1Sc - TheSteep DescendingTum 287
Keep a good lookout, especially below. The steep descending

turn described here is without reference to any ground object -
the aim is to hold a steady bank angle, which means you will
descend through a 'cylinder' of air. In nil-wind conditions, you
will remain over the same patch of ground, but in a wind you will
be carried along with it.
ij
Still air
* Wihd
es?!#:?=
■ Figure1Sc-1 In a steep descending turn the aeroplane will be carried

along by the wind
Airmanship
Airmanshipis remaining Be aware of your proximity to the ground since the rate of descent
aware ofyour altitude and will be quite high in a gliding steep turn.
ground clearance.
Allow the airspeed to increase and maintain a safe margin
above the stall, but do not let a spiral dive develop.
Keep a very good lookout, especially below.
Airwork 15c
Steep DescendingTurns
Aim To perform a steepglidingturn.
Established
1. Entry to the Turn
•
•
Complete checks.
Look out.
--
..- w..a,.ae~ent
• Select horizon reference point.

• Trim for best gliding speed.
• Roll on bank with aileron.
Look
• As bank angle passes 30°, lower out
hose attitude to maintain
increased airspeed due to higher
stalling speed (approx. +5 knots
for every 10° of bank beyond 30°
of bank).
2. Maintaining the Steep

Gliding Turn
• Look out.
Look
out
• Maintain bank angle with aileron.
• Maintain desired airspeed with
elevator. ----..........
.....,
If airspeed increases: ',
•
•
Reduce bank angle.
Raise nose with elevator.
' '\
\
'
• Reapply bank angle. Look
out 1
3. Roll Out
• Look out.
•
•
Roll off bank with ailerons.
Balance with rudder. --
----,
_,,,,,,,,.
----
~-
• Select desired pitch attitude
with elevator.
Maintain airspeedwith elevator.

If desired,control rate ofdescentwith power.
Forced Landings 289
Exercise 16
The Forced Landing Without Power
Aim
To carry out a safe approach and landing following engine failure.
Considerations
Why Would an Engine Fail?
A forced landing due to a mechanical malfunction or a structural
problem is a rare event with modern aeroplanes. However,
occasionally it happens, so be prepared.
Alwayscheck the fuelprior Fuel starvation is often the cause of an engine stopping in flight.
to flying. Fuel gauges can be inaccurate and fuel agents have on rare occasions
loaded inconect or contaminated fuel. A visual inspection of the
fuel tanks and of the fuel itself during your pre-flight inspection
should prevent insufficient or inc01Tectfuel causing a forced landing.
Alwayscheckyourfuel Forgetting to switch from a near-empty fuel tank in flight to an
selectionand use the alternative tank, incorrect use of the mixture control and failure to
mixtureand carburettor
use carburettor heat can all lead to an engine stoppage through
heat controlscorrectly.
fuel starvation.
■ Figure16-1 Safe forced landings can be made in small fields
Pe1formance data published in Flight Manuals is obtained from

test results achieved by experienced test pilots flying new
aeroplanes under ideal conditions. Similar results will be difficult
to achieve for an average pilot in a well-used aeroplane. The
published fuel consumption and range figures assume correct
leaning of the mixture. If this is not done by the pilot when
cruising at 75% maximum continuous power or less, the
manufacturer's range figures will not be attained.
290 FORCED LANDINGS
As the captain of an aeroplane, you must show good

airmanship and always be aware of the real fuel situation. Never
allow fuel starvation to force you into an unwanted landing.
Other possible causes of engine stoppage include faults in the
magneto system, in ancillary equipment (e.g. a carburettor
malfunction or a broken fuel line), mechanical failure (possibly
due to insufficient oil) or an engine fire. Bad luck sometimes plays
a role - for instance, a bird-strike damaging the propeller.
Ratification of an engine stoppage by the pilot is generally
limited to checking that the engine controls are providing the
correct amount of fuel and air to the engine (i.e. fuel selector,
mixture control, throttle and carburettor heat), or
experimentation with the ignition system (e.g. eliminating a
faulty magneto system by selecting the opposite magneto).
This is not to say that you will have to cope with an engine stop- Alwaysbe preparedto
page each and every time you go flying - it is not unusual for a pilot cope withenginefailure.
to go through a whole career without a real engine failure, although
simulated engine failures will have. been practised many times. A
well-trained pilot is well prepared for an engine failure at any time in
flight or on the ground. A disciplined approach to checklists and the
sequence of events during training is important, as the recall of pro-
cedures can be extremely difficult when faced with a real emergency.
Forced Landings without Power

All pilots must be able to cope with an emergency landing Forcedlandingswithout
without the use of engine power, possibly on an unprepared powercan be made quite
surface. This can be done quite successfully. The low landing safely,and shouldbe
consideredan extensionto
speed of a modern training aircraft and its robust construction the glideapproach.
allow it to be landed safely in quite small fields, provided the pilot
positions the aeroplane accurately. •
No new flying aspects are introduced with this exercise; it is
simply a matter of putting together what you already know -
making sound decisions fairly quickly and acting on them.
An aeroplane that glides at 700 ft/min rate of descent will allow
the pilot only 3 minutes from a height of2,000 ft agl. Always be
aware that:
• flying the aeroplane is your number one priority - maintain
a satisfactory airspeed and keep it in trim;
• planning and executing the approach comes next, with an
attempt (if you think it advisable) to restart the engine.
Partial power from an engine that has not completely failed
may give you extra time and the possibility of gaining some extra
distance, but do not rely on it. The engine may fail completely at
a most inopportune moment, so plan your approach and landing
as if no power is available.
16 - The Forced Landing Without Power 291
Engine Failure at Altitude

Height is time. Height means time to a pilot, and the amount of time that you
have available determines what options you have. If the engine
fails, convert any excess speed into height by a gentle climb or into
useful distance by maintaining height until the airspeed decays to
gliding speed, and then establish a glide with the aeroplane in
trim.
When the aeroplane is comfortably under control, perform
some simple emergency actions and attempt an engine restart -
provided that you think restarting the engine is a good idea. It is
possible that a restart is not advisable, say following an engine fire
or mechanical damage. This is a command decision that only the
pilot-in-command can make.
Engine Restart
An immediateengine An experienced pilot may decide very quickly to attempt an
restartmay be possible. immediate restart and will perform the required actions while
allowing the aeroplane to slow down to gliding speed.
A less-experienced pilot may be advised to concentrate just on
flying the aeroplane - first establishing it in the glide and trimming
it beforeperforming any restart actions. Your flying inst1uctor will
advise you on this point.
Rectifythe problem If the propeller is still turning, rectification of the fuel or
if possible. ignition problem (if that is the cause) will see the engine fire up
again without any need to use the starter. Some obvious items to
be considered in an attempted restart of the engine are:
• A fuel problem:
change fuel tanks;
fuel pump on (if fitted);
mixture RICH;
primer locked.
• An ignition problem:
check magneto switches individually (BOTH - LEFT - RIGHT).
If the engine operates on one magneto as a result of a fault
in the other magneto system, then leave it there, otherwise
return to BOTH.
• An icing problem:
- carburettor heat FULL HOT.
NOTE Following a mechanical failure or fire, the engine should
be stopped immediately. If the failure is partial, resulting in
reduced or intermittent running, then use the engine at your
discretion. There is a likelihood that it may fail at a critical stage,
so it may be best not to rely on it and simply assume a total failure.
Following a failure due to faulty operation by the pilot, restart the
engine in the glide.
292 FORCED LANDINGS
Part (i)
Forced Landing Without Power
Forced Landing Scenario
Many scenarios are possible and your actions will depend on the
situation at the time, the height above ground at which the failure
occurs, the surface wind and the availability of suitable landing
fields (possibly even an airfield).
We will consider a very general situation which is capable of
modification to suit your precise set of conditions.
If the engine fails at a reasonable height (say 3,000 ft or more
above ground level), a basic pattern that may be followed is:
• convert excess speed to height or to useful distance;
• trim for a safe glide;
• attempt a restart;
• select a suitable field and plan an approach to it;
• make a distress (Mayday) radio call;
• attempt to resolve the emergency (while maintaining a safe
glide);
• carry out a safe approach and landing (in the case of training,
a go-around rather than a landing will usually be performed).
Always Know the Ground Wind

While flying along, it is good airmanship (common sense) to keep
an eye on the surface wind. A forced landing into wind is
generally safer because of the lower groundspeed on touchdown
and the shorter landing run.
Smoke .
, ./,..,,.,,
Wind sock Wind lines
F. c::~?;)
■ Figure16-2 Always be aware of the surface wind direction
Good indicators of surface wind include:

• smoke·
'
• a windsock;
• cloud shadows on the ground (especially if the clouds are low);
16 - The ForcedLandingWithoutPower 293
• the drift angle of the aeroplane over the ground;

• wind lanes on water or standing crops.
Estimate the Gliding Range
Flyat the recommended A typical training aircraft has a best lift/ dragratioof approximately
glidingspeed to achievethe 9:1, which means that, when flown at the correct gliding speed,
best glidingrange. 9,000 ft (or 1.5nm) can be gained horizontally for each 1,000 ft
lost in height.
Losing 1,000 ft vertically in 9,000 ft horizontally is an angle of
depression (down from the horizontal) of about 7° (easy to work
out using the 1-in-60 rule, from your navigation studies).
To estimate gliding range in still air conservatively, lower your
arm about 10° from the horizontal. You should be pointing at a
position on the ground to which a glide in still air is possible. Of
course, the closer the chosen field is, the more certain you are of
reaching it comfortably.
------------horizontal
Not to scale
■ Figure16-3 An approximate estimate of gliding range in nil wind
A headwind will reduce the gliding range; a tailwind will

increase it. A windmilling or stopped propeller will also decrease
it. In your training so far, you have become familiar with the
glidepath achievable with the engine idling and the propeller
turning over.
Gliding range downwind is
greater (but allow room
to turn into wind
for landing)
■ Figure 16-4 Wind affects gliding range over the ground

294 FORCED LANDINGS
If the engine has failed, the propeller (either stopped or

windmilling) will cause a significant increase in drag. The nose of
the aeroplane will have to be lowered to maintain airspeed and the
rate of descent will increase. The increased drag will mean a
steeper glidepath and a reduced gliding range.
Select a Suitable Field

Following an engine failure, convert excess speed above gliding Choosea forcedlanding
speed to height or useful distance, then adopt the gliding attitude fieldwellwithinyourgliding
and speed and trim the aeroplane. Change fuel tanks. range.
An experienced pilot might attempt a restart at this stage but,
at all times, it is most important to fly the aeroplane first.
When settled into the glide, select a suitable field for a forced
landing. It is safest to select a field well within your gliding range
and to fly a pattern around it, rather than to try a long straight
glide to a distant field. This makes correct judgement of the glide
easier and gives you more :flexibility and room to correct if your
original estimates are not perfect.
The easiest place to look for a field is out of the left window.
But do not fail to look out to the right, just in case a perfectly
suitable field is available there. Manoeuvre the aircraft if necessary,
and look beneath it. Ideally, select a field downwind of your
present position, since that is where the gliding range of the
aeroplane will be greatest.
Make all turns towards the field and do not turn your back on Make allturns towardsthe
it - it is possible to lose sight of the field and waste time re- field.
identifying it.
The forced landing field should:
• be well within gliding range;
• be large and preferably surrounded by other suitable fields;
• have no obstacles on the approach and overshoot areas;
• be level or slightly uphill;
• have a suitable surface (ideally an aerodrome, but pasture or
stubble may be satisfactory; wetness, often indicated by dark
green areas, may be a disadvantage; crops and beaches in
general should be avoided - the preferred order being pasture,
stubble, harrowed fields, ploughed fields, beaches, standing
crops. Avoid roads if possible, because of the danger of vehicles,
power lines and roadside posts or signs, although, especially
after heavy rain, a quiet, straight country road might be the best
option).
• be close to civilisation (communication and assistance may be
valuable).
Apply the mnemonic wosssss:
'WOSSSSS' FORCED LANDING CHECK
W Wind
0 Obstacles (on surface:trees, rocks,etc.)
S Size and Shape of field (inrelationto wind)
S Surface and Slope
S ~shoots, (undershootand overshootareas)
S Sun (positionrelativeto finalapproachplanned)
S S(c)ivilisation (proximityfor assistancea~er landing)
Planning the Approach

Use key points in planning The basic plan that you formulate depends mainly on your height
the approach. above the ground. Various patterns and key points around a field
can assist you in flying a suitable glide descent.
Each flying training organisation and each flying instructor will
have a preferred technique, but the aim is the same in every case
- consistently good positioning for a glide approach and landing.
We discuss various planning techniques. Your flying instructor will
give you sound advice on which to use.
Method ( a): The 1,000 ft ag Close Base Leg Technique

The basic aim using this technique is to arrive at 1,000 ft agl on a
close base leg, from which a comfortable glide well into the field
can be made. If the engine is stopped, the drag from the propeller
will steepen the glidepath compared to the glide angle when the
engine is idling (as in the practice manoeuvre), so allow for this
possibility.
A close baseleg A wide base leg allows little room for error, but a close base leg
givesflexibility. gives flexibility in the case of over- or under-shooting the field,
allowing adjustments to be made quite easily. According to your
position when the engine fails, choose either a left or right
1,000 ft base area, with a long base leg and a short final. Left turns
provide a better view of the field for the pilot. Noting a ground
reference point near the 1,000 ft position will assist in re-
identifying the turning-base point if you are distracted.
Staycloseto the field and A suitable distance for the downwind leg is approximately nm
make all turns towardsit from the selected landing path. In flying a square pattern around
the selected field, approximately 1,000 ft per leg will be lost, and
this must be considered in your planning.
296 FORCED LANDINGS
above
...,.----- 2,000 ft agl
Planned
landing
run
Selected field
■ Figure16-5 A very basic circuit plan for a forced landing

Method (b): The High Key and Low Key Technique
The advantage of using the highkey and the lowkey is that they are The initialaimingpoint
closely related to the selected landing strip and therefore are easily (/AP)may be between one-
re-identified: third and two-thirdsinto
the landingsite - your
•. The low key - 1,500 ft agl about 113 nm abeam the initial instructorwilladvise.
aiming point - IAP (a similar position to where the aeroplane
would be using Method (a)).
• The high key- 2,500 ft agl in line with and about 3/4 to 1 nm
upwind of the far end of the selected landing strip.
Engine failure
point 4,500 ft agl
High key
2
■ Figure16-6 The high key and the low key

The first aim in the descent is to glide to the high key, keeping
the field in sight. The purpose of the high key is simply to assist
your judgement in reaching the low key, which is of course the
more important key point. After some practice glide descents,
you may find that you can glide direct to the low key without any
definite consideration of the high key.
Engine failure at a low height (say 2,000 ft agl) will also mean
flight direct to the low key.
Planyourdescentfor Monitor descent to the key points and plan on a long base and
a longbase and a a short final. If too high, widen out; if too low, cut in.
short final. If the initial aiming point appears to move up in the windscreen
or side window, you are becoming too low, so immediately turn in
towards the landing area. If the initial aiming point appears to move
down, you are becoming too high, so turn outwards. Try to
maintain a constant aspect as the aircraft closes onto the landing
area.
High key
2,500 ft agl
..._......
,
,,,.,
;' ......
......
I
I
I
~
~
',,
I Revised plan ',
'
Low key
1,500 ft agl
0
0
if tending to
undershoot
high key
',
\
■ Figure16-7 Monitor the descent to the key points
Estimates of familiar heights (such as 1,000 ft agl circuit height)

will generally be reasonably accurate.You should develop the same
skill with other heights.
Assess the windduringthe Assess the wind during the descent to assist in choosing a suitable
descent. base point. A reasonably long base leg allows:
• more time to judge wind strength (using the drift angle on base);
• better judgement of height (since it is easier to judge height
out to one side of the aeroplane than straight ahead);
• flexibility in adjusting the descent path:
cutting in if too low;
- widening out, lengthening the base leg or extending flap if
298 FORCED LANDINGS
too high.
A short final allows for a glidepath steeper than expected.
Rectifying the Problem
When established in the glide, there may be time to look for the Attemptto rectifythe
cause of the engine failure and to remedy it. The Pilot's Operating engineproblem.
Handbook will contain a list of the appropriate items to check. It
will include:
• fuel·
'
• mixture·
'
• carburettor heat;
• throttle linkage;
• fuel pump on (if fitted);
• primer (locked);
·• magneto switches.
If the propeller is rotating, then fuel and ignition ON should be Donotneglectto
enough to restart the engine, otherwise the starter may be control
theflightpath.
required. While attempting to rectify the problem, the continuing
descent towards the key points should be monitored and the
suitability of the field confirmed. If you decide that your chosen
field is unsuitable, then select another as early as possible.
Radio Calls and Passenger Briefing
Make a Mayday distress call (in a real forced landing, but not Adviseothersof your
when practising). VHF radio signals may not be effective from forcedlanding.
very low levels, so the sooner a Mayday call is made in the glide
the better. The Mayday call should be made on 121.5 MHz as this
frequency secures best A TC assistance.
Keep radio conversations brief and do not be distracted from
your main duty, which is to fly the aeroplane. Squawk transponder
code 7700, as this helps ATC radar to identify an aeroplane
expenenc1ng an emergency.
Advise your passengers of your intentions. Request them to Donotbe distracted from
remain calm, to remove sharp objects from their pockets, to yourmainduty,whichisto
remove glasses and dentures, to ensure that their seatbelts are flythe aeroplane.
fastened securely and to adopt the brace position. Soft clothing or
pillows will help to protect them if a sudden deceleration or impact
is expected. Harnesses should remain fastened until the aeroplane
stops. Be firm and tolerate no interference. Request silence.
Approaching the Low Key Point- 1,500 ~ agl
As normal circuit height is approached, all of your attention needs Securetheaircra~
for
to be focused on positioning for the approach and landing. touchdownona rough
Further attempts to re-start would only distract you from this. surface.
Secure the aeroplane, placing it in a safer condition for a landing
on an unprepared field by carrying out the required security
check (also known as the crashor impactcheck):
16 - TheForcedLandingWithout Power 299
• fuel OFF
'
• ignition OFF;
• radio OFF;
• master switch OFF (unless flaps are electrically operated);
• cabin heater OFF;
• brakes OFF;
• harnesses very secure;
• doors unlatched (if appropriate to your aeroplane type);
• all loose items secured and the position of safety items noted
(e.g. fire extinguisher, first-aid kit).
Where to Turn onto Base Leg

Extenddownwind From the low key abeam the touchdown point, extend
according
to thewind. downwind according to the wind. The stronger the wind, the
shorter the extension of the downwind leg, bearing in mind that
it is preferable to be a little high on final approach than to be too
low. If the su1face wind is:
• greater than 20 kt, commence base turn at the low key point
abeam the aiming point for landing, i.e. at about 1,500 ft agl;
• between 10 and 20 kt, commence base turn when the aiming
point for landing appears about one-half chord length behind
the trailing edge (for a low-wing aeroplane), which will occur
at about 1,300 ft agl;
• less than 10 kt, commence base tum when the aiming point for
landing appears about one chord length behind the trailing edge
(for a low-wing aeroplane), which will occur at about 1,100 ft agl.
11
Low key
1,500 ft agl
IAP
@
I
If too low , If too high
✓
....... ✓
■ Figure 16-8 Manoeuvre for a long base and a short final
When To Use Flaps

A typical technique is to lower flap to bring the initial aiming
point (IAP) closer to the threshold. Lower:
• the first stage of flap on base leg;
• the second stage on final;
300 FORCED LANDINGS
• full flap on final when assured of reaching the landing site.

If the aeroplane appears to be high on base leg, then:
• lengthen the base leg; or
• widen the base leg; or
• extend some flap; or
• sideslip (if permitted - refer to the Pilot's Operating
Handbook); or
• carry out some S-turns (but try and avoid this).
If the aeroplane appears to be low on base leg, then you can: A longbase leg and a short
• shorten the base leg; finalgiveyouthe greatest
• cut in towards the field for a shorter final; or flexibility.
• delay the use of flap.
Monitor Airspeed and Bank Angle

It is most important that you maintain the correct gliding speed, Monitorairspeedand bank
especially when turning. A gliding turn near the ground should anglecloselyin the gliding
not be steep because: turnto final.
• stalling speed increases with increasing bank angle and wing
loading; and
• rate of descent in a glide increases with bank angle.
Be very conscious of your airspeed during the turn onto final
and limit the angle of bank to 15-20° (30° maximum). Do not
stall or even allow the aeroplane to approach the stall!
Turn onto final so that the aiming point is well into your
chosen field, say 112 to 1/3 into the field, to ensure that you make
it. It is better to land too far in than to undershoot the field and
hit a fence or some other obstacle. It is best of course, to land
comfortably over the field boundary and have sufficient distance
to stop well before the far boundary without any drama.
Final Approach
Once certain that you can glide well into the field, continue
extending flap in stages to steepen your approach and bring the
aiming point closer to you.
Keep the aiming point comfortably past the near boundary so
that, even if an undershoot occurs, a safe landing in the field can
still be made. It is safer to hit an obstacle at the far end at slow speed
than to hit the fence before landing. It is safest, of course, to judge
your aiming point so that neither occurs and so that you land com-
fortably into the field. Ensure that the master switch is OFF once
electrically operated flaps have been placed in the landing position.
If you are too high on final approach:
• extend flap;
• make shallow S-tums (but avoid this if possible);
• dive-off excess height (but avoid this also if possible).
16 - TheForcedLandingWithout Power 301
If you are too low on final approach, delay extending flap. Do

not fall into the trap of trying to stretch the glide by raising the
nose. Airspeed will reduce and the rate of descent will increase;
the flightpath will in fact be steeper. In an extrern.e case you may
have to land in a nearer field.
■ Figure 16-9 Use of more flap brings the aiming point closer
The Landing
A forced landing with full flap is generally safest because:
• the touchdown speed is low (due to the lower stalling speed);
• the landing run is shorter; and
• the stress on the airframe will be less if the field is rough.
Hold the nosewheeloff Touch down on the main wheels, holding the (less-robust)
duringthe landing. nosewheel off to avoid unnecessa1y stress. Brakes should be used
to shorten the ground run.
Unseen obstacles and ditches could be a problem. If collision
with an obstacle is imminent (say the far fence), apply 1udder, brak-
ing on one side only to initiate a controlled ground loop if possible.
Aeroplane at Rest
Securethe aeroplaneand A forced landing is not complete until the aeroplane is stopped,
evacuate. the passengers evacuated, the aeroplane made secure and assistance
obtained. So as soon as the aeroplane stops:
• set the brakes to PARK;
• secure the aeroplane (check all switches OFF, fuel OFF, control
locks IN);
• evacuate;
• chock the aeroplane;
• remove any items thought necessa1y;
• protect the aeroplane, e.g. keep animals away;
• seek assistance and telephone the chief flying instructor and
the appropriate authorities. If possible, leave someone in
charge of the aeroplane.
Do not attempt to take off1
302 FORCED LANDINGS
Part (ii)
Simulated Forced Landing

Engine Operation
So far we have covered the genuine engine-failure situation. In Ensurecorrect
practice, however, we only simulate an engine-failure and, once engineoperation.
having demonstrated that we could have made a safe landing, go
around off the approach from a safe height (say 500 ft agl in the
low flying training area). To ensure that the engine will respond
at the time of go-around:
• ensure that the mixture is RICH and move the carburettor heat
control to HOT to avoid carburettor icing (prior to reducing
power in the simulated engine-failure). If a fuel pump is fitted,
switch it ON;
• clear the engine and keep it warm by increasing rpm for a few
seconds every 500 or 1,000 ft on descent;
• when applying power for the go-around, check mixture RICH
and carburettor heat full COLD (most engine manufacturers
recommend moving carburettor heat to COLD first, then
applying power).
Simulate the trouble check, Mayday call and security check
that you would carry out in a real forced landing, i.e. call them out
at the appropriate time in your glide descent, but do not action
them. For example, call "fuel OFF, magneto switches OFF", and so
on, but do not move the switches.
Keep a good lookout. Other aircraft may be practising glide
approaches to the same field in the training area, possibly from the
other direction in calm wind conditions. Ensure that the climb-
out area following the go-around is clear of obstacles. Check this
well before you descend to a point where the go-around could
become marginal.
Practising forced landings requires steady concentration. It is
practising for an emergency and has its own peculiar risks. You are
calling out items associated with a real forced landing, yet
operating the aeroplane so that it will function normally when
you carry out a go-around from a safe height. Be quite clear that,
while practising, you should not do anything that would endanger
the aeroplane (e.g. actually stop the engine).
Practising forced landings without the use of engine power (i.e.
with the engine idling) is good training in developing the skills of
command. One of these skills is to manage your resources
effectively and efficiently in an emergency situation.
16 - The ForcedLandingWithout Power 303
Airmanship
Airmanshipis µyingwell When practising forced landings without the use of engine power:
and making sound • Look out, especially in the latter stages of the glide approach -
decisions.
other aircraft may be practising forced landings into the same or
a nearby field.
• Clear the engine by increasing rpm at least every 1,000 ft on
descent.
• Do not descend below the authorised break-off height.
• Know your checks thoroughly and execute them in the
correct sequence.
• Do not turn your back on the field - keep it in sight at all
times.
• Do not make unnecessary changes in your field selection.
• Make command decisions in a calm but firm manner.
An Actual Forced Landing

When carrying out an actual forced landing without the use of
engine power, most of the points above related to practising also
apply in the real forced landing situation:
• Do not rely on a partially failed engine.
• Ensure the trouble check, Mayday call and security check are
actioned and not just called out, as in practice. To be effective,
the Mayday call must be made at a reasonable height. It may be
made earlier in the sequence, according to circumstances at the
time. For instance, if the engine fails at a low height, the
Mayday call could be made as the last item of step 1 in the
following Airwork diagram. If the engine fails at height, then
the Mayday call can be made at position 5 as shown.
• Be certain to know (and to action) door position either OPEN
or CLOSED as specified in the Pilot's Operating Handbook for a
forced landing.
• Ensure the safety of your aeroplane and passengers after
landing, stopping and securing the aeroplane.
• Notify the authorities as soon as possible following the
landing.
304 FORCED LANDINGS
Airwork 16
Practising
the ForcedLanding
5. Simulate 4. Simulate Trouble Check
Distress Call
as in Pilot's Operating Handbook:
• Mayday
Mayday
Mayday
• (Name of station
---====
High key point
addressed) 2,500 ft agl
Look out (4) ~
• (Your callsign
and type)
~5)
• (Nature of Warm the engine
8. Initiate Go-Around
•
emergency)
(Your intention) Monitor
// • Full power- (carb heat COLD).
the descent • Stop descent (initially fly straight
• (Present position,
altitude and heading) and level).
• (Pilot qualification)
~
c~ • Raise flap in sequence (as
recommended in POH).
Squawk transponder
• Adopt climb attitude.
code 7700, (Mode C,
if fitted) • Trim.
Warm the ·,
',
',@
Wind
Turn base Initialaimingpoint
according
to the wind
\ Use flap
as required
~-
6. Simulate Security Check 7. Adjust Base and Final

as in Pilot's Operating Handbook: Use flap as required to
bring the aiming point
closer to the threshold.
But complete the normal pre-landing checks:
u •,,a•! ■ t•' I I U;, l•ii •• • ■■ ■•• ■ ■ n • • ■ •-t IP• I U I; I U ii I u ■• • • • • u ••, ~~ P, •+• II It •+1 n, 1, ■
16 - The ForcedLandingWithout Power 305
Airwork 16
3. Plan the Approach
• Select key positions.
• Keep turns towards the field.
2. Select Field: (W O S S S S S)
- Monitor~
' the descent~ ~ • Wind.
Look out • Obstacles (on surface).
• Size and Shape (in relation to wind).
• Surface and Slope.
• 'Shoots' (under-lover-shoot areas).
• Sun (position relative to final).
Warm the engine
• S(c)ivilisation (proximity for assistance).
~ 1. Simulated Engine Failure

~ \ •
• Mixture rich.
1 • Power OFF ( carb heat HOT).
• Convert excess speed to distance or
height.
• Adopt gliding attitude.
IAS ..................
kt and trim.
• Simulate emergency check ( change fuel
tanks, magneto check, carburettor ice
check).
Prior to Practising Forced Landings
START
Check:
HERE
• Correct local flying training area.
• At a suitable height above the ground.
• Maintain awareness of low flying regulations.
306 FORCf.D LANDINCS
Forced Landings 307
Exercise 17a
The PrecautionarySearchand Landing
Aim
To carry out a safe powered approach and landing at an unfamiliar
field.
Considerations
Why Land on an Unfamiliar or Unprepared Field?
A pilot may be faced with the decision to land away from an
aerodrome for a number of reasons. These include suspected
engine or airframe problems; a sudden deterioration in weather,
with low cloud and decreasing visibility making further flight
unsafe; or as a result of deficient flight planning or navigation.
Being totally lost, having insufficient fuel or insufficient daylight
remaining are good enough reasons to consider making a
precautionary landing in a field.
Impending incapacitation of the pilot, say due to food
poisoning, is best coped with on the ground. Land sooner rather
than later, but ensure that the field chosen for landing is suitable.
If you are about to land at an unfamiliar field, then you should
consider a precautionary inspection before landing, especially if
there is no other activity at the field.
Decision to Land
Make an earlydecisionto If any doubt exists as to the advisability of continuing the flight,
land. make the decision to land while there is still time to do so with the
aeroplane under full control and before conditions deteriorate to
a dangerous level. It is better to land before you run out of either
fuel, daylight or visibility, even if the landing is in a field rather
than at an aerodrome.
Estimate what time you do have available. Slowing the
aeroplane down and possibly lowering some flap may help
enormously. Slow flight gives you more time to observe the
ground and to plan, as well as making the aeroplane more
manoeuvrable. Turning performance is better at slow speeds and
forward vision from the cockpit is improved. Slow flight may
reduce the problems facing you and may even eliminate them.
308 FORCED LANDINGS

Search for a Suitable Landing Area
Once the decision to land has been taken, immediately search for
a suitable landing area. Ideally, choose an active aerodrome;
otherwise select the most suitable landing field as outlined in
"Select a Suitable Field" on page 294. Consider advising Air
Traffic Control of your intentions by radio on the normal
frequency and, if not satisfactory, on the emergency frequency
121.5 MHz.
Items to consider when selecting a field include:
• its alignment with respect to the surface wind;
• size (large is better than smaller);
• no obstacles in the approach or go-around areas;
• level or slightly uphill (a downslope is not good);
• a firm surface with no obstructions;
• near civilisation.
If no suitable field is obvious, then searching downwind will
allow you to have a higher groundspeed and so cover more area.
Aircraft Configuration
If low cloud, poor visibility or a restricted manoeuvring area is Consideradoptingthe
involved, then adopt the precautionary (or bad weather) precautionary
configuration. Use the optimum stage of flap, which may be just configuration.
the first stage. Extending some flap allows:
• slower speeds (due to reduced stalling speed);
• a smaller turn radius and a higher rate of turn (due to the
reduced speed);
• better visibility from the cockpit (due to lower nose position);
and
• improved elevator and rudder response due to higher power
and greater slipstream effect over the tail (possibly).
Staying in the one configuration allows you to fly the whole
sequence (descents, straight and level, and climbs) at a constant
airspeed, thereby removing one variable. Fly the attitude for the
desired speed, and control descent, level flight and climb-out with
the use of power.
Field Inspection
Several inspection runs should be made in the precautionary Inspectthe selected
configuration and a circuit pattern and circuit height established. landingarea.
With no restrictions, a normal circuit pattern should be suitable.
In bad weather, a low and tight circuit (e.g. 500 ft agl) may be
advisable. The heights at which the circuits are flown and the
17a - The Precautionary
Searchand Landing 309
number of inspection runs carried out depend on the situation.

Command decisions must be made by the pilot.
The low flying check should be completed before descent to a
low level. It is good airmanship to keep your workload to a
minimum in low-level flight. Flying low to inspect a surface
means accurate flying and a good lookout. Keep the aeroplane in
trim or, if anything, trim slightly nose-up so that the aeroplane
will have no tendency to descend while your attention is directed
outside.
Airmanship
Fly the aeroplane into a position for a normal engine-assisted
approach. Consider making a short-field landing to minimise
stress on the aeroplane during the touchdown and landing run if
the field is rough. Complete the appropriate pre-landing checks.
If time is not a consideration, be prepared to go around if not
totally satisfied with the approach.
Be aware of the usual illusions of low flying resulting from the
wind effect. Keep your turns accurate and balanced in spite of the
deceptive appearance of the ground if there is a strong wind. Add
power to maintain airspeed in the turn if necessary and monitor
the airspeed indicator.
Learnto make command Even though three preliminary circuits are shown in "Ai1work
decisionsquicklyand 17a" on page 311, adapt the procedure according to your require-
efficiently. ments. Learn to make command decisions quickly and efficiently.
Adapt your plan to suit the conditions (e.g: low cloud,
imminent darkness, low fuel). Possibly a 500 ft agl, close-in circuit
with only one inspection run might be called for, with no delay
in making a landing.
When practising the precautionary search and landing:
• Ensure that you are in the correct local flying area and keep a
good lookout for other aircraft.
• Consider any regulations or local rules (such as no descents
below 500 ft agl, do not frighten animals, etc.), and obey them.
• Align the direction indicator with the landing direction
(either on 360 or 180) to help with orientation.
Your flying instructor will give you plenty of practice at this
procedure in many different situations. Adapt to each situation as
you see fit.
310 FORCED LANDINGS
Further Points
Three Inspection Circuits

If there are no time, fuel or weather restrictions, and three inspec-
tion circuits are considered necessary, a suitable plan might be:
CIRCUIT 1. At 1,000 ft agl to establish circuit and note landmarks
and magnetic headings. Some flying instructors may consider this
preliminary circuit superfluous. Complete low flying checks
before descent.
CIRCUIT 2. To select and make a preliminary evaluation of the
actual landing path. Descend on final and make a 500 ft agl run (or
300 ft agl run - refer to your flying instructor) slightly right of the
landing path to give you a good view of the approach path and the
landing surface out of your left cockpit window. Search for large
obstacles and obstructions, ditches, animals, wires, fences, etc.
Return to circuit height as you near the end of the field.
CIRCUIT 3. Descend on final and make a run to the right of and
along the landing path at a lower, but still safe, level (say 100 ft agl)
for a closer inspection of the landing surface itself Return to
circuit height.
CIRCUIT 4. A normal circuit followed by a short-field landing.
Make each inspection run alongside the selected landing path at a
constant height and not as a slow descent that necessitates a frantic
climb at the far boundary to avoid obstacles.
17a - The PrecautionarySearchand Landing 311
Airwork 17a
The PrecautionarySearchand Landing
Aim To carry out a safe approach and landing at an unfamiliar (teld with engine power available.
For the purpose of this exercise, the scenario is a cloud base of 600 ft agl,
poor visibility and 20 minutes' flight time available before night sets in.
Preliminary Circuit/Visual Inspection

500 ~ agl
• If field looks satisfactory, continue; and select
turning points on ground, if possible.
If field not satisfactory, look elsewhere.
I (2)
2. Adopt Precautionary
Configuration
0
• Flap ..................
.
(1)
• Speed ...................
kt IAS.
• Align direction indicator.
1. Select Field
• Into wind.
• Large.
START
HERE • No obstacles in the approach or go-
around areas.
• Level or slightly uphill.
• Firm surface, no obstructions.
• Near civilisation.
312 FORCED LANDINGS
Airwork 17a
Run 1. 300 ft agl, To right of • Obstructions.
landing path • Ditches.
Look for: • Transmission wires.
• Large obstacles. • Fences, animals or vehicles.
,,.--..._.
Descend
to 300 ft agl
on final ---- ....-:-
Run 2. 100 ft agl,

just right of landing path • Inspect landing surface closely.
Descend
to mo ft agl
on final
Run 3. Short, soft-field approach and landing
Inmate go-around
(in practrce situation)
--~U;s;e;s:ho;rt;_;,fie~l~d~a;ndd-~---==;::::::::~~~;
soft-field approach and
;~~ ~~~~
•••
landing techniques
17b - Ditchingin Water 313
Exerci:se 17b
Ditchingin Water
Aim
To alight on water as successfully as possible, if ditching is the only
available option.
NOTE This exercise is not part of the EASA syllabus.
Being forced to ditch in the ocean is a remote possibility; how-

ever, it is worthwhile having a suitable procedure in the back of
your mind.
Make emergencyradio Try to land near a ship or in a shipping lane if possible. Make a
callsbefore ditching. Mayday radio call before too much height is lost to ensure the best
chance of reception by ground stations.
Landing Direction
If the water is smooth, or smooth with a very long swell, then land
into wind.
If there is a large swell or rough sea, then land along the swell,
even if you have to accept a crosswind. This avoids the danger of
nosing into a big wave. Waves generally move downwind except
near a shoreline or in fast-moving estuaries, but swells may not
bear any relationship to surface wind direction.
Clues to wind direction include:
• wave direction;
• wind lanes (the streaked effect being more apparent when
viewed downwind);
• gust ripples on the water surface;
• aeroplane drift.
Best po.sitlon
Swell~i~
■ Figure1lb-1 Touch down on top of a swell, or just a~er it

314 FORCED LANDINGS

If your engine is running, use a powered approach for ditching. Use a poweredapproach,
From altitude, water generally appears to be calmer than it is. Fly if possible,for ditching.
low and study the water surface before ditching.
Generally ditch with an early stage of flap set, using a low
speed, a high nose attitude (tail-down) and a low rate of descent
controlled by power (if available). Power gives you a lot more
control over the touchdown point, so avoid running out of fuel
prior to ditching.
Touch down with as low a flying speed as possible, but do not
stall in.
Alert the Passengers

Warn the passengers. Buckle up and don life-jackets, if available,
but do not inflate them until in the water, as they may restrict the
evacuation. Remove headsets and anything else that may get in
the way during the evacuation.
Be prepared for a double impact - the first when the tail strikes
the water, the second (and greater) when the nose hits the water.
The aircraft may also slew to one side.
Evacuation (if possible) should be carried out as calmly as
possible, life-jackets being inflated outside the cabin. The pilot-
in-command should supervise.
Flying Training 315
Exercise 18a
Pilot Navigation
Aim
***
* *
~*•*: EASAPart-FCLTo fly cross-country, navigating with visual reference to the ground.
requires radio
navigation to bestudied
(Ex.1Bc).Thisisnot Considerations
required fortheUK
national syllabus.When you have completed most, or all, of your basic flying
EASAPart-FCL students training, the next challenge awaiting you is to deal with cross-
shouldreadthis country navigation. Flying to another aerodrome, perhaps quite
introductorychapterto distant, requires the additional knowledge and skills encompassed
navigation,
andthengoto in flight planning and navigation. In this exercise, we have
Vol.3 of TheAirPilot's summarised the knowledge that is covered in detail in Volume 3
Manual,whereallaspects
of navigation,includingof this series, Air Navigation. Volume 3 prepares you for the CAA
radionavigation, are PPL exam in this subject.
covered indepth.
Flight Management
Control
theprogress of As the pilot-in-command of a cross-country flight you have
yourflightfromthe certain duties to perform, both on the ground and in flight. The
planning
stageto closing main flight management tasks are:
theflightplan.
• to fly the aeroplane; and
• to navigate it to the destination, which involves:
- flight planning; and
- en route navigation.
You have limited resources in the cockpit which need to be
managed efficiently. For example, it is difficult to measure tracks
and distances on a chart in flight while trying to fly in rough air.
Better management would have seen the chart work done on the
ground prior to flight. The better the flight planning, the easier
the en route navigation!
Personal Navigation Equipment

The two most important instruments in visual navigation are the
magnetic compass and the clock, so always carry a serviceable
watch. Provided that the aeroplane's position has been fixed
within the previous twenty minutes or so, and its speed is known
(at least approximately), its position during flight can be deduced
from the direction it has travelled and the time taken from the fix.
316 FLYING TRAINING
A flight case, satchel or 'nav bag' that fits comfortably within

reach in the cockpit should be used to hold your navigation
equipment. A typical flight case should contain:
• relevant charts covering at least 50 nm either side of your
planned track;
• a navigation computer;
• a scale rule and protractor (or a plotter);
• pens, pencils and spare flight log forms;
• appropriate flight information publications, e.g. Pooley's Flight
Guide; and
• sunglasses.
The Flight Log

The flight log is designed to keep the necessary navigation data
and calculations orderly. There are various presentations and the
one illustrated below is typical.
Pilot H. Lawson Aircra~ G-BATC Date 1-6-2002 E.TD 1430 UTC

• From/To I
Safety ALT RAS TAS W/V TR Dri~ HOG Var HDG GS Dist Time E.TA HDG
ALT ' 07 07 OM oc
Temp
'
I
'
I
,I
■ Figure1Ba-1 Layout of a typical flight log form
Flight Planning
Weather and Operational Considerations
B fore you tart t plan any flight, you should check the likely Obtain a thorough
w a her to h found on e plan ed route including a fo • ca t of pre-flight briefing.
wind and t mp ratu ·es. It is good airn1anship o ak advantag
of the bri ting facilitie avai] le o get a w ather bri · fing for
yo r plann d ar a and a rodron1 of op rafon.
Weather information is available:
• in aerodrome briefing offices (where, at certain aerodromes,
print-outs and facsimiles of Area Forecasts and Aerodrome
Forecasts are available - as advised in UK AIP GEN 3-5);
• by telephone from the AIRMET automated text infonnation
ervic , u ing h AIRMET r gr .1n shown in IP EN 3-5; or
• by fa imil fr rn th dial-u ME •- a •erv1c • hich
upplies a variety of graphic a ·ea for ca ts and RME •
18a - PilotNavigation 317
regional forecasts, together with actual weather reports and

aerodrome forecasts.
NOTE For flights outside the area of coverage of UK Area
Forecasts, a Special Forecast may be obtained from a weather
office, but two hours' notice is required (four hours' if the route
distance exceeds 500 nm). Refer to the Weather Forecastsand
Reports chapter in Vol. 2 of this series.
Make an informedgo/ Establish from the forecasts that the planned flight can be
no-godecision. completed in visual conditions. Note the Altimeter Setting
Regions (ASRs) you will pass through en route. You must check
for any operational factors affecting your route, referring to:
• NOT AMs for urgent and short notice items;
• AICs (Aeronautical Information Circulars), the AIP (UK
Aeronautical Information Publication) and AIP Supplements
for 'permanent' items of long standing;
• Preflight Route Bulletins (GEN);
• Temporary Navigational Warning Bulletins (TNW).
Compiling a Flight Log

Selecta suitableroute. Select the route over which you want to fly. Terrain, cultural
features and aeronautical information are shown on the CAA
1:500,000 aeronautical chart series, as well as the 1 :250,000 series.
(1 :250,000 charts have airspace information only up to 3,000 ft
amsl, however.) Note the nature of the terrain and of the airspace
along the chosen route and to either side of it:
• terrain - check the height of any obstacles within (say) 10 nm
of track;
• airspace - check the route for:
controlled airspace, including CTRs and overlying TCAs
and CTAs;
Prohibited Areas, Restricted Areas or Danger Areas;
Aerodrome Traffic Zones (ATZs) and Military Aerodrome
Traffic Zones (MATZs);
Radar Advisory Service Areas;
other aerodromes.
It may be best to avoid particularly high or rugged terrain and
areas of dense air traffic.
Choose turning points and checkpoints that will be easily
identified in flight, and cannot be confused with other nearby
ground features. Mark the route on your chosen aeronautical
chart and enter the checkpoints on the navigation flight log.
Lookfor suitableen route Note any suitable alternate aerodromes on or adjacent to the
alternateaerodromes. route, in case of an unscheduled landing becoming necessary. Also
note the en route radio frequencies and any other relevant
information.
318 FLYING TRAINING
Safety Altitudes and Cruising Altitudes

In selecting an appropriate altitude at which to fly on a cross Selecta safe
count1y flight in VMC and under VFR, it is useful to bear in mind cruisingaltitude.
the following:
• The need to comply with the requirements of the low flying
rules (rule 5) including:
- separation from obstacles,
- suitable clearance over congested areas,
- the glide-clear requirements.
• Selecting a higher altitude at which to fly gives you more
options in the event of an in-flight emergency.
• Selecting altitude other than the obvious 1500, 2000, 2500 feet
amsl is less likely to lead to a conflict with other traffic.
A reasonable minimum altitude is very handy if, for instance,
cloud forces you to fly lower than planned. Also check the
meteorological information to confirm that the forecast cloud
base is above this safety altitude.
Select a suitable cruising altitude for each leg and enter it in
the flight log.
Considerations should include:
• terrain·
'
• overlying airspace restrictions; and
• the cloud base.
Tracks and Distances
For each leg of the flight, mentally estimate the track in degrees
true and the distance in nautical miles before measuring it accu-
rately (ensuring that you are using the correct scale). Mentally
estimating track and distance prior to actual measurement will
avoid gross errors. Insert these measured figures on the flight log.
From/To Safety ALT RAS TAS WIV TR 1 Ori~ HDG Var HOG GS , Dist Time ETA HOG
Elstree ALT OT OT OM oc
Temp I
'
_I 069 '
60
Ipswich I
I 1
. 1286 ' 40
I
Cambridge
-2081 38
Elstree
'
Total 138
'
I
■ Figure 1Ba-2 The flight log at this stage
Distance Markers or Time Markers

To assist you in flight, it is suggested that each leg be subdivided
and small marks placed at intervals on the track lines drawn on the
chart. The usual means of subdividing (your flying instructor will
recommend a method) is to use one of the following:
• distance markers each 10 nrn; or
• distance markers at 1/4, 112, and 3/4 points; or
• time markers each 10 m.inutes; or
• time markers at the 1/ 4 1/2 and 3/ 4 points.
NOTE The time markers will, of course, have to wait until you have
calculated groundspeeds and time intervals. Once in flight, these may
vary from the flight-planned values, unlike the distance markers.
Track Guides
To allow easier in-flight estimation of any deviation from the
desired track, it is useful to draw in 5 ° and 10° guides either side
of track emanating from each turning point. This avoids having to
use a protractor or plotter in flight.
Destination
oes\red\rack
~~~
Departure
■ Figure1Ba-3 Track guides
Grounds,peeds and Time Intervals

Insert the forecast winds for each leg, the selected cruising altitude
and the T AS onto the flight log.
Remember that for a given indicated airspeed, the true
airspeed will be greater at higher altitudes and temperatures
because of the decreased air density. Converting IAS to T AS is
easily done on the calculator side of the computer.
CRP-1
pressurealtitude
•
■ Figure1Ba-4 If necessary convert IAS to TAS (using pressure
altitude and temperature)
320 FLYING TRAINING
On the wind side of the computer, use the forecast wind to set
up the trian le of velocitie and calculate drift, heading and
groundspeed.
NOTE It is most important when using the wind side of the
computer that you work either completely in degrees true or
completely in degrees magnetic. Do not mix them! Either method
is satisfactory, but it is most common for PPL holders in the UK
to work in degrees true. Using the navigation computer is covered
in detail in V olun1e 3 of this series.
Having obtained the values for groundspeed (GS) and heading
HDG( , ins, rt the1n n the flight log. Magnetic variation, found
on the chart, is then used to convert the true heading into
magnetic heading - required when using the magnetic compass
and the direction indicator during the flight.
Having measured the distance of each leg and calculated the
expected groundspeed, determine the estimated time interval and
insert it on the flight log.
■ Figure1Ba-5 Calculate heading and Figure1Ba-6 Calculate the estimated time

grounds-peed intervals
Add all of the individual time intervals together and obtain the
total time interval for the whole flight.
It is good airmanship at this point to compare this with the
total distance for the flight and verify that it is a reasonable result,
considering the average grounds eed expected to be achieved. Also,
confirm that you will a-riv with adequate daylight remaining.
18a- PilotNavigation 321
From/To Safety ALT TR HOG Var HOG HOG

ALT
RAS TAS WIV or
Dri'ft 07 OM
GS Dist Time ETA oc
!
Temp
Shoreham
2400 I
2080 98 102 21ono I 082 -2 080 2W 082 132 47 21 083
+10
Lydd
2400
1811 98 102 270/30 346 -16 330 12w 332 91 38 25 I 332
+10
Southend I
2400
2310 98 102 270130 212 +14 226 2W 228 84 42 30 230
+10
Uckfield
2400
2113 98 102 270/30 241 +8 249 2W 251 75 17 14 253
I
+10 i
Shoreham I
1'
II
Total 144 Ii
■ Figure18a-7 The flight log at this stage
Fuel Calculations
The fuel consumption for various power settings is published in
the Flight Manual and Pilot's Operating Handbook. These figures
assume correct leaning of the fuel/ air mixture at higher levels
(usually above 5,000 ft) when cruising at less than 75% maximum
continuous power. Leaning the mixture correctly can decrease
fuel consumption by up to 20%.
At least 45 minutes' From the estimated time interval for the whole flight and the
reservefuel is published fuel consumption rate, calculate the expected flight
recommended. fuel. Reserve fuel should also be carried to allow for in-flight
contingencies, including diversions, fuel consumption poorer
than that published, unexpected headwinds en route, etc. At least
45 minutes' reserve fuel is recommended.
Insert the fuel calculations onto the flight log.
CONSUMPTION RATE 7 USG/hr
Stage min US gal
Route 88 10.3
Reserve 45 5.3
Fuel required 133 15.6= 16
Margin 180 21.0
Total carried 313 37.0
'
■ Figure180-8 Fuel calculations
Weight and Balance (Mass and Balance)

The aeroplanemust be At this stage in your flight planning, knowing the fuel required
loadedwithinits weight and the passenger and baggage load, it is appropriate to consider
and balancelimits. weight and balance. For a flight to be legal, the aeroplane must not
exceed any weight limitation and must be loaded so that the
centre of gravity lies within the approved range throughout the
322 FLYING TRAINING
flight. Complete a load sheet (if necessary) to verify that the

requirements are met.
SAMPLE AIRPLANE YUUR AIRPLANE
SAMPLE LOADING
PROBLEM WEIGHT ARM MOMENT WEIGHT ARM MOMEN1
(LBS.I IIN,l (LB,IN, (LBS.I UN.I (LB,•IN,
/1000) /10001
• 1. L eensedEmpty 1262 83.4 ,: 105.25 J:l.G.Z ~

Weight(Typical)
.49
2. Oil (8 qts.) 1 qt. 15 32.0 .48 -- /5 32.0 1---
= 1.875 lbs.
I
3. Fuel (in excess of
unuseable)
' Standard Tanks
(37 gal.) 222 90.9 20.18
___
222 ,
90.9
20-l'l
Long Range Tanks I
(51 gal.) 94.81 --- 94.81 ---

4. Pilot and Co-Pilot 340 90.6 30.80
340 90.6
30·80
5. Rear Seat Passengers 340 26.0 42.84 - 126.0 ----

•s. Bagg.,ge(in ba09age 21 151.0 3.17
4-5 151.0 --6-8~
compartment) Max.
allowable 120 lbs.
7. Cargo Area h16.4 _1£..1116.4 ---2·32,

Max. allowable I
340 lbs.
8. Total Airplane 2200 92.17 202.72 l~O'J lf5,63

Weight (loaded)
!NOTE: Change in moment from uprfght

to (old-down positionor rur seat
I is negligible.
•Maximum allowable is 1W pounds H C.G. is within Cent r of Gravity Envelope.
Refer to C.irgo Lo1ding and Weight and Balance Section for c rgo loading in-
sttuc 1ions.
"'
~ 400
LOADINGGRAPJI ..
:::, I T 'PILOT& CO-PlLOT
~ $TO FUEL •~• ..,;~ 6 .... ••L
·, " .
~
...3'NI JI,
:c
F\lt. !W, w,._ -II.
IIEAR$EATPAS'S.~GEflS.
.
"
iii
;: 200 '
'I
0
I
. . I
9 100 .
, BA ell . .
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 s.s
MOMENT/1000 INCH POUNDS
,, .
2200
2100
"'
0
z
:::,
... 1000
0
:i5
.. ... .
:I ·1 ...
.. ...
• -I·, ..
I
I I
130 140 150 !GO 170 180 IIIO lOO
MOMENT/1000 INCH POUtlDS
■ Figure1Ba-9 A typical load sheet

Take-Off and Landing Performance

Checkthat runways Having considered weight and balance, you will know the
are adequate. expected take-oH: weight and landing weight of the aeroplane. If
any doubt exists regarding the suitability of the departure,
destination and alternate aerodromes, then reference should be
made to the take-off and landing performance charts in the
Flight Manual. The official source of aerodrome data is the AD
section of the Aeronautical Information Publication (AIP).
Meteorological data affecting the performance (i.e. wind and
temperature) can be obtained from the forecast.
UNITED KINGDOM GULFSTREAM AMERICAN
SUPPLEMENT MODEL AA•5A CHEETAH
TAKEOFF DISTANCE (AA-5A United Kingdom! Sample only

Not to be used
ASSOCIATEDCONDITIONS: for operational
POWER- MAXIMUM purposes
FLAPS-UP
RUNWAY - HARD SURFACE(LEVEL & DRY)
FUEL .. ll(TURE - FULL THROTTLE CLIMB, MIXTURE LEANED ABOVE 6000
FT TO SMOOTH ENGINE OPERATION.
NOTES:
1. DECREASE DISTANCE 4% FOR EACH 5 KNOTS HEADWIND. FOR OPERATION
WITH TAILWINDS UP TO 10 KNOTS, INCREASI: OiSTANCE BY 10% FOR EACH I
2.5 KNOTS.
2. F TAKEOFF POWER IS SET WITHOUT BRAKES APPLIED, THEN DISTANCES
___________
_____________
APPLY FROM POINT WHERE FULL POWER IS ATTAINED.
3. FOR TAKEOFF FROM A ORY, GRASS RUNWAY, INCREASE GROUND RUN
AND TOTAL DISTANCE TO CLEAR A 60 FT OBSTACLE BY 12.5% OF THE ......_ _,
HARD SURFACE RUNWAY TOTAL TO CLEAR 50 FT OBSTACLE.
GULFSTREAM AMERICAN UNITED KINGDOM

MODEL AA-5A CHEETAH SUPPLEMENT
I TAKEOFF O"C 10"C
SPEED 132"FI l40"FI LANDING DISTANCE (AA-5A United Kingdom!
WEIGHT Kl.AS (Ml'HI i PRESS. METRES METIAE;
KGS !UFT CLEAR ALT GNO 50 GND ! A T.§C!{;Q~ QIIIQlll:i:
,5,S§Q!;;I p\..Eo~\.. \unc\\ol'I
I OFF liO FJ' FT RUN FT .RUN F POWER-OFF 5,-; sed \o co,\'onsot
FLAPS-DOWN \.Obe u ope1e :
99B 66 63 SL 230 1 419 1255 '•1 RUNWAY - HARD SURFACE !LEVEL & DRY) t,to\VI\\h f\\gh\
f\\g \
:p\atll'\1\9
(&$) (731 2000 273 , 495 304 15'
I BRAKING - MAXIMUM
4000 326 ,687 362 Iii!
6000
8000
391 698 434 1
469 832 520 ;e:
.wna:
I. DECREASEOISfANCE 4'll, FOR EACH 5 KNOTS HEADWIND.
( 901 '63 60 SI.) 183 336 203 3.... 2. FOR OPERATIONS WITH TAILWINDS UP TO 10 KNOTS, INCREASE DISTANCE
!611 (69) 2000
4000
218
260
397
471
m-IIr,,
2ee ◄• 3.
BY9%FOA ,E CH2,5 KNOTS.
WHEN I.ANDING ON A ORY G'RASS RUNWAY, INCREASE GROUND RUN ANO
I
I
6000 1 311 660 346 'Gl TOTAL DISTANCE OVER 60 FT. OBSTACJ...EBY 20% OF THE HARD SURFACE
8000 373 668 414 1'' RUNWAY TOTAL DISTANCE OVER A 50 FT OBSTACLE.
816 50 57 SL 142 263 168 21
l581 (661 2000 169 312 187 3A 10"C 20"C 30't: 40'C
O"C
4000 202 369 221 4( SPEED (86°F) (104"FI
!:; l32"FI l40"FI 168'FI
6000 241 439 268 41 ... AT60 FT
.,,
< METRES METRES METRES METRES METRES
I
:c
8000 290 623 321 61
!:!.,, .,,
w •
z::, a: z
::, a: z::, a:
z
::, a:
we,
==~ ~
i2
... ......
:c
::;;
a: ...
C
z
a: ;5 t:
.J 0
a:
C
z
<t-...
w
.J 0
a:
C
z<,
<t-
w&&.
.J 0
§'.;
a: ;5a:
~
...
...
I c::lfi:
a:
C
z
< &&.
IU
...
.JO'
I <,
CJ Ill
<,
CJ Ill CJ ID
<, C, CJ "'I
99B 68 7B SL 123 410 127 422 130 434 133 445 137 458
2000 130 434 134 447 138 i 460 141 473 145 487
4000 138 461 • 142 476 146 490 150 504 165 519
I
6000 I 147 492 I 151 507 156 523 161 639 165 655
I 8000 157 526 I 162 643 167 560 172 578 177 595
( 907 i 65 I 75 L..fil:.J 115 1362 ! 118 392] 121 402 124 413 127 424
2000 121 403 125 414 128 426 131 438 135 449
4000 12a I 421 132 440 135 I 452 139 '!65 143 478
I 6000 136 4541 1140 468 144 482 148 496 152 511
8000 145 484 149 600 164 J 615 158 531 163 547
816 61 71 SL 107 : 353 ; 110 362 112 I 311 116 380 118 390
2000 112 371 115 381 118 I 392 121 402 121 412
4000 118 393 122 404 125 415 128 426 131 438
6000 I 125 I 415 129 429 136 454 140 467
I 132 II 441
8000 133 443 137 457 141 471 145 4B5 149 499
■ Figure 1Ba-10 Consider if performance charts need to be consulted

324 FLYING TRAINING
Flight Notification
Prior to flight you should contact the relevant Air Traffic Services
(ATS) unit and either:
• book out; or
• file a flight plan.
A flight plan may be filed with A TC for any flight and is
advisable when planning to fly more than 10 nm from the coast or
over sparsely populated or mountainous areas, especially if the
aeroplane is not equipped with a radio. A flight plan must be filed
for certain flights, e.g. in certain controlled airspace. The AIP and
AICs detail the requirements. Notification can be in the form of
a full flight plan, or an abbreviated flight plan containing the
limited information needed to obtain a clearance for a portion of
a flight. The abbr· viate flight plan can be filed on the radio or by
t lephone prior take-off.
For most visual flights, however, it is sufficient to book out
with the ATS unit. This may be done by radio prior to taxiing, by
telephone, or in person if necessary. Booking out details should
include the aircraft registration, the destination, flight time,
endurance and the number of persons on board.
Aeroplane Documentation and Flight Preparation

Check that the Certificate of Airworthiness is valid and that the
maintenance document confirms that the aeroplane is airworthy.
Ensure that there is adequate fuel on board and complete Preparethe aeroplanein
your normal pre-flight duties, i.e. the· e rnal (walk-a ~o d) an orderly manner.
Do not rush!
inspection and internal insp ction. v r ·ush ,hi aspect f the
flight. It is more important that th pr -fligh pr paration is
thorough and, even if you are running behind schedule because of
flight planning taking longer-than expected (a common reason),
do not rush your normal pre-flight duties.
ettl in o th ockp' t and P· ce your navigatior1 quipn1 n and
char • wher th y are readily ace ibl . nsure that th char are
folded that at le t 20 nm either ide of track i vi ibl . Ensu ·e that
no metallic or magnetic objects are placed near the magnetic
compass. Check on the comfort of your passengers. Brief them on
actions to be taken in the event of an emergency, e.g. the "brace
position", release of seat belts and emergency escape hatches.
These final checks are worthwhile since, once the engine
starts, the noise level will be high r» c mmunica •on will be
lightly mor difficult and you will be bu i with th • no ·mal
workload of anipulating the aeroplan .
1Ba - Pilot Navigation 325
ht
CERTIFICATE OF AIRWORTHINESS
Certificate IUnber: United Kingdom Dale ol Expiry:

059435/001
Civil--Aviation Authority -- --
10 s~~ m;
1. Nationaily and Regislration Marks 2. Manulacllnr and desli,l3lion ol amaft 3.AiraallSenal tunber
G-CEPX CESSNA AIRCRAFT COMPANY 152-85792
CESSNA152
4. Calegories
UUllty Category Aeroplane
DEANLAND MAINTENANCE
is vaid unless r1Mlked
6. This Ce,tilicale of AilwcJf1ho>ess
Dean/and Airfield
"TIiisartillcate &hal be carried on board during aN alg!lb
CERTIFICATE OF RELEASE TO SERVICE
The work recorded above has boon carried out in accordan.;e 'n~H1 lhe requi1~ments of lhe Air Nav(Jation OrdN rc,rthe ti:nc
being in force and in that respect the a1rcraft/equipmenlis conside1ed fil for release to service
Catego,y
1
A fA ct11~)
I c· \Engine)
R' (Radio)
;""ff,;,;
Certficate is ValidunUI 24.00 hours on 13"' September, 2008 \date)
: or upon comple1:onby l11eaircraft or ------;-50;:----- Fiying hours rr~n the dale of ceffif,:ntion.
i whthe\•er 1s the sooner ..-- • ..........-
_ _ ___ I
~o • Eri1frn, ~ -i>,or,ollc1 P.ro ·e I
·,_.., .--- ~ /102 Nol ··-No ~----- 7
-----·----=Rt.•2'1G97-15 .. _ K~716-3
M86.5 48.8S IOH
IS) d: 10$ .fit~. NA,
To
Aircratt Type Cessna 152
Cerbfied lhal a maintenance revie't, ol 1hisaircraft and such or ils equipment~!; ;s necessary for rts airworthiness has ~en
c~rried oul in accordance with the requirements of lhe Air Nav;,ga:ionOrder for the lime being m force
The nex1maintenance reV.ewtSdue 13,n saetsrow,

200s A
Slgnc,d CAA Approval licence ~
ICompasy·• Dea11landMaintenance AMR/333
■ Figure 1Ba-11 Check the CofA and the maintenance document

326 FLYING TRAINING
The Flight
Start-Up and Taxi
Following normal procedures, start the engine, switch on the radio,
book out with the ATS unit (if this has not already been done) and
taxi to the take-off position. If in any doubt about the exact time,
confirm it with an A TS unit and ensure that your clock is set
correctly. Complete all of the normal pre-flight checks.
Ensure that your navigation equipment is accessible, but will
not restrict the controls in any way.
Take Off and Set Heading

When aligned on the runway, but not accelerating, check that the
magnetic compass is reading correctly and that the direction
indicator is aligned with it.
Following take-off, the easiest method of setting heading is
from directly overhead the airfield, at which time you would men-
tally note your 'set heading' time (or actual time of departure).
NOTE For various reasons, it is not always possible to set heading
over the top (for example, at aerodromes with a low-level Entry I
Exit Lane or if there is overlying controlled airspace) and you must
fly to intercept the planned track some short distance en route.
Once on track, you should estimate what the actual time of
departure from overhead would have been .
.~ Estimated
F, 'set heading'
'time
\
\
\
■ Figure1Ba-12 Two methods of setting heading
To use the magnetic compass precisely, you should refer to the

compass deviation card in the cockpit so that the magnetic
heading can be modified if necessary to the slightly more accurate
compass heading. (Deviation is-usually less than 3° and so is not
operationally significant.)
1Ba - PilotNavigation 327
Once well clear of the circuit area, enter the 'set heading' time
on the flight log and estimate the arrival time at the destination and
at selected points en route. Regional Pressure Setting (obtainable by
radio from an ATS unit) should be set in the altimeter subscale so
that height above mean sea level is indicated, i.e. altitude. Look
well ahead to ensure that visual flight and the required separation
from cloud can be maintained and, if not, consider a diversion.
When established outbound from the aerodrome:
• Arrange the chart so that your planned track runs up the page,
making it easier for you to read from map to ground.
• Confirm that the direction indicator is aligned correctly with
the magnetic compass.
• Positively check a definite ground feature or group of features
within the first 10 nm to ensure that you are indeed on track
and that no gross error has been made - misreading the com-
pass or misaligning the direction indicator is always a possibility.
■ Figure 1Ba-13 Check that tracking is correct soon a~er setting heading
En Route Navigation
It is important to maintain steady headings for known times when
flying cross-country.
There is no need to refer to the chart all the time, but be sure
to keep it handy (and usually on your lap). It is best to select
ground features that will appear at intervals of 10 minutes or so
(which at a groundspeed of 120 kt puts them about 20 nm apart)
to verify that you are on or near track. Selecting checkpoints this
far apart allows time for your other duties, which include flying
the aeroplane, making radio calls and carrying out periodic checks
of the aeroplane systems (see FREDA check, page 240).
Knowfrom the chart which At the appropriate time, look ahead for the next checkpoint
features to expect ahead. which should be coming into view - in other words, look at the
chart, note the features that should shortly come into view and
then look outside with the expectation of seeing them. Read
328 FLYING TRAINING
from map to ground - then use features to either side of track

and well ahead to confirm your position.
Groundspeed Checks
The actual groundspeed is easily calculated from distance/time, Make regularchecksof the
using the time and distance between two fixes or crossing two groundspeedand revise
position lines. For example, if you cover 5 nm in 3 minutes, then yourETAs.
the groundspeed is 100 kt (3 minutes = 1/20 of an hour, therefore
GS = 20 x 5 = 100 kt). These calculations can be done mentally
or on the computer. Mentally is better if you can manage it.
Once you know the GS, you can revise your ET A for the next
check-point (and others further on). Again, this can be done
mentally or by computer. For example, if it is 40 nm to the next
checkpoint, then at 100 kt this should take 40/100 (4/10) of1 hour=
4 x 6 minutes = 24 minutes. If the time now is 1343 UTC, ET A
at the checkpoint is 1407 UTC.
Checking the actual time at the 1/4, 112 or 3/4 points along the
way makes the mental calculation of the next ET A very easy. Also,
it is good airmanship to log the times at fixes (or mark them on the
map), so that you have some record of what positions the
aeroplane passed over and when.
~-
.....
...__River
-:.
;
;
\.._.,.....\
\
j
l i
~134~/\ .
,;: .,,_•
..~··· Town
►•.,..,•~,.•••• ~•ho1 •~ •••••~•Oo>, •t •~•••••
I '··--
......
_
■ Figure1Ba-14 Calculate grounds-peed and revise ETAs
Off-Track Corrections
It is usual to find that the actual track made good over the ground Adjustheadingas
differs from the desired track plotted on the map, possibly because necessary.
the wind is different to that forecast.
Whatever the cause, it is quite a simple calculation to revise the
heading to reintercept track. There are various means of doing
this and your flying instructor will recommend a method. It can
be done by computer or it can be done mentally (which leaves
your hands free for other duties and avoids having your 'head in
the cockpit' for too long). It is good airmanship to log the heading
changes and the time at which they were made.
In each of the three methods in the next figure, the same result
(turn 12° to the right) is obtained. Having regained track, turn 4°
left to maintain it.
1.1:60 Rule
4 nm in 30 nm = 8 nm in 60, :. TE 8°
4 nm in 60 nm,:. CA4°
:. alter heading by 12°
2. Track Guides
10°
by estimation TE =8°
CA=4°
3. Ratio Method
TE = 8° in 1/3 distance
:. CA= 4° in 2/3 distance
■ Figure1Ba-15 Various methods of revising heading
Regular Aeroplar~ Checks

Periodically
checkthe The correct operation of the aeroplane and its systems should be
aeroplanesystems. checked on a regular basis (about every 15 minutes, or just prior
to arrival overhead a check-point). A suitable periodic check is
FREDA, as described in Exercise 13c on page 240.
Turning Points
Just prior to reaching a turning point, check that the DI is indeed
aligned with the magnetic compass (part of the FREDA check).
Take up the new heading over the turning point, log the time and
calculate the ET A for the next checkpoint. Then, within 10 nm
of passing the turning point, confinn from ground features that
you are on the desired track and that no gross error has been made.
Use of the Radio
The radio is a very useful aid. En route and outside controlled
airspace, you will normally select the FIR frequency (shown on
the charts) to enable i1nmediate contact with the Air Traffic
Service unit if desired. If passing close to Aerodrome Traffic
Zones, Military Air Traffic Zones, regulated airspace, etc., make
sure that you contact the appropriate R/T frequency prior to
penetrating the airspace.
330 FLYING TRAINING
Do not be afraid to request a Lower Airspace Radar Service

(LARS) if it is available in your area.
A typical position report will contain your:
• aircraft callsign and type;
• departure point and destination;
• present position;
• level; and
• additional details/intention (e.g. flight rules, next route point).
Arrival at the Destination

If appropriate, make contact with the A TS unit at the aerodrome
some 10 minutes prior to your ET A. This will allow time for you
to obtain the aerodrome information (e.g. the wind, runway in
use, and the QFE or QNH) so that you can plan your arrival.
Normal procedures are either to join on downwind leg at
circuit height or to overfly at 2,000 ft above aerodrome level and
let down to circuit height on the 'dead side' of the traffic pattern.
The latter method is preferred at non-radio fields.
Having landed and taxied in, secure the aeroplane and book in.
Refuelling may be a consideration, as well as payment of any
landing fees.
Further Points
Diversions
A successful cross-country flight does not necessarily mean
arriving at the destination. Sometimes conditions are such that
continuing to the destination would expose your flight to
unnecessary risk. Weather forecasters are not infallible. If the
actual weather conditions ahead deteriorate to such a degree that
onward visual flight would be unsafe (or less safe than you like it
to be), then to divert is good airmanship.
There will always be pressures to press on from, for example, Never be afraidto divertif
passengers wanting to get home, a sense of failure if you do not you think it is the
make it to the planned destination, the inconvenience of having to appropriatething to do.
stay overnight away from home unexpectedly, etc.
When faced with an operational decision of whether to divert
or not, forget all of these secondary problems! They are irrelevant.
Your decision should be based on flight safety grounds alone.
Having decided to divert, perhaps in difficult conditions such
as turbulence, there is a basic diversion procedure that you
should follow:
• Make your decision to divert earlier rather than later.
• If possible, plan to divert from a prominent ground feature

ahead, so that the diversion is commenced from a known point
(e.g. a town).
• Mark the diversion track on the chart (freehand if necessary)
and estimate track and distance - estimate the track in degrees
true with reference to the latitude-longitude grid and estimate
the distance.
• At the prominent feature, take up the estimated diversion
heading, which you have calculated from the estimated track,
allowing for magnetic variation and wind drift. Your heading is
extremely important at this stage - even more important than .
distance (within reason).
• Log the time at the diversion point and your new heading.
• Refer to the chart and look for a positive ground feature soon
after altering heading to ensure that no gross error has been
made.
• When time permits, measure the track and distance accurately
(ideally this would be done prior to the actual diversion).
• Estimate the GS and ET A at the diversion aerodrome or next
turning point.
Informan ATS unitofyour • Inform the nearest Air Traffic Service unit by radio of your
revisedintentions. actions.
• Continue with normal navigation until you reach the diversion
aerodrome (i.e. adjust heading and ETAs as required, contact
the ATS unit at the diversion field when about 10 minutes
away, obtain QNH or QFE, landing direction and other
information).
• Join the circuit normally, land, and book in (and consider if the
original destination aerodrome should be advised), and then
advise your home base of the situation.
Low-Level Navigation
If a diversion is due to a lowering cloud base you may find yourself
involved in low-level navigation. Low-level flying is fully covered
in Exercise 18b, but navigation aspects worth noting are:
• If possible, perform any required checks before descent to a
low level.
• Consider using the precautionaryconfiguration (which allows
slower flight, a better forward view, better manoeuvrability, but
poorer fuel consumption).
• Your field of vision at low level is small and the speed that
ground features pass through it is greater.
• Check features need to be close to track to fall within this field
of vision and must be prominent in profile (i.e. when seen from
the side).
332 FLYING TRAINING
• You must anticipate reaching the ground features, because they

may not be in your field of vision for long. •
• Keep your eyes out of the cockpitas much as possible.
Uncertain of Position
Being temporarilyuncertainof your position is not the same as being
lost. A DR (dead reckoning) position can be calculated which,
hopefully, can shortly be backed up with a positive fix over or
abeam a ground feature.
If, at any time, you are uncertain of your position:
1. Log your heading (compass and direction indicator) and the
time.
2. If the DI is incorrectly set, then you have the information
needed to make a reasonable estimate of your actual position.
Reset the DI and calculate a HDG and time interval to regain
the desired track.
3. If the DI is aligned correctly with the compass, then the non-
appearance of a landmark, while it will perhaps cause you some
concern, need not indicate that you are grossly off track. You
may not have seen the landmark for some perfectly legitimate
reason (bright sunlight, poor visibility, a change in features not
reflected on the chart, cloud, etc.).
4. If you think it is appropriate, make an urgency call (Pan-Pan
Pan-Pan Pan-Pan, etc.) on the frequency in use or on the
emergency frequency 121.5 MHz, squawk the appropriate
conspicuity code on your transponder and request assistance.
S. If still unable to fix your position, follow the procedures on the
next page.
Procedure when Lost

Becoming lost is usually the result of some human error. Careful
pre-flight planning followed by in-flight tt ntion to the itnpl
navigation t ks will en ure hat you nev r becmn I t. You may
become temporarilyuncertain of your exact position, but thi is no
b ing lost beca e you can calculat . n appro imat D position.
If you ever become lost, formulate a plan of action and do
not just fly around aimlessly. Make use of the Radar Information
Service, if available (refer to point 4 above).
When lost:
1. It is important that you initially maintain the HDG (if terrain,
visibility and what you know of the proximity of controlled
airspace permit) and carry out a sequence of positive actions.
2. If a vital checkpoint is not in view at your ET A, then continue

to fly for 10% of the time since your last positive fix.
3. Start from the chart position of your last known fix, check the
headings flown since that last fix, and ensure that:
the magnetic compass is not being affected by outside
influences such as a camera, portable radio, or other metal
objects placed near it;
the gyroscopic direction indicator (DI) is aligned with the
magnetic compass correctly;
magnetic variation and drift have been correctly applied to
obtain your HDGs flown;
an estimate of the track direction on the chart against that
shown on the flight plan is correct.
4. When lost, read from ground to chart, i.e. look for significant
ground features or combinations of features and try to
determit?-e their position on the chart.
5. Establish a most probable area in which you think you are.
This can be done in several ways - your flying instructor will
recommend a method. Two suggested methods of establishing
a most probable area follow.
Establishing A Most Probable Area

Use one of these two methods to establish the most probable area
that you are in.
METHOD 1. Estimate the distance flown since the last fix and apply
this distance, plus or minus 10%, to an arc 30 degrees either side
of what you estimate the probable track made good (TMG) to be.
Most probable
position
VI
■ Figure1Ba-16 Estimating the most probable area that you are in
METHOD 2. Estimate your most probable position and around it

draw a circle of radius equal to 10% of the distance flown since the
last fix.
334 FLYING TRAINING
■ Figure1Ba-17 Another means of estimating the most ,probable ,position
Establish a safe altitude to ensure adequate clearance of all

obstacles in what you consider the general area to be - being
especially careful in conditions of poor visibility or low cloud.
Check large features within this area of the chart with what
can be seen on the ground. Try to relate features seen on the
ground with those shown on the chart, i.e. read from ground to
chart. Confirm the identification of any feature by closely
observing secondary details around the feature.
At all times continueto fly the aircraft.safely,maintainingan awareness

of time, especiallywith respectto last light and your fuel state.
When you do positively establish a fix, recheck your DI and

recommence normal navigation activity. Calculate the HDG, GS
and ET A for the next check feature and set course for it.
If you are still unable to fix your position, you should consider
taking one of the following actions:
1. Increase your most probable area by 10%, 15% or 20% of the
distance flown since the last fix.
2. Climb to a higher altitude to increase your range of vision.
3. Turn towards a prominent 'line feature' known to be in the
area, e.g. a coastline, large river, railway line or road, and then
follow along it to the next town, where you should be able to
obtain a fix.
4. Steer a reciprocal heading and attempt to return to your last fix.
Important Points
• If you want to cover as much ground as possible with the fuel
available, you should fly the aeroplane for best range.
• Keep a navigation log going.
• Remain positively aware of time. Keep your eye on the fuel
and on the amount of time remaining until last light. If last
light is approaching, remember that it will be darker at ground
level than at altitude and, if you are flying in the tropics, that it
will become dark very quickly following sunset.
• If you decide to cany out a precautionary search and landing,

allow sufficient time and fuel to do this, because two or three
inspections might have to be made before finding a suitable
landing area.
Why Did You Become Lost?

If at any stage you became lost, try to determine the reason
systematically (either in flight or post flight) so that you can learn
from the experience. '
Common reasons for becoming lost include:
• incorrectly calculated HD Gs, GSs, and ET As (hence the
need to make mental estimates of approximate answers to these
items);
• an incorrectly synchronised direction indicator (DI), i.e. the
gyroscopic DI not aligned correctly with the magnetic compass
- the DI should be checked every 10 or 15 minutes against the
compass;
• a faulty compass reading (due to transistor radios, cameras
and other metal objects placed near the compass);
• incorrectly applied variation (variation west, magnetic best,
etc.);
• incorrectly applied drift (compared to track, heading should
be into wind);
• an actual wind velocity significantly different to that forecast,
and not allowed for in flight by the pilot;
• a deterioration in weather, a reduced visibility, or an
increased cockpit workload;
• an incorrect fix, i.e. misidentification of a check feature;
• a poorly planned diversion from the original desired track;
• not paying attention to carrying out normal navigation tasks
en route.
With regular alignment checks of the DI with the compass,
reasonably accurate flying of heading, and with position fixes
every 10 or 15 minutes, none of the above errors should put you
far off-track. A pilot will only become lost if lazy or inattentive,
allowing deviations to develop undetected.
336 FLYING TRAINING
Exercise ·1Bb
Navigation at Lower Levels
and in ReducedVisibility
Aim
1. To fly the aeroplane safely at a low level.
2. To observe the misleading visual effects caused by a strong

wind at low levels.
Considerations
Why Fly at a Low Level?
A low level is generally considered to be 500 ft above ground level flyingis at 5 00 ~
Low-level
or lower. Low-level flying may be necessary: aglor below.
• in poor weather conditions such as low cloud and/ or poor
visibility;
• to inspect a field in preparation for a forced landing with
power available;
• in the VFR Entry /Exit Lanes that provide access to certain
aerodromes beneath airspace reserved for Instrument Flight
Rules (IFR) operations.
Pilot Responsibilities
Do not fly within 500 ft of any person, building, animal, etc., Remainaware ofyour pilot
except when taking off or landing. There are other restrictions responsibilitieswhen low
regarding flight over built-up areas (1,000 ft) and large open-air flying.
gatherings (1,000 metres horizontally and 1,000 ft vertically),

which are covered in the Aviation Law section of Vol. 2 of The Air
Pilot's Manual.
Low cloud or some other unforeseen situation may force you
below the minimum legal levels. As a visual pilot, you are not
qualified to enter cloud and this should be avoided at all costs. If
low cloud is encountered, it is better to fly slowly beneath it closer
to the ground and turn back as soon as possible, rather than to
enter it. This is because, in cloud, all visual contact with the
ground and the horizon will be lost and the consequences for an
untrained pilot are usually fatal!
Be aware that radio communication, which depends on line-
of-sight transmission, may be poor at low levels.
1Bb - Navigationat LowerLevelsand in ReducedVisibility 337
Around the country there are areas that have been set aside for
local training. Other aircraft may be operating in these areas at the
same time as you, so keep a good lookout for them (and for
obstructions such as TV masts and transmission wires). Remember
that balloons, helicopters, sailplanes, hang-gliders, microlights and
fast jet milita1y aircraft may also be operating at low levels.
Obstacle Clearance
A close study of charts of the area is advisable prior to flight -
special attention being given to the height of the ground above sea
level, the nature of the terrain and the position of obstacles.
Watch out for radiotowers Flying at a low level you have a limited field of vision and
and elevatedcableswhen surface features move rapidly through it. You need to anticipate
low flying,especiallyin any ground features and recognise them quickly. Obstacles such
valleys.
as overhead cables, radio masts, chimneys and rising ground
deserve particular attention. Note these prior to commencing
low-level flight.
■ Figure 1Bb-1 Elevated cables and the guy wires supporting

transmission towers can be almost invisible
Aeronautical charts may not show elevations below 500 ft
above mean sea level (amsl) and obstacles below 300 ft above
ground level (agl). Consequently, an obstacle that is 798 ft amsl
may not be shown on your chart, so always keep a sharp lookout,
especially in poor visibility.
If you fly 500 ft higher than the highest spot height shown on
the chart for the area, your obstacle clearance may in fact be only
200 ft. Flying at 300 ft you may have no obstacle clearance at all,
especially if altimeter errors have crept in. Charts specify terrain
and obstacles in terms of height above mean sea level. If you are
using a chart to determine vertical clearance from obstacles, then
QNH should be set in the subscale so that the altimeter reads
height amsl.
338 FLYING TRAINING
Some common sense rules for obstacle clearance are:

• Anticipate rising ground and climb early to remain at the
desired height above it.
• Ensure that the aeroplane can actually out-climb the rising
ground, especially if a wind is blowing down its slopes.
• Avoid areas of rising ground under a lowering cloud base.
• Always be prepared to turn back. A 180° turn away from
deteriorating weather is always the best option.
Lowering '~.__;_ __ ~::::::.::.S::r=-c:---,-;-'=~~~~"iH;::--

cloud base
■ Figure1Bb-2 Avoid a lowering cloud base and rising ground

Ground Features
Features with vertical characteristics are good landmarks for low-
level navigation. Hills, peaks, high monuments, factory chimneys
and radio or television masts fall into this category.
■ Figure1Bb-3 Choose landmarks suitable for low-level flight

Misleading Visual Effects
When flying at high levels, you are less aware of your passage over Be carefulof the visual
the ground, which may seem to be in slow motion. In low-level illusionscaused by wind
flight, however, both speed and drift are very obvious. when low ~ying.
The aeroplane flies in the air mass - its indicated airspeed has
much more significance than its groundspeed, and balanced flight
is achieved when the ball is centred (even if it appears to be
slipping or skidding over the ground because of a crosswind).
A TAILWIND causes a false impression of high speed. An aeroplane
flying with an airspeed of 70 kt in a 25 kt tailwind will have a
groundspeed of 95 kt. The nearness of the ground will give an
impression of speed much greater than 70 kt, but you must resist
any temptation to slow down. Reducing the groundspeed to what
feels like 70 kt would require an airspeed of 45 kt, which may be
below the stalling speed. Check the airspeed on the ASI regularly.
IN A HEADWIND the reverse is the case. The groundspeed is lower

than the airspeed, giving an impression of low (rather than high)
speed. Since there is no temptation to slow down, this situation is
not as dangerous as the former one.
SIDEWAYS DRIFT over the ground due to a crosswind causes false
impressions of balance. In strong crosswinds, especially if the
airspeed is low, the aeroplane will experience a large drift angle
over the ground even though it is in balance.
Keep your hand on the The false impression of slip or skid, especially when turning, can
throttle when flying low. tempt an inexperienced pilot to use 1udder to counteract it. This
would place the aeroplane out of balance and degrade its
performance. Confirm balance with the balance ball. Since airspeed
tends to fall in a tum, it is also good airmanship when flying low to
have your hand on the throttle to adjust the airspeed if necessary.
~-
Upwind
Slow over the ground
* Wind (same TAS, low GS)
Check
ASI
~
Drift on
crosswind regularly
* Wl
.nd
Fast over the ground
(same TAS, high GS)
~ Downwind
------ ~ ------------
■ Figure 1Bb-4 Wind effect is very noticeable in low-level flight
Obstacles
Remain downwind of obstacles, especially when turning, to
avoid the wind carrying the aeroplane into them.
Turbulence and Windshear

Expect increased The air is often more turbulent near the ground than at higher
turbulenceand windshear levels for various reasons - the main ones being:
at low levels.
• surface friction slowing down strong winds;
• changes in wind speed and/ or direction (windshear); and
• uneven heating of the earth's surface creating convection
currents.
The possibility of turbulence at low level is another reason why
it is good airmanship to keep your hand on the throttle most of
the time to enable an immediate response to airspeed variations if
they occur.
NOTE See Chapter 15 in Vol. 3 of The Air Pilot'sManual for more
on low-level navigation. See Chapter 17 for low-level routes.
340 FLYING TRAINING
Aircraft Configuration
In good visibility and over open country, the normal cruise Considerthe precautionary
configuration of 'clean' wings may be suitable for low-level configuration
for lowflying.
flying. In poor visibility or in confined areas where good
manoeuvrability is required, however, the precautionary
configuration with an early stage of flap lowered may be
preferable.
Using the precautionary configuration allows:
• better vision because of the lower nose attitude with flap
extended;
• a lower cruise speed because of the reduced stalling speed;
• better manoeuvrability and smaller-radius turns because of
the lower airspeed;
,. better response to elevator and rudder, due to the extra power
required causing a greater slipstream effect.
A disadvantage of having flap extended for long periods,
however, is the increased fuel consumption and the reduced range
capability.
18b - Navigationat LowerLevelsand in ReducedVisibility 341
Preparation
Be we//prepared before As it is important that the pilot maintains a very good lookout
descendingto a low level. when flying at a low level, a low-flying check of items in the
cockpit should be completed prior to descending. The FREDA
check, outlined previously, may be adequate:
FREDA IN-FLIGHT CHECK
F Fuel
Fuel on and sufficient.
Fueltank usagemonitored.
Mixture rich.
Fuelpump on (if fitted) and fuel pressurechecked.
R Radio
Radiofrequencycorrectlyselected,volumeand squelchsatisfactory.
Make any necessaryradio calls (receptionwill decreaseat low levels).
E Engine
Engineoil temperatureand pressure;mixture set correctly;carburettorheat if
required;checkof other systems(ammeter forelectricalsystem;suctiongauge
forair-drivengyroscopesif installed).
D Direction
Directionindicatoralignedwith magneticcompass,and your position on the
map checked.
A Altitude
Altitude checkedand subscalesetting correct(normallyRegionalQNH, possibly
QFEif joining a bad-weathercircuit).
Additional check items prior to low-level flight should include:

• the security of the aeroplane (doors and harnesses) and take
steps to make the aeroplane more visible (landing lights,
rotating beacon and strobe lights on if appropriate);
• check the surface wind direction;
• assume the desired configuration (' clean' or an early stage of
flap in the precautionary configuration);
• trim.
A good lookout is essential! View the ground even before
you commence the descent to a low level to ensure that an
adequate height above obstacles can be maintained and also look
out for other aircraft. Beware of rising ground, especially if a
wind is blowing down its slopes.
342 FLYING TRAINING
Vital points when flying low are:

• monitor the airspeed (resisting any temptation to slow down
in a tailwind);
• keep in balance;
• stay well clear of obstacles and turn downwind of them.
■ Figure1Bb-5 Monitor airspeed and balance when flying at low level
Allow for Aeroplane Inertia

The aeroplane will take time to respond to any control
movements due to inertia (resistance to change). Commence
climbs and turns early to avoid obstacles. Avoid harsh manoeuvres
(such as steep turns or high-g pull-ups) which may lead to an
accelerated (or high-speed) stall.
Trim
An aeroplane that is correctly trimmed is easier to fly and more Keep in trim when
likely to maintain height. Since your attention is directed out of low flying.
the cockpit for most of the time in low-level flying, a well-
trimmed aeroplane is essential. A very slight nose-up trim will
help to ensure that an unintentional descent does not occur.
Airmanship
Maintain a high visual awareness. Keep a good lookout for other
aircraft and also for birds. Avoid congested areas and maintain a
suitable altitude (at least 500 agl). Also, avoid annoying people or
farm animals. Select a suitable area with good ground references.
Beware of false impressions caused by the wind effect, best
counteracted by reference to the airspeed indicator and the
balance ball. Be aware of false horizons.
Divide your time appropriately between:
• aeroplane control;
• maintaining and adjusting the path over the ground, keeping
coordinated with rudder pressure; and
• maintaining a visual scan so that you can see and avoid other
aircraft or obstacles, if necessary.
Apply the necessary wind drift corrections in straight flight by
adjusting heading, and in constant ground radius turns by
adjusting bank angle (but not to exceed 45°). Entering a
manoeuvre with the wind behind you will mean that the first turn
will be the steepest.
Turbulence may be greater at low levels, so ensure that you are
strapped in securely.
Hold the chosen speed to within 10 kt and altitude to within
100 feet. Avoid bank angles in excess of 45°.
344 FLYING TRAINING
Airwork 18b
Low-LevelFlying
Aim (a) To fly the aeroplanesafelyat a low level.

(b) To observethe misleadingvisualeffects causedby a strongwindat low levels.
1. Prior to Descending to Low Level

• Complete FREDAcheck (refer to full version on page 240):
F - Fuel system checks.
R - Radio correctly set
E - Engine and systems for normal operation.
D - Direction indicator aligned correctly and position on
map checked.
A - Altitude and altimeter subscale checked (QNH or
perhaps QFE set).
• Additional considerations:
- Security of the aeroplane (doors and harnesses,etc.) and its visibility
(landing lights, beacons, strobes ON).
- Note surface wind direction.
- Aeroplane configuration (clean or early stage of flap).
- Trim.
- Decide on suitable IAS for the operation.
• Awareness of low flying regulations.
Look out forobstaclesand other aircra~- includingballoons,microlights,gliders,

parachutists,airships,militaryaircra~,towers,masts, hang-gliders,
largebirdsand
flocksof birds.
Airwork 18b
2. Descent to Low Level

• Commence descent, hand on throttle, keeping a good lookout.
• Fly no lower than 500 ft agl (or as advised by your flying instructor) .
• Estimate height visually,with back-up from the altimeter and known height amsl of the
ground.
3. Establish Cruise Flight at the Desired Level

• Set desired airspeed and height.
• Trim.
• Consider increasing power in the medium turns to maintain airspeed.
Look out
Into wind - low groundspeed
4. Observe the Various Effects of Wind - Look Out

These are more noticeable as you near the ground:
• For the same IAS, there is a low groundspeed into wind - check the airspeed indicator .
• At same IAS,there is a high groundspeed downwind, so do not remove power without
checking ASI first.
• Noticeable drift on crosswind legs - check that the balance ball is centred .
• Significant downwind drift in turns (check ball for balance) and do not fly close to
obstacles.
346 FLYING TRAINING
Further Points
Low Flying in Bad Weather
Poor visibility, a descending cloud base or rising ground may require
some unplanned low flying. If you are 'caught-out' in really marginal
conditions, maintain as much separation from the ground as possible,
but never enter cloud - an estimated 100 ft beneath it is adequate.
Use any aircraft systems that can assist you in coping with bad
weather, such as carburettor heat (if required), pitot heaters,
window demisters, etc. Make your aeroplane more visible by
switching the rotating beacon and strobe on.
If the legal requirements of minimum visibility and distance
from cloud cannot be satisfied, then consideration must be given
to either:
• executing a 180° turn;
• diverting to an area where better weather exists;
• landing at a nearby aerodrome, or requesting radar guidance if
navigation is a problem; or
• making a precautionary landing in a field (this procedure is
discussed in Exercise 17).
The Bad-Weather Circuit

A circuit in bad weather (i.e. poor visibility and/ or a low cloud
base) should be flown so that visual contact with the field is not
lost. This may require a tight circuit flown at low level in the
precautionary configuration. Aim for a circuit height of at least
500 ft above ground level if possible, but do not enter cloud!
Maintain a clearance of at least 300 ft vertically from obstacles.
1------------------------
Normal
pattern
altitude 3. Complete 2. Adopt 1. ATC call if Make a close
1,000 ft aal pre-landing precautionary thought downwind leg
-------x-·--------------------~
,c f
20-SO secs
Abeam\
threshold \
checks
500 ft aal
conffguration necessary ~
I ...... ...............::'\\... ··!·....,,..... .~~?.~~.~-P~~!~. ~!-~~!.'!!~!

·"":::::;::;:;~";F~··
"" .~!~9~}!.P}!!~~!"~
...................•·•.........
\ •,
'
\
,- ----~---~----------------- --
\
\
Ground path of bad-weather circuit pattern ' ,
',
. . \
•Begin descent \\ ',
.
from 500 ft
when on final
\\
4 ,,
•
··...... ' ' .... \
______
',.,,
··············..,.--------
Monitor airspeed in turns to base
and final; add power if necessary
■ Figure 1Bb-6 The bad-weather circuit

FlyingTraining 347
Exercise 19
InstrumentFlying
Introduction to Attitude Instrument Flying

As an instrument pilot, you must learn to trust what you see on
the instruments.
We normally use our vision to orientate ourselves with our
surroundings, supported by other bodily senses that can sense
gravity, such as feel and balance.Even with the eyes closed,
however, we can usually manage to sit, stand and walk on steady
ground without losing control. This becomes much more difficult
standing on the bed of an accelerating or turning truck, or even
in an accelerating elevator.
■ Figure19-1 Flying on instruments
In an aeroplane, which can accelerate in three dimensions, the

task becomes almost impossible without using your eyes.
The eyes must gather information from the external ground
features, including the horizon, or, in poor visibility, gather
substitute information from the instruments.
A pilot's eyes are very important, and the starting point in your
instrument training will be learning to use your eyes to derive
information from the instruments.
348 FLYING TRAINING
Fundamental Skills.
The three fundamental skills in instrument flying are:
• instrument cross-check (also known as scanning the
instruments);
• instrument interpretation (understanding their message); and
• aeroplane control (directing the aeroplane along the desired
flightpath at the desired airspeed using attitude flying).
Cockpit
Instrument flying is much easier if you are comfortable in the
cockpit and know your aeroplane well. Adjust the seat position
prior to flight to ensure that you can reach all of the controls easily,
and so that you have the correct eye position.
Attitude Flying
Attitude flying is the name given to the technique of using a Powerplus attitudeequals
selected power and a selected attitude to achieve the desired performance.
performance of the aeroplane in terms of flightpath and airspeed.
For a given aeroplane weight and configuration, a particular
attitude combined with a particular power setting will always
result in a similar flightpath through the air, be it a straight and
level flightpath, a climb, a descent or a turn. Any change of power
and/ or attitude will result in a change of flightpath and/ or
airspeed.
Aeroplane attitude has two aspects - pitch and bank, i.e. nose
position against the horizon, and bank angle. Pitch attitude is the
angle between the longitudinal axis of the aircraft and the
horizontal. Bank angle (or bank attitude) is the angle between the
lateral axis of the aeroplane and the horizontal.
Horizontal
■ Figure19-2 Pitch attitude (le~) and bank angle (right)
Pitch Attitude
The pitch attitude is the geometric relationship between the Pitchattitudeis not
longitudinal axis of the aeroplane and horizontal. Pitch attitude angleofattack.
refers to the aeroplane's inclination to the horizontal, and not to
where the aeroplane is actually going. The angle of attack, how-
ever, is the angle between the wing chord and the relative airflow.
The angle of attack, therefore, is closely related to flightpath.
19 - Instrument Flying 349
-
Relative airflow
◄
Pitch attitude
■ Figure19-3 Pitch attitude and angle of attack are not the same
Pitch attitude and angle of attack are different, but they are
related in the sense that if the pitch attitude is raised, then the
angle of attack is increased. Conversely, if the pitch attitude is
lowered, the angle of attack is decreased.
Attitude Flying on Instruments

Attitude flying on instruments is an extension of visual flying,
with your attention gradually shifting from external visual cues to
the instrument indications in the cockpit, until you are able to fly
accurately on instruments alone.
You select pitch attitude using the elevator. In visual
conditions, you select the desired pitch attitude by referring the
nose position to the external natural horizon. In instrument flight,
pitch attitude is selected with reference to the attitude indicator
(also known as the artifical horizon (AH)), using the position of
the centre dot of the wing bars relative to the horizon bar. The
centre dot represent~ the nose of the aeroplane.
-· - - - - ---- - - -- - - - - - - - - -,
I I
I
■ Figure19-4 The full panel •

You select bank angle using the ailerons. In visual conditions,
you refer to the angle made by the external natural horizon in the
windscreen. On instruments, you select bank angle on the
attitude indicator, either by estimating the angle between the
350 FLYING TRAINING
wing bars of the miniature aeroplane and the horizon bar, or from
the position of the bank pointer on a graduated scale at the top of
the attitude indicator.
■ Figure19-5 Low pitch attitude, ■ Figure19-6 High pitch attitude,

and wings level and right bank
Most of your attention during flight, both visual and on Check the attitude
instruments, is concerned with achieving and holding a suitable indicatorevery few
attitude. A very important skill to develop when flying on seconds.
instruments, therefore, is to check the attitude indicator eve1y few
seconds. There are other tasks, of course, to be performed, and
there are other instruments to look at as well, but the eyes should
always return fairly quickly to the AI.
To achieve the desired performance (in terms of flightpath and
airspeed), you must not only place the aeroplane in a suitable
attitude with the flight controls, you must also apply suitable
power with the throttle. Just because the aeroplane has a high
pitch attitude does not mean that it will climb - it requires climb
power as well as climb attitude to do this. With less power, it may
not climb at all.
Attitude flying is the name given to the skill - controlling the
aeroplane's flightpath and airspeed with changes in attitude and
power. The techniques used in attitude flying are the same
visually or on instruments.
Scanning the Instruments

Scanning the instruments with your eyes, interpreting their
indications, and applying this information is a vital skill to develop
if you are to become a good instrument pilot.
Power is selected with the throttle, and can be checked on the
power indicator. Pitch attitude and bank angle are selected using
the control column, with frequent reference to the attitude
indicator. With both correct power and attitude set, the aeroplane
will perform as expected. The attitude indicator and the power
indicator, because they are used when controlling the aeroplane,
are known as the control instruments.
19 - InstrumentFlying 351
The actual performance of the aeroplane, once its power and

attitude have been set, can be cross-checked on what are known
as the performance instruments - the altimeter for altitude, the
airspeed indicator for airspeed, the direction indicator for
heading, and so on.
■
-
Power
_indicJ1.tor-·
Figure 19-7 Layout of a typical instrument panel
- •
Yourmain scan is across Scanning is an art that will develop naturally during your train-
six basicinstruments: ing especially when you know what to look for. The main scan to
• AS/ • Al • ALT
develop initially is that of the six basic flight instruments,
• TC • DI • VS/
concentrating on the AI and radiating out to the others as
required. Having scanned the instruments, interpreted the mes-
sage that they contain, built up a picture of where the aeroplane
is and where it is going, you can control it in a meaningful way.
Controlling the Aeroplane

During instrument flight, the aeroplane is flown using the normal
controls according to the picture displayed on the instrument
panel. From this picture, you will, with practice, know what
control movements (elevator, aileron, rudder and throttle) are
required either to maintain the picture as it is, or to change it.
352 FLYING TRAINING
When manoeuvring the aeroplane, a suitable control sequence

to follow (the same as in visual flight) is:
1. Visualise the desired new flightpath and airspeed.
2. Select the attitude and the power required to achieve the
desired pe1formance by moving the controls, and then checking
when the aeroplane has achieved the estimated attitude on the AI.
3. Hold the attitude on the Al, allowing the aeroplane to settle
down into its new performance, and allowing the pressure
instruments that experience some lag to catch up.
4. Make small adjustments to attitude and power until the actual
performance equals the desired performance.
5. Trim (which is essential, if you are to achieve accurate and
comfortable instrument flight). Heavy loads can be trimmed
off earlier in the sequence to assist in· control, if desired, but
remember that the function of trim is to relieve control on the
pilot, and not to change aircraft attitude.
, II
Change Check, Hold, Adjust, Trim
■ Figure19-8 Control sequence
Some helpful hints follow:

• Derive the required information from the relevant
instrument, e.g. heading from the direction indicator, altitude
from the altimeter.
• Respond to deviations from the desired flightpath and/ or air-
speed. Use the AI as a control instrument, with power as
required. For instance, if you are 50 ft low on altitude, then
raise the pitch attitude on the AI slightly and climb back up to
height. Do not accept steady deviations - it is just as easy to fly
at 3,000 ft as it is to fly at 2,950 ft. A lot of instrument flying
is in the mind and, in a sense, instrument flying is a test of char-
acter as well as of flying ability. Be as accurate as you can!
• Do not over-control. Avoid large, fast or jerky control
movements, which will probably result in continuous
corrections, over-corrections and then re-corrections. This
can occur if attitude is changed without reference to the AI, or
it might be caused by the aeroplane being out-of-trim, or
possibly by a pilot who is fatigued or tense.
• Do not be distracted from a scan of the flight instruments for

more than a few seconds at a time, even though other duties
must be attended to, such as checklists, radio calls and
navigation tasks.
• Be relaxed. Easier said than done at the beginning, but it will
come with experience.
Sensory llilusions
Sensoryillusionscan Most people live in a 1g situation most of the time, with their feet
leadyou astray. on the ground (1g means the force of gravity). However, some
variations to 1g do occur in everyday life - for instance, when
driving a car. Accelerating a car, hard braking, or turning on a flat
bend will all produce g-forces on the body different from the 1g
of gravity alone. Passengers with their eyes closed could perhaps
detect this by bodily feel or with their sense of balance.
A right turn on a flat road, for instance, could be detected by
the feeling of being thrown to the left - but it might be more
difficult to detect if the curve was perfectly banked for the
particular speed. A straight road sloping to the left (and causing
the passenger to lean to the left) might give the passenger the false
impression that the car is turning right, even though it is in fact
not turning at all. The position-sensing systems of the body, using
nerves all over the body to transmit messages of feel and pressure
to the brain, can be fooled in this and other ways.
■ Figure19-9 Turning right - or simply leaning?
The organs within the inner ear, used for balance and to detect
accelerations, can also be deceived. For instance, if you are sitting
in a car travelling around a suitably banked curve, the sensing
system in your ears falsely interprets the g-force holding you
firmly and comfortably in the seat as a vertical force, as if you were
moving straight ahead rather than in a banked turn.
The inner ear organs have other limitations, one being that a
constant velocity is not detected, nor is a very gradual change in
velocity. If you are sitting in a train, for instance, and there is
another train moving slowly relative to you on an adjacent track,
354 FLYING TRAINING
it is sometimes difficult to determine which train is moving, or if

indeed both are moving.
False impressions of motion can also be caused by unusual
g-forces - for instance, by rapid head motion, or by lowering the
head. If you happen to drop your pencil while instrument flying,
don't just lower your eyes a:nd lean down to look for it in one
motion - take it very carefully step by step to avoid any feelings of
vertigo.
Because an aeroplane moves in three dimensions, it is possible
to accelerate and decelerate in three dimensions, and this can lead
to more complicated illusions. Pulling up into a steep climb, for
instance, holds a pilot tightly in his seat, which is exactly the same
feeling as in a steep turn. With your eyes closed, it is sometimes
difficult to say which manoeuvre it is.
Another example is decelerating while in a turn to the left, The senses of balanceand
which may give a false impression of a turn to the right. Be aware bodilyfeel can be
that your sense of balance and bodily feel can lead you astray in an misleading; trustyoureyes
and what the instruments
aeroplane, especially with rapidly changing g-forces in
tellyou.
manoeuvres such as this. The one sense that can resolve most of
these illusions is sight. If the car passenger could see out, or if the
pilot had reference to the natural horizon and landmarks, then the
confusion would be easily dispelled.
Unfortunately, in instrument flight you do not have reference An instrumentpilotmust
to ground features, but you can still use your sense of sight to scan learnto believethe
the instruments, and obtain substitute information. Therefore, instruments.
an important instruction to the budding instrument pilot is:
believe your eyes and what the instruments tell you.
While sight is the most important sense, and must be protected
at all costs, also make sure that you avoid anything that will affect
your balance or position-sensing systems.
Avoid alcohol, drugs (including smoking in the cockpit) and
medication. Do not fly when ill or suffering from an upper
respiratory infection (e.g. a cold). Do not fly when tired or
fatigued. Do not fly with a cabin altitude higher than 10,000 ft
amsl without using oxygen. Avoid sudden head movements and
avoid lowering your head or turning around in the cockpit.
Despite all these don'ts, there is one very important do - do trust
what your eyes tell youfrom the instruments.
Developing a Scan Pattern

The performance of an aeroplane is, as always, determined by the
power set and the attitude selected.
In visual flying conditions, the external natural horizon is
used as a reference when selecting pitch attitude and bank angle.
The power indicator in the cockpit is only referred to occasion-
ally, for instance when setting a particular power for cruise or for
climb.
In instrument conditions, when the natural horizon cannot
be seen, pitch attitude and bank angle information is still available
to the pilot in the cockpit from the attitude indicator. Relatively
large pitch attitude changes against the natural horizon are
reproduced in miniature on the attitude indicator.
In straight and level flight, for instance, the wings of the
miniature aeroplane should appear against the horizon line, while
in a climb they should appear one or two bar widths above it.
In a turn, the wing bars of the miniature aeroplane will bank
together with the real aeroplane, while the horizon line remains
horizontal. The centre dot of the miniature aeroplane represents
the aeroplane's nose position relative to the horizon.
Nose high
Wings level
1,--=:c--~ ----- I
I I
I I
I I
I ~~ I
~
:.
',,........-====----- ~[!!J1~Jl_;=--;.J
I 1.------
il I
I
I
I
■ • •
Figure19-10 The Al is the master instrument for ,pitch attitude
and bank angle
Simple Scans
Balance (Coordination)
The AI, while it shows pitch attitude and bank angle directly, does
not indicate balance (coordination) or yaw. Balance or coordina-
tion information can be obtained simply by moving the eyes from
the attitude indicator diagonally down to the left to check that the
balance ball in the turn coordinator is indeed being centred with
rudder pressure. The eyes should then return to the Al.
356 FLYING TRAINING
Heading
Directional information can be obtained from the direction
indicator (DI) or from the magnetic compass. From the AI, the
eyes can be moved straight down to the DI to absorb heading
information, before returning to the AI.
Each eye movement to obtain particular information is very
simple, starting at the attitude indicator and radiating out to the
relevant instrument, before returning again to the AI.
----------------------, --------- ------------,
l
I
I~~~~
1_______
Q-l
'
•
r-
u~:,1-v"'"'·
- __ ,___
:
I
I
-I
1Q
I______ _
,--------
I I
I I
I
. I
I ,a;
• I
I ________. _______
I =•"---",,,,..,,~-JI _.
■ Figure19-11 A simple scan for balance ■ Figure19-12 A simple scan for heading
(coordination)
Airspeed
Airspeed information is also very important, and this is easily
checked by moving the eyes left from the AI to the airspeed
indicator (ASI), before returning them to the AI.
Altitude
The altimeter is the only means of determining the precise height
of the aeroplane, in visual as well as in instrument conditions.
To obtain height information, the eyes can move from the AI
towards the right where the altimeter is located, before moving
back to the AI.
,---------------------.
r I
I II~~!-~~: I
I . ,.......,,,.."_ I
f ~-·••S•"'N• J
I---~=-~ ~ ~:~~:;;-·'=~-
I
1:
-------, ,--------- ,--------
I I
I
I
I
I :
,.
I
'
•
• •
~~~_j: ________.
■ Figure19-13 A simple scan for airspeed ■ Figure19-14 A simple scan for altitude
Vertical Speed
The rate of change of height, as either a rate of climb or a rate of
descent in feet per minute, can be monitored on the vertical
speed indicator (VSI) by moving the eyes from the AI diagonally
down to the right to the VSI, before returning them to the AI.
The VSI, since it is often used in conjunction with the altim-
eter, is located directly beneath it on most instrument panels.
Turning
A turn is entered using the AI to establish bank angle and the ball
to confirm balance (coordination). Additional information on the
turning rate is available from the turn coordinator once the bank
angle is established.
The normal rate of turn in instrument flying is 3 ° per second,
known as rate 1 or standard rate, and this is clearly marked on
the turn coordinator (or turn-and-slip indicator).
■ Figure19-15 A simple scan for vertical ■ Figure19-16 A simple scan for turn rate
speed information
With six basic flight instruments, plus the power indicator, it is
possible to fly the aeroplane very accurately and comfortably without
any external visual reference, provided that the instruments are
scanned efficiently, and the pilot controls the aeroplane adequately in
response to the information that he derives from them.
Control and Performance

Control the aeroplane to achieve the desired performance. The atti-
tude selected on the attitude indicator and the power set on the
power indicator dete1mine the performance of the aeroplane;
hence these two instruments are known as the control instruments.
The attitude indicator is located centrally on the instrument
panel directly in front of the pilot, so that any changes in attitude
can be readily seen. Because continual reference to the power
indicator is not required, it is situated slightly away from the main
group of flight instruments, easy to scan occasionally, but not in
the main field of view.
358 FLYING TRAINING
- - - .,
• ' I
, . •. . I
• • .i . I
JI
~:
... '.
~(~~=--_, L____;::::~__;,,,
■ Figure19-17 Use the control instruments to select attitude and power
The other flight instruments are performance instruments

that display how the aeroplane is performing (as a result of the
power and attitude selected) in terms of:
• altitude - on the altimeter and VSI;
• heading - on the DI and turn coordinator; and
• airspeed - on the ASL
■ Figure19-18 The performance instruments

Changes in pitch attitude are shown directly on the AI, and

are reflected on the altimeter, VSI and ASL Changes in bank
angle are shown directly on the AI, and are reflected on the turn
coordinator and the direction indicator. The quality of flight is
shown by the balance ball.
■ Figure19-19 The pitch instruments ■ Figure19-20 The bank instruments
The Selective Radial Scan

Of the six main flight instruments, the attitude indicator is the
master instrument. It gives you a direct and immediate picture of
pitch attitude and bank angle. It will be the one most frequently
referred to (at least once every few seconds in most stages of
flight).
The eyes can be directed selectively towards the other
instruments to derive relevant information from them as required,
before returning to the AI. This eye movement radiating out and
back to selected instruments is commonly known as the selective
radial scan.
For instance, when climbing with full power selected, the
estimated climb pitch attitude is held on the attitude indicator,
with subsequent reference to the airspeed indicator to confirm
that the selected pitch attitude is indeed correct. If the ASI
indicates an airspeed that is too low, then lower the pitch attitude
on the AI (say by a half bar width or by one bar width), allow a
few seconds for the airspeed to settle, and then check the ASI
again.
Correctpitch attitude in The key instrument in confirming that the correct attitude has
the climbis checked on the been selected on the AI during the climb is the airspeed indicator.
airspeedindicator. Because it determines what pitch attitude changes should be made
on the AI during the climb, the airspeed indicator is the primary
performance guide for pitch attitude in the climb. It is supported
by the AI and the VSI.
360 FLYING TRAINING
Primary
performance
guide to correct
pitch attitude r:--:;~=--=:_-;::::::::::::::=::;;;~~;::..-=,
I
I
■ Figure19-21 ASI is the primary instrument in the climb to confirm

correct pitch attitude
Approaching the desired cruise level, however, more attention Correctpitchattitudewhen

should be paid to the altimeter to ensure that, as pitch attitude is cruisingis checkedon the
lowered on the AI, the aeroplane levels off at the desired altitude. altimeter.
When cruising, any minor deviations from altitude detected on
the altimeter can be corrected with small changes in pitch atti-
tude. Because the altimeter is now the instrument that determines
if pitch attitude changes on the AI are required to maintain level
flight, the altimeter is the primary performance guide for pitch
attitude in the cruise. It is supported by the AI and the VSI.
erforman erforman
ide to pitc ide to pitc
I I
. , l ' I
: • I ' • . I
I I
• • II I
I
,---e-::::,,,,;~-,.
■ Figure19-22 The altimeter is the primary instrument in the cruise to

confirm correct pitch attitude
If climb power is still set after the aeroplane has been levelled
off at cruise altitude, then the aeroplane will accelerate, shown by
an increasing airspeed on the ASL At the desired speed, the power
should be reduced to a suitable value.
Correctpowerwhen While it is usual simply to set cruise power and then accept the
cruisingis checkedon the resulting airspeed, it is possible to achieve a precise airspeed by
airspeedindicator.
adjusting the power. Because the ASI indications will then
determine what power changes should be made during level
flight, the airspeed indicator is the primary performance guide to
power requirements in the cruise.
r;■- '~I
:
I
I
••
•
;,
- '
" .
I : -
--
• ,
1
• I
I
I
'I . •
I
'1 ,. ... ,
,
I
~
•
I "' • W I I ~-
,-------1 ·- - - - - -,.
, I
.
II
,1
I
I
,_____:
~!'!!,.T.,~~-t:_1' _,, ..._""b~~-:::__,
!I _____ _.l, ....
~..::.'(/J_d(jJ.~i_!..J
■ •
Figure19-23 The ASI is the primary instrument in the cruise to
confirm correct power
IPower controlj •
Check wings level on the Heading is maintained with reference to the direction indicator
attitude indicator. (DI), any deviations being corrected with gentle balanced
(coordinated) turns. Because the indications on the DI will
determine what minor corrections to bank angle should be made
on the attitude indicator during straight flight, the direction
indicator is the primary performance guide to zero bank angle in
maintaining a constant heading for straight flight. It is supported
by the turn coordinator as well as the AI.
Keep the balance ball The ball should be centred to keep the aeroplane in balance,
centred. avoiding any slip or skid, i.e. to provide coordinated straight flight.
362 FLYING TRAINING
to direction
■ Figure19-24 The direction indicator is the primary -performance

instrument in straight flight to confirm wings level on the Al
•
The Basic-T Scan
A basic scan suitable for straight and level flight (where altitude,
direction and airspeed need to be monitored) is centred on the AI,
and radiates out and back, following the basic- T pattern on the
panel, to the relevant performance instrument:
• the DI to confirm heading (and correct with shallow turns on
the AI);
• the altimeter to confirm altitude (and correct with pitch
changes on the AI);
• the ASI to confirm airspeed (and, if desired, correct with
power changes).
_______,
I
I ,
I I
I I I
I J
I I
I
I
-·-----·---
'
I
■ Figure19-25 The basic-T scan in cruise flight
If cruise power is set and left alone, with the resulting airspeed
being accepted (often the case in a normal cruise), then scanning
the ASI need not be as frequent, and the scan can concentrate on
the AI, DI, and altimeter.
Also, once established and well trimmed in the cruise, the
aeroplane will tend to maintain altitude because of its longitudinal
stability, making it less essential to scan the altimeter continually
compared to when the aeroplane is out of trim. The aeroplane
may not be as stable laterally as it is longitudinally, however, and
so the direction indicator should be scanned quite frequently to
ensure that heading is maintained.
Non IMC-rated pilots are already well-practised at scanning
the altimeter regularly, since it is the only means of accurately
maintaining altitude, but they may not be used to scanning the DI
quite so frequently as is necessary in instrument conditions. This
skill must be developed.
What About the Other Flight Instruments?

In smooth air, the VSI will show a trend away from cruise altitude
often before it is apparent on the altimeter, and can be used to
indicate that a minor pitch attitude correction is required if
altitude is to be maintained. The VSI provides supporting pitch
information to that provided by the altimeter, although it is ofless
value in turbulence which causes the VSI needle to fluctuate.
If the wings are held level on the AI, and heading is being
maintained on the DI, then it is almost certain that the aeroplane
is in balance (coordinated), with ball centred. Normally, the
balance ball does not have to be scanned as frequently as some of
the other instruments, but it should be referred to occasionally,
especially if heading is changing while the wings are level, or if the
'seat of your pants' tells you that the aeroplane is skidding or
slipping.
The turn coordinator will show a wings-level indication
during straight flight, and provides supporting information
regarding bank to that provided by the attitude indicator. In a rate
1 turn, it is the primary performance guide to confirm that the
bank angle is correct.
Choice of Scan Pattern

Use a logicalscan for each Starting with your eyes focused on the AI, scan the performance
manoeuvre. instruments that provide the information required. Relevant
information can be obtained from different instruments,
depending on the manoeuvre.
Primary pitch information (to confirm whether or not the
pitch attitude selected on the AI is correct) is obtained from the
altimeter during cruise flight, but from the ASI during climbs and
descents. There is no need to memorise particular scan patterns,
since they will develop naturally as your training progresses.
364 FLYING TRAINING
Do not allow the radial scan to break down. Avoid fixation on Keep the eyes moving,and
any one instrument because the resulting breakdown in the radial continually
returnto the
scan will cause delayed recognition of deviations from the desired attitudeindicator.
flightpath and/ or airspeed. Fixation on the DI, for instance, can
lead to heading being maintained perfectly, but in the meantime
altitude and airspeed may change - tendencies which would have
been detected (and corrected for) if the altimeter, VSI and ASI
had been correctly scanned. Keep the eyes moving, and continu-
ally return to the AI.
Occasionally, the eyes will have to be directed away from the
main flight instruments for a short period, for instance when
checking the power indicator during or following a power
change, or when periodically checking the oil temperature and
pressure gauges, fuel gauges, the ammeter, or the suction
(vacuum) gauge, or when realigning the direction indicator with
the magnetic compass. Do not neglect the radial scan for more
than a few seconds at a time, even though other necessary tasks
have to be performed.
Avoid omitting any relevant instrument. For instance, after
rolling out of a turn, check the DI to ensure that the desired
heading is being achieved and maintained. The wings might be
level and the aeroplane flying straight, but you may be on the
wrong heading.
Use all available resources. For instance, with correct power set
and the correct attitude selected on the AI, it is possible to main-
tain height, at least approximately, using only the AI and the
power indicator but, if precision is required, then the altimeter
must be included in the scan as the primary reference for altitude.
: g :
I
,.~, :
:~~:::_-:.,.
I
I
l
I
I
. I
. ________.
I
■ Figure19-26 A suitable scan during straight and level flight
Furthermore, do not forget that supporting instruments can

provide additional information to back-up prima1y instruments.
For instance, altitude is indicated directly on the altimeter, but
any tendency to depart from that altitude may first be indicated on
the VSI (especially in smooth air), which makes it a very valuable
supporting instrument to the altimeter.
Other Scans
It is necessary on some occasions to have a fast scan, such as on
final for an instrument approach. On other occasions, however,
the scan can be more relaxed, for instance when cruising with the
autopilot engaged. It may then be suitable just to have a fairly
relaxed circular scan.
---! _______ ......,J
■ Figure19-27 A circular scan
If you are pe1forming other tasks while flying a constant

heading, such as map reading, then a very simple scan to make
sure things do not get out of hand is a vertical scan from the AI
down to the direction indicator and back again.
If at any time, you suspect an instrument failure, then a very
efficient means of establishing what instrument or system has
failed is to commence an inverted-V scan, centred on the AI and
radiating to the turn coordinator and the VSI.
,----~ • ------------,
I I
l~~~•i~:~~~~
I
• 1:i;:~~~~~~?~I
I
-------1 I"'-------
91,
•:
--·-•
al, .. ,
___ _.
■ Figure19-28 The vertical scan ■ Figure19-29 The inverted-V scan
Each of these instruments normally has a different power

source - the vacuum system for the AI, the electrical system for
the turn coordinator, and the static system for the VSI - so a false
366 FLYING TRAINING
indication on one should not be reflected on the others.

Confirmation of attitude and flightpath can then be achieved
using the other instruments.
With practice, you will develop scans to suit every situation.
Performance Table
To help you adjust to a new aeroplane type, we have included a
type performance table. You can fill in this table as you become
familiar with the power settings and attitudes required to achieve
the desired performance in the various phases of flight.
Attitude can be shown on the AI by inserting a horizon line.
The table allows for aircraft with retractable landing gear - if yours
has a fixed undercarriage, then just pencil the wheels in on the
chart, and only fill in the power settings and attitudes that you
need. Knowing the numbers simplifies the game.
Airmanshi,p
Never proceed into instrument conditions without a flight Airmanshipis never
instructor unless you are properly qualified (with a valid proceeding into instrument
conditionsunlessyou and
instrument rating) in a suitably equipped aeroplane, and within
the aircra~are properly
the limitations of your ability and licence rating privileges. equippedto handlethem.
Always calculate a lowest safe altitude before entering
instrument conditions.
Keep in practice! Use smooth and coordinated control move-
ments.
Airwork
The basic manoeuvres will be practised initially while you have
visual reference to the outside world, and then solely by reference
to the cockpit instruments.
,This introduction to instrument flying may best be handled in
the following four separate parts:
• Part (i) Straight and Level
• Part (ii) Climb, Cruise and Descent
• Part (iii) Turning
• Part (iv) Recovery from Unusual Flight Attitudes
--
PERFORMANCE TABLE
Configuration Power Attitude Performance V-speeds
Flaps Gear MP Airspeed
rpm VS/
0
down
Take-off
0
up
Vs1= ...................
.
(stall speed,clean)
0 Vx= ..........
_ ....
Climb up
(best angle)
Vy= ..................
.
(best rate)
VA= .................
..
(manoeuvringspeed)
VNo= ...,.. m ~.... , ...
Cruise
(nonnalmaximum)
VNE= .................
..
(neverexceed)
Cruise
descent
(500 ~/min)
Slow-speed
cruise
1. Clean
maps extended)
2. Flaps
0
extended up
VLo= .................
..
3. Flapsand (landinggear operation)
landinggear Vso= ...........
-.....
0
extended down (landingffapsand landing
gear extended)
368 FLYING TRAINING
Airwork 19, Part (i)

FlyingStraightand Levelon Instruments
Aim: To maintaina steady cruise,straightand level,with referenceto the flightinstrumentsonly.
1. To Establish Straight and Level Flight

• Select power for level flight.
• Set pitch attitude for level flight by
positioning the miniature aeroplane
against the horizon line of the attitude
indicator.
• Hold the attitude and allow aeroplane to
stabilise.
• Monitor: Al-AL T-AI-D1-AI-ASI-AI-VSI-AI-
TC-AI-AL T, etc.
• Trim the aeroplane carefully so that it will
fly 'hands-off.
2. Raising the Nose at Constant

Power
• Place the miniature aeroplane a little
above the horizon line on the Al (say one-
half or one bar width) and hold.
• The ASI will show a gradual decrease and
finally settle on a lower indicated airspeed
(IAS).
• The altimeter, after some lag, will start
showing an increase in height.
• - --llli'~1
The VSI. after some initial fluctuations, will
' ' ,..._.,
settle on a steady rate of climb. , I
• - , I
. I
I

3. Lowering the Nose at Constant Power
• Placethe miniature aeroplane a little below

the horizon line on the Al and hold this
attitude.
• The ASI will show a gradual increase and
finally stabilise at a higher IAS. Note that a
relatively large airspeed change will occur
after a small change in attitude.
• The altimeter, after some lag, will start
showing a gradual decrease in height.
• The VSI will eventually stabilise on a steady
rate of descent.
4. Maintaining Straight and Level at Constant Power
Aim: Suggestedaccuracy: • airspeed± 10 kt • heading± 10° • altitude± 100 ~
Correct variations in:
• Altitude by making very small changes in

the position of the miniature aeroplane
relative to the horizon line on Al. Within
±100 ft is acceptable.*
• Heading by using small bank angles and
checking that the aeroplane is balanced.
Within ±10° is acceptable.*
• Airspeed by adjustments in power,
followed by, as a consequence, a small
change in attitude. Within ±10 kt is
acceptable.*
Keep in trim.
Figure19-30 Monitoring straight and
*Aim to have airspeed, altitude and heading precisely on the desired numbers.
If they are not, take corrective action immediately.
370 FLYING TRAINING

5. Changing Airspeed, Straight and Level
(a) To increase airspeed at a constant altitude:
• Add power with the throttle (balance with rudder and forward pressure on the
control column).
• Gradually lower the pitch attitude to avoid climbing, and allow the airspeed to
increase to the desired value.
• Adjust power to maintain desired airspeed, and hold the pitch attitude.
• Trim.
(b) To decrease airspeed at a constant altitude:
• Reduce power with the throttle (balance with rudder and hold nose up with elevator
back pressure).
• Gradually raise the pitch attitude to avoid descending and allow airspeed to reduce
to desired value.
• As the desired airspeed is approached, adjust power to maintain it, and hold the pitch
attitude.
• Trim.
Normal cruise Fast cruise Slow cruise
Figure19-31 Different pitch attitudes for different speeds

Airwork 19, Part (ii)

Climbing,Cruisingand Descendingon Instruments
Aim: Toclimb,cruiseand descend,and to changefrom one to another,
with referenceonlyto the flightinstruments.
1. Climb, Cruise and Descent at a Constant Airspeed

Climb, cruise and descent speeds are usuallydifferent. However, by using a constant
airspeed in these initial manoeuvres,we simplify the task by removing one of the variables.
A-P-T P-A-T
P-A-T P-A-T
(a) From straight and level, enter a climb at a constant airspeed:
• Settle into straight and level flight (a cruise) and note airspeed.
• Smoothly open throttle to full power (balance with rudder).
• Simultaneously raise nose slightly to maintain airspeed, and hold attitude .
• Note the VSI shows a rate of climb and altimeter a gain in altitude .
• Trim .
(b) From a climb, level off and maintain a constant airspeed:
• Lower the nose to maintain a constant airspeed.
• Reduce the power to normal cruise as set before (balance with rudder).
• Note the VSI shows zero and the altimeter a constant altitude.
• Trim.
( c) From straight and level, commence a descent:
• Reduce power by (300 rpm or so), balance with rudder.
• Lower the nose to maintain a constant airspeed.
• Note the VSI shows a rate of descent and the altimeter shows a decrease in altitude.
• Trim.
( d) From a descent, enter a climb:
• Smoothly open the throttle to full power (balance with rudder) and simultaneously
allow nose to rise to the climb attitude.
• Hold the attitude to maintain desired airspeed.
• Note the VSI shows a rate of climb and the altimeter a change in altitude.
• Trim.
accuracy: • airspeed± 10 kt
Suggested • heading± 10°
372 FLYING TRAINING

2. Initiating a Climb at Normal Climb Speed
Generally the normal climb speed is less than cruise speed. As in normal visual flight, a climb
is initiated in the sequence P-A-T: Power-Attitude-Trim.
Procedure:
• Settle in straight and level flight and note the airspeed.
• Increase power to the climb figure (balance with rudder) .
• Raisethe nose to the pitch attitude for climb .
• Hold the new attitude as airspeed decreases to the desired climbing speed. The VSI will
show a rate of climb and the altimeter an increase in altitude.
• Make minor pitch attitude adjustments to achieve and maintain the correct
climb airspeed.
• Trim .
Climb.
power • =m
accuracy:• airspeed± 10 kt
Suggested • heading± 10°
NOTE If desired, you can trim earlier in the sequence, while holding the new attitude as
airspeed decreases, to off-load some control-column pressure. However, a final trim
adjustment will need to be made. Do not use trim to change the attitude; pitch attitude must
only be changed with elevator. The trim is used solely to relieve sustained control pressures.
A steady climb is maintained with reference to all flight instruments, with the AS! confirming
that you are indeed holding the correct attitude for climbing, as set on the Al.

3. Levelling Off from a Climb
As in visual flight, levelling off from a climb follows the sequence A-P-T: Attitude-Power-Trim.
Since cruise speed is normally greater than climb speed, acceleration is allowed to occur
before the power is reduced from climb to cruise power.
To level off at the desired height:

• Smoothly lower the nose to the cruise position slightly before the desired altitude is
reached - a suitable amount of 'lead' being approximately 10% of the rate of climb. (For
example, at 500 ft/min rate of climb, begin lowering the nose 50 ft prior to reaching the
desired altitude).
• Allow the airspeed to increase towards the cruise figure .
• Reduce power to cruise rpm as the cruise speed is reached.
• Make minor adjustments to maintain altitude, heading and airspeed.
• Trim .
IReduce power, trimj

Suggestedaccuracy: • airspeed ± 10 kt • heading± 10° • altitude± 100 ft.
NOTE Steady, straight and level flight is maintained by reference to all flight instruments, with
the altimeter confirming that you are holding the correct attitude for straight and level, as set
on the attitude indicator.
374 FLYING TRAINING

4. Initiating a Descent on Instruments
As in normal visual flight, a descent is initiated in the order P-A-T: Power-Attitude-Trim.
Descent speed may be lessthan cruise speed. If so, decelerate to descent speed at the cruise
height before lowering the nose to descend.
The standard rate of descent in instrument flying is 500 ft/min. This may be achieved by a
reduction of 250 rpm or so from the cruise power-setting. However, you may remove more
power and descend at a greater rate, if desired. Also, a glide descent may be made, with the
throttle fully closed.
NOTE The approximate rate of descent (RoD) may be achieved by dividing RoD required by
2, and then reducing the rpm accordingly.
For example, 500 RoD :::::500 + 2 = -250 rpm; 800 RoD = 800 --,-2 = -400 rpm.
Power Allow speed

~ to decrease
-~----------~--------~.ud~e
Suggestedaccuracy: P-A-T ~~
• airspeed± 10 kt ~
• heading± 10°
Procedure:
• Reduce power (balance with rudder and exert back pressure on the control column as
necessary to maintain altitude).
• Allow the airspeed to decrease towards descent speed.
• At descent speed, lower the nose to the estimated descent attitude .
• Hold the new attitude to allow descent speed to stabilise (VSI will show rate of descent
and altimeter a decrease in altitude).
• Make minor adjustments to achieve the desired descent speed and rate of descent
( control airspeed with attitude and rate of descent with power).
• Trim .
At descent speed,
Descentpower, lower pitch attitude •
hold altitude and trim
NOTE A steady descent is maintained with reference to all flight instruments, with the ASI
confirming you are holding the correct attitude for descent as set on the Al.

S. Controlling the Rate of Descent at a Constant Airspeed
To achieve any desired rate of descent while maintaining a constant airspeed, both the power
and attitude must be adjusted. Rate of descent is indicated to the pilot by the:
• vertical speed indicator (primarily); or the
• altimeter and clock.
(a) To increase the rate of descent:
• Reduce power .
• Lower the pitch attitude to maintain airspeed.
• Trim .
(b) To decrease the rate of descent:
• Increase power .
• Raisethe pitch attitude to maintain airspeed.
• Trim .
__________________
, _
111'1____
__!
' •
Descentrate
Simultaneo~s~ ;.~:
pitch attitude
•- ~
too high and add power
Suggestedaccuracy:• airspeed± 10 kt • heading ± 10° • desiredrate ofdescent± 100 ~/min

376 FLYING TRAINING

6. Levelling Off from a Descent
As in normal visual flight, levelling off from a descent follows the sequence P-A-T: Power-
Attitude- Trim .
...............
P-A-T
Suggestedaccuracy: • altitude± 100 ~ • airspeed± 10 kt • heading± 10°
To level off at a specific altitude, increase the power and gradually raise the nose towards the
cruise position just before that altitude is reached-the amount of 'lead' being approximately
10% of the rate of descer:-it.For example, at 500 ft/min rate of descent, start increasing power
and raising the nose 50 ft prior to reaching the desired altitude.
• Increase power to cruise rpm (and balance with rudder pressure).
• Raisethe pitch attitude to the cruise position .
• Make minor adjustments to maintain altitude .
• Trim .
Steady straight and level flight is maintained with reference to all flight instruments - with the
altimeter confirming that you are holding the correct attitude for straight and level as set on
the attitude indicator.

7. Climbing Away from a Descent
The procedure is the same as levelling off from a descent, except that climb power and climb
attitude are selected instead.
Be prepared for strong nose-up and yawing tendencies as climb power is applied. Even though
the climb attitude is higher than the descent attitude, it may initially require forward pressure
to stop the nose rising too far. Rudder will of course be required to balance the increase in
slipstream effect.
Trim off any steady pressure remaining on the control column.
Procedure:
Suggestedaccuracy:
• Apply climb power, balance with rudder.
• airspeed±10 kt
• Set the desired pitch attitude for the climb. • heading± 10°
• Trim.
~---
P-A-T ~q
Climb attitude __ ~ --
~-I!..~--~~
-------- ~ ------ ~
NOTE If making a go-around from an approach, you should apply maximum power (keeping
ball centred with rudder), hold a higher pitch attitude to establish a climb, and then raise the
flaps in stages. If your aeroplane has a retractable undercarriage, you would retract it once
you have a positive rate of climb.
378 FLYING TRAINING
Airwork 19~Part (iii)

TurningUsing the Flight Instruments
Aim To turnthe aeroplanesolelyby referenceto the flightinstruments.
1. A Rate 1 Level Turn

The required bank angle for a rate 1 turn will equal ¾othe airspeed plus 7.
At 80 kt, the bank angle required will be (8 + 7) = 15°.
• Trim for straight and level flight.
To enter and maintain the turn:
• Roll into the turn using ailerons, balancing with rudder pressure.
• Hold a constant bank angle and keep the balance ball centred .
• Hold the correct pitch attitude to maintain altitude using elevator .
• Do not use trim in a turn, since turning is normally only a transient manoeuvre (although
you may trim for a sustained turn).
The rate of turn is indicated to the pilot by:
• The turn coordinator (rate 1 = 3° per sec, or 360° in 2 min); or
• The direction indicator and clock.
To stop the turn on a desired heading:
• Anticipate and begin recovery from the turn by about half the bank angle prior to reaching
the desired heading.
• Roll the wings level, and balance with rudder .
• Lower the pitch attitude to that required for straight and level flight.
• Trimming will not be necessary,if trim was not adjusted during turn .
Suggestedaccuracy:
• altitude± 100 ~
• bank angle±5°
• heading± 10°
■ A rate 1 level turn to the le~

A.irw-ork19, P-art(iii)
NOTE A rate 1 turn may also be achieved by using the clock and the direction indicator. By
holding the calculated bank angle you should achieve a turn rate of 3°/sec, which will give a
45° heading change in 15 seconds, a 90° heading change in 30 seconds, a 180° heading change
in one minute and 360° heading change in two minutes (hence the 2 MIN that is marked on
many turn coordinators).
2. A 30° Banked Level Turn
At the speeds achieved by most training aircraft, a 30° banked turn is greater than rate 1. A
steeper bank angle requires greater back pressure to maintain altitude, so the airspeed will
decrease a little further - by about 5 or 10 kt. The pitch attitude will be slightly higher than
for straight and level flight.
The rate of turn can be estimated from the turn coordinator, or by using the clock and the
direction indicator (bearing in mind that the turn coordinator may be limited by stops at about
rate 2 (twice rate 1, or 360°/min) - so that steeper bank angles will not be accompanied by
an increased rate-of-turn indication).
Suggestedaccuracy:
• bank angle±5°
• heading± 10°
■ A 30° banked level turn

380 FLYING TRAINING
Airwork 19,, Part (iii)

3. The Climbing Turn
The climbing turn will normally be entered from a straight climb. To ensure adequate climb
performance, do not exceed a 20° bank angle in a typical training aeroplane. The pitch attitude
will have to be lowered slightly to maintain a constant airspeed in a climbing turn. (In climbing
and descending turns, speed is maintained with elevator, whereas in level turns it is altitude
which is maintained.)
Suggestedaccuracy:
• bank angle±5°
• heading±10°
■ Entering and maintaining a climbing turn to the right
4. Descending Turns
The descending turn will normally be entered from a straight descent. A lower pitch attitude
will be required in the turn to maintain airspeed. The rate of descent will increase - it can be
controlled with power, if you wish.
Suggestedaccuracy:
• altitude±100 ~
----------
• bank angle±5°
• heading± 10°
1 -
I ' -:
'r=:~,---, •
:(!/!!;~~~~ •~ :
t~_~:
Primary
direction
■ Entering and maintaining a descending turn to the le~

Airwork 19, Part (iv)'

Recoveryfrom UnusualAttitudes
Aim: To recognisea potentiallyhazardous~ightattitude from instrumentindicationsand recover
beforea hazardousattitudedevelops.
An unusual attitude is considered to be a potentially hazardous attitude where either:

• the aeroplane's nose is unusually high with the airspeed decreasing; or
• the aeroplane's nose is unusually low with the airspeed increasing.
The aeroplane may also be banked.
The easiest recovery from an unusual attitude is not to get into one! In extreme attitudes, the
attitude indicator (a gyroscopic instrument) may topple, depriving you of your most important
instrument. Most of its information can be derived, however, from other sources:
• Approximate pitch attitude can be determined from the airspeed indicator (increasing or
decreasing airspeed) and the altimeter and vertical speed indicator (descent or climb). A
decreasing airspeed indication and a decreasing rate of climb would indicate an unusually
high nose-up attitude; conversely a rapidly increasing airspeed and rate of descent would
indicate a nose-low attitude.
• Turning can be detected on the turn coordinator. The direction indicator (a gyroscopic
instrument) may have toppled and the magnetic compass will probably not be giving a
steady reading if there is any significant turn occurring. The turn coordinator is gyroscopic
but will not topple.
1. Nose High and Steep Bank - Beware of Stall
. Lower pitch attitu
I .
.I i'
1
.
•
) •.
• ,
• i .:-
I ,
·..
'
Ml,l
~
'
..
: - -!
I
~
:1
I.___-==-=-__, I •~ • I
.. - - - - - '----==----' ._______ ~-- I
I •
------
• ~ I
1,-_:::::s;;;;;;:::__JI
:
I
I
•
J 1. Apply power
=m
I■ A nose-high unusual attitude - recovery action is ,power-roll-pitch

382 FLYING TRAINING
Airwork 19, Part (iv)

Recovery Procedure: power-roll-pitch
(a) If airspeed is decreasing:
• apply full power (balance with rudder);
• roll wings level with aileron - balance with rudder;
• lower the nose to the level pitch attitude .
• Adjust power as necessary.
(b) If the stall warning activates, recover as above.
• Ailerons can be used as the wings are not stalled.
(c) If the aircraft does stall (loss of height, buffet, nose or wing drop):
• centralise all controls, and when the aircraft is unstalled apply power-roll-pitch.
2. Nose Low and High Airspeed
Beware of an overspeed or a spiral dive.
Recovery Procedure - power-roll- pitch:
• Reduce the power (throttle closed).
• Roll the wings level with aileron and balance with rudder .
• Easeout of the ensuing dive into straight and level attitude (Al) .
• Reapply power .
• Regain altitude, if necessary.
ISpiral dive I
■ A nose-low unusual attitude and recovery
Appendix 1 383
The PPL(A)SkillTest
T he following info ·mation is reproduced from Lie nsing

Admini t tion and Standa d •sa •on
Requirements and Safety (LASORS) and is expanded in
p r tions
Standards Document 19 (Notes for the Guidance of Applicants

taking the Skill Test for the PPL-Aeroplanes) courtesy of the CAA
and the Joint Aviation Authorities CTAA)Flight Crew Licensing. It
is an outline of what you can expect to be asked to demonstrate
for your PPL(A) Skill Test in a single-engine piston aircraft.
The oral examination and Aircraft Class Rating qualification is
also covered at the time you take your flight test. Details of this test
are included in Vol. 4 of The Air Pilot's Manual.
Note: Applicantsfor the PPL(A) SKILL TEST

National PPL(A)will be
required to undertake a
This syllabus lists all the items which should be covered during training and
separate Navigational which will be examined during the Skill Test. It applies to the test for single-
Flight Test (without the engine and multi-engine piston aircraft and is similar for SLMG (self-
requirementto launching motor gliders). Microlight aircraft will, for the time being, remain
demonstratethe use of with the existing syllabus for the UK National Licence.
radio navigationaids).
The Skill Test will cover the following items and the candidate will be
required to demonstrate satisfactory standards of knowledge and handling
in each section.
The flight may be conducted in two parts with the agreement of the examiner,
that is the Enroute Section (Navigation) may be conducted on a separate flight
test. However, if this option is taken up the applicant will be reassessed on the
Planning, Departure, Anival and Precision Landing Phases.
The applicant is required to demonstrate proficiency in the following exercises:
1. Pre-flight planning and departures
2. VFR navigation and basic instrument flying
3. Visual flying including the use of radio aids
4. Visual general handling exercises
5. Abnormal and emergency operations
6. Asymmetric flight (if multi-engine)
7. Approaches and landings
8. ATC liaison and use of radio communication
9. Post-flight procedures
10. Aircraft systems and operation of the aircraft used for the flight test.
384 APPENDIX 1
Below is an example of a completed Report Form for the PPL(A) Skill Test -
note that the applicant was successful!
r------------Scr_iulN~o:Ql45Q2
I APPLICATIONAND REPORTFORM FOR THE PPL(A)SKILLTEST I
SERIES No:..... t ............ A'ITEMPT No: ..... 1...........
.
SURNAME: ... t\Y.U~.b~............................ CAA REF. No: ~.),jJi..J\.b. ..........
FORENAMES: ..~.G.~.N..~.A ......................

SIGNATURE.: ....... .
IT IS AN OFFENCETO MAKE, WITH IIITEITTTO DECEIVE,AHY FALSE REPRESENTATIONSFOR THE PURP0SE OF PROCURINGTHE GRANT, ISSUE,RENEWAL
OR VARJATIOff OF AMY CERTIFICATE,LICEtlCE, APPROVAL, PERMISSIONOR OTHERDOCUMENT. PERSONS50 DOINORENDER THEMSELVESLIABLE , OH
SUMMARYCONVICTIONTO A FINE NOT EXCEEDINGTHE STATUTORYMAXIMUM(CURRENTI.Y£5000) OR IN NORTHERNIRELAND £2000 MIO ON CONVICTION
ON INDICTl,IEITTTOAN UNLIMITED FlNE OR IMPRISONltElfT FOR A TERIANOT EXCEEDING2 YEARSOR BOTH.
Date of Test: .\.:-: .. \.:-:- .. _q_~

.............
Base: ... C...~~-l.\\f.~.«;.;.,.-~D.
................................
.
Aircraft Type & Regn. Block Times Examinersname& LicenceNo.
Dep. Arr. Duration "2....(!Y2~£
PA ..1q Ct'&C..C..K \Doo t'L1L> ,'2.:
'2..o Y.~.~~w\~
Route: ~- Q l-\ALL- ~~Q.d-Dt\ltLJl.T HtS..N( OW
TEST SECTIONS:
SECTIONS TO BE TAKEN; V
RESULT:
a
b
C
d
e
f
g
h
Re-test:
Test sections inco111plcl
• due:
Items not completed:
Retraining Requirement: Ale: Sim:

Remarks:
Signed: ... /2./...~

ll'll~lll J::\iJllllllt:IJ
....................
, L~...\."'.'
...~.9..............
Date: ... ,.......
Ba~LrS AV.,
~... ,., ....
~TO
Received: ... d ... Date nying training
~t•li•.inl) completed 23-11.._,-c.t~
Whil<- ,\rrh,Jn! c,,1y, Pini. FCl.11Copy l'ORM Kl. (,8,1

'frlluw ·,.,min~ C'opy, Rluc - C:FE, Cnr,y 200S9R
ThePPL(A)SkillTest 385
The reverse side describes each manoeuvre from each section, item by item.
Clvll AviationAuthorityRegulatlon6
Regulation 6(5) of tho Civil Av,ation Authority Regulations, 1991 as follows: Any pon:on y,t,o ha5 failod any lost or oxilminntion y,t,ich ho is
roqulrod lo pass bolore he Is granled or may exercise the privilegos of a porsonnol liconco may within 14 days of being notified of his faiJuro
request lhal the Authority dotormino whothor the test or examination was properly conducted. In ordor to succoed you v~IIhave to s11t,slythe
Authority that lhe examination or test was not proporty conducted. Mere dissatlslaclion of the resutt is not enough.
SECTION1. PRE FLIGHTOPERATIONSAND DEPARTURE SECTION4. APPROACHAND LANDINGPROCEDURES

..
a Pro flight document.:ition .:ind wo.:ither briel Ia Aorodromo arrival procedures
-~
b Massand balance and performance calculation b • Procislon l.:inding (short lield landing), cross wind (if suitable
oondijions available)
C Aeroplane lnspeclion and servicing C • Flapless landing
d Engino slarting and aftor starting procedures d Approach and landing with ldlo power (Single engine only)
0 Taxying and aerodrome procedures, pre take 011procedures 0 Touch and go

'
f Toke off ond aftor tako off checks I Go around from low height
I
g Aerodrome departure procedures g ATChaison and compliance, R/T procedures, Airmanship
h _ATCliaison and compliance, R/T procedures, Airmanship h Actions aftor !light Including documentation
SECTION2. AIRWORK + SECTION5. ABNORMALAND EMERGENCYOPERATIONS*+

a ATC liaison and compliance, Rrrprocedure. Airmanship This section may bo combined with Sections 1 through 4.
b Straight and level llighl ...,ithspeed changes a Simulated engine failure after take off (Single engine only)
C Climbing: i, Best rate of climb I> • Simul11ledforced landing. (Single engine only)
ii. Climbing lurns
---
d
- ,j~ Lovc1Iinci
Modium turns (30' llank)
off
C Simulated precmilionary landing (Single engine only)
'
0 ' Stoop turns (360' lef1and 119hl- ,15' b,mk) including recognition d 'Simulatod emergenclei;
: and recovery from a spiral divo.
f Flight at critically low airspeed with and Y.ithout flaps. Best

unalo of climb
g Stalling: i. Cloan stall and rocovory with power
ii. Approach to stall descending turn with bank SECTION6. SIMULATEDASYMMETRICFLIGHT(if applicable)•
angle 20', approach conliguralion. AND RELEVANTCLASS/TYPERATINGITEMS I
iii. Approach to stall in landing configuration. I
This t:octlonmay be combined wilh sec/Ions t through 5.
h Dosconding:
- -
I. With and without power a Simulatod ongine failure during take oll (at a safe altitude
ii. Dosconding turns (stoop gliding turns) I
1
unless carried out in a FNPT II or a night simulator)
11,.Levelrlnnoll
b ' Asymmotrlc approach and go around
C Asymmetric approach and full stop landing

SECTION3, EN-ROUTEPROCEDURES +
a Flight plan. dead reckoning and map rooding d Engine shutdown and restart (ii applicablo)
b Maintenance of allitudo, heading and spood 'e ATC liaison and compliance. Arr procedures, Airmanship
I
C O1iontation, timing and revision of ETAs, log keeping I As dotormlnod by the Fhghl ExRminer - any relevant itoms of
'
the class/type rating skill lost to include, ii applicable:
d Diversion to alternate aerodrome, planning & implomentation I. Aeroplane systems including handling of auto pilot
II. Operation of pressurisation system
0 Uso of radio navigation aids, position fix and tracking iii Uso ol de•icing and anti icing system
t Basic instrument flying (100' turn in simulated IMC) !J Oral questions
g Flight managomont (checks, fuel, systems and carburettor icing

1 etc.) ATC liaison and complianco. R/T procedures. Airrnanship.
+ Additionally,Items a, b and h of Socllon4 shall be assessed j .. Some ol these Items may be combinedat tho discretionof tho
within nny re-tut or ;sollt108'. _ FlightExaminer
Reproducedwith kind permissionefthe Civil Aviation Authority

386
387
Index
A approach
seelanding
aeronautical charts 337 attitude instrument flying 347, 368-382
ailerons autorotation 191
adverse yaw (unwanted yaw) and 33
aileron drag 140
effectiveness 49, 52
B
further effect 40, 43 bad-weather circuit 346
primary effect 3, 32, 36 balance ball 34; 74, 84, 355, 357, 359
spinning and 192 balancing
stalling and 175 a turn 140
use in turns 148, 153-163, 277, 286 ballooning 58, 96
use on landing 258 bank angle 348
use on take-off206, 208, 211, 252 base leg, of circuit 199
airspeed basic-T scan 362
best endurance 94, 167 battery 6
best range 94 baulked approach
control effectiveness and 49, 168 see go-around
drag and 94, 112 best-endurance airspeed 94
elevator and 41, 44, 49 best-range airspeed 94
in a climb 103-113 brakes
in a climbing turn 148 brake pedals 4
in a descending turn 153, 157, 161, 286 failure 11, 75
in a glide 116-121, 247 inspection 17
in a medium level turn 127, 141 on landing 224
in a powered descent 124 use during taxiing 69, 75
in a slip 133
in a spin 189, 190
in straight and level flight 91-95 C
limits 95, 281 carbon monoxide poisoning
low-level flying and 341, 344 precautions against 68
on approach 216, 220, 221, 223, 228 carburettor 5
airspeed indicator carburettor heat 5
flap operating range 59, 100, 129, 131 on approach and landing 223
limit speeds 173 use 54, 61, 118, 121
stall speed markings 59, 129, 174 carburettor icing
alcohol causes 60
seemedical aspects effects 60
all-flying tail 31 prevention 54
alternator 6 centre of gravity
angle of attack effect on stall speed 185
elevator and 82 effects on spin characteristics 190
in a climbing turn 149 longitudinal stability and 79
in a descending turn 154 weight and balance calculations 321
in a spin 190 charts 337
in a steep turn 27 6 checklists 8
in straight and level flight 82 after start 20
stalling 173-177, 180-186 after take-off 208
vs. pitch attitude 348 after-landing check 225
388
external inspection 15 fuel requirements 321

internal inspection 18 low-level 331
low flying 341 procedure when lost 332
pre-aerobatic 179, 195 radio calls 329
pre-landing 216 weather 316, 330
pre-start 19 see also navigation
pre-take-off20, 201, 210 crosswind landing
security check 298 combination method 264
shutdown 20 crab method 259
circuit estimation of crosswind component 250
after a go-around 234 general considerations 255-265
bad-weather circuit 346 sideslip method 261
base leg 200 wing-down method 261
climbing onto downwind leg 200, 209, 211 see alsolanding
crosswind circuit 251 crosswind leg, of circuit 199
crosswind leg 199
crosswind take-off 254
departing 236 D
downwind leg 200
descending
joining 236
aiming point on ground 125
orientation in poor visibility 238
at low airspeed 169
prior to landing 216, 226
climb away after 170, 377
standard 199, 215 effect of flaps 57-101, 128
upwind leg 238
forces in a descent 124
wind effect, allowing for 200, 219, 246 glide descent 115-123
clearances
on instruments 374
take-off 204, 210 turns 152-163
taxi 73, 75
using power 115, 124
climbing 103-113
using sideslip 133, 161
airspeeds 103-110
dihedral 41, 81
at low airspeed 170
direction indicator
effect of flaps 113
turns onto selected headings 164
engine cooling on climb 106 discontinued approach
forces acting on a climb 103
see go-around
from a glide 123
discontinued take-off 212
on instruments 359, 371
ditching 313
performance 112, 148
diversions 330
turns 148
documentation, pre-flight 14, 324
clock code 27
downwind leg, of circuit 199
clock, as aid to turning 165
drag
cockpit inspection 18
airspeed and 94, 167
colds, and flying 13
effects of flaps 97, 128, 183
control locks 8
in a climb 103, 113
critical attitudes
in a glide 115
see unusual attitudes
in a powered descent 124, 128
cross-count1y flights
in a sideslip 133
arrival procedures 330
in a spin 189
departure procedures 326
in a steep turn 27 6
diversions 330
in a turn 138
en route navigation 327-335
in straight and level flight 91
flight log 316-321
induced drag 81
flight management 315
drugs
flight planning 316-321, 324
see medical aspects
389
E fire extinguisher 9, 15, 18

fires
electrical system 6 cabin fires 11
malfunctions 10 electrical fires 10
elevator engine fires 9, 21
airspeed and 41, 44 extinguishing 9
angle of attack and 82 precautions against 8
effectiveness 49, 168 first flight 25
further effect 41, 44 first solo flight 273
power changes and 53 flap
primary effect 2, 31, 36 approach and landing 216, 245, 247
trim 45-48, 88 effects of 57, 129, 132, 183
use in a turn 137, 145, 155, 277-282, 288 go-around 232
use on approach and landing 221 in a climb 113
use on take-off 207, 211 in a descending turn 160
elevator trim tab 45-48 in a descent 128
emergencies 9 in a forced landing 311
ditching 313 operating range 59, 96, 98, 129, 131
during start-up 21 operation of 102, 113, 129, 208
during take-off 212 spinning and 193
forced landing 289-304 straight and level 96
precautionary search and landing 307-312 take-off 198, 208
priorities during 9 flight controls
radio transmissions 240 control locks 8
use of transponder 67 during take-off 206, 252
engine effectiveness 49, 168, 175
after start checks 20 further effects 40-44
cooling in a climb 106 operation 29, 39
ignition system 5 prima1y effects 2, 29-39
instruments 4, 7 stalling and 175
malfunctions 10, 21, 289-291 trimming 45, 48
operation 19, 60 flight instruments
pre-start checks 19 basic types 7
pre-take-off checks 20, 201 during slow-speed flight 169
shutdown 20, 62 in a spin 194
starting 19 in a turn 144, 378
starting problems 21 pre take-off checks 201
warming during descent 119, 154 scan patterns 350, 354-366
Engine Control Unit (ECU) 4 taxi check 7 4
engine failure use and operation 7, 347-382
after take-off 212 flight log 316-321, 335
causes 289 flight notification 324
re-starts 291 forced landing
engine fire estimating glide range 293
in flight 10 field selection 305
on ground 21 glide approach 245
ent1y/ exit lanes simulated forced landing 302
on ground 336 use of flap 299
external inspection 15 wind assessment 292
with power 307-312
without power 290-304
F forces
in a climb 103
fin 1, 33, 80
390
in a climbing turn 148 attitude instrument flying 347, 368-382

in a glide 115 climbs 371
in a gliding turn 152, 154, 161 descents 374
in a medium level turn 137 go-around 377
in a powered descent 124 scan patterns 354-366
in a spin 189 sensory illusions 353
in a steep turn 275 straight and level 368
straight and level 77, 83, 91 suggested accuracy 352, 369-380
forward slip 261 turns 144, 357, 378
FREDA check 240, 329, 341, 344 type performance tables 366
fuel unusual attitudes 381
calculations 321 internal inspection 18
drain check 16
gauges 5
grade 5
pre-take-off checks 202
J
Jet A1 4
requirements 321
tanks 5
Full Authority Digital Engine Control L
(FADEC) 4
landing
approach speeds 220
G common faults 228
crosswind 255-265
gliding 115-123 final approach control 218-226, 248, 256-
approach and landing 245-?? 265
climb away from 121 flap 216, 248
effect of flap 128, 248 flapless 243
effect of wind 117 flare and touchdown 223-229, 248, 269
estimating range 117, 293 glide approach and landing 245-249
for best endurance 119 go-around 232-235, 377
for best range 117, 248 landing run 224
forces 115 performance 216, 323
turns 152-156, 161 powered approach and landing 215-231
glow plugs 6 pre-landing check 216
go-around 229, 232-235
runway selection 216
flap 130 short-field approach and landing 267, 309,
ground effect 207 312
soft-field approach and landing 271, 312
H touch-and-go landings 230
wind effect 215
HASELL pre-aerobatic checklist 179 windshear and turbulence 219, 258
heading indicator see alsocrosswind landing
see direction indicator landing gear 4
turns onto selected headings 164 pre-flight inspection 17
heating and ventilation system 68 retraction after take-off 208
horizontal stabiliser 1, 3, 77 see alsoundercarriage, wheels
slipstream and 49-53 lift
angle of attack and 81
I coefficient 81
in a climb 103
ignition switch 5 in a glide 115
see also magnetos in a powered descent 124, 129
instrument flying in a spin 192, 193
391
in a turn 138, 152, 275

in straight and level flight 77-83 N
lift/ drag ratio
navigation 317, 327-335
in a glide 115
computer calculations 319, 328
in a sideslip 133
en route diversions 330
light signals from tower 241
flight planning 316-324
load factor
low-level 331
in a turn 138, 276, 281
navigation equipment 315
stall speed and 138, 183, 276
procedures when lost 332
logbook 23
see also cross-country flights
lost, procedure when 332
low flying check 309, 341
low-level flying 342 0
checks309,341,344
effect of wind 338, 345 obstacle clearance, in low-level flight 337
illusions 33 7 overshoot
in bad weather 338, 346 see go-around
navigation 331, 338
obstacle clearance 337 p
pilot responsibilities 336
precautionary configuration 308, 311, 340 Pan-Pan call 241, 332
precautions 342 passenger briefing 18
turbulence and windshear 339 performance
climb 112, 148
M landing 216, 266, 323
table for instrument flying 366
magnetic compass take-off 197, 266, 323
errors 165 turning 141, 281
for turning 165 pitch attitude 348
magnetos 5 pitot cover 8
pre-take-off check 203 post flight
shutdown check 20 documentation 23
manoeuvring speed (VA) 281 securing aeroplane 23
marshalling 74 power
Mayday call 240, 298 during approach and landing 216, 221, 268
medical aspects during stall recovery 176
alcohol 13, 354 effect of changes 53, 78,104,118,120,126
carbon monoxide poisoning 68 fuel consumption and 94, 167
drugs 13, 354 go-around 233
illness 13, 354 in a climb 104, 108, 112, 148
sensory illusions 353 in a descending turn 157
smoking 354 in a descent 115, 124
upper respiratory complaints 13 in a medium level turn 137
medium level turns 137-147 in a steep level turn 277-282
microphone in straight and level flight 91-95, 167-172
types 66 spinning and 193
use of 67 use during take-off 204
missed approach use during taxiing 69, 76
see go-around precautiona1y configuration 308, 311, 340
mixture control 5, 62-63 precautionary search and landing 307-312
for engine shutdown 63 field selection 308
use 54, 63, 118, 120 inspection patterns 308-311
pre-flight
documentation 14
external inspection 18
392
internal inspection 15 control effectiveness 168

passenger briefing 18 descents 170
preparation 13 power requirements 168
straight and level 167-172
turns 170
R smoking 354
radio soft-field landing 271
components 6, 64 soft-field takeoff 270
solo, first solo flight 273
emergency transmissions 240
failure 66, 241 spms
autorotation 192
position reports 329
effect of CG 191
procedures 204
effect of power 193
squelch control 65
entry 192, 196
use 64
forces and characteristics 189-195
rate 1 turns 142, 165, 357, 363, 378
reference axes full spins 189-196
incipient spin recove1y 182, 187
for aeroplane motion 29
rudder incipient spins 187, 191
recovery 192, 195, 284
balance and 34, 38, 41, 53, 145, 149, 154
effectiveness 50 stages 191
further effects 41, 43 use of flaps 193
pedals and taxiing 4, 69 spiral dive 284
power changes and 53, 169 stability 30, 78
primary effect 3, 33, 38 CG position and 79
rules of the air 87 stall speed
ASI markings 174
slipstream and 50
spinning and 193 during dive recovery 183
stalling and 175 effect of CG 186
effect of flap 97, 129
trim 53, 88, 104
use on landing 258 effect of power 184
effect of surface contamination 182
use on take-off205, 211, 252, 254
effect of turning 138, 183, 276, 279, 286
s effect of weight 185

stalling 173-185
angle of attack and 173-177
scanning flight instruments 354-366 checklist 179
selective radial scan 359 effectsof173, 176,180
sensory illusions, in instrument flying 353 flight controls during 175
short-field landing 267 in a turn 183, 279
short-field take-off 267 incipient spins 182
slipping 133 incipient stalls 176, 182
flaps and 133 on final approach 184
forward slip 261 recovery 176, 181, 184, 285
in a gliding turn 161 straight and level 176-181
in crosswind landings 261 standard-rate turns
to steepen descent 133 see rate 1 turns
slipping in a turn 140 steep turns 275-282
slipstream 169 straight and level flight
control effectiveness and 49 at a selected airspeed 91-95
effect of power changes 50, 53, 104, 118, at constant power 77-89
149,169,205 at low airspeed 167-172
slow flying 167-172 forces acting during 77, 81
climbs 106, 170 on instruments 369
393
with flap extended 96 balance 145

effect of wind at low level 338, 345
T effect on stall speed 138, 183
forces 137, 183, 275
tailplane 1, 77 medium level 137, 147
on instruments 357, 378
design 3
slipstream and 49-53 onto selected headings 164
take-off 197-211 performance 141, 281
after take-off checks 208 stalls while 183
clearance 204 steep descending turns 286
effect of wind 197 steep level turns 275-282
suggested accuracy 146, 150, 154, 158, 164
emergencies 212
while climbing 148, 380
flap 113, 198, 208
while descending 152-163, 380
flapless 198
tyres, pre-flight check 17
ground roll 204, 210
initial climb-out from 113, 208, 253
pe1formance 198, 266, 323
pre-take-off checks 201, 210
u
runway selection 197,210 undercarriage
short-field 266 design 4
soft-field 270 pre-flight inspection 17
variations 214 retraction after take-off 208
with crosswind 250-254 see alsowheels
taxiing 69-76 unusual attitudes
allowing for wind 71 recovery 86, 283
flight instrument checks while 7 4 recovery on instruments 381, 382
marshalling 7 4 types 283
rules 73 upwind leg, of circuit 199
surface awareness 70
taxi clearance 75
use of power and brakes 75
V
throttle 2 ventilation, cabin 68
use 53, 60, 75, 118 vertical stabiliser 1, 33, 80
use on take-off 204 VFE 59, 129
thrust VFR entry I exit lanes 336
in a climb 103, 113 VHF-COM radio 64
in straight and level flight 77 visual illusions 220
torque reaction 205 during low-level flight 338, 345
touch-and-go landings 230 vso174
transponder 67 VSl 174
trim
use of 45-48, 86, 88, 108, 120, 342
turbulence
during low-level flying 339
w
on final approach 219, 230, 257 wake turbulence 231
wake turbulence 231 weight and balance 321
turn typical load sheet 322
balancing a turn 140 wheels
turn coordinator 165 care of71, 226
turning chocks 8
at low airspeed 170, 171 inspection 17
at rate 1 142, 165, 357, 363, 378 wind direction indicators 198, 238
394
wing drop 192
yaw
adverse yaw in turns 33
power changes and 53

Air Pilotx27s Manual Volume 1 Flying Training Compress

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Air Pilotx27s Manual Volume 1 Flying Training Compress

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Air Pilotx27s Manual Volume 1 Flying Training Compress

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

The Air Pilot's Manual

1. Aircraft Familiarisation .................................................. 1

3. Air Experience ................................................................ 25

5. Taxiing an Aeroplane .................................................... 69

\ a Selected Airspeed ..................................................... 91

7. Climbing ........................................................................ 103

14. First Solo ........................................................................273

16. The Forced Landing Without Power ........................289

18. Pilot Navigation

19. Instrument Flying .........................................................347

4a. The PrimaryEffectof EachMain FlightControl .................. 36

5. Taxiing an Aeroplane ........................................................76

6a. Straightand Level in Balanceat Constant Power ................ 88

7. The Climb ....................................................................... 110

Ba. The Glide ....................................................................... 122

9a. The Medium LevelTurn .................................................. 147

10a. Slow Flying...................................................................... 172

12. Standard Take-Off and Climb to Downwind Leg .............. 210

1la. Powered 'Approach and Normal Landing ......................... 226

1 Sa. Steep Level Turns ............................................................ 280

16. Practisingthe Forced Landing ........................................... 304

17a. The Precautionary Searchand Landing ............................. 311

18b. Low-Level Flying .............................................................. 344

19. Instrument Flying

Dorothy Pooley LLB(Hons) FRAeS

Esther Law BA(Hons) AFRAeS

The Civil Aviation Authority; Allied Signal, Bendix, Cessna,

A Condensed History of the Air Pilot Manuals

Sk_,(llS. ·. C,o-r~fE"k t."·h.

Becoming a Pilot < \

■ The main aerodynamic surfaces of the aeroplane

How an Aeroplane Flies

■ In flight, the aeroplane is supported by li'(t

The air is made up of many molecules, all of which are moving

■ Static pressure exerted by a stationary parcel of air

The size of the force is greatest when the collision is 'head-on',

■ Static pressure acts in all directions

The energy of motion is called kinetic energy. The kinetic

■ Dynamic pressure is greater in dense air

Editor'snote: Now, an aircraft wing is shaped so that the airflow speeds up

7~ Direction of flight "==-t:::

NOTE The decrease in static pressure with an increased speed of

________ ~~i~h! _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Weight ________ _

A limit occurs when the aeroplane slows to an airspeed at

Be Prepared for your Flying Lessons

PHASE 3. Advanced manoeuvres and procedures, including steep

You will feel a great sense of achievement as you progress

Flight Tests for the PPL(A)

The Air Pilot's Manual and EASA Part-FCL

THE AIR PILOT'S MANUAL SERIES

Volume 1 Flying Training

T he basic training aero plan con i ts of a fu lag to whi h the

Horizontal stabilizer (or tailplane)

Wing trailing edge

■ Figure1-1 The aeroplane

The tail section of the aeroplane is situated some distance to the

command s1tt1ng on the left-hand side. Various controls and

The attitude (or position in flight) of the aeroplane is control-

THE AILERONS(hinged to the outer trailing edge of each wing)

■ Figure1-3 The control column and the control wheel